1. Upanisads Eight Vol 2 RK Mutt

EIGHT UPANISADS

VOLUME TWO (Aıtareya, Mundaka, Māndūkya & 1 Kārikā, and Praśna)

With the Commentary of

SANKARĀCĀRYA

Translated by SWĀMĪ GAMBHĪRĀNANDA

ADVAITA ASHRAMA WELLINGTON LANE CALCUTTA 13

PUBLISHED BY SWAMI GAMBHIRANANDA PRESIDENT, ADVAITA ASHRAMA MAYAVATI, ALMORA, HIMALAYAS

All Rights Reserved First Published in 1958

PRINTED IN INDIA BY N L. MUKHERJEE AT THF MODERN PRESS 6 BENTINCK STREET CALCUTTA I

CONTENTS

PAGE Aitareya Upanisad ... I

Muņdaka Upanisad ... 77

Māņdūkya Upanisad and Kārikā I73

Praśna Upanısad 405

Index to Texts I 507

Index to Texts II ... ... 5II

AITAREYA UPANISAD

ॐ वाङमे मनसि प्रतिष्ठिता मनो मे वाचि प्रतिष्ठित- माविरावीर्म एधि वेदस्य म आणीस्थः श्रुतं मे मा प्रहासीरनेनाधीतेनाहोरात्रान संदधाम्यतं वदिष्यामि सत्यं वदिष्यामि तन्मामवतु तद्वक्तारमवत्ववतु मामवतु वक्ता- रमवतु वक्तारम्।

ॐ शान्तिः शान्ति: शान्ति: ।

May my speech be based on (i.e. accord with) the mind; may my mind be based on speech. O self-effulgent One, reveal Thyself to me. May you both (speech and mind) be the carriers of the Veda to me. May not all that I have heard depart from me. I shall join together (i.e. obliterate the difference of) day and night through this study. I shall utter what is verbally true; I shall utter what is mentally true. May That (Brahman) protect me; may That protect the speaker (i.e. the teacher). May That protect me; may That protect the speaker-may That protect the speaker.

Om Peace! Peace! Peace !

AITAREYA UPANIŞAD PART I

CHAPTER I

Introduction: Earler than this1 was finished karma2 along with the knowledge (1 e meditation on) the inferior Brahman (1 e. Hiranyagarbha) The highest result, achievable through karma, as associated with meditation, was concluded with the meditation on Uktha3 It was said, "This Brahman that is Truth is called Prana, this is the only Deity" (Kau. II 2, Maıtrāyanī, VII 7); "All the gods are but manifesta- tions of this Prana", "Attaining identity with (Con- sciousness, the Deity, Brahman, Immortalty, that is) this Prana, one becomes united with the gods" Some people believe that the highest human goal consists in this merger in the Deity, that this is emancipation, that this is attainable through a combination of medi- tation and karma, and that there is nothing higher than this With a view to enjoming the knowledge of

1 The Aitareya Upanisad forms the 4th 5th and chapters of the second Aranyaka of Aitareya Brahmana The Upanisad is concerned only with the knowledge of the Self, whereas the earlier portions deal with karma as associated with meditation. 2 Rites, duties, etc ? Uktha is Prana (lit Vital Force, 1e Hıranyagarbha); and meditation on it consists in thinking. "I am that Uktha, that is Prana" The result of such deep concentration is identity with Prana

4 EIGHT UPANISADS

the absolute Self, whereby this (earlier) view may be refuted, this Upanisad says, "In the beginning this was but the absolute Self alone" etc. (I i.I). Objechion: How is it, again, known that the subse- quent text is meant for enjoining the knowledge of the absolute Self, unconnected with karma? Answer: Since no other meaning can be deduced. Moreover, through such texts as "He subjected Hım1 to hunger and thirst" (Ai. I i1 I) etc., it will be shown that the gods such as Fire, mentioned earlier. are included in the phenomenal world because of the defects of their hunger etc. All that is subject to hunger etc. is within the phenomenal world, whereas the supreme Brahman is mentioned in the Vedas as transcendental to hunger and the rest. Objection: Even if it be thus conceded that the knowledge of the absolute Self is the means for eman- cipation, it does not follow that a non-performer of karma alone is qualified for this, since no such specifica- tion is heard of, there being no mention in this Upanisad of any non-performer of karma (ie. Sannyäsī) belonging to a distinct order. Again, the knowledge of the Self is begun after introducing the rite called Brhatī-sahasra. Therefore it is the per- former of karma who is in fact entitled to this. Nor is the knowledge of the Self incompatible with karma, for the summing up (here) at the end conforms to what went earlier. Just as it was stated by the (earlier) brāhmana (portion) that Purusa,2 identified

1 Virāt who is-the gross manifestation of Hıranyagarbha " Conscious, all-pervasive Reality that dwells everywhere.

AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 5

with the Sun, is the Self of all beings, mobile and immobile,1 and as it was confirmed by the mantra (portion) in such texts as "The Sun is the Self (of the universe, moving and motionless)" (R I cxv I), sımilarly (here) too, the start will be made with "This one is the inferior Brahman, this is Indra" (A! III 13), and the conclusion will be, "All the creatures that there are, which move or do not move, are impelled by Consciousness" (A1 III 13) Similarly, too, in the Upanisad of the samhita (portion) the Self will be spoken of as associated with karma in the text, "The followers of the Rg-Veda deliberate on this very Entity in the hymn called Brhati-sahasra" etc (A1 III 11 3.12), and the conclusion will be with, "They speak of it alone as the Self in all beings" etc Similarly, too, the identity of the One that :s referred to in "That which is the bodiless conscious Self" is spoken of in "One should know That as identical with Him that is in the sun". Here, again, commencing with, "What is It that we worship as the Self?" (Ai. III 1.I), identity with Consciousness Itself will be shown in "Consciousness is Brahman" (Ai. III.13) Therefore the knowledge of the Self is not disconnected with karma Countey objection (On that supposition) the present text becomes useless because of tautology

1 First His identity with the Sun is shown in "He, in- deed, illumines this world-the One that shines as the Being (in the sun)", and then He is shown as all-pervading in "Therefore they know Him as a hundred-rayed-the One that is that very Purusa", and "The Vatal Force indeed is all these beings" (Ch VII xv 14, V 1 15)

6 EIGHT UPANISADS

How? The Self having been ascertained by the brāhmana (portion) in "O Rsi, I am indeed Prāna", and by the mantra (portion) in "The Sun is the Self (R. I.cxv I), it is useless to ascertain It over again by the brāhmana (1.e. Upanisad portion) by raisıng the question, "What is It that we worship as the Self?" (Ai. III.i.I) and then answering that all this is but the Self, and so on. Opponent's view: Not so, for no tautology is involved, inasmuch as this is meant to determine some special qualities of that very Self How? Of that very Self, as connected with karma, it is sought to deter- mine some special attributes such as (the power of) creation, protecton, and dissolution of the world, or to present It as an object of meditation in Its uncondi- tioned state. To explain the second alternative: from the fact that meditation on the Self (as such) was not enjoined in the context of karma, it might be inferred that the Self, that is (found) associated with karma, is not to be meditated upon apart from karma; there- fore the purport of the (following) text, beginning with "Atma" etc., is that the unconditioned Self, too, is to be meditated on. Or since the Self is to be worshipped as different and non-different (from one- self), the same Self that is subject to the idea of difference in a context of karma, is again, to be meditated on as non-different outside (the context of) karma. Thus there is no tautology. Moreover, accord- ing to the adherents of the Vajasaneya Section (of the (Yajur-Veda) there are the statements, "He who knows these two, vidyā: and avidyā, together, by crossing over death through avidya, attains immortality through

AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 7

vidyā" (Iś. II) and "By doing karmas mndeed should one wish to live here for a hundred years" (Iś. 2). Not that mortals can have more than a hundred years as the fullest span of life, so as to be able to meditate on the Self after renouncing karma (after a hundred years). And it has been shown in the Aitareya Āranyaka, "The span of a man's life comprises as many thousands of days"1. Now the hundred years of life are packed with karma, and the mantra, "By doing karma indeed" has just been quoted. Similar are the texts, "One should perform the Agni- hotra sacrifices as long as one lives", "One should perform the Darśa and Pūrnamāsa (new moon and full moon) sacrifices as long as one lives", and others, as well as, "Him they burn along with the sacrificial vessels". Besides, there is the Vedic text speaking of the three debts.2 As for the scriptural text dealing with monasticism etc., to wit, "Knowing this very Self Brāhmanas renounce, . . and lead a mendicant life ' (Br III.v I, IV.iv 22), it is eulogistic, meant to praise the knowledge of the Self Or it is meant for the dis- qualified ones (e.g. the blind, the lame, and others) 3 Vedantist's reply: Not so; for when the supreme knowledge is achieved, there can be no idea of results, and so no action is possible. As for the statements

1 The Aranyaka first points out rhat the sastra (hymn) called Brhati-sahasra has got 36,000 letters in it, and then states that a man's life consists of as many days, that is, I0o years " "The Brahmana, from his birth, is under three debts" (Tai S. VI 111 10)-to the gods, Mane=, and sages 3 Who cannot undertake Vedic rites.

8 EIGHT UPANIȘADS

that "the knowledge of the Self comes to the man engaged in karma", that "it is associated with karma", and so on, they are wrong. Action is inconreivable in one who has the knowledge of Brahman as his Self as comprised in the realisation, "I am the supreme Brahman in which all desires are fulfilled and which is above all the worldly shortcomings", and who has no idea of results because he feels no need for any- thing to be got for himself from actions done or to be done (by him). Objection: Though he may not perceive any benefit therefrom, he still acts because of the (scriptural) injunction. Answer : No; for he has realised the Self that is beyond the range of injunctions. It is a matter of experience that one comes within the scope of injunc- tion so long as one feels the need for acquiring some desirable thing or avoiding some undesirable thing and seeks for a means thereof; but not so the one who is of a contrary disposition and has realised the identity of the Self with Brahman that cannot be subjected to any injunction. If a man who has realised the identity of the Self and Brahman has still to bow down to injunctions, even though he is beyond all mandates, then there will remain none who is outside the pale of scriptural direction; and so all actions will become fit to be undertaken by all and sundry at all times. But that is undesirable. Nor can he be directed by any- body, for even the scriptures emanate from him. Not that anyone can be impelled by any sentence issuing out of his own wisdom. Nor is a well-informed master commanded by an ignorant servant.

AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 9

Objection. The Vedas, being eternal, are indepen- dent, and hence have the mandatory power over all Answer: No, for the defect (of such an argument) has been already pointed out. Even on this assump- tion, the defect persists unavoidably of every duty becoming fit to be indiscriminately undertaken at all umes by all and sundry. Objection. That, too, is enjomed by the scriptures. (To explain): As performance of duties is prescribed by scriptures, so is the knowledge of the Self prescribed for that man of karma by the scriptures themselves Answer: No, fon it is unthinkable that the scrip- tures should be prescribing contradictory things. Just as heat and cold cannot both be averred of fire, so it as not possible to instruct association as well as dis- sociation with virtue and vice for the same person Nor are the desires to attain the delectable and to avoid the detestable, for oneself, created by the scrip- tures, for all beings are seen to have them. Had these two been the products of the scriptures, they would not have been found in the cowherds and others, who are ignorant of scriptures. The scriptures have to instruct about those things only that are not self- evident That being so, if the scriptures have pro- duced the knowledge of the Self, opposed to (ideas of) duties that have been accomplished or are yet to be accomplished, how can they agamn produce a sense of duty that runs counter to it, like coldness in fire or darkness in the sun? Objection The scriptures da not certainly generate such a knowledge

I0 EIGHT UPANIȘADS

Answer: They do; for the conclusion is made thus: "One should know thus: 'He is my Self'" (Kau. III. 9), 'Consciousness is Brahman" (Ai. III. 1. 3). And sentences such as, "It knew only Itself as 'I am Brahman'; therefore It became all" (Br. I. 1v. 10), "Thou art That" (Ch. VI. vii-xvi), bear on the same idea. And since the knowledge of the identity of the Self and Brahman, once it has emerged, is never sublated, its origination cannot be denied or pronounced erroneous. Objection: With regard to renunciation, too, there is an equal absence of need, in accordance with the Smrti, "(He has no object fn this world to gamn by doing action), nor by non-performance" (G. III. I8). Those who say that after realising Brahman one must resort to renunciation are equally open to the same charge of absence of need. Answer: No, since renunciation consists in mere cessation from activity. The feeling of want follows from ignorance and is not inherent in any object, for this fact (of feeling of want towards an object) is in evidence in all beings 1 Moreover, it is noticed that one acts through speech, mind, and body when one is impelled by thirst for desired results; and by the text beginning with, "He desired, 'Let me have a wife' " (Br. I. iv. 17), and by the text, "Both these

1 Even in people who are ignorant of the nature of a thing This is according to the reading, "taddarsanāt". Ananda Gıri prefers "tadadarsanāt-is not in evidence". If the feeling inhered in the object, all should have felt it sımilarly and for ever. The reaction being different, the feeling is subjective.

AITAREYA UPANISAD IT

are but desires (for ends and means) ' (Br. III v. I, IV ıv. 22), of the Vajasaneya Brähmana, it has been emphatically asserted that sons, wealth, etc., that constitute the fivefold karmal are comprised within desire Since the fivefold activities of speech, mind, and body, arising from such defects as ignorance, desire, etc, cannot belong to a man of reaiisation because of his freedom from those defects, his renun- ciation consists in mere absence of activity; and it is not a positive something to be accomplished like sacrifice etc And that being a natural accomplishment of a man of illumination, no necessity is to be sought for it Not that any question can be raised as to why a person, who was (once) enveloped in darkness does not fall into a pit, swamp, or brambles after the dawn of lıght Objection . Then it comes to this that renuncia- tion follows as a matter of course and is not fit to be enjoined Therefore, if the supreme knowledge of Brahman dawns n domestic life, the passive man may continue in that state, and there need be no moving away from it Answer. No, since domestic life is a product of desire, for it has been clearly declared, "This much indeed is desire2" (Br. I iv. 17), "Both these3 are ' The metre called Pankti has five letters in each foot; and in sacrifices the five factors-wife son, divine wealth (meditation), human wealth and rites-get conjoined. Hence sacrifices are pankta, constituted by five factors " The first part of the sentence is He desired, 'Let me have a wife, so that I may be born (as a child). And let me have wealth, so that I may perf3rm rites'" 3 Hankering for ends and means.

I2 EIGHT UPANISADS

indeed desires" (Br. III. v. I, IV. Iv 22). Renuncia- tion is defined as the mere absence of well-established relationship with sons etc arising from desire and not as the mere moving away from that domestic lite And so the mnactive man of realisation cannot con- tinue in the domestic life itself.1 Hereby it is established that for an illumined soul there can be no acceptance of such duties as the service of the Guru, or (practice of) austerities. Against this argument, some householders, shy of begging alms and afraid of ridicule, advance the following rejoinder, thereby making a show of their intellectual acumen: Inasmuch as a mendicant, desirous merely ot maintaining his body, is seen to subject himself to regulations about begging, there may be continuance in the domestic life even for a householder who has become freed from both kinds of desires with regard to ends and means, but who has to depend on mere food and raiment for the maintenance of the body. Answer: Not so; for this has already been refuted by saying that the constant habit of resorting to any particular house of one's own is prompted by desire. When there is no clinging to any particular house of one's own, there follows begging alone, as a matter of course, in the case of one who has no special inclination for turning to his own and who seeks for food and raiment under the impulsion of maintaining the body.

1 He cannot consider himself a householder, nor can he deliberately put on the householder's garb or accept the latter's duties.

AITAREYA UPANISAD I3

Objection Just as (for a Sannyasī) there are iegulations with regard to engagement in begging for the sake of maintaining the body, as also with regard to personal cleanliness etc, so in the case of the householder, who has become illumined and free from desire, there may be regular engagement in obligatory duties for the sake of avoiding evil in pursuance of the impulsion implied in the Vedic text enjoining karma for the whole life Answer: This has already been refuted by pointing out that the illumined soul is outside the range of injunction, besides, he cannot be impelled Objection: The injunction about obligatory duties contained in "One should perferm the Agnihotra sac- rifice for life" becomes meaningless thereby Anstcer . No, because it retains its meaningful- ness with regard to the ignorant man As for the regulation about the activities of the mendicant engaged in the mere support of the body, that regulation does not generate any action Just as no fresh motive is in evidence in the matter of quenching thist (pari passu) for a man engaged in sipping water from the palm of the hand as a ceremomial act, similarly in the matter of (rules for) begging, no other impulse is in evidence (apart from assuaging hungcr) : It cannot be argued on similar grounds that in the

' Following the injunct.on about sipping a man sips water and the thirst is assvaged pan passu; but the latter fact is not the motive for the sipping Similarly a man engages in begging for supporting life, and consequent on that begging theie occur some rules, but those sules cannot supnly the motive for the begging

I4 EIGHT UPANISADS

case of Agnihotra, too, the activities are derived naturally and are regulated accordingly.1 Objection. Restriction of even spontaneous acti- vity is uncalled for when it serves no purpose. Answer: No, since that restriction follows naturally out of past tendencies, and an overriding of them involves great effort.2 From the fact that a fresh injunction of renunciation, despite its emergence as a matter of course (in the case of a man of illumi- nation), is met with,3 it becomes evident that it is obligatory for the man of illumination. And monas- ticısm is obligatory even for the unillumined soul that hankers after emancipation. With regard to this matter, the sentence, "Therefore he who knows thus becomes self-controlled, calm"etc. (Br. IV. iv. 23) can be cited as authoritative. Besides, such means for the realisation of the Self as physical and mental control etc., are incompatible with other stages of life. And it is known from the Śvetāśvatara Upanısad, "To those (monks) who had gone beyond the (four) stages of life he spoke well of that supremely holy Reality that is sought after by seers of Truth" (VI. 21). And in the Kaivalya Upanisad (2) we find,

1 For these activities are not spontaneous, but follow from a desire for heaven etc. 2 Life can be maintained by begging for alms, whether according to rules or not But before the rise of knowledge, the mendicant had followed good rules as a spiritual disci- pline, and the habit persists even after illumination. The path of least resistance lies in following the habit and not in counteracting it. $ In Br III v.I etc .- "Knowing this very Self, the Brāhmanas renounce .. and lead a mendicant life"

AITAREYA UPANISAD I5

'Some atrained immortality not by karma, not by progeny, not by wealth, but by renunciation "1 And the Smrti says, "After attaining knowledge, one should have recourse to mactivity", and "He should continue in that order of lite (Sannyasa) which is conducive to the attainment of Brahman" Moreover, the practice of such disciplines as continence, in their totality, is possibie only by those who have gone beyond the four stages of life, whereas it is impossible in domestic life Not that any inadequate means can lead to full con- summation As for the kinds of realisation to which the karmas pertaining to the householder's life can lead, their highest »esult has been summed up as merger in the Deity (Hiranyagarbha), and that is within the worldly state itself If the knowledge of the Self were possible for people engrossed in karma, the concluson there would not have been made with a result, (viz merger in Deity), very much withn the worldly state Objection That is only the product of some subsidiary factor (associated with the higher knowl- edge) 2 Answer No, for the knowledge of the Self relates to the Reality that is the Self and that is entirely opposed to it (viz a subsidiary). The means to the attamnment of immortalty is the knowledge of the Self which is the supreme Reality beyond all names, forms, and actions If that knowledge remains asso-

1 The idea is that the few who ever realised. did so through renunciation 2 e g the knowledge of Fire associatad with the realisa- tion of the Self

I6 EIGHT UPANISADS

ciated with some secondary result (within the world), it cannot pertain to the Reality that is the Self from which is ruled out all distinctions And that is un- desirable; for in the text of the Vājasaneya Brahmana, beginning with "Where everything becomes his Self" (Br. II. Iv. 14), all empirical dealings, involving actions, auxiliaries, and fruits, have been denied for the illumined soul; and by sayıng, "Where there is an appearance of duality" (Br. IV Iv. 14), the worldly state has been shown in the case of the unillumined soul opposed to the former. Similarly, here, too, the text thinks, "I shall speak of that absolute knowledge of the all-pervasive Reality thatrleads to immortality after I have dealt with the fruit that consists in the identity with the Deity, exists within the worldly state, and is constituted by things subject to hunger etc." For the unenlightened man, again, and not the enlightened one, do the three debts act as impediments in the way to his attaining the worlds of men, Manes, and gods, as it is established by the Vedic text, "That world of men is to be conquered through the son alone"1 etc. (Br. I v. 16), which determines the means for the attamment of the three worlds And for the man of illumination, craving for the world of the Self, the absence of impediment from debts is shown by "What shall we achieve through children" etc. (Br. IV. iv. 22). So also there are the texts of the Kausitakī branch, "So the ancient seers, the Kavaseyas, who had realised It, said ('Why should we study the Vedas?')" (Kau. II. 5) and "The ancient 1 ". . the wor'd of Manes through rites; and the world of the gods through meditation."

AITAREYA UPANISAD I7

iliumined souls, who knew It, did not perform the Agnihotra sacrifice" (ibid). Objection: For the unillumined soul, then. there can be no monasticism before he clears the (three) debts. Answer: Not so, because one does not become involved in debts before entering the householder's life If one can become indebted irrespective of his obligetion thereto, then all may as well become so, which (conclusion) will lead to undesirable consequen- ces Even for one who has embraced the householder's life, monasticism is desirable as a disciplinary means for the realsation of the Self in accordance with the text, "From the domestic life he should resort to that of the forest-dweller (recluse), and then embrace monasticism, alternativelv one may embrace monas- ticism from the stage of the celibate, or the house- holder, or the recluse" (Ja 4). The Vedic texts speaking of performance of rites throughout life find the fullest scope among the unenlightened souls who, do not long for freedom In (some recensions of) the Chandogya, too, it is found that for some people it is enjoined that the Agnihotra sacrifice can be given up after performing it for twelve nights. As for the view that monasticism is meant for those who are dis- qualified (from performing karma), it is unsound, since with regard to them an independent injunction occurs in "He whose fire has been extmguished or who has not lighted it up (shall renounce the day he becomes desireless)" (Np III. 77) Moreover, it is a well-known fact that the Smrtis, in a general way, enjoin option with regard to, as well as adoption (in succession) 2

I8 EIGHT UPANIȘADS

of, all the stages of life. As for the argument, "Inasmuch as renunciation ensues spontaneously in the case of the illumined soul, it is beyond the purview of the scriptures, and theretore it makes little difference as to whether he continues in domestic life or repairs to the forest", it is unsound; for absolute renunciation being a spontaneous result, there can be no persistence in any other order. We pointed out that involvement in any other stage of life is a result of desire, and that renunciation consists merely in the absence of this. As for wilfulness in the case of the illumined soul, it is entirely out of place, it being found among the extremely ignorant. Moreover, see- ang that even scriptural duties are known to be inapplicable in the case of the knower of the Self, they being too burdensome, can there be for him any (action through) heedlessness that arises from extreme non-discrimination? Not that a thing perceived under lunacy or through eyes affected by Timira disease, continues to be exactly so when the disease is cured, that vision being contingent on the lunacy or Iimira. Accordingly, it is proved that for the knower of the 'Self there can be neither recklessness nor engagement in any other duty apart from renunciation. As for the text "He who knows these two, vidyā and avidyā, together" (Iś. II), it does not convey the idea that ignorance, too, persists along with enlighten- ment for the man of knowledge. What is the meaning then? It is meant to imply that they cannot cohere in the same person at the same time, as for instance the ideas of silver and nacre cannot cohere in the same person with regard to the same mother of pearl. For

AITAREYA UPANIŞAD I9

it is said in the Katha Upanisad, "That which 1s known as vidya (knowledge) and that which is known as avidya (ignorance) are widely contradictory, and they follow divergent courses" (I 1l 4) Hence there is no possibility of continuance of ignorance when knowledge dawns From such Vedic texts as, "Crave to know Brahman through concentration" (Tai III 11 ), it follows that concentration etc. that are conducive to the rise of knowledge, as well as activities like service of the teacher, are called avidyā (nescience), since they are the products of nescience Producing uidya (knowledge) through them, one transcends death that is the same as desire. Then the passionless man renounces all desires and achieves immortality through the knowledge of Brahman. In order to reveal this idea the (Iśā) Upanısad says, "Crossıng over death through avidya, one attains immortality through urdya" (II) As for the view that the entire span of a man's life is stuffed with karma according to the text, "By doing karma indeed should one wish to live here for a hundred years" (Iś 2), that has been dis- missed as relating to the ignorant, for otherwise it would be untenable. And the argument was advanced that what follows (in the present Upanisad) is in line with what preceded it, and therefore the knowledge of the Self is not opposed to karma This view was disposed of by relating the two standpoints to the con- ditioned and the unconditioned Self; and this will be shown by us in the succeeding explanatian. Therefore the following text is commenced in order to reveal the knowledge of the oneness of the Self and Brahman that is absolute and actionless.

20 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.1. I

ॐ आत्मा वा इदमेक पवाग्र आसीत्। नान्यत् किंचन मिषत्। स ईक्षत लोकान्न सृजा इति ॥१॥ I. In the beginning this was but the absolute Self alone. There was nothing else whatsoever that winked. He thought, "Let Me create the worlds."

Âtmā var, the absolute1 Self. The word ātmā, Self, is derived in the sense of comprehending, engulf- ing, or pervading, and by it is signified one that is the highest, omniscient, omnipotent, and transcendental to all such worldly attributes as hunger; and is by nature eternal, pure, conscious, and free; and is birthless, undecaying, immortal, fearless, and without a second. Idam, this, all that has been referred to as this world, diversified through the differences of namc, form, and action. This world agre, in the beginning, before the creation of this world; āsīt, was, ātmā ekah eva, but one Self. Objection: Has It ceased to be the same one entity? Answer: No. Objection: Why is it then said, "It was"? Answer: Though even now that very same single entity endures, still there is some distinction. The distinction is this: The universe in which the differ- ences of name and form were not manifest before creation, which was then one with the Self, and which was denotable by the word and idea "Self", has now

1 Vai is used to present the absolute as distinguished from the conditioned.

AITAREYA UPANISAD 2I

become denotable by many words and concepts as well as by the word "Self", because of its diversifica- tion through the multiplicity of names and forms. The case is analogous with that of foam and water. Foam is denoted by the single word and concept water before the manifestation of names and forms distinct from water, but when that foam becomes mani- fested as (an entity) distinct from water, owing to the difference of name and form, then the very same foam bcomes denotable by many words and concepts, viz foam and water, as well as by only one word and one concept, viz water The same is the case here. Na anyat kimcana, there was nothing else whatso- ever, misat, winking, that was active (Nor was there) anything else (that was inactive). Unlike the Pradhäna of the Samkhyas which is an independent entity classed with the non-Selves, and unlike the atoms of the followers of Kanäda, there remained here nothing whatsoever apart from the Self. What existed then? The Self alone existed. This is the idea Sah, that Self; being naturally omniscient, īksata, thought; even though It was but one. Objechon. Since the Self was devoid of body and senses, how could It think before creation? Answer. This is no fault because of Its nature of omniscience, in support of which fact is the mantra text, "Without hands and feet He grasps and goes" etc (Sv III.19). With what motive (did He think)? The answer is srjai, let Me create; lokan, the worlds -- (viz) ambhas etc. which are the places for the enjoy- ment of the fruits of work by creatures

22 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.i. 2

Having visualised, i.e. deliberated, thus,

स इमाँलोकानसृजत। अम्भो मरीचीमरमापोऽदोऽम्भः परेण दिवं दयौः प्रतिष्ठाऽन्तरिक्ष मरीचयः पृथिवी मरो या

अधस्तात्ता आपः ॥२। 2. He created these worlds, viz ambhas, marici, mara, apa. That which is beyond heaven is ambhas. Heaven is its support. The sky is marici. The earth is mara. The worlds that are below are the apah. Sah, that Self; asrjata, created; imān lokān, these worlds; just as in the world an intelligent architect, or others, think, "I shall construct a palace etc. accord- ing to this plan", and builds up the palace etc after that deliberation. Objection: It is logical that architects and others, possessed of materials, should raise up palaces etc. But how can the Self, devoid of materials, create the worlds?

Answer: This is nothing wrong. Name and form, which remain identified with the Self in their unmani- fested state just like the (undiversified) foam with water, and are hence denotable by the word Self, can become the material cause of the universe, as water becomes that of the manifested foam. Therefore there is nothing incongruous in saying that the omniscient Being creates the universe by virtue of Its oneness with the materials-viz name and form-which are identified with Itself. Or the more reasonable position is this: Just as an intelligent juggler, who has no

I.i. 2] AITAREYA UPANISAD 23

material, transforms himself, as it were, into a second self ascending into space, similarly the omniscient and omnipotent Deity, who is a supreme magician, creates Himself as another, in the form of the universe. On this view the schools that hold such beliefs as the unreahty of both cause and effect have no legs to stand on and are totally demolished. ^Which are the worlds that He created? They are being enumerated: Ambhas, maricih, marum, apah. Starting with space, he created in due order the cosmic egg, and then created the worlds-ambhas etc. As for these, the Upanisad itself explains the words ambhas etc. Adah, that one-the world that is there, parena divam, beyond heaven; is ambhas, is denoted by the word ambhas. It is called ambhas because it holds ambhas, water (cloud). Of that world, viz ambhas, dyauh pratistha, heaven is the support. Antariksam, the sky-that there is below heaven is the (world called) marici. Though this (last) world is one, it is used in the plural number as maricīh (or rather maricayah), because of the diversity of the space covered by it. Or it is so used because of its associa- tion with the maricayah, rays (of the sun). Prthivi, the earth, is marah, since beings die (mriyante) on it. Yah adhastat, the worlds that are below-below the earth, tāh, they (are); äpah, called apah, (lit water) the word being derived (from the root ap) in the sense of being attained 1 Though the worlds are con- stituted by the five elements, still, because of the predominance of water (etc. in them), they are

1 Attained by the denizens of the nether worlds.

24 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.i. 3

referred to, by the synonyms of water (etc.),1 as ambhas, marīcīh, maram, āpah.

स ईक्षतेमे नु लोका लोकपालान्नु सृजा इति। सोऽदय एव पुरुषं समुद्दत्यामूछयत्।।३।

3. He thought, "These then are the worlds. Let Me create the protectors of the worlds." Having gathered up a (lump of the) human form from the water itself, He gave shape to it.

Having created the four worlds that provide support for the fruits of action, as well as the materials for those fruits,2 for all creatures, sah, He, God; īksata, deliberated; again; iti, thus. "Imāh nu lokah, these then are the worlds, viz ambhas etc., created by Me, which will perish if they are devoid of protectors Accordingly, for their preservation, nu srjai, let Me create; lokapalān, the protectors of the world." Having deliberated thus, sah, He; samud- dhytya, having gathered up; purusam, a human form, possessed of head, hands, etc .; adbhyah, from the water, itself-from the five elements in which water predominated, and from which He had created (the worlds, viz) ambhas etc .- just as a potter gathers up a lump of clay from the earth; amurchayat, (He) gave shape to it-that is to say, fashioned it by endowing it with limbs.3

1 The word ''water" is suggestive of marici etc .- A G. 2 And accessones for the achievement of fruits. 3 He created Vırät.

I.1 4] AITAREYA UPANISAD 25

तमभ्यतपत्तस्याभितप्तस्य मुखं निरभिद्यत यथाऽण्डम्। मुखाद्वाग्वाचोऽग्निर्नासिके निरभिद्येतां नासिकाभ्यां प्राणः प्राणाद्वायुरक्षिणी निरभिद्येतामक्षिम्यां चक्षुश्चक्षुष आदित्यः कर्णौ निरभिदयेतां कर्णाभ्यां श्रोत्रं श्रोत्राद्दिशस्त्वङनिर- भिद्यत त्वचो लोमानि लोमभ्य ओषधिवनस्पतयो हृदयं निरभिदयत हृदयान्मनो मनसश्चन्द्रमा नाभिर्निरभिद्यत नाभ्या अपानोऽपानान्मृत्यु: शिक्ष निरभिद्यत शिक्षाद्रेतो रेतस आप:॥४।।

इत्यैतरैयोप निषदि प्रथमाध्याये प्रथमः खण्डः ॥

4. He deliberated with regard to Him (i.e. Virät of the human form). As He (i.e. Virät) was being deliberated on, His (i.e. Virät's) mouth parted, just as an egg does. From the mouth emerged speech; from speech came Fire. The nostrils parted; from the nostrils came out the sense of smell; from the sense of smell came Vāyu (Air). The two eyes parted; from the eyes emerged the sense of sight; from the sense of sight came the Sun. The two ears parted; from the ears came the sense of hearing; from the sense of hearing came the Directions. The skin emerged; from the skin came out hair (1.e. the sense of touch associated with hair); from the sense of touch came the Herbs and Trees. The heart took shape; from the heart issued the internal organ (mind); from the internal organ came the Moon. The navel parted; from the

26 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.1. 4

navel came out the organ of ejection; from the organ of ejection issued Death. The seat of the procreative organ parted; from that came the procreative organ; from the procreative organ came out Water.1 Tam, with regard to Hım, (Virat of) that human form; He abhyatapat, undertook tapas (lit. austerty), i.e. He deliberated over, or resolved about, Him, for a Vedic text says, "Whose tapas is constituted by knowledge" (Mu. I 1. 9). Tasya abhitaptasya, of that (Virat), of the lump (that was Virat's body), when subjected to the tapas or resolution of God; mukham nirabhidyata, the mouth parted-a hole in the shape of the mouth emerged, just as the bird's egg bursts. Mukhat, from (that) mouth, that had parted; was brought into existence vak, the organ of speech; vācah, from that vāk; was produced agnih, Fire, (the deity) that presides over vāk and is a regional protector. Similarly, nāsike nirabhidyetām, the nostrils parted; nasıkābhyām prānah, from the nostrils emerged the sense of smell, prānāt vāyuh, from the sense of smell was formed Vayu, Air. In all cases, the seat of the organs, the organs, and the deity-these three emerged in succession. Aksim, the two eyes; karnau, the two orifices of the ears; tvak, skin-(all these which are the seats of the organs), (and) hrdayam, heart (which is the) seat of the inter- nal organ; manah, mind, the internal organ; nābhiḥ, the navel (i.e. the root of the anus), which is the focal

1 Thus originatad the presiding deities of the organs from the limbs of Virāt.

I il. I] AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 27

point of the vital forces The organ of ejection (seated at the anus) is called apanah, because of its associa- tion with Apana (the vital force that moves down). From that originated its presiding deity mrtyuh, Death. As in the other cases, so śiśnam, the seat of the organ of generation was formed. Its organ is retas, semen-the organ meant for discharging semen being called semen from the fact of its association with semen. From semen (1.e the procreative organ) emerged (its deity) apah, Water.

CHAPTER II

ता एता देवता: सृषा अस्मिन्महत्यणवे प्रापतन्। तमशनायापिपासाभ्यामन्ववार्जत्। ता एनमब्रुवन्नायतनं नः प्रजानीहि यस्मिन् प्रतिष्ठिता अन्नमदामेति॥१॥ I. These deities, that had been created, fell into this vast ocean. He subjected Him (i.e. Virat) to hunger and thirst They said to Him (i.e. to Creator), "Provide an abode for us, staying where we can eat food" Tah etāh devatāh, these deities-Fire and others; srstak, that had been created, as the rulers of the regions, by God, (fell) asmin, into this, mahat arnave, vast ocean-of the world which is like a vast ocean, that is filled with the water of sorrow arising from ignorance, desire, and action; that is infested with huge sea-animals in the form of acute disease, and

28 EIGHT UPANISADS

age, and death, that has no end and limit and pro- vides no resting place, that affords only momentary respite through the lttle joy arising from the contact of senses and objects; that is full of the high waves in the shape of hundreds of evil, stirred up by the gale of hankerng for the objects of the five senses, that resounds with the noise of cres and shneks of 'alas! alas!" etc, issuing from the beings condemned to varous hells like Maharaurava, that has the raft of knowledge, furnished with such provisions for the way as truth, simplicity, charity, compassion, non- injury, control of inner and outer organs, fortitrde, etc, that are the embellishments of the heart, that has good company and renunciation of everything as its track; and that has emancipation as its shore Into this vast ocean prāpatan, (they) fell This is the construction Hence the idea sought to be imparted here is that even the attainment of the state of merger in the deities, viz Fire and others, that was explained (earlier), and that is the result of the combned practice of meditation and karma-(even this) is not adequate for the removal of the sorrows of the world Since this is so, therefore, after having grasped this fact, one should, for the eradication of all the worldly miseries, realise the supreme Brahman as the Self of one's own as also of all beings,-the Self which is possessed of the characteristics to be mentioned here- after, and which has been introduced as the source of the origination, continuance, and dissolution of the universe Thefefore in accordance with the Vedic text, "There is no other path for reaching there" (Sv. III 8, VI. 15), it follows that, "This, that is the

I ll. 2] AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 29

knowledge of the oneness of Brahman and the Self, is the path, this is the karma, this is Brahman, this is truth' (A1. Ā II. 1. I). (He, the Creator) anvavārjat, suffused, ie. en- dowed, tam, Him-who was the source of the organs, their seats, and their deities, the Being (i e. Virat) who was the first begotten and the Self in the form of a lump; aśanāyā-pıpāsābhyām, with hunger and thirst. Since He (the first begotten), the source of all, was afflicted with the defects of hunger etc., His products, the deities, are also subject to hunger etc. Then tah, those deities; being afflicted with hunger and thirst, enam, to Him, to the grandsire, to the Creator (of the body of Virāt), abruvan, said; itt, this. "Prajānīhi, provide, nah, for us; ayatanam, an abode; pratisthitāh yasmin, staying where, and becoming able, annam adāma, we can eat food.

ताभ्यो गामानयत्ता अब्रुवन्न वै नोऽयमलमिति। ताभ्योऽश्वमानयत्ता अब्रुवन्न वै नोऽयमलमिति ॥२॥ 2. For them He (i.e. God) brought a cow. They said, "This one is not certainly adequate for us." For them He brought a horse. They said, "This one is not certainly adequate for us."' God, having been told so, täbhyah, for them, for the deities; anayat gam, brought a cow; having gathered up a lump of the size of a cow from that very water, just as before, and having fashioned it, He showed it to them. Tāh, thay; on their part, having seen the bovine form; abruvan, said: "Ayam,

30 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.ii 2

this one-this lump; na vai, is not certainly, alam, adequate, nah, for us-fit to serve as a seat while eating food, that is to say, it is not sufficient so far as eating is concerned. The cow having been rejected. He anayat, brought, aśvam, a horse; tābhyah, tor them Tah, they, abruvan, said; iti, this-just as before. "Ayam na vai alam nah, this is not certainly serviceable for us."

ताभ्यः पुरुषमानयत्ता अन्नुवन् सुकृतं बतेति पुरुषो चाव सुकृतम्। ता अब्रवीद्यथायतनं प्रविशतेति॥३। 3. For them He brought a man. They said, "This one is well formed; man indeed is a creation of God Himself." To them He said, "Enter into your respective abodes." When all else had been rejected, täbhyah, for them; anayat (He) brought, purusam, a man, their progenitor.1 Having seen that man, that was their source, they became free from misery, and tāh, they; abruvan, said; iti, this: "This abode is sukrtam bata, well created, to be sure." As a result purusah vāva, man is indeed; sukrtam, virtue itself-he having thereby become the source of all virtuous deeds.2 Or he is called sukrta, (lit.) created by oneself, because God created man by Himself, through His own Māya.3 1 Who conformed in features to Virat, their origin. 2 Since they pronounced man as sukrta, therefore man acts virtuously even today. 3 Man was a good product, since God created him inde- pendently of servants and accessories Sukrta is thus explained in three Senses-good product, virtue, created by oneself.

I n. 4] AITAREYA UPANISAD 3I

God thought that this abode was liked by them, since all beings love the source from which they spring; and so He abravit, said; tāh, to them; iti, this: "Pravisata, enter; yathayatanam, nto the respective abode-into the dwelling that suits each for such activities as speak- ing etc. अशनिर्वाग्भूत्वा मुखं प्राविशद्वायुः प्राणो भूत्वा नासिके प्राविशदादित्यश्चक्षुर्भूत्वाSक्षिणी प्राविशद्दिशः श्रोत्रं भूत्वा कर्ण प्राविशन्नोषधिवनस्पतयो लोमानि भूत्वा त्वचं प्राविशंश्चन्द्रमा मनो. भूत्वा हृदयं प्राविशन्मृत्युरपानो भूत्वा नाभिं प्राविशदापो रेतो भूत्वा शिक्षं प्राविशन्।।४।। 4. Fire entered into speech taking the form of the organ of speech; Air entered into the nostrils assuming the form of the sense of smell; the Sun entered into the eyes as the sense of sight; the Directions entered into the ears by becoming the sense of hearing; the Herbs and Trees entered into the skin in the form of hair (i.e. the sense of touch); the Moon entered into the heart in the shape of the mind; Death entered into the navel in the form of Apana (i.e. the vital energy that presses down); Water entered into the limb of generation in the form of semen (1.e. the organ of procreation). Just as the commander of armies etc. (enter into a city at the bidding of the king), so having got the permission of God in the words, "Let this be so", agnih, Fire, the deity that identifies himself with the organ of speech; bhūtvā, becoming, vāk, speech itself,

32 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.ii. 4

prāvisat, entered; mukham, into the mouth, which was his source. Similarly are the rest to be explained. Vāyuh, Air; entered nāsıke, into the nostrils Ādıtyah, the Sun; aksim, into the eyes; disah, the Directions; karnau, into the ears; osadhi-vanaspatuyah, the Herbs and Trees; tvacam, into the skin; candrama, the Moon; hrdayam, into the heart; mrtyuh, Death; näbhim, into the navel (i.e. the root of the anus); apah, Water, siśnam, into the generative organ.

तमशनायापिपासे अव्रतामावाभ्याम भिप्रजानीहीति ते अब्रवीदेतास्वेव वां देवतास्वाभजाम्येतासु भागिन्यौ करोमीति। तस्माद्यस्यै कस्यै व देवतायै हविर्गुद्यते भागिन्यावेवास्यामशनायापिपासे भवतः ।।५।। इत्यैतरेयोपनिषदि प्रथमाध्याये द्वितीय: खण्डः ॥ 5. To Him Hunger and Thirst said, "Provide for us (some abode)." To them He said, "I provide your livelihood among these very gods; I make you share in their portions." Therefore when oblation is taken up for any deity whichsoever, Hunger and Thirst become verily sharers with that deity. When the gods had thus found their abodes, aśanāyā-pipāse, Hunger and Thirst, being without abodes; abrūtām, said; to that God: "Āvāblyam, for us; abhiprajānīhi, think of, ie. provide; some abode." God, having been told thus, abravit, said; te, to them two-to Hunger and Thirst: "Since you are but feelings, you cannot possibly enjoy food with- out being supported by some conscious being.

I 1ll. I] AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 33

Therefore etasu eva, among these beings themselves; devatasu, among the deities, viz Fire etc .- in the corporeal context, as also in dıvine context; ābhajāmī vam, I favour you by assigning your livelihood. Karomı, I make you; bhāginyau, sharers; etāsu, among these gods. Whatever allotment, consisting of oblation etc., is assigned to any deity, I make you share in that very portion." Since God ordained thus in the begin- ning of creation, tasmāt, therefore, even today; yasyaı kasyai ca devatayai, for whichsoever deity; havih, oblation-such as porridge, cake, etc .; grhyate, is taken up; asyām, ın that deity; aśanāyā-pipāse, Hunger and Thırst, bhāginyau eva bhavatah, become sharers indeed.

CHAPTER III

स ईक्षतेमे नु लोकाश्च लोकपालाश्चान्नमेस्य: सृजा इति ॥१ ॥ I. He thought, "These, then. are the senses and the deities of the senses. Let Me create food for them."

Sah, He, God, iksata, thought, thus. How' "Ime nu, these then are, lokāh ca lokapalah ca, the senses and their deities-that have been created by Mc and dowered with hunger and thirst, therefore these cannot subsist without food. Accordingly, srar is the same as srje, let Me create; annam fooa, ebhyah, for these-the deities of the senses." Thus is seen in the

3

34 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.in. I

world the independence of lordly persons with regard to extending favour or disfavour to their own people. Therefore the supreme Lord, too, has independence in the matter of favouring or disfavouring all, since He is the Lord of all.

सोऽपोऽम्यतपत्ताम्योऽभितप्ताभ्यो मूर्तिरजायत। या वै सा मूर्तिरजायतान्नं वै तत् ॥२।। 2. He deliberated with regard to the water. From the water, thus brooded over, evolved a form. The form that emerged was verily food. Sah, He, God, being desirous of creating food, abhyatapat, deliberated with regard to; apah, water, already mentioned. Tabhya abhitaptābhyah, from the water that was brooded over, and that formed the material; ajāyata, evolved; murtih, a solid form, that could provide support for others and that comprised the moving and the unmoving. Yā var sa murtih ajāyata, the moulded form that evolved, annam vai tat, that formed thing is verily food.

वदेनत्सृष्टं पराङ्त्यजिघांसत्तद्वाचाSजिघृक्षत् तन्ना- शक्रोद्वाचा ग्रहीतुं। स यद्धैनद्वाचाऽग्रहैष्यदभिव्याहृत्य हैवान्नमत्रप्स्यत्।।३। 3. This food, that was created, turned back and attempted to run away. He tried to take it up with speech. He did not succeed in taking it up through speech. If He had succeeded in taking it up with speech, then one would have become contented merely by talking of food.

I.im1. 4] AITAREYA UPANIȘAD 35

Tat enat annam, this aforesaid food, that was srstam, created, in the presence of the senses and their deities. As a mouse, for instance, when in the presence of a cat, thinks, "This is an eater of food and j< Death to me", and moves back, sımilarly this food became paran, turned back, and atyajighamisat, wanted to go .beyond the reach of the devourers ;- began to run away. When that sum total of the organs and their deities, that formed the lump called the body and senses (of Virat), realised that intention of the food, and did not notice other eaters of food, He Himself being the first begotten» He anghrksat, tried to take up; tat, that food, väca, through speech, through the act of speaking Na asaknot, He did not succeed, grahitum tat, to take up that, vāca, through speech, through speaking. Yat, if, sah, He, the First Born, the first embodied Being, agrahaisyat, had taken up, enat, this food; vacā, through speech, then everyone, being a product of the First Born, atrapsyat, would have become satisfied, abhivyāhrtya eva annam, merely by talking of food But as a matter of fact this is not the case. Hence we understand that the First Born, too, did not succeed in grasping food through speech. The remaining portions are to be similarly explained. तत्प्राणेनाजिवृक्षत् तन्नाशक्रोत्प्राणेन ग्रहीतं स यद्धैनत्प्राणेनाग्रहैष्यदभिप्राण्य हैवान्नमत्रप्स्यत्।।४।। 4. He tried to grasp that food with the sense of smell. He did not succeed in grasping it by smelling. If He had succeeded in grasping it by smelling, then every one would have become contented merely by smelling food.

36 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.ni. 5

यद्धैनच्चक्षुषाऽग्रहैष्यदुद्टष्ा हैवान्नमत्रप्स्यत् ।।५॥। 5. He wanted to take up the food with the eye. He did not succeed in taking it up with the eye. If He had taken it up with the eye, then one would have become satisfied by merely seeing food.

तच्क्रोत्रेणाजिघृक्षत् तन्नाशक्रोच्करोत्रेण ग्रहीतुं स यद्धैनच्क्रोत्रेणाग्रहैष्य च्करत्वा हैवान्नमत्रप्स्यत्॥६॥ 6. He wanted to take ap the food with the ear. He did not succeed in taking it up with the ear. If he had taken it up with the ear, then one would have become satisfied merely by hearing of food. तत्त्वचाऽजिघृक्षत् तन्नाशक्रोत्तवचा ग्रहीतुं स यद्धै- नत्त्वचाऽग्रहैष्यत् स्पृष्टा हैवान्नमत्रप्स्यत्।।७।। 7. He wanted to take it up with the sense of touch. He did not succeed in taking it up with the sense of touch. If He had taken it up with touch, then one would have been satisfied merely by touching food. तन्मनसाSजिघृक्षत् तन्नाशक्रोन्मनसा ग्रहीतुं स यद्धैनन्मनसाSग्रहैष्यदु ध्यात्वा हैवान्नमत्रप्स्यत्।।८।। 8. He wanted to take it up with the mind. He did not succeed in taking it with the mind. If He had taken it up with the mind, then one would have become satisfied by merely thinking of food.

I ili Io] AITAREYA UPANISAD 37

तच्छिश्रेनाजिघृक्षत् तन्नाशक्रोच्छिश्नेन ग्रहीतुं स

9 He wanted to take it up with the procreative organ He did not succeed in taking it up with the procreative organ. If He had taken it up with the procreative organ, then one would have become satisfied by merely ejecting food. तदपानेनाजिवृक्षत् तदावयत् सैषोऽन्नस्य ग्रहो यद्वायु- रन्नायुर्धा पष यद्ायुः ॥१०॥ I0. He wanted to take it up with Apãna He caught it. This is the devourer of food. That vital energy which is well known as dependent on food for its subsistence is this vital energy (called Apāna). Beng unable to take up the food through nose, eye, ear, skin, mind, and the generative apparatus, that is to say, through the activity of the respective organs, at last He ajighrksat, wanted to take up the food, apānena, by Apāna (the indrawing energy of) air, through the cavity of the mouth Tat avayat, (He) took up that-that food thus, He ate it There- fore sah esuh, this Apāna air; annasya grahah, (1s) the devourer of food. Yat vayuh, (should be rather yah vayuh) the vital energy that, is annāyuh vai, well known as dependent on food, for its subsistence; is esah, this one, yat väyuh, that is the vital energy, called Apäna.1

1 The eater of food is not the Self, buc the vital energy that manifests itself as inhaling etc

38 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.iii. II

स ईक्षत कथं न्विदं मटते स्यादिति स ईक्षत कतरैण प्रपद्या इति। स ईक्षत यदि वाचाऽभिव्याहतं यदि प्राणे नाभिप्राणितं यदि वक्षुषा दष्टं यदि श्रोत्रेण श्रुतं यदि त्वचा स्पृष्टं यदि मनसा ध्यातं यद्यपानेनाभ्यपानितं यदि शिक्षेन विसृष्टमथ कोऽहमिति ॥११॥ II. He thought, "How indeed can it be there without Me?" He thought, "Through which of the two ways should I enter ?"' He thought, "If utterance is done by the organ of speech, smelling by the sense of smelling, seeing by the eye, hearing by the ear, feeling by the sense of touch, thinking by the mind, the act of drawing in (or pressing down) by Apāna, ejecting by the procreative organ, then who (or what) am I?"

Having thus made the existence of the congress of senses and their deities dependent on food, like the existence of a city, its citizens, and its rulers, sah, He; iksata, thought, like the ruler of the city, while cogi- tating thus: "Katham nu, how indeed; mat-rte, with- out Me, the master of the city; syat, can there be; idam, this thing-this activity belonging to the body and senses that will be spoken of; since it is meant for somebody else? Yadi vācā abhivyāhrtam, if speak- ing is encompassed by the organ of speech. The mere use of speech etc. will become useless, will not take place in any way, just as offerings and praise that are made and sung by citizens and bards in honour of their lord become useless when their lord is not there.

I.iii. II AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 39

Therefore just as the king is with regard to the city, so I should be there as the supreme lord, the ruler, the witness of virtue and vice, and the enjoyer. It is a logical necessity that the combination of the effects (1.e. body and the organs) should be meant for some- body else If this necessity can be fulfilled even without Myself who am a conscious being and by whom enjoyment through them is sought for, just as much as the activities of a city and its citizens can be sought to be explained without their lord, atha, then; kah aham, who or what, and whose lord am I? It, after entering into the combination of body and senses, I do not witness the fruits of utterances etc. made by speech etc , just as a king, after entering a city, observes the omissions and commissions of the officers, then nobody will understand or think of Me as, "This one is a reality and is of this kind." Contrariwise, I shall become cognisable as the conscious reality who knows as His objects such activities as utterance etc of the organs of speech etc., and for whose sake exist these utterances etc. of such composite things as speech and so on, just as the pillars. walls, etc., that enter into the construc- tion of a palace etc., exist for the sake of somebody else who is sentient and does not form a part of that structure. Having reasoned thus, sah, He; īksata, thought, iti, thus: "Katarena prapadyai through which shall I enter? There are two ways of entrance into this composite thing-the fore part of the foot and the crown of the head. Katarena, by which of these two, paths; prapadyai (or rather, prapadyeya), should I enter; into this city of the aggregate of body and senses?"

40 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.n1i T2

Having considered thus and having deliberated, "That being so, I should not enter through the lower way-viz the two tips of the feet-that is the path of entry for My servant Prāna (the Vital Force), that is commissioned to act in every way on My behalf. What then (should I do)? As a last resort, let me enter by splitting up the crown of its head"-having thought so, just like a human being who performs what he' thinks.

स एतमेव सीमानं विदार्येतया द्वारा प्रापद्यत। सैषा विद्ृतिर्नाम द्वास्तदेतन्नान्दनम्। तस्य त्रय आवसथास्त्रयः स्वप्ना अयमावसथोऽयमावसथोऽयभावसथ इति ॥१२॥ 12. Having split up this end, He entered through this door. This entrance is known as vidrti (the cleft entrance). Hence it is delightful. Of Him there are three abodes-three (states of) dream. This one is an abode, this one is an abode, this one is an abode.

Sah, He, the Creator God; etam eva sīmanam vidārya, having cleft this end, having made a hole into, the farthest point where the parting of the hair occurs; etayā dvārā, through this gate, this entrance; prāpadyata, entered; into this world, i.e. into this conglomeration of body and senses. This one is that entrance that becomes well known from the fact of the perception inside (the mouth) of the taste etc. of oil and other things when these are applied on the crown of the head for a long time. Sā eșā dvāh, this door; vidrtih nāma, is, well known as vidrti (the cleft one), because of its having been cleft. As for the other

I.ml I2] AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 4I

entrances-viz the ear etc -they are neither perfect nor the sources of jov, since they are common passages meant for those occupying the places of servants etc But this passage is only for the supreme Lord, tat, hence, etat nandanam, this one is productive of joy Nandana is the same as nandana, the lengthen- ing being a Vedic licence It is so called because one revels (nandati) by reaching the supreme Brahman through this door. Tasya, of Him, who, after having created thus, entered (the body) as an individual soul, lıke a king entering a city, there are trayah āvasathah, three abodes,-viz the right eye-the eye- ball, the seat of the sense (of vision)-during the waking state; the mind inside, during the dream state; and the space within the heart, during the tate of deep sleep Or the three abodes may be the ones that will be enumerated, viz the body of the father, the womb of the mother, and one's own body. (He has) trayah svapnāh, three dreams, that are known as waking, dream, and deep sleep. Obection The waking state is not a dream, it being a state of consciousness Answer. Not so, it is verily a dream. Objection. How? Answer: Since there is no consciousness of one's own supreme Self, and since in it are perceived unreal things as in a dream Ayam, this one-the right eyc; is the first ävasathah, abode, the second is the mind inside, and the space within the heart is the third. "Ayam avasathah, this is an abode" is only a recounting of what is already enumerated. Residing alternately as

42 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.iii. 12

identified with those abodes, this individual soul sleeps deeply for long through natural ignorance, and does not wake up, though experiencing the blows of sorrow that anse from the concurrence of many hundreds of thousands ot calamities and fall like the thumps of a heavy club. स जातो भूतान्यभिव्यैख्यत् किमिहान्यं वाघदिषदिति।, स एतमेव पुरुषं ब्रह्म ततममपश्यत्। इदमदशेमिती ३॥१३। I3. Being born, He manifested all the beings;1 for did He speak of (or know) anything else ?2 He realised this very Purusa as Brahman, the most pervasive, thus: "I have realised this." Sah jātah, He being born, having entered into the body as the individual soul, abhivaikhyat, mani- fested; bhutāni, the beings. When, by good luck, a teacher of supreme compassion beat near his ears the drum of the great sayings of the Upanisads whose notes are calculated to wake up the knowledge of the Self, then the individual apaśyat, realısed; etam eva, this very; purusam, Purusa (as Brahman)-the Purușa that is being discussed as the Lord of creation etc., who is called Purusa because of residence (śayana, i.e. existence) in the city (puri) (of the heart). (He realised Him) as brahma, Brahman, the Great; that is tatamam (by adding the missing ta, and taking the form

1 He knew and spoke distinctly of them as identified with Himself thus. "I am a man", "I am blind", "1 am happy", eic. 2 That is to say, He neither perceived, nor spoke of anyone beside Himself. As He did not perceive any difference, He identified Himself with the individual soul.

I.mm. I4] AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 43

tatatamam, the word means) the most pervasive, the fullest, like space. How (did he realıse)? "I adarsam, have seen; idam, this one-this Brahman, that is the real nature of my Self." The elongation (of i in itī) is in accordance with the rule that in the case of a word suggesting deliberation, the vowel gets length- ened.1

तस्मादिदन्द्रो नामेदन्द्रो ह वै नाम। तमिदन्द्रं सन्तमिन्द्र इत्याचक्षते परोक्षेण। परोक्षप्रिया इव हि देवा: परोक्षप्रिया इव हि देवा:॥१४॥ इत्यैतरयोपनिषदि प्रथमाध्याये तृतीयः खण्डः ॥ I4. Therefore His name is Idandra. He is verily known as Idandra. Although He is Idandra, they call Him indirectly Indra; for the gods are verily fond of indirect names, the gods are verily fond of indirect names. Since He realısed Brahman as "this" (i.e. directly) -"the Brahman that is immediate and direct, the Self that is within all" (Br. III. iv. I)-therefore from the fact of seeing as "idam, this", the supreme Self is idandrah nāma, called Idandra. God is idandrah ha vai nama, verily known as Idandra, in the world. Tam idandram santam, Him who 1s Idandra; they, the knowers of Brahman; ācaksate, call; paroksena, indirectly, by a word denoting a

1 The elongation suggests that he first considered whether Brahman had been fully realised or not and then got the conviction, "It is fully realised". This conviction led to full satisfaction.

44 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.iii. 14

'remote thing; indrah itt, as Indra. (They call Hım thus) for the sake of conventional dealings, they being afraid of referring by a direct name, since He is the most adorable. So it follows that, hi, inasmuch as; devāh, the gods; are paroksapriyāh iva, verily fond of indirect names; it needs no mention that the great Lord, the God of all the gods, must be much more so. The repetition (in paroksaprıyāh etc.) is to indı- cate the end of the Part (I) that is being dealt with.

PART II

CHAPTER I

Introduction: The purport of the Fourth1 (1 e. First) Part (just finished) is this: The Reality, that is the creator, preserver, and destroyer of the universe, and is transcendental, omniscient, omnipotent, and all-knowing, created in due order, this entire universe beginning with space, without the help of rny sub- stance other than Himself Then He entered by Hmself into all living creatures for the sake of self- realisation And having entered there, He realised directly His own Self in its reality as "I am this Brahman." Therefore He is the only one Self in all bodies and there is none besides And so everybody else, too, should realise thus. 'He is my Self'" (Kau III I. 8), "I am Brahman" (Br I. 1v. I0) 2 Moreover, it has been said here, "In the beginning this was but the absolute Self alone" (Ai I 1. I), and "Brahman that is the most pervasive" (A1 I. ni 13), and so also in other Upanisads. Objection: For the One that is all-pervasive and that is the Self of all, there is not so much as the point of a hair unoccupied. Therefore how could He enter by splitting the end like an ant entering into a hole>

' Toarth counting from the First Part.of the Aranyaka mn which this Upanisad is included. 2 In the commentary the two texts seem to have become combined

46 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II 1

Answer: This is but an insignificant question to be posed when there are so many others that can be asked here That without organs He thinks; that without the help of anything He created this universe, that gathering up (a lump of) the human size from water, He gave it shape; that from His brooding parted the mouth etc., from which emerged Fire etc., the presiding deities of the organs; that the deities became associated with hunger and thirst; that they prayed for abodes; that cows etc. were shown to them, that they entered into their respective abodes, that the created food ran away; that there was an attempt at taking it up with the organ of speech etc .- all these are on a par with the (problem of) splitting the end and entering Objection: Then reject all this as incoherent Answer: No, there is no fault, since all this is but eulogistic,1 the only thing sought to be taught being the knowledge of the Self. Or a better explana- tion is that the Deity, who is omniscient and omni- potent and is a great conjurer, created all this like a magician; but the parable etc. are elaborated here for the sake of easy instruction and comprehension just as it is done in ordnary life. For the mere acquain- tance with anecdotes regarding creation etc. leads to no useful result, whereas it is well known in all the Upanisads that from the knowledge of the unity of the Self follows immortality as a result; and the same fact is in evidence in the Smrtis like the Gita in such sentences as "(He sees, who sees) the Lord Supreme, 1 Arthavada, meant for emphasising something other than the idea conveyed literally.

II 1] AITAREYA UPANISAD 47

existing in all beings, (deathless in the dying)" (XIII. 27) Objection. There are three souls: One 13 Well known in the world and in all the scriptures as the transmigrating soul that enjoys and acts The second soul is God, the creator of the universe, the intelligent one. And He is inferable from the logical ground shown in the scriptures, viz the creation of bodies and worlds fitted with many localties that are suitable for the enjcyment of the fruits of actions of innumer- able beings, just as an architect etc possessed of the requisite skill and knowledge can be inferred from the fact of the construction of a town, a palace, etc. The third is the ali-pervading Consciousness (Purusa) presented by the Upanisads alone and well known from such texts as: "From where speech turns back" (Taı. II iv. I), "Not this, not this" (Br. III. ix. 26). Thus there are three selves distinct from one another That being so, how can it be known that the Self is one without a second and transcendental? Vedāntist: As to that, how is the individual soul even known? Opponent Is he not known as the hearer, thinker, seer, teacher, maker of (inarticulate) sound, perceiver, and knower? Vedantist: Is it not contradictory to say of him, who is known through the act of hearing etc, that "He thinks without being thought of, he knows without being known" (Br III. vill. II, Ke I. 1. 6), and that "You cannot think that which is the thinker of thought; you cannot know that which is the knower of knowl- edge" (Br. III iv. 2) etc .?

48 EIGHT UPANISADS [II.i

Opponent : True, it will involve a contradiction if the individual soul is known directly like happiness etc. But as a fact, direct perception is denied by "You cannot think that which is the thinker of thought" etc But he is known through such inferen- tial ground as hearing. Hence how can there be a contradiction? Vedantist: How is he known even through such ground of inference as hearing? For when the Selt is engaged in hearing an audible sound, it cannot have the actions of thinking and knowing with regard to itself or anything else, since it is engrossed in the mere act of hearing. So also with regard to other acts like thinking. And the acts of hearing etc. pertain to their own objects only (and not to their subjects); not that the act of thinking by the thinker can occur with regard to anything outside the thinkable.1 Opponent: Is not the mind able to think of everything? Vedantist: Truly this is so; still no thinkable can be thought of without the thinker.2 Opponent: Granted this is so, what follows? Answer: This will be the accruing result here. He who is the thinker of all will simply be the thinker, and he will not be an object of thought. And there is not a second thinker who can think of that thinker. Should he be thinkable by the Self, then there will be two Selves-the one being the Self by which the (thinking) Self is thought of and the other the Self

1 The Self is not a thinkable object. ª Mind being only an instrument for the Self, an agent has to be posited to make the act of thinking possible.

II.17 AITAREYA UPANISAD 49

which is thought of. Or the same Self will be split into two halves, like a bamboo, to become the thinker and the thinkable But it is :ogical either way. This :s analogous to the case of two lamps which, because of their similarity, cannot be (mutually) the illuminator and the illumined. Besides, the thinker, while engaged in thinking the thinkable object has no time left out from the process of thinking during which to think of himself 1 Even on the supposition that the thinker thinks of the Self through the grounds of nference, there will spring up two Selves-the one that is inferred through logical grounds, and the other that infers Or the same Self will be splt up. And so there will be the defect already mentioned. Objection. If the Self be not known either through perception or inference, why is it said, "One should realise thus. 'He is my Self' " (Kau. III 9)? Or why is the Self called the thinker and the hearer' Answer: Is it not a fact that the Self is possessed: of such qualities as the capacity of hearing,2 and is it not well known (in the Upamisads) that It is free from such qualities as the capacity of hearing> What inconsistency do you find here? Opponent. Though it may not strike you as incongruous, to me it is so. Vedantist How? Opponent. When the Self :s a hearer, It is not a thinker, and when It is a thinker, It is not a hearer

1 The mind engages not in the Self but in things external to It 3 The Self is the eternal hearer, seer, etc

4

50 EIGHT UPANIŞADS [II.i

That being so, It becomes a hearer and a thinker from one point of view, while from another It is neither a hearer nor a thinker. So with regard to other situa- tions. That being so, how can you avoid the feeling of an irreconcilability in the face of the doubt that crops up as to whether the Self is possessed of the capacity to hear etc., or possessed of the opposite quality of not being able to hear etc? At the time when Deva- datta moves, he is not stationary, but is moving to be sure; and when he is motionless, he is not moving, but staying on. During such a period he can be either moving or staying as an only exclusive alternative; but he cannot be both moving and staying continuously. The same is the case here. Similar (also) is the view, in this matter, of the followers of Kanada and others, according to whom the Self is called a hearer, a thinker, and so on because of Its being occasionally possessed of hearing etc. For they say that the knowl- edge is a product of contact (between the mind and the senses), and that this contact is not simultaneous. And (as a proof) they adduce such an argument as: "My mind was occupied with some other object, so I did not see this." And (they argue that) it is proper to accept the non-simultaneity of knowledge as a logical ground for inferring the existence of mind.1 Let this be so. What do you lose if it be so?

1 If the mind did not exist, then all the senses, when simultaneously in contact with their objects, would perceive all the objects. But this is not a fact. So the Vaisesikas believe in an atcmic mind that gets connected with the senses in succession.

II i] AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 5I

Vedäntist: Let it be so if it be logical and if it pleases you But it cannot be the meaning of the Upanışads. Opponent: Is it not implied by the Upanisads that the Self is the hearer, thinker, etc .? Vedantist: No, since there is the statement that It is not the hearer, thinker, etc.1 Opponent: Was not that position denied by you by saying that It is occasionally so? Vedantist: No, for by me the Self is accepted as the eternal hearer etc., according to the Vedic text, "For the listener's function of hearing can never be lost" etc. (Br.IV.ni 27). Objection: If on that view eternal hearing is admitted, there will be the simultaneous origin of (all kinds of) knowledge that will contradict experience; besides this will lead to the assumption of abscnce of ignorance in the Self. And that is undesirable Answer: Neither of the defects arises, since accord- ing to the Upamsads, the Self can become the hearer etc. through Its (inherent) power of hearing etc.2 (Br. III.iv.2). The seeing etc., by the impermanent and gross eyes etc. that are subject to conjunction and disjunction (with their objects), are impermanent indeed, just as is the burning of fire because of its production from contact with hay etc. Not that the eternal and formless Self, which is free trom the attributes of conjunction and disjunction, can have transitory qualities like seeing etc. that are caused

1 Seems to be a reference to Br IV iv .. 2. 2 By virtue of Its being the witness of all mental changes involved in the acts of hearing etc.

52 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.i

by contact. In support of this is the Vedic text: "The vision of the witness can never be lost" etc. (Br. IV.111.23). From this it follows that there are two kinds of vision-the transitory vision of the eve and the eternal vision of the Self. Similarly there are two kinds of hearing-the transitory hearing of the ear and the eternal hearing of the Self. So also are there two kinds of thinking and two sorts of knowing-the external and the internal. For on this view alone, and in the way it has been shown, does the Vedic text "The seer of seeing and the hearer of hearing" (Br. III.Iv.2) become justifiable. It is a matter of experi- ence, too, that the vision of the eye is non-eternal, inasmuch as it is lost or regained in accordance as the disease, called Timira, sets in or is cured. Similar is the case with hearing and thinking. And the eternality of the vision of the Self is well known in the world, for a man whose eyes have been plucked out says, "My brother has been seen by me in dream today." Similarly a man who is known to be deaf may say, "A mantra has been heard by me today in dream", etc. Should the eternal vision of the Self be produced merely through the contact of the eye, it should be destroyed on the destruction of the latter; and then a man whose eyes are plucked out should not perceive blue, yellow, etc. in dream. Moreover, such Vedic texts as, "The vision of the witness can never be lost" etc. (Br. IV.iii.23), would be illogical; and the same will be the fate of such Vedic texts as, "That is the eye in a man through which one sees in a dream" The logical position is this: The eternal vision of the Self witnesses the ephemeral external

II 17 AITAREYA UPANISAD 53

vision, but since the external vision has such changing attributes as growth and decay, the vision of the Self that witnesses it, appears accordingly and seems to be ephemeral owing to the error of men The case is similar to that of the vision fixed in a whirling fire-brand or such other things, where the vision seems to be revolving (as the latter does) And in confirmation of this is the Vedic text, ' It thinks as it were and shakes as it were" (Br IV 111 7). Hence the vision of the Self being eternal, it can have neither simultaneity, nor the opposite of it But for the ordinary people, owing to their preoccupation with the external limiting adjuncts, and for the logicians, owing to their remain- ing outside scriptural tradition, it is quite possible to have the erroneous idea that the vision of the Self 1s impermanent The imagination of difference among God, the individual soul, and the supreme Self can also be traced to this error; and equally erroneous it is to fancy such ideas as "it is", "it is not" with regard to the eternal and unconditioned vision of that Entity in which all the variations of speech and mind (1 e name and form) get unified. He who entertains, with regard to that Reality beyond all speech and mind, any idea of fancying-that It exists, or It does not exist; that It is one, or that It is many; that It has attributes, or that It has not, that It knows, or that It does not; that It is active, or that It is not; that It is frunful, or that It is fruitless, that It has a seed, or that It is seed- less; that It is happiness, or that It is misery, that It is inside, or that It is outside, that It is void, or that It is not; or that It is different from me, or that It is

54 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IIi

I ;- (that man) may as well wish to roll up the sky like leather, to ascend there with his feet, or to trace the footprints of the fish and birds in water and sky; for the Vedic texts declare: "Not this, not this" (Br III.1x.26), "From which words turn back" (Tai II iv I), and so on. And there is the mantra text, "Who indeed knows?" etc. (R I xxx 6). Objection: How does he, then, get the realisation, "He is my Self"? Tell me, how I can realise Hım as, "He is my Self." Answer: Apropos of this, they relate a story: An idiot, who committed some guilt was told, "Fie on you! You are no man!" Because of his stupidity he approached somebody to get the conviction that he was a man and told him, "Tell me who I am." The latter understood his silliness and said, "I shall make you understand by degrees." And then after proving that he was not a motionless thing, and so on, he (the teacher) concluded with, "You are none other than a man." That dullard then told him, "You who started to enlighten me have become silent. Why do you not instruct me?" That sentence of yours is just like this. How can he, who does not understand himself to be a man when told, "You are none other than a man," understand himself to be a man even when told, "You are a man"? Therefore the process to be followed in enlightening about the Self is as it is set forth in the scriptures and- nothing else; for hay etc. that can be consumed by fire are not burnt by anything else. It is because of this that the scripture, which started to impart knowledge about the nature of the Self,

II 1. I] AITAREYA UPANISAD 55

stopped after declaring "Not this, not this" (Br. III ix 26), as it was done in the story after denying all that was other than man. And similar are the texts, "Without interior or exterior" (Br.II.v.I9, III.vll1 8), "This Self, the perceiver of everything, is Brahman. This is the teaching" (Br II v 19), "Thou art That" (Ch VI.vin-xvi), "But when to the knower of Brahman, everything has become the Self, what should one see and through what?" (Br II.iv.I4, IV v.I5); and there are still others.

As long as one does not realise thus this Self that has been described, so long does one accept the lımit- ing adjunct1 possessed of the external and impermanent vision as one's Self, and considering through ignorance the attributes of the limiting adjuncts as one's own. one transmigrates under the influence of ignorance, desire, and action, by rotating again and again through the regions of the gods, animals, and men, that range from Brahma to a clump of grass. While transmi- grating thus, one rejects the body assumed earlier, and giving it up, accepts another. In the course of show- ing what states one experiences as one continues thus without a break in the current of birth and death, as though in a river, the Upanisad says with a view to generating detachment:

ॐ पुरुषे ह वा अयमादितो गर्भो भवति यदेतद्रेतः।

1 The mind whose vision is identical with itself and is external to the Self

56 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.i. r

तद्यदा स्त्रियां सिश्चत्यथैनजनयति तदस्य प्रथमं जन्म ।।१॥ I. In man indeed is the soul first conceived. That which is the semen, is extracted from all the limbs as their vigour. He holds that self of his in his own self. When he sheds it into his wife,. then he procreates it. That is its first birth. This very man performs such karmas as sacrifice etc. owing to his self-identification with ignorance, desire, and action, then he reaches the lunar region after passing from this world through smoke and the rest in succession, and then, when the fruits of hıs action become exhausted, he reaches this world to become food after passing in succession through rain etc .; then he is poured as a libation in the fire that is man. Puruse ha vat, in that man indeed; ayam, that, transmigrating soul; adtah garbhah bhavati, is first conceived, in the form of semen after passing through the juice of food etc. This is being stated by sayıng that he takes birth in that form in the text: "Yat etat retah." Yat etat retah, that which is this semen; sambhutam, is accomplished, (extracted); as tejas, vigour, essence, of the body; sarvebhyah angebhyah, from all the limbs, from all the component parts, such as the juice, of the body that is the product of food. Being identified with the man himself this (semen) 1s called his self. He bibhartı, bears; that atmanam, self that has been concerved in the form of semen; ātmani eva, in his own self :- (in other words) he holds his own self (the semen) in his own body. Yadā,

II 1 2] AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 57

when-when his wife is in the proper state, he sincati, sheds, while in union, tat, that semen, striyam, in the wife-in the fire of the woman, atha, then, the father, janayati, procreates, enat, this one- that was conceived by him as identified with himself Asya, of that transmigrating soul; tat, that, that issuing eut of its own place, in the form of semen, when it is being poured out; is the prathamam anma, the first birth- the first manifested state. This fact was stated earlier by the text, "This self (that is the man), (offers) this self of his (that is the semen), to that seif of his (that is the wife) "

तत्स्त्रिया आत्मभूयं गच्छति यथा स्वमङ्गं तथा। तस्मादेनां न हिनस्ति। साऽस्यतमात्मानमन्र गत भावयति॥२।।

2. That becomes non-different from the wife, just as much as her own limb is. Therefore (the foetus) does not hurt her. She nourishes this self of his that has entered here (ın her womb). Tat that, the semen; gacchati, becomes, atma- bhuyam, nondifferent-from the wife into whom it is shed; yatha svam angam tatha, just like her own lımb-her breast etc -as it was in the case of the father. Tasmat, because of this fact, the foetus na hinastı, does not hurt-like a boil, enam, this one-the mother Since it has become a part of herself just like her breast etc, therefore it does ^not hurt her, this is the idea. Sa, she, that pregnant woman,

58 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.i. 3

understandıng etam ätmanam, this self, of her husband; atra gatam, as having entered here-into her womb; bhavayati, nourishes, protects it-by avoiding the food etc. that are injurious to the foetus and by accepting such food etc. as are favourable to it. सा भावयित्री भाषयितव्या भवति। तं स्त्री गर्भं बिभर्ति। सोऽग्र एव कुमारं जन्मनोऽय्रेऽधिभावयति। स यत्कुमारं जन्मनोडग्रेSधिभावयत्यात्मानमेव तद्गावय- त्येषां लोकानां सन्तत्या। एवं सन्तता हीमे लोकास्तदस्य द्वितीयं जन्म ॥३॥ 3. She, the nourisher, becomes fit to be nourished. The wife bears that embryo (before the birth). He (the father) protects the son at the very start, soon after his birth. That he protects the son at the very beginning, just after birth, thereby he protects his own self for the sake of the continuance of these worlds. For thus is the continuance of these worlds ensured. That is his second birth. Sa, she; the bhāvayitri, nourisher, of the self of her husband, conceived in her womb; bhāvayıtavyā bhavati, becomes fit to be nourished, to be protected, by the husband; for no one can have any relation with another unless it be through reciprocity of benefit. Stri, the wife; bibharti, bears; tam garbham, that foetus, by following the method of protecting the foetus mentioned earlier; agre, before its birth. Sah, he, the father; bhāvayati, protects; kumāram, the son; agre eva, at the very start, as soon as he is born;

II 1 4] AITAREYA UPANISAD 59

ganmanah adhi, after the birth; through natal rites etc Yat, that, sah, he, the father, bhāvayat, protects, the kumāram, son, agre janmanah adhi, at the very start, just after the birth, through natal rites etc ; tat, there- by, he bhāvayatı ātmānam eva, protects his own self. For it is the father's self that takes birth as the son. And so it has been said, "The husband enters into the wife" (Harı.III lxxni.3I) Now is being stated why the father protects himself after being born as the son: esām lokānām santatyar, for the continuance of these worlds, i e. for their non-stoppage For these worlds will cease to continue if everyone should stop procreat- ing sons etc The idea is this Since these worlds thus continue to flow like a current through the continuity of such acts as the begetting of sons, there- fore these acts should be undertaken for the non- stoppage of the worlds, bui not so for the sake of eman- cipation. Tat, that fact, the issuing out; asya, of hım, of the transmigrating soul, as a son from the mother's womb, is the dvitiyam janma, second birth the manifestation of the second state, relatvely to his form as semen.

सोऽस्यायमात्मा पुण्येभ्यः कर्मस्यः प्रतिधीयते। अथास्यायमितर आत्मा कृतकृत्यो वयोगतः प्रति। स इतः प्रयन्नेव पुनर्जायते तदस्य तृतीयं जन्म ॥।४।। 4. This self of his (viz the son) is substituted (by the father) for the performance of virtuous deeds. Then this other self of his (that is the father of the son), having got his duties ended and having advanced in age, departs. As soon

60 EIGHT UPANISADS [II.1. 4

as he departs, he takes birth again. That is his (1.e. the son's) third birth. Sah ayam ātmā, that self, that is the son, asya, of his, of the father, punyebhyah karmabhyah, for the performance of virtuous deeds, as prescribed by the scriptures, pratidhiyate, is substituted, by the father, in his own place, for the accomplishment of all thar was the father's duty. Sımilarly it is seen in the Väjasaneyaka, in the portion dealing with the substitu- tion (of the son), that on being instructed by the father, the son admits thus. "I am Brahman (1 e. the Vedas), I am the sacrifice"1 (Br.I.v.17). Atha, after that, after the father's responsibilty has been entrusted to the son, ayam itarah atmā, this other self, that is the father; asya, of this one, of the son; krtakrtyah, becoming freed from duties, from the three debts (to gods, to seers, and to Manes)-having all his duties fulfilled, vayogatah, having advanced in age, being afflicted with decrepitude; praiti, dies. Sah itah prayan eva, as soon as he departs from here, no sooner does he leave the body than; he punah jāyate, takes birth again; by adopting another body according to the results of his actions (by moving from one body to the other) just like a leech. Tat, that, the birth that he gets after death; is asya, his; trtiyam janma, third birth.

1 The father's idea is this "Let the study of the Vedas (Brahman) which so long was my duty, devolve on you, for you are Brahman Similarly whatever sacrifices there are, that were to be performed by me, be henceforth performed by you, for you are the sacrifices" All this the son accepts (See Sankara's commentary on the passage)

II 1 5] AITAREYA UPANISAD 6I

Obiection Is it not a fact that for the trans- migrating soul the first birth is in the form of semen from the father? And his second birth has been stated to be as a son from the mother The turn now being for stating the third birth of that very soul (which became the son), why is the birth of the dead father enumerated as the third? Answer That is not wrong. for the intention is to speak of the identity of the father and the son. That son. too, just like his father, entrusts his res- ponsibility to bis son (in his own turn) and then departing from here takes birth immediately after. The Upamisad thinks that this fact which is stated with regard to another (viz the father) is implied here (with regard to the son) also, for the father and the son have the same self.

तटुक्तमृषिणा गर्भे नु सन्नन्वेषामवेद- महं देवानां जनिमानि विश्वा शतं मा पुर आयसीररक्ष न्नधः श्येनो जवसा निरदीयमिति। गर्भ पवैतच्छयानो वामदेव एवमुवाच।।५।। 5. This fact was stated by the seer (i.e. mantra): "Even while lying in the womb, I came to know of the birth of all the gods. A hundred iron citadels held me down. Then, like a hawk, I forced my way through by dint of knowledge of the Self." Vamadeva said this while still lying in his mother's womb.

62 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.1. 5

Transmigrating in this way, ever involved in the chain of birth and death through the manifestation of the three states, everyone remains merged in the ocean of this world. If he ever succeeds somehow, in any of the states, to realise the Self as revealed in the Vedas, he becomes freed then and there from all worldly bondages and gets all his duties fulfilled. The Upanisad says that tat, this fact; uktam, was declared, rsınā, by the seer, by the (tollowing) mantra; also: "Garbhe nu san, while still in the womb, of my mother. The (indeclinable) word nu imples deliberation. By virtue of the fruition of my meditations in many previous births, aham, I; anvavedam, knew, had the knowledge of, viśvā animāni, all the births; esām devānām, of these gods-of Speech, Fire, etc. What a good luck! Satam, a hundred, many; āyasīh (or rather āyasyaḥ) purah, citadels made of iron, that is to say impene- trable bodies as though made of iron; araksan mā, kept me guarded; adhah, in the lower worlds; guarded me from getting freed from the meshes of the world. (Or adhah, later on);1 śyenaḥ, like a hawk; javasā, forcefully, through the power generated by the knowl- edge of the Self; niradiyam, I came out, by tearing through the net. O the wonder!" Vāmadevah, Vāmadeva, the seer; garbhe eva śayānah, while still lying in the womb; uvāca, said; etat, this; evam, in this way.

1 Ananda Giri gives these two alternative explanations of the word adhan occurring in the commentary. There are two readings, Adho'dhah and Adho'tha.

IIi 6] AITAREYA UPANISAD 63

स एवं विद्वानस्माच्छरीरभेदादूर्ध्व उत्क्रभ्यामुष्मिन स्वर्गे लोके सर्वान् कामानाप्त्वाऽमृतः समभवत् समभवत् ॥६॥। इत्यैतरेयोपनिषदि द्वितीयोऽध्यायः॥

6. He who had known thus (had) become Identified with the Supreme, and attained all desirable things (even here); and having (then) ascended higher up after the destruction of the body, he became immortal, in the world of the Selt. He became immortal.

Sah, he, the seer Vamadeva; evam vidvan, having known thus, the Self as spoken of earlier; became urdhvah, uplfted, identified with the supreme Self, and asmāt sarirabhedāt, after the destruction of this body-of this body that is conjured up by igno- rance, that is impenetrable like iron; on the dissolution of the succession of bodies-subject to many evils con- sisting in birth, death, etc .- through the power gen- erated by the tasting of the knowledge of the supreme Self, that is to say, on the destruction of the body following the destruction of such causes as ignorance that are the seeds of the creation of the body; he urdhvah (san), having already become identified with the supreme Self; (then) utkramya, having ascended higher up as compared with the lowly worldly state, becoming established in the state of the pure, all- pervasıve Self, shining with knowledge, amusmin, mn that Reality, which was described as ageless, death- less, immortal, fearless, and omniscient, which has no

64 EIGHT UPANISADS [II.i. 6

cause or effect, inside or outside, which is of the nature of the unalloyed nectar of consciousness; he became merged like the blowing out of a lamp. He samabhavat, became; amrtah, immortal; svarge loke, in his own Self, in hıs own reality; sarvān kāmān āptvā, after the attainment of all desires; that is to say, atter having got all the desirable things, even earlier (when still living), by virtue of his becoming desireless through the knowledge of the Self. The repetition in "he became" is to show the end of the knowledge of the Self together with its fruit and its illustration.

PART III

CHAPTER I

There are Brahmanas of modern times who crave for emancipation hanker after the knowledge of Brahman, and realise that the achievement of iden- tity with the Self of all follows from its (own) means, viz the knowledge of Brahman, as revealed by the Vedas through the succession of teachers like Vamadeva and well known in the councils of the knowers of Brahman. These Brahmanas of modern times become desirous of desisting from the imperma- nent world of ends and means, inclusive of being borm as a limited soul; and with a view to this they ask each other thus, while engaged in deliberation: "Kah ayam atma etc -what is It that we worship as this Self?" How do they ask?

ॐ कोऽयमात्मेति धयमुपास्महे कतरः स आत्मा। येन वा पश्यति येन वा शणोति येन वा गन्धानाजिघ्रति येन घा चाचं व्याकरोति येन घा स्वादु चास्वादु च विजानाति ॥१। I. What is It that we worship as this Self? Which of the two is the Self? Is It that by which one sees, or that by which one hears, or that by which one smells odour, or that by which one utters speech, or that by which one tastes the sweet or the sour ? 5

66 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III.i. I

The Self which vayam upasmahe, we worship; directly ayam ātmā iti, as this Self, kah, what, is It? And we worship that very Self, by meditating on which directly as "This is the Self", Vāmadeva be- came immortal. What, indeed, is that Self? When they were thus questioning each other with such eagerness to know, then from the Vedic texts, "Brahman1 entered into this person through the two ends of the feet", and "Having split up this end, He entered through this door" (A1. II. i. I2), called up by the mental impression created (in the past) as a result of hearing (the Vedas), there flashed in their minds the fact, "Two Brahmans entered from opposite sides And these two are the souls in this body. One of these selves is fit to be worshipped." While still engaged in discussion, they again asked each other with a view to determining clearly the Self that was to be worshipped out of the two. As they were discussing, there arose in them another thought regarding the one that should be the object of close enquiry. How? Two entities are perceived in this body: One is the instrument, diversified into many forms, through which one perceives; and the other is the perceiver, inferable from the fact of the occurrence of recognition through memory of what was perceived with a different sense.2 Of these two,

• Präna, the inferior Brahman. 2 A man, with eyes plucked out, remembers the colour he had perceived before with his eyes. "I who saw before am hearing now" So also he thinks, This is impossible unless the perceiver is one in the different situations.

III i. 2] AITAREYA UPANISAD 67

the one through which one perceives cannot be the Self Through what, again, does one perceive? That is being stated: Yena vā paśyati, that by which, transformed as eye, one sees colour; yena vā, that by which, transformed as ear, śrnoti, one hears sound, yena va, that by which, transformed as the sense of smell, anghrati gandhan, one smells the odours; yena va, that by which, transformed as the organ of speech, one vyākaroti vācam, utters speech, consisting of names, such as cow, horse, etc., and good, bad, etc., yena va, that by which, transformed as the sense of taste, vijānātı, one perceives svādu ca asvadu ca, the sweet and the sour (tastes)

Which again, is that one organ that has become diversely differentiated? That is being answered: .

यदेतद्धदयं मनश्चैतत्। संज्ञानमाक्षानं विज्ञानं प्ज्ञानं मेधा दृष्टिर्धुतिर्मतिर्मनीपा जूतिः स्मृतिः संकल्पः क्रतुरसुः कामो वश इति। सर्वाण्येवैतानि प्रज्ञानस्य नामधेयानि

भवन्ति ॥२। 2. It is this heart (intellect) and this mind that were stated earlier. It is sentience, ruler- ship, secular knowledge, presence of mind, retentiveness, sense-perception, fortitude, think- ing, genius, mental suffering, memory, ascertain- ment, resolution, life-activities, hankering, passion, and such others. All these verily are the names of Consciousness.

68 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III.1. 2

Etat, it Is; hrdayam manah ca, the heart and mind,1 yat, that, were spoken of earlier, in "The essence (i.e. the product) of all beings is the heart; the essence of the heart is the mind; by the mind was created water and Varuna; from the heart came the mind; and from the mind Moon". That very thing, that is but one, has become multiformed. Through this single internal organ, as transformed into the eye, one sees colour; through this, trans- formed into ear, one hears; through this, transformed into the sense of smell, one smells; through this, trans- formed into the sense of taste, one tastes; through this very one, in its aspect as the organ of deliberation, one deliberates, and in its aspect as the heart (1.e. the intellect), one decides. Therefore this is the one single organ which acts with regard to all objects of the senses, so that the perceiver may perceive everything. Similar is the text of the Kausītakī Upanisad: "Be- coming identified with the organ of speech through the intellect (as reflecting the consciousness of the Self), the Self reaches (i.e. becomes identified with) the names2 etc." (III. 6). And in the Vājasaneyaka occur these: "It is through the mind that one hears"

1 The entity you asked about is the same as was referred to earler as the heart (i e. intellect), or the mind This entity is the vital force that assumes various aspects. It entered through the tip of the feet, whereas Brahman entered through the crown of the head. 2 The intellcct becomes transformed into the organ of speech, and speech into words The Self, too, through super- imposed self-identification, seems to assume those forms, though It still remains as their illuminator.

III.1. 2] AITAREYA CPANISAD 69

(Br. I v. 3), "for one knows colours through the heart" (Br. III 1x. 19), etc Accordingly, the entity that is called the heart and the mind is well known as the agent producing perception. And the vital force (Prana) consists of these two, for there occurs the brahmana text: "That which is the vital force is the intellect, that which is the intellect is the vital force" (Kau III 3). And we said in the texts dealing with the conversations with the vital force and so on (Br I. ui, VI. 1. 7-14, Pr II.) that the vital force is in essence a combination of the organs. Therefore, the entity, (in the form of which) Brahman entered through the feet, cannot be the Self to be worshipped, since it is a subsidiary thing, being an instrument of perception for the perceiver. As a last resort, they arrived at this certitude: "That witnessing Self is worthy of worship by us, for whose perception the functions of this instrument, in its aspects as the heart and the mind, are being stated." The functions of that inner organ-with regard to internal and external objects that take place for bearing witness to the witnessing Brahman1 that exists in the midst of Its limiting adjunct, the internal organ, and that is consciousness by nature, are (these that are) being enumerated: Samjñanam, sentience, the state of consciousness; ajñanam, rulership, the state of lordlıness; vyñānam, (secular) knowledge of arts etc .; prañanam, presence of mind; medha, abilty to 1 Brahman cannot be perceived since It is not an object of cognition, and It is attributeless Stall, without being objectified, It is perceivable as the witness of mental states. -- A G

70 EIGHT UPANISADS [III.i. 2

understand and retain the purport of books; drstih, perception, of all objects through the senses; dhrtih, fortitude, by which the drooping body and senses are buoyed up-for they say, "By fortitude they buoyed up the body"; matıh, thınking; manīsā, independent thinking (genius); jutih, mental suffering, owing to disease etc .; smrtih, memory; samkalpah, ascertain- ing, of colours etc. as white, black etc .; kratuh, reso- lution; asuh, any function calculated to sustain life's activity, such as breathing etc .; kāmah, desire for a remote object, hankering: vaśah, passion for the com- pany of women; iti, etc., and other functions of the inner organ. Since these are the means for the per- ception of the witness who is mere Consciousness, they are the limiting adjuncts of Brahman that is pure Consciousness, and therefore samjñana etc. become the names of Brahman. Sarvāni eva etāni, all these verily; bhavantı, become; māmadheyāni, the indirect names; prajñānasya, of Consciousness, but not so naturally and directly. And so it has been said, "When It does the function of living, It is called the vital force" (Br. I. iv. 7) etc.

एष ब्रह्मेष इन्द्र एष प्रजापतिरेते सर्वे देवा इमानि व पश्च महाभूतानि पृथिवी घायुराकाश आपो ज्योतींषी- त्येतानीमानि व क्षुद्रमिश्राणीष। बीजानीतराणि चेतराणि चाण्डजानि च आरुजानि व स्वेदजानि चोद्विजानि चाश्वा गावः पुरुषा हस्तिनो यत्किचेदं प्राणि जङ्गमं व पतत्रि व

III1 3] AITAREYA UPANISAD 7I

यच्च स्थावरं सर्व तत्प्रज्ञानेत्रम् प्रज्ञाने प्रतिष्ठितं प्रशनित्रो लोक: प्रज्ञा प्रतिष्ठा प्रज्ञानं ब्रह्म ॥३॥ 3. This One is (the inferior) Brahman; this is Indra, this is Prajapati; this is all these gods; and this is these five elements, viz earth, air, -space, water, fire; and this is all these (big creatures), together with the small ones, that are the procreators of others and referable in pairs- to wit, those that are born of eggs, of wombs, of moisture, of the earth, viz horses, cattle, men, elephants, and all the creatures that there are which move or fly and those which do not move. All these have Consciousness as the giver of their reality; all these are impelled by Conscious- ness; The universe has Consciousness as its eye, and Consciousness is its end. Consiousness is Brahman.

Esah, this One, the Self which is essentially Consciousness; is brahma, Brahman, the inferior one (who is Hiranyagarbha and) who as the vital force (possessed of the power of action) and the conscious soul (possessed of the power of knowledge) exists in (the sum total of) all the bodies (1 e in the cosmic gross body) after having entered into all the limiting ad- juncts of the internal organs (1 e. into the cosmic subtle body) like the reflection of the sun on diverse waters. He is the power of action and knowledge (in the individual) Esah, this One; is verily indrah, Indra, who is called so because He possesses the qualities (mentioned earlier in Ai. I iii 13-14); or

72 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III.i. 3

"Indra" means the lord of the gods. Esah, this One; is prajāpatih, Prajāpati (Virāt) who is the first embodied Being.1 That Prajäpati, from whom the presiding deities of the organs, viz Fire and others, were born after the formation of the cavity of the mouth etc., is verily this One. And ete sarve devah, all these gods. viz Fire and others, that there are, are but this One; ca, and; ımām panca mahābhūtām, these five great elements; viz etani, these-starting with earth-that are the materials of all the bodies and that constitute the foods and the eaters; ca iman, moreover these also, e.g. snakes etc. that are ksudra-misrani iva, mixed with small creatures, the word iva being meaningless; and that are bijani, the seeds, causes (of others); ca itarānı itarāni, as well as those others and others, that are mentionable in pairs (e.g. the moving and the stationary). Which are they? They are being enumerated: Andajāni, born of eggs- birds and others; jarujani, born of wombs-men and others; svedajāni, born of moisture-lice etc .; udbhij- jāni, born of earth-e.g. trees etc .; aśvāh, horses; gāvah, cattle; purusah, human beings; hastinah, elephants; and yat kim ca idam, and whatever living creature there may be. Which are they? Whichever is jangamam, moving on feet; and whichever is patatri, flying in the sky; and whatever is sthāvaram, motion- less. All that is but this One. Tat sarvam, all that, without exception, is prajñanetram, made to exist by Consciousness, (the phrase being derived thus): Prajna is Consciousness that is the same as Brahman: 1 Hiranyagarbha identifies Himself with the cosmic subtle body, but Virat with the cosmic gross body.

III i. 3] AITAREYA UPANISAD 73

netra is that by which one is dowered with substance, or that by which one is impelled (to one's natural activity), therefore that which has Consciousness as the giver of its substance or impeller is prajñanetra Prajnane pratisthitam, on Consciousness it is establish- ed, that is to say, it is supported by Brahman during creation, existence, and dissolution The sentence "pramanetrah lokah, the universe has Consciousness as its impeller", is to be understood as before; or the meaning is that all the universe has got Consciousness as its netra, eye (1 e. the source of revelation) Prajña, Consciousness; is pratistha, the suppert, of the whole universe.1 Therefore pramanam brahma, Consciousness is Brahman That Entity, thus dealt with, when freed from all distinctions created by the limiting adjuncts, is without stain, without taint, without action, quiescent, one without a second, "Not this, not this" (Br.III.1x.26), to be known by the elimination of all attributes, and beyond all words and thoughts. That very Entity that is God, the omniscient, and the ordainer of the common seed of all the unmanifested universe- assumes the name of antaryāmi (the Inner Controller) by virtue of guiding. That Entity Itself assumes the name of Hiranyagarbha, identifying Hmself with (cosmic) intelligence that is the seed of the unmanifested

1 Consciousness is self-revealing and is not dependent on any other factor for the revelation of Itself or of others Or the sentence may mean that Consciousness i3 the one reality :n which all phenomenal things end, just as the superimposed snake etc end in their bases, the rope etc, after the dawn of know ledge

74 EIGHT UPANISADS [III.i. 3

world. That Entity Itself gets the name of Virat, that is Prajäpati, by assuming as His limiting adjunct the (gross, cosmic) body that is born first within the cosmic egg; and It becomes known by the names of the (cosmic) deities such as Fire and others, who originate from that egg. Sımilarly, Brahman gets the respective names and forms as conditioned by the divergent bodies, ranging from that of Brahma to that of a clump of grass. It is the same entity that has become diversified under all the conditions and is known in every way and is thought of multifariously by all creatures as well as the logicians. "Some call this very Entity Fire, some call It Manu, and some Prajāpatı. Some call It Indra, while others call It Prāna (vital force), and still others the eternal Brahman" etc. (Manu XII.I23).

लोके सर्वान् कामानाप्त्वाSमृतः समभवत् समभवल्॥४॥ इत्यैतरेयोपनिषदि तृतीयोऽध्यायः॥ 4. Through this Self that is Consciousness, he ascended higher up from this world, and getting all desires fulfilled in that heavenly world,s he became immortal, he became immortal. Sah, he, Vämadeva or somebody else; knew thus the Brahman as described; through the Self that is Consciousness-through that very conscious Self by which the seers of old became immortal. Similarly, this one, too, etena prañena atmana, through (i.e. in identification with) this (very) Self that is Conscious- ness; asmāt lokāt utkramya, ascending higher up from

III i 4] AITAREYA UPANIŞAD 75

this world. The portion starting from here was explained before (A1 II.1.6). Ascending higher up from thıs world and sarvān kāmān aptvā, attaining all the desires; amusmin svarge loke, in that heavenly world; (he) samabhavat, became, amrtah, immortal; sama- bhavat, (he) became (immortal). Om.

ॐ वाङमे मनसि प्रतिष्ठिता मनो मे वाचि प्रतिष्ठित- माविरावीर्म एधि वेदस्य म आणीस्थः श्रुतं मे मा प्रहासीरनेनाधी तेनाहोरान्नान् संदधाम्युतं वदिष्यामि सत्यं वदिष्यामि तन्मामधतु तद्वक्तारमवत्ववतु मामवतु वक्तारमवतु घक्तारम्॥

ॐ शान्तिः शान्ति: शान्ति:।

MUNDAKA UPANISAD

ॐ भद्रं कर्णेभि: शणुयाम देवा भद्रं पश्येमाक्षभियजन्राः ।

व्यशेम देघहितं यदायुः॥ स्वस्ति न इन्द्रो वृद्धभ्रघा: स्वस्ति नः पूषा विश्ववेदाः। स्वस्ति नस्ताक्ष्यो अरिष्टनेमि: स्वस्ति नो बृहस्पतिदधातु॥ ॐ शान्तिः शान्तिः शान्ति:।।

Om ! O gods, may we hear auspicious words with the ears; while engaged in sacrifices, may we see auspicious things with the eyes; while praising the gods with steady limbs, may we enjoy a life that is beneficial to the gods. May Indra of ancient fame be auspicious to us; may the supremely rich (or all-knowing) Pūșā (god of the earth) be propitious to us; may Garuda, the destroyer of evil, be well disposed towards us; may Brhaspati ensure our welfare. Om ! Peace! Peace! Peace !

MUŅDAKA UPANIŞAD FIRST MUNDAKA

CANTO I

Introduction. The Upansad, commencing with "Om brahmā devānām" etc belongs to the Atharva- Veda, (and it is being explaned). By way of eulogy, the Upansad itself reveals at the very beginning the connection, forged by a succession of teachers of the knowledge, that this Upanisad has (with the knowl- edge of Brahman) Thus with a view to arousing the interest of the hearers, the knowledge itself is being extolled by showing that this knowiedge, that is a means for the highest human goal, was acquired with strenuous effort by great people. For when this knowiedge is made attractive by praise, they will engage in it. As to how this knowledge is relaied to its purpose (or goal) like a means to its end, will be spcken later on in "the knot of the heart gets untied" etc.1 (Mu.II.11.8). And here, too, the Upanisad itself first distinguishes between the superior and inferior knowledge and then, through the text beginning with "remaining within the fold of ignorance" etc. (Mu I.ii 8), declares that the knowledge, called the inferior one, comprising the Rg-Veda etc. and devoted merely to injunction and prohibition, does not possess the power of removing the defects of ignorance etc

• The purpose of the knowledge being shown thus, the purpose of the Upanisad is shown par passu

80 EIGHT UPANIȘADS

that are the causes of the worldly state; and then in the text beginning with "After examining the worlds" etc. (Mu.I 1i.12), it speaks of the knowledge of Brahman that is the means for the highest goal and is achievable through the grace of the teacher after renouncing every- thing, whether it be an end or means. And of the purpose (i.e. the goal aimed at) it speaks more than once thus: "Anyone who knows Brahman hrcomes Brahman" (Mu.III.1i.9), and "Having become identifi- ed with the supreme immortality, they become freed on every side" (Mu.III.ii.6). And by mentioning "while begging for alms" (Mu.I.ii.II), and "with the Yoga of monasticism" (Mu III.i1.6), the Upanısad shows that though people in all stages of life have a nght to knowledge as such,1 still the knowledge of Brahman, founded on monasticism only, and not as associated with karma, is the means for emancipation. And this follows from the opposition between knowledge and karma; not even in dream can karma proceed side by side with the vision of the identity of the Self and Brahman. Knowledge brooks no temporal limitation, as it has no association with any time and is not depen- dent on definite causes. As for the indrect indications (suggesting that knowledge and karma can co-exist), to wit, the fact that among the householders are found some with whom started the traditional lines of the knowers of Brahman,2 that cannot override the established rule.

1 According to the injunction "The Vedas are to be studied," the three higher castes have a right to read the Upanisads and grasp their meaning .- A.G. 2 See Muņdaka, I i. I-3.

MUNDAKA UPANISAD 8I

For when even by a hundred injuncuions cannot be brought about the co-existence of light and darkness, :nuch less can it be done so by mere indications. Of the Upanisad, whose connection and goal have thus been shown, a brief explanation is begun This ıs called Upanısad, because it mitigates (misātayatt) sich numerous evils as birth, old age, disease, etc, for those who approach this knowledge of Brahman with loving eagerness, or it is called so, since it leads to the supreme Brahman, and completely weakens or destroys (cvasadayatı) the ignorance etc, that are the causes of the world, for traditionally, the meaning of the root sad, preceded by upa and ni, is shown to be so.

ॐ ब्रह्मा देवानां प्रथम: संबभूव विश्वस्य कर्ता भुवनस्य गोप्ता। स ब्रह्मविद्यां सवविद्याप्रतिष्ठा- मथर्वाय ज्येष्ठपुत्राय प्राह ॥१॥ I. Om ! Brahma, the creator of the universe and the protector of the world, was the first among the gods to manifest Himself To His eldest son Atharva He imparted that knowledge of Brahman that is the basis of all knowledge. The word brahma means One who is all-surpassing, great, i.e. excels all others in virtue, knowledge, detach- ment, and splendour, (He) prathamah (san), as the foremost in quality, or the first in precedence; devanam, among the shmning ones, such as Indra and others, sambabhuva, became pertectly manifest, that is to say, He was born independently, unlike other 6

82 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.1. I

worldly creatures who take birth under the impulsion of virtue and vice. This agrees with the Smrta, "He that is super-sensuous, and cannot be grasped, (subtle, unmanifested, eternal, existing in all beings, and beyond thought-is this One who was born indepen- dently)" (Manu, I.7). Kartā, the creator, visvasya, of the whole universe, gopta, the protector; bhuvanasya, of the world, after it is created. This descripuon of Brahmã is meant as a eulogy of the knowledge (in this way): Sah, He, Brahma, whose fame is so well known; (praha, imparted), the brahmavidyam. the vidyā or knowledge of Brahman, the supreme Self, is the brahmavidyā, for it relates to the supreme Self, inasmuch as it is described as "that by which one realises the true and immutable Purusa" (Mu.I.i1.I3); or it is called brahmavidya, because the knowledge was imparted by Brahma, the First Born. (He imparted) that knowledge that is sarvavidyā-pratiş- tham, the support of all kinds of knowledge, since it is the source of them all, or since through it alone is known the Reality that all kinds of knowledge aim at, in accordance with the Vedic text, "That by which all that cannot be heard becomes heard, all that is un- thinkable becomes thought of, all that is unknowable becomes known" (Ch.VI.i 3) By the phrase "basis of all kinds of knowledge" the knowledge is again being praised. (He) praha, imparted, that knowledge; atharvāya ryesthaputraya, to Atharva, His eldest son. He is the eldest and he is also one among the sons of Brahmā. Atharvā is the eldest in the sense that he was born at the beginning of one of the many cycles of Brahma's creation. To that eldest son He said.

Il 2] MUNDAKA UPANISAD 83

अथर्वणे यां प्रवदेत ब्रह्माS- थर्वा तां वुरोवाचाडिरे ब्रह्मषिद्याम्। स भारद्वाजाय सत्यवहाय प्राह भारद्वाजोऽड्िरसे परावराम् ॥२।।

2. The knowledge of Brahman that Brahma imparted to Atharvā, Atharvā transmit- ted to Angir in days of yore. Angir passed it on to Satyavaha of the line of Bharadvaja. He of the line of Bharadvaja handed down to Angiras this knowledge that had been received in succession from the higher by the lower ones.

Yam Brahmavıdyam, that knowledge of Biahman, which, brahma, Brahmā, pravadeta, said, atharvane, to Atharva, tam, that very knowledge, received from Brahmā, atharvā, Atharvā, purī, in days of vore, uvaca, said, angire, to one named Angir And sah, he, Angır, prāha, said, satyavahāya bhāradvājāya, to one named Satyavaha of the line of Bharadvāja Bharadoojah, he of the line of Bharadvaja, (imparted) angirase, to Angiras, who was either his son or disciple, parāvarām, (the knowledge) that had been receved from the higher (para) by the lower (avara) in succes- s.on,1 or it is so called because it permeatcs all things that come within the scope of the higher (para) or lower (avara) knowledge He imparted to Angiras this knowledge that had been received from the higher by the lower in succession, the verb 'imparted" being understood 11.e it ran through a line of masters and disciples

8.4 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.1. 3

शौनको ह वै महाशालोऽङ्गिरसं विधिवदुपसन्नः पप्रच्छ। कस्मिन्नु भगवो विज्ञाते सर्वमिदं विज्ञातं भवतीति॥३। 3. Śaunaka, well known as a great house- holder, having approached Angiras duly, asked, "O adorable sir, (which is that thing) which having been known, all this becomes known?" Šaunakah, the son of Śunaka; mahāśālah, a great householder, upasannah (san), having approached, uidhivat, duly, that is to say, in accordance with the scriptures, the teacher angirasam, Angiras, disciple of Bharadvāja, papraccha, asked. From the use of the adverb "duly" from the time of contact between Saunaka and Angiras, t is understood that for their predecessors there was no established rule about the method of approach. The adverb is used by way of delimitation, or it is used on the analogy of a lamp placed in a house,1 for the rule regarding the manner of approach is intended for us as well. What (did he ask)? That is being stated: "Bhagavah, kasmin nu urñāte, O adorable sir, (which is that thing) which having been known indeed; sarvam idam, all that there is, that is to be known; bhavatı, becomes; vijñātam, well known?" The particle nu is used to express reflection. Saunaka had heard the traditional utterance of the good people that there is something by knowing which one becomes omniscient. Being desirous of 1 The lamp placed in a house illuminates the inside as well as the outside. The rule may thus relate both to those who preceded and succeeded Angiras and Saunaka.

I1 4] MUNDAKA UPANISAD 85

knowing that thing specifically, he asks thoughtfully, 'which indeed'" Or by following the commonsense view, he puts this question knowingly. "There are in the world vanieties of pieces of gold etc which are known by ordinary people from the recognised fact of the material unity of the gold etc Similarly does there exist a single (substance that is the) cause cf the whole universe of diversity, by knowing which all things become known?" Objection The question with the word "which"' is improper with regard to an unknown thing In that case the reasonable form of the question is. "Does such a thing exist?" "Which" can occur only when the existence is already established, as in, "Into which is it to be deposited'" Answer. No, for the question, "Which is that thing which having been known, one becomcs all- knowing?" is admissible from the standpoint of avoid- ing trouble arisıng from verbosity

तस्मैस होषाच। द्वे विद्ये वेदितव्ये इति ह स्म यदुब्रह्मविदो वदन्ति परा चैधापरा च ॥४॥

of knowledge to be acquired-the higher and the 4. To him he said, "'There are two kinds

lower', this is what, as tradition runs, the knowers of the import of the Vedas say." Tasmai, to hım, to Saunaka, sah, he, Angiras, scaca ha, did say What did he say' That is being stated "'Dve iidye veditavye, two kinds of knowl- edge are to be acquired'-itı, this, is, ha sma, as the tradition goes, yat, what, brahmavidah the knowers

86 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.i 4

of the import of the Vedas, those who have realised the supreme Truth, vadantı, say " Which are the two? That is being said "Para ca, the higher, the knowledge of the supreme Self; apara ca, and the lower, the knowledge of virtue and vice and their means and ends." Objection: The question put by Saunaka was, "Which is it which having been known one becomes all-knowing?" The answer should have related to that, whereas Angiras says in his answer, "There are two kinds of knowledge" etc -something beside the question Answer: That is nothing wrong, for the answer requires an order of procedure For the lower knowl- edge is ignorance which has to be eradicated, inasmuch as nothing in reality is known by knowing the objects of ignorance, and the rule is that the conclusion should be stated after refuting the faulty standpoints.

Of these, which is the lower knowledge? The answer is:

तत्रापरा ऋग्वेदो यजुर्वेद: सामवेदोऽथर्ववेद: शिक्षा कल्पो व्याकरणं निरुक्तं छन्दो ज्योतिषमिति। अथ परा यया तदक्षरमघिगम्यते॥५॥ 5. Of these, the lower comprises the Rg- Veda, Yajur-Veda, Sāma-Veda, Atharva-Veda, the science of pronunciation etc., the code of rituals, grammar, etymology, metre, and astrol- ogy. Then there is the higher (knowledge) by which is realised that Immutable.

Ii. 5] MUNDAKA UPANISAD

Rg-Veda, Yajur-Veda, Sāma-Veda, Atharva-Veda -these are the four Vedas. Siksa, the science of pro- nunciation etc ; kalpah, the code of rituals, vyākara- nam, grammar, miruktam, etymology, chandah, metre; jyotisam, astrology,-these are the six auxiliary parts (of the Vedas). These constitute the apara (lower) knowledge Atha, now is being stated; the para, higher, knowledge: yaya, by which, tat, that; aksaram, the Immutable, whose attributes will be stated hereafter, adhigamyate, is attained; for (the root) gam, preceded by (the prefix) adhi, generally means attainment. Besides, the sense of realisation does not differ from that of attainment in the case of the Highest; for the attain- ment of the Highest consists merely in removing igno- rance, and nothing more. Objection. From this point of view, then, the knowledge (of Brahman) is outside the Rg-Veda etc ; and so how can it be the higher knowledge, and how can it be the means for emancipation? Since the view accepted traditionally is this, "The Smrtis that are outside the Vedic pale, and those that propound per- verted views, are all useless in the next world; and they are counted as occupied with dark things" (Manu, XII.9), therefore it will be unacceptable as its outlook is perverted and it is useless. Moreover, the Upansads will become excluded from the Rg-Veda etc. Again if they are included in the Rg-Veda etc., it is illogical to distinguish them by saying, "Then the higher" and so on 1

1 There is another reading, 'Atha katham pareti, how then is it called the higher?"

88 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.i. 5

Answer: No, since (by the word vidya) is implied the realisation of the thing to be known. What is primarily meant in this context by the term, "higher knowledge," is that knowledge of the Immutable that is imparted only by the Upanisads (considered as revealed knowledge), and not merely the assemblage of words found in the (books called) Upanisads. But by the word Veda the meaning implied everywhere is the assemblage of words. The knowledge of Brahman is distinctively mentioned and it is called the higher knowledge since, even after the mastery of the assem- blage of words, the realisation of the Immutable is not possible without some other effort consisting in ap- proaching the teacher and so on, as well as detachment. Unlike what happens with regard to the subject matter of injunctions, where there are to be found certain acts, like the Agnihotra (sacrifice), to be performed subsequent to the understanding of the text through a combination of numerous accessories, to wit, the agent etc., there does not remain anything to be performed here within the domain of the higher knowl- edge; but all actions cease simultaneously with the comprehension of the meaning of the sentences, inas- much as nothing remains to be done apart from con- tinuance in the mere knowledge revealed by the words. Therefore the higher knowledge is being specified here by referring to the Immutable, possessed of attributes stated in "(The wise realise ... ) that which cannot be percerved" etc.

Ii 6] MUNDAKA UPANISAD 89

यत्तद्द्रेश्यमग्राह्यमगोत्रमवर्ण- मचक्षुःश्रोत्रं तदपाणिपादं। नित्यं विभुं सर्वगतं सुसूक्ष्मं तदव्ययं यद्गतयोनि परिपश्यन्ति धीरा: ॥६॥

6. (By the higher knowledge) the wise realise everywhere that which cannot be perceived and grasped; which is without source, features, eyes, and ears; which has neither hands nor feet, which is eternal, multiformed, all-pervasive, extremely subtle, and undiminishing; and which is the source of all.

By the expression, "yat tat-that which", is called up to memory something as a realised entity that is still to be explained. (They realise that which is) adreśyam (should rather be adrśyam), not visıble (or not perceptible), 1 e. beyond the range of all the crgans of knowledge, for the power of perception, as directed outward, has the five senses as its gates Agrūhyam, beyond one's grasp, 1.e. beyond the range of the organs of action. Agotram: gotra is synonymous with con- nection or root; so agotram means unconnected, for It has no root with which It can get connected. Varnāh, (features), are those that can be described, they are qualities of a thing, such as grossness etc. or whiteness etc That Immutable which is devoid of varnah is the avarnam, featureless. Acaksu-srotram; the caksuh, eye, and srotram, ear, are the organs in all beings for perceiving forms and names; that in which these two do not exist is acaksuh-śrotram, without eye and ear.

90 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.i. 6

From the ascription of sentience in the text. "He who is omniscient in general and all-knowing in detail" (Mu.I.i.9), it may follow that, just like ordmnary beings, the Immutable, too, achieves Its purposes with the help of such organs as eyes, ears, etc. That supposition 1s refuted here by "without ear and eyes"; for this ac- cords with what is found (elsewhere): "He sees without eyes, and He hears without ears" (Sv.III.II) More- over, that Immutable is apāmipadam, without hands and feet, that is to say, devoid of the organs of action. Since It cannot thus be seized, nor does It seize, there- fore It is mityam, (eternal) indestructible. It is uibhum, multiformed, because of assuming diverse forms in all the different creatures from Brahma to a motionless thing. Sarvagatam, all-pervasıve, like space. Susuksmam, extremely subtle, being devoid of such causes of grossness as sound etc Sound etc are verily the causes of the progressive grossness of space, air, etc. Being free from these, It is extremely subtle. Furthermore, tat, that, ıs avyayam, undimi- nishing, one that does not decrease, because of those very virtues. For a partless thing cannot have any diminution by way of loss of Its parts as in the case of a body, nor can It sustain any loss by way of decrease of treasure as in the case of a king; nor can there be any shrinkage through loss of qualities, since It is attributless and all-pervasive Yat, that, which is possessed of such characteristics; bhutayonun, the source of all creation, just as the earth is of all moving and unmoving things ;- that Immutable, dhirah, the intelligent, the discriminating ones; paripasyantı, see everywhere, as the Self of all. The purport of the

I1. 7] MUNDAKA UPANISAD 9I

whole verse is this: "That is the higher knowledge by which the Immutable of this kind is realised." It has been said that the Immutable is the source of beings. Now is being shown with the help of famihar illustrations how It can be so:

यथोणनाभि: सृजते गृह्णते च यथा पृथिव्यामोषधयः संभवन्ति। यथा सतः पुरुषात् केशलोमानि तथाऽक्षरात् संभवतीह विश्वम्।७।। 7. As a spider spreads and withdraws (its' thread), as on the earth grow the herbs (and trees), and as from the living man issues out hair on the head and body, so out of the Immutable does the universe emerge here (in this phenomenal creation).

Yatha, as it is a familar fact, in the world, that the urnanäbhih, spider, by itself and independently of any other auxiliary; srjate, spreads out, the threads that are non-different from its own body; ca, and, again; grhnate (should rather be grhnat), withdraws, those very threads-makes them one with itself; ca, and, yatha, as, prthivyam, on the earth; (grow) osadhayah, the herbs, that is to say, plants ranging from corn to trees-as they grow inseparably from the earth, and yatha, as; satah purusat, from the existing, living, man, sambhavanti, grow, keśa-lomāni, hair on the head and other parts of the body, that is dıssimilar (to the body) in nature ;- just as it is in these cases, so

92 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.1. 7

aksarat, from the Immutable, of the foregoing characteristics, that does not depend on any other auxihary; sambhavati, originates; iha, here, in this phenomenal creation; viśvam, the entire universe -both sımilar and dissimilar. As for the citing of many illustrations, it is meant for easy comprehension.

The next verse is begun in order to show a fixed order of creation, viz that the universe, while emerg- ing out of Brahman, does so in this order of succession and not simultaneously like a handful of jujubes thrown down:

तपसा चीयते ब्रह्म ततोऽन्रमभिजायते। अन्नात्प्राणो मनः सत्यं लोका: कर्मसु चामृतम् ॥८

8. Through knowledge Brahman increases in size. From that is born (the unmanifested) food. From food evolves Prāna (Hiranya- garbha); (thence the cosmic) mind, (thence) the five elements; (thence) the worlds; (thence) the immortality that is in karmas. Tapasā, through knowledge, by virtue of posses- sing the knowledge of the process of creation; brahma, Brahman, the Immutable, the source of creation when desirous of creating this world, like a seed sending out its sprout; cīyate, increases in size, as a father procreating a son does out of elation. From that Brahman, thus become inflated because of Its possession, through Its omniscience, of the power and knowledge of creation, preservation, and dissolution; abhijayate, originates (grows) annam, food: the word

I.1. 8] MUNDAKA UPANIŞAD 93

being denved from the root ad in the sense of that which is eaten, 1 e. enjoyed, means the Unmanifested (Maya) that is common to all creatures. (That food originates or) gets evolved into the states of imminent manifestation.1 From that Unmanifested, 1.e. from that food in a state of imminent manifestation, (was born) granah, Hiranyagarbha, who is common2 to all the beings in the universe that are endued with (a part of His) power of knowledge and action, who sprouts from that seed of all beings constituted by ignorance, desire, and action, and who identifies Himself with the universe; "was born"-this is to be supplied. From that Hiranyagarbha evolved manah, that which is called the (cosmic) mind, comprising volition, deliberation, doubt, determination, etc. From that mind, agai, as characterised by volition etc., evolved satyam, the five elements, such as space etc., which are called satya (ie. the gross, sat, and the subtle, tyat). From those five elements, called satva, evolved the lokäh, the seven worlds, such as the earth etc, in succession, after the creation of the cosmic egg. Following the order of the evolution of creatures- beginning with men-there evolved on these (worlds) karmas,3 castes, and stages of life. And karmasu, in 1 The beginningless Maya is the unmanifested food, the Upanisad speaks of its origin in the sense cf its becoming ready for evolution. Otherwise Māyā has no beginning 2 He is the sum total of all the mndividuals Being common to all, He is called Sutra, the thread (running through all). 3 Rituals etc.

94 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I1. 8

the karmas, that acted as the cause, (there evolved) amrtam, immortality, the frunt of karmas It 1s called immortality, since it is not destroyed as long as karma is not eliminated in billions of kalpas (cycles).

With a view to concluding the subject matter, dealt with above, the verse states as follows

यः सर्वजः सर्वविद्यस्य ज्ञानमयं तपः। तस्मादेतदुब्रह्म नाम रूपमन्नं च जायते॥।६।। इति मुण्डकोपनिषदि प्रथममुण्डके प्रथम: खण्डः ॥ 9. From Him, who is omniscient in general and all-knowing in detail and whose austerity is constituted by knowledge, evolve this (deriva- tive) Brahman, name, colour, and food. Yah, He, the one called the Immutable, and answering to the foregoing definition; that is sarvajnah, a knower of all things in general, (and) sarvavit, a knower of all things in detail, yasya, whose, the tapah, austerity; ıs ñānamayam, made up of knowl- edge-consists in omniscience, and not in effort; tasmat, from that, from that ommiscient Entity, as aforesaid; āyate, is born; etat brahma, this, the derivative, Brahman, as said betore, who is called Hiranyagarbha. Besides, (from It) evolve nāma, name, such as "That one is Devadatta or Yajnadatta" etc .; rūpam, colour, such as "This is white or blue" etc .; ca annam, and food, such as paddy, barley, etc They evolve in the order shown in the preceding verse; and hence it is to be understood that there is no contradiction.

FIRST MUNDAKA

CANTO II

By the text starting with "Rg-Veda, Yajur-Veda" (Mu.I.1.5) it has been said that the Vedas, with their appendages, constitute the lower knowledge. And the »higher knowledge, with its attributes, has been defined as that knowledge through which is realised the Immu- table whose characteristics have been set forth in the text beginning with, "(The wise realse .) that which cannot be perceived" etc (I.1.6) and ending with, "are evolved name, colour, and food" (I.i.9). The following text starts by setting before it the task of distinguishing hereafter the subject matters of these two kinds of knowledge which relate to the states of bondage and freedom. Of these, the sphere of the lower knowledge is the state of bondage which involves a distinction of accessories like agent etc., and actions and results. This state has no beginning and no end; it has to be eradicated wholly1 and individually by each embodied being, because it consists of sorrow; and it flows un- broken like the current of a river. And the subject matter of the higher knowledge is freedom-which consists in the elimination of that bondage and is beginningless, endless, ageless, deathless, immortal, fearless, pure, and placid; and it is supreme bliss that is without a second and is nothing but remaining estab- 1 The world of diversity is not eradicated wholly in deep sleep, but on the rise of realisation, when nescience 1s destroyed, Its effect, the world, also is eliminated entirely and for ever.

96 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.11. I

lished in one's own Self. That being so, the text com- mences first to show the scope of the lower knowledge; for detachment from it follows only as a consequence of recognising its nature. It will be said accordingly in, "After examining the worlds acquired through karma" etc. (I.11 12). And inasmuch as examination is not possible unless something is in view, the text says by way of presenting it:

तदेतत् सत्यं मन्त्रेषु कर्माणि कवयो यान्यपश्यं- स्तानि त्रेतायां बहुधा सन्ततानि। तान्याचरथ नियतं सत्यकामा

एष वः पन्था: सुकृतस्य लोके॥१॥ I. That thing that is such is true. The karmas that the wise discovered in the mantras are accomplished variously (in the context of the sacrifice) where the three Vedic duties get united. You perform them for ever with desire for the true results. This is your path leading to the fruits of karma acquired by yourselves.

Tat etat, that thing that is such; is satyam, true. Which is that? The karmani, karmas, Agnihotra etc., yani, which; kavayah, the wise-Vasistha and others; apasyan, saw ;- mantresu, in the mantras, known as the Rg-Veda etc .- these karmas having been revealed by the mantras only. Those that were seen thus are satyam, true, they being unfailing in ensuring human

I ni. 2] MUŅDAKA UPANIȘAD 97

goals And tani, these, the karmas enjoined by the Vedas and visualısed by the seers, santatān, are in vogue, are accomplished; bahudhā, in various ways; by the people steeped in karma; tretāyam, where the three get united, in the context of the sacrifice consisting of three kinds of duties prescribed by the Rg-Veda, Yajur-Veda, and Sama-Veda; or the meaning is that the karmas are very much in vogue tretāyam, in the Tretā Age. Therefore you acaratha tāni, accomplish them, nıtyam, for ever; satyakamäh, with a desire for the true results of karma. Eșah, this; is vah, your; panthah, path, sukrtasya loke, for the result (of karma) accomplished by yourselves. The result of karma is called loka, the word being derived from the root luk in the sense . of that which is looked at or enjoyed (lokyate) as a result. This is the path leading to it, or ensuring its achievement-this is the idea. These karmas, viz Agnihotra etc., that are enjoined in the Vedas, constitute this path that is meant for the achieve- ment of inevitable results.

The next verse proceeds now to present Agnihotra first, out of all these karmas, since it precedes all others. How is that presented?

यदा लेलायते ह्यचिः समिद्धे हव्यवाहने। तदाSऽज्यभागावन्तरेणाSडहुतीः प्रतिपादयेत् ॥२।। 2. When, on the fire being set ablaze, the flame shoots up, one should offer the oblations into that part that is in between the right and the left.

98 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.ii. 2

Yadā, at the (very) time when; samiddhe havya- 'vahane, on the fire being set ablaze, by a good supply of fuel; arcıh, the flame, lelāyate, shoots up, tadā, then, into the blazing, dancıng flame, ājyabhāgau (should be rather ājyabhagayoh) antarena, in the midst of the two places where oblations are poured, and which is called the avapa-sthana, one pratipadayet, should offer,1 ahutih, oblations; in honour of the gods. The word ähutih occurs in the plural number, since the offerings have to be made for many days.2 This path of karma, that consists in the adequate offering of oblations etc., is the road to the attainment of the results of karma. But it is difficult to follow it properly, and impediments crop up in galore. How? यस्या ग्निहोत्रमदर्शमपौर्णमास- 4

मचातुर्मास्यमनाग्रयणमतिथिवर्जितं च। अहुतमवैश्वदेवमविधिना हुत- मासप्तमांस्तस्य लोकान् हिनस्ति ॥३॥ 3. It (i.e. the Agnihotra) destroys the seven worlds of that man whose Agnihotra (sacrifice) is without Darśa and Paurņamāsa (rites), devoid of Cāturmäsya, bereft of Agrayana, unblest with 1 In the Darsapurnamāsa sacrifices two oblations are offered in the right and left sides of the fire in honour of Fire and Soma respectively, the other sacrifices being per- formed in the middle portion called the āvāpa-sthāna ª The Agnihotra sacrifice is performed twice a day-in the morning and the evening. But this is a daily duty to be followed throughout a man's whole life. And hence the plural, instead of the dual. number.

I.i1. 3] MUŅDAKA UPANIȘAD 99

guests, goes unperformed, is unaccompanied by Vaiśvadeva (rite), and is performed perfunctorily. Yasya, of him, of that performer of the Agnihotra (sacrifice), whose, agnıhotram, Agnıhotra; is adarśam, devoid of the sacrifice called Darśa. The performance of the Dara (sacrifice) being a necessary duty for the undertaker of Agnihotra, it becomes a qualifying word for Agnihotra owing to its concomittance with the latter. The sense is that, it is an Agnihotra in which the Darsa is not accomplished. Similarly are to be understood the adjectival use in the words, apaurna- māsam etc. with relation to Agnihotra, for they equally form parts of the Agnihotra. Apaurnamasam, without the Pūmnamasa sacrifice. Acāturmāsyam, dovoid of the Cāturmāsya1 ritual. Āgrayana rituals2 are to be undertaken in autumn etc .; that Agnihotra in which these are not accomplished is anagrayanam. So also atithivarjitam, that in which guests are not served, day in and day out. Ahutam, in which the Agnihotra itself remains unperformed at the proper time. Just like adarśa etc., avaiśvadevam means that in which the Vaiśvadeva rite remains unaccomplished. And although the Agnihotra is performed, it is avidhinā hutam, per- formed unduly, that is to say, not performed in the proper way. What these rites, viz Agnihotra and the rest, lead to, when they are thus accomplished perfunc- torily or left undone, is being stated: (That rite)

1 The three sacrifices performed at the beginning of each season of four months, viz Vaiśvadevam, Varuna-praghāsah, Šāka-medhah. 2 The Agrayana rituals are performed in autumn and spring with newly harvested corn

I00 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.ii. 3

hınasti, destroys, āsaptamān lokān, the worlds up to and inclusive of the seventh; tasya, of him, of the per- former It destroys, as it were, for the only fruit is the trouble undergone Inasmuch as the worlds counting from the earth to Satya,1 accrue as a result, only when the rites are duly performed, and nasmuch as those worlds are not achievable through Agnıhotra etc. of the above description, they are, so to say, destroyed. Since the mere trouble is a constant factor, it is said that such a rite is destructive. Or the mean- ing is this: The seven generations-viz father, grand- father, great-grandfather, son, grandson, great-grand- son, (and the sacrificer), who become connected through the favourable influence of such services as the offering of lumps of food etc.2 do not confer any benefit on one- self as a result of this kind of Agnihotra etc .; and this is affirmed by saying that they are destroyed.

काली कराली च मनोजवा च सुलोहिता या च सुघूम्रवर्णा।

स्फुलिड्गिनी विश्वरुची च देवी लेलायमाना इति सप्तजिह्वाः ॥४।। 4. Kālī, Karālī, Manojavā, and Sulohitā, and that which is Sudhūmravarņa, as also

1 Bhūr, Bhuvar, Svar, Maha, Jana, Tapas, Satya 2 The sacrificer serves the three past generations by offering pinda, water, etc., and the three living generations by feeding them. Thus the six generations get connected with himself as the seventh.

I.i1 5] MUNDAKA UPANIȘAD

Sphulingini, and the shining Viśvaruci-these are the seven flaming tongues.1 These, beginning from Käli and ending with Viśvarucī, are the lelāyamānāh, flamıng; sapta jhvāh, seven tongues, of fire, meant for devouring the clarified butter offered as oblation.

पतेषु यश्चरते भ्राजमानेषु यथाकालं चाहुतयो ह्याददायन्। तं नयन्त्येता: सूर्यस्य रश्मयो

यत्र देवानां पतिरेकोऽधिवास:।।५।। 5. These oblations turn into the rays of the sun and taking him up they lead him, who performs the rites in these shining flames at the proper time, to where the single lord of the gods presides over all. These ähutayah, offerings of oblation undertaken by the sacrificer, these libations that had been poured by him; ādadāyan, having taken him up; (carry him) by having become survasya raśmayah, the rays of the sun, that is to say, along the course of the sun's rays; (and) they tam nayanti, lead him-that performer of Agni- hotra; yah, who; carate, performs the rites, e.g., Agni- hotra etc .; eteșu bhrājamānesu, in these different shin- ing tongues; yathākalam, at the proper time, at the time fit for each rite ;- (they carry him) to heaven

1 Literally the names mean . Black, terrible, speedy as mind, very red coloured like thick smoke, emitting sparks, having innumerable rays.

I02 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.ii. 5

yatra, where; patih, the lord, Indra; devānam, of the gods; ekaḥ, alone, adhivāsa, dwells (presides), above a.ll.

Now is being stated how they carry him along the rays of the sun:

पह्येहीति तमाहुतयः सुघर्चसः सूर्यस्य रश्मिभिर्यजमानं वहन्ति। प्रियां वाचमभिवदन्त्योऽर्चयन्त्य पष वः पुण्य: सुकतो ब्रह्मलोकः ॥६॥ 6. Saying, "Come, come", uttering pleasing words such as, "This is your well-earned, virtuous path which leads to heaven", and offering him adoration, the scintillating oblations carry the sacrificer along the rays of the sun. The suvarcasah, scintillating (oblations); ehi ehi itt, welcoming (him) with the words "Come, come"; moreover, abhıvadantyah, uttering; priyām vācam, pleasant words, i.e. praise etc .; and arcayantyah adoring-the idea being that they carry him while uttering such pleasant words as-"Esah, this one, is; vah, your; punyah, virtuous; sukrtaḥ, well-earned, road to; brahmalokah, heaven, which is your result." From the context it follows that brahmaloka (lit. the world of Brahma) means heaven.

This karma, unassociated with knowledge, is being decried by showing that it has only this limited result; that it is the product of ignorance, desire, and action;

I.ii. 7] MUNDAKA UPANIȘAD I03

and that it is for this reason unsubstantial and the source of misery: प्वा होते अटढा यज्ञरूपा अष्टादशोक्तमचरं येषु कर्म। एतच्रेयो येऽभिनन्दन्ति मूढा जरामृत्युं ते पुनरेवापि यन्ति ॥७।। 7. Since these eighteen constituents of a sacrifice, on whom the inferior karma has been said to rest, are perishable because of their fragility, therefore those ignorant people who get elated with the idea, "This is (the cause of) bliss", undergo old age and death over again. Plavāh means perishable. Hi, since; ete, these; yajnarupah, the constituents of the sacrifice, the accom- plishers of the sacrifice; (who are) astādaśa, eighteen in number, viz the sixteen priests, the sacrificer, and his wife; yesu uktam, on whom, on which eighteen of these, it has been said, by scripture, as resting; the avaram karma, the inferior karma, mere karma, without knowledge ;- (these are pershable, because they are) adrdhah, fragile, impermanent; therefore, the inferior karma accomplished by those eighteen factors, gets destroyed, along with its result, owing to the fragility of the eighteen factors on which it rests, just as milk or curd held in a vessel is destroyed on the destruction of the latter. This being so, ye, those, the non- discerning, ignorant people; who . abhinandanti, delight with regard to this (karma); thinking, "Etat śreyas, this is good-the cause of bliss"; te, they; after staying in heaven for some time; punar eva api, over

I04 EIGHT UPANISADS [I xi. 7

again; yanti, undergo; ara-mrtyum, old age and death. अविद्यायामन्तरे वर्तमाना: स्वयं धीरा: पण्डितं मन्यमाना: । जङुन्यमाना: परियन्ति मूढा अन्धेनेव नीयमाना यथाऽन्धाः ॥८।। 8. Remaining within the fold of ignorance, and thinking, "We are ourselves wise and learned", the fools, while being buffeted very much, ramble about like the blind led by the blind alone. Furthermore, vartamānāh, existıng; avidyāyām antare, within the fold of ignorance; being steeped in non-discrimination; (and) manyamānāh, thinking; "Svayam dhirāh, we ourselves are intelligent, and panditah, learned, conversant with all that is to be learned"-flattering themselves in this way; those mudhah, fools, janghanyamanah, while being buffeted, hurt very much, by hosts of evils like old age, disease, etc .; pariyanti, ramble about, because of their loss of vision; just as in the world andhah, the blind, deprived of eyes; fall into pits or brambles; nīyamānāh, while being led, being shown their way, andhena eva, by the blind alone, by one who is himself without eyes. Moreover, अविद्यायां बहुधा वर्तमाना वर्यं कृतार्था इत्यभिमन्यन्ति बाला: । यत्कर्मिणो न प्रवेदयन्ति रागात् तेनाऽडतुरा: क्षीणलोकाश्च्यवन्ते॥६॥

I.ii. IO] MUNŅAKA UPANIȘAD I05

9. Continuing diversely in the midst of ignorance, the unenlightened take airs by think- ing, "We have attained the fullest achievement." Since the men, engaged in karma, do not understand (the truth) under the influence of attachment, thereby they become afflicted with sorrow and are deprived of heaven on the ex- haustion of the results of karma. Vartamānāh, continuing, avıdyāyām, in the midst of ignorance; bahudhā, in diverse ways; bālāh, the unenlightened; abhımanyanti, take airs by thinking, "Vayam krtarthah, we alone have attained the fullest achievement." Yat, since; in this manner; karminah, the men engaged in karma; na pravedayantı, do not understand the truth; rägat, under the influence of attachment, to the results of karma; tena, thereby; äturāh (santah), becoming afflicted with sorrow, they cyavante, get deprived, of heaven; kşınalokāh, on the exhaustion of their results of karma. इष्टापूर्त मन्यमाना वरिष्ठं नान्यच्क्ेयो वेदयन्ते प्रमूढाः । नाकस्य पृष्ठे ते सुकृतेऽनुभूत्वे- मं लोकं हीनतरं वा विशन्ति ॥१०॥ IO. The deluded fools, believing the rites inculcated by the Vedas and the Smrtis to be the highest, do not understand the other thing that leads to liberation. They, having enjoyed (the fruits of actions) on the heights of heaven that are the abodes of pleasure, enter this world or an inferior one.

I06 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.ii. 10

Manyamanah, thinking, istam, sacrifice and other rites, enjoined by the Vedas, purtam, (digging of) pools, wells, tanks, etc. inculcated by the Smrtis ;- thinking these to be the varstham, best means, for the achievement of human objectives, the chief thing ;- thinking thus, the pramudhah, deluded fools, who are so because of their infatuation for sons, cattle, friends, etc ; na vedayante, do not understand; anyat, the other thing, called the knowledge of the Self-to be the means for the achievement of śreyas, the highest goal (libera- tion) And te, they; anubhutva (should rather be anubhuya), having enjoyed, the fruits of their karma; sukrte, in the abode of enjoyment; nakasya prsthe, on the heights of heaven; again, visantt, enter; into imam lokam, this, human, world; va hinataram, or a world inferior to it, e.g. that of the beasts, or hell, etc, in accordance with the residual results of karma.

तप:श्रद्धे ये ह्युपघसन्त्यरण्ये शान्ता विद्वांसो भैक्ष्यचर्या चरन्तः । सूर्यद्वारेण ते विरजा: प्रयान्ति यत्रामृतः स पुरुषो ह्यव्ययात्मा ॥११। II. Those who live in the forest, while begging for alms-viz those (forest-dwellers and hermits1) who resort to the duties of their respective stages of life as well as to meditation, -and the learned (householders) who have their senses under control-(they) after becoming

1 The householders who repair to the forest in the third stage of their lives, or become monks in the fourth stage.

I.n. II] MUŅDAKA UPANISAD I07

freed from virtue and vice, go by the path of the sun to where lives that Purusa, immortal and undecaying by nature.

On the other hand, as opposed to the former, ye, those, who-the forest-dwellers and the hermits, possessed of knowledge; while staying aranye, in the forest; upavasanti, resort to; tapahśraddhe-tapas, the duties pertaining to that stage of lıfe, and śraddhā, meditation on Hiranyagarbha and others; and the santah self-controlled, who have their senses under control; vidvamsah, the learned, that is to say, the householders, too, who are devoted chiefly to meditation; (go). (Upavasantı aranye) bhaıksyacaryām carantaḥ, (live in the forest) while begging for alms, since they do not accept the customary gifts; they live in the forest while begging for alms-this is how the sentence is to be construed. Te, they; virajāh, becoming freed from rajas, that is to say, having got their virtue and vice attenuated; prayānti, move superbly; sūryadvāreņa, along the path of the sun, along the Northern Path, indicated by the word sun, to the worlds called Satya etc. yatra, where (lıves); sah amrtah purusah, that immortal Purușa, the first-born Hiraņyagarbha; hı avyayātmā, who is by nature undecaying, who lives as long as the world endures. The goals of the world, that are attain- able through the lower knowledge, terminate here alone. Objection: Is not this state considered to be liberation by some?

Answer: Theirs is not a correct view in accord- ance with such Vedic texts as: "All the desires vanish

I08 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.11. II

even here'' (Mu.III.i1 2). "Those discriminating people, ever merged in contemplation, attain the all-pervasive (Brahman) everywhere, and enter into the all" (Mu.III.11.5), etc 1 Besides, that is not the topic here Since the topic under discussion is that of the lower knowledge, the consideration of liberation cannot crop up all of a sudden. As for freedom from virtue and vice, it is only relatively so. All the results of the lower knowledge, comprising the ends and means, and diversified into varieties of action, accessories, and fruits, and consisting n duality, extend up to this only, or in other words, terminate with the realisation of Hiranyagarbha. So also it has been said by Manu, while recounting successively the courses of the world, starting with that of the motionless things, "The wise men say that this is the highest goal of holiness that consists in the attainment of (the state of) Hıranya- garbha, the Prajapatis (lords of creatures, such as Marīci), Dharma (Death), (the principle called) Mahat, and the Unmanifested" (XII.50) Now this verse is being sad in order to show that one, who becomes detached from this whole world of ends and means, has competence for the higher knowl- edge: परीक्ष्य लोकान् कर्मचितान् ब्राह्मणो निर्वेदमायान्नास्त्यकत: कृतेन। तद्विज्ञानार्थ स गुरुमेवाभिगच्छेत् समित्पाणि: श्रोत्रियं ब्रह्मनिष्ठम् ॥१२।। ' These texts deny any course to be followed by the liberated soul after the death of the body.

I.iı. I2] MUŅDAKA UPANIȘAD I09

12. A Brähmana should resort to renun- ciation after examining the worlds, acquired through karma, with the help of this idea : "There is nothing (here) that is not the result of karma; so what is the need of (performing) karma?" For knowing that Reality he should go, with sacrificial faggots in hand, to a teacher, versed in the Vedas and absorbed in Brahman.

Parīksya, examining-all these (rites) that are included within the scope of the lower knowledge con- stituted by the Rg-Veda etc., that are to be undertaken by persons subject to natural ignorance, desire, and action, they having been inculcated for the man swayed by the defects of ignorance etc .; and (examining) the worlds that are their results and are indicated by the Northern and Southern Paths, and the worlds of the beasts and ghouls that follow as the result of omission of obligatory duties and commission of prohibited ones -having examined all these, wth the help of direct perception, inference, analogy, and scriptures, i.e. having ascertained in their essence from every point of view; lokan, the worlds-that exist as the goals of transmigration ranging from the Unmanifested to a motionless thing, whether evolved or involved; that are productive of one another like the seed and the sprout; that are assailed with multifarious troubles in their hundreds and thousands; that are devoid of substance like the interior of a plantain tree; that appear like magic, water in a mirage, or a city in space; and that are comparable to dream, water-bubbles, and foam, that get destroyed at every turn ;- that is to say. turn-

IIO EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.ii. I2

ing one's back to virtue and vice acquired through karma, instigated by the defects of ignorance and desire, (a Brahmana should renounce). The Brāhmana is mentioned because he alone is specially qualified tor the acquisition of knowledge by renouncing everything. What should one do after examining the worlds? This is being said. Nirvedam ayat, one should arrive at detachment, that is to say, should renounce-the root uid with the prefix nh being used here in the sense of renunciation. The process of renunciation is being shown: "In the universe there is nothing that is akrta, a non-product; for all the worlds are effects of karma, and being products of action, they are impermanent. The idea is that there is nothing that is eternal. All actions are productive of transitory things, since all effects of actions are only of four kinds-they can be produced, acquired, purified, or modified, over and above these, action has no other distinctive result. But I am desirous of the eternal, immortal, fearless, un- changing, unmoving, absolute Entity, and not of its opposite. Therefore krtena (kim), what is the need of (accomplishing) any task, that involves great trouble and leads to evil?" Having become detached in this way, sah, he, the dispassionate Brähmana; abhigacchet, should go; gurum eva, to a teacher alone, who is blessed with mental and physical self-control, mercy, etc .; tad-vinānārtham, for the sake of understanding that fully. The emphasis in "the teacher alone" implies that he should not seek for the knowledge of Brahman independently, even though he is versed in the scriptures. (He will go) samit-panih, with a load of (sacrificial) faggots in hand; (to) śrotriyam brahmanış-

Lii. I31 MUNDAKA UPANIȘAD III

tham, (a teacher) who is versed in the meaning of the Vedas that he recites and hears, and who is absorbed in Brahman. One who renounces all activities and remains absorbed in the non-dual Brahman only is brahmanisthah, just as it is in the case of the words gapanisthah, absorbed in self-repetition, taponisthah, absorbed in austerity. For one, engrossed in karma, cannot have absorption in Brahman, karma and the knowledge of the Self being contradictory. Having approached that teacher in the proper way, and having pleased him, he should ask about the true and immut- able Purusa (all-pervasive Reality).

तस्मै स विद्वानुपसन्नाय सम्यक् प्रशान्तचित्ताय शमान्विताय। येनाक्षरं पुरुषं वेद सत्यं प्रोवाच तां तत्त्वतो ब्रह्मविद्याम्॥१३।।

इति मुण्डकोपनिषदि प्रथममुण्डके द्वितीय: खण्डः॥

I3. To him who approaches duly, whose heart is calm and whose outer organs are under control, that man of enlightenment should adequately impart that knowledge of Brahman by which one realises the true and immutable Purușa. Sah vidvan, that enlightened one, the teacher who has realised Brahman; (should say) tasmai, to him; upasannāya, to the one who has approached; samyak, duly, that is to say, in accordance with the scriptures, prasāntacittāya, to one whose heart is calm, who has

II2 EIGHT UPANISADS [I.ii. I3

become free from such faults as pride, and śamānvi- taya, to one who is endued with control over the outer organs, i.e. who has become detached from every- thing, (to such a one) he provaca, said, or rather, should say, tām brahmavidyām, that knowledge of Brahman, lattvatah, adequately, yena, by which, by which higher knowledge, veda, one realıses; aksaram, the Immutable, that is possessed of such attributes as being imperceptible etc (Mu.I.i 3); that very Immu- table that is referred to by the word Purusa, because of all-pervasiveness or existence in all the hearts; and that again is satyam, true, because of being essentially the supreme Reality, and It is aksaram (immutable) because of the absence of mutation, injury, and decay. For the teacher, too, this is imperative that he should save from the ocean of ignorance any good disciple that approaches hım dulv

SECOND MUŅDAKA

CANTO I

All the effects of the lower knowledge have been stated. And that Immutable is true that is called Purusa (the all-pervasive Reality), and that is the essence of this phenomenal existence, the source from which it springs, and the place where it gets dissolved. The Reality, after knowing which all this becomes known, is the subject matter of the higher knowledge of Brahman. That has to be stated. Hence commences the subsequent text:

तदेतत् सत्यं

सहस्रशः प्रभवन्ते सरूपा:। तथाऽक्षराद्विविधा: सोम्य भावा: प्रजायन्ते तत्र चैवापि यन्ति ॥१॥

I. That thing, that is such, is true : As from a fire, fully ablaze, fly off sparks, in their thousands, that are akin to the fire, similarly O good-looking one, from the Immu- table originate different kinds of creatures and' into It again they merge. That truth that is constituted by the results of karma, the subject matter of the lower knowledge, is. only relatively so. But this truth is the subject matter of the higher knowledge, since it is possessed of the 8

II4 EIGHT UPANISADS [II.i. I

characteristics of the supreme Reality.1 Tat etat, that thing, that is this (subject matter of higher knowl- edge), is satyam, true, whereas the other is unreal, being within the domain of ignorance. The True and Immutable, being altogether beyond direct cognition, an illustration is being cited with a view to making people somehow directly realıse It. Yathā, as, sudiptāt pāvakat, from a fire well lighted up; visphulingāh, sparks, sarupah, that are akin to the fire, prabhavante, fly off; sahasrasah, in their thousands, innumerably, tathā, sımilarly, somya, O good-looking one! aksarāt, from the Immutable, of the foregoing characteristics; (orıginate) vıvıdhāh bhāvāh, different kinds of creatures -different because of conformity with the various bodies that form the limiting adjuncts. The different small empty spaces, circumscribed by pots etc., are seen to spring from space in conformity with the differ- ences in the limiting adjuncts viz the pots etc .; just in this way the creatures prajāyante, originate, in accordance with the creation, under various names and forms, of the bodies that are their limiting adjuncts; tatra ca eva, and into that again, into that very Immutable; they apiyanti, merge, following the dissolu- tion of the bodies that are their limiting adjuncts, just as the different openings do on the disintegration of the pots etc. As in the origin and dissolution of the different cavities, space appears as a cause owing to the presence of the limiting adjuncts, viz pots etc., so also in the matter of the birth and death of the indivi- duals, the Immutable appears as a cause owing to the

1 Since it can never be sublated.

II.1. 2] MUŅDAKA UPANIȘAD II5

presence of the limiting adjuncts, viz the bodies created by name and form. The text now proceeds to speak of the Immu- table that is higher than the (other) immutable which is the seed of name and form, is called the Unmani- fested (Maya), and is itself higher than its own modifications; this (absolute) Immutable that is devoid of all lmiting adjuncts, which is the very essence of the (other) immutable, is comparable to space, free from all forms, and is describable by such expressions as "Not this, not this": दिव्यो ह्यमूतः पुरुषः सबाह्याभ्यन्तरो ह्यजः । अप्राणो ह्यमनाः शुभ्रो ह्यक्षरात्परतः परः ॥२॥ 2. Purusa is transcendental, since He is formless; and since He is coextensive with all that is external and internal and since He is birthless, therefore He is without vital force and without mind; He is pure and superior to the (other) superior immutable (Māyā). Puruşah, Purușa, who is so called because of (the derivative meaning of) all-pervasiveness or residence in all hearts; is divyah, resplendent-because of self- effulgence or residence in His own resplendent Self- or transcendental; hi, because; amurtah, devoid of all forms. That self-effulgent Purusa, being formless and all-pervasive, is sabāhyabhyantarah, coextensive with all that is external or internal; ajah, birthless, is not born of anything, since there is nothing else but Him- self which can be His cause of birth, in the sense that air is the cause of water-bubbles etc., or pots etc. are

II6 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.i. 2

the causes of the different kinds of cavities of space. As all modifications of positive entities are preceded by their births, the denial of birth is tantamount to the denial of all modifications. Hi, as, that Being is coeval with all that is external or internal; therefore It is unborn; and hence It is ageless, deathless, and immu- table, constant, and fearless. This is the idea. Although like the sky, appearing as possessed of surface and taints, It appears in the context of the different bodies. to be possessed of vital force, mind, senses, and cbjects, in the eyes of those people whose vision, owing to their ignorance, is fixed on the multiplicity of the limiting adjuncts, e.g. the bodies etc; yet from Its own point of view It is apranah, without the vital force, to those whose eyes are fixed on the supreme Reality. That is called apranah in which air, the principle of motion, does not exist in its diversity of the power of action. Sımilarly amanāh, without mind, that in which mind, consisting of thinking etc., does not exist in its diver- sity of the power of knowledge. By the expressions "without vital force" and "without mind" it is to be understood that all the different vital forces, viz Prāna, (Apāna, etc), the organs of action, and the objects of those organs, as also the intellect and the mind, the senses of perception, and their objects, are denied. In support of this, there occurs this passage in another Upanisad, "It thinks as it were, and shakes as it were" (Br.IV.ini.7). As the two limiting adjuncts are denied for It, so It is subhrah, pure. And hence (It is higher) paratah aksarāt, as compared with the (other) higher immutable, called the Unmanifested (i.e. Māyā). And the nature of this Māya is mferred

II i. 27 MUŅDAKA UPANISAD II7

from the fact of its being the limiting adjunct of Brahman that appears to be the seed of name and form.1 And that (other) immutable, called the Unmanı- fested, that is inferred as the limiting adjunct of that (higher) Immutable, is itself higher than all the modi- fications, because it is considered to be the seed of all the effects and accessories 2 The unconditioned, all- pervasive entity is parah, hıgher; aksarāt paratah, than that immutable (Maya) that is superior (in relation to its effects). This is the idea. It is being shown how the entity that transfuses through and through the (other) immutable, called ākāsa, and enters as an object into all empirical deal- ings, can be without the vital force etc. If, like Purusa (the all-pervasive Entity), the vital force etc. exist as such before creation, then the all-pervasive Entity will be possessed of the vital force etc. by virtue of their co-existence with It. But as a fact, unlike the all-pervasive Entity, the vital forces etc. do not exist as such before creation; therefore the supremely all- pervasive Entity is without vital forces, just as Deva- datta is said to be without a son so long as a son is not

1 In such manifestations of ronsciousness as memory, doubt, etc, the power of Brahman remains ingrained, and thus Brahman appears to be the cause of name and form; but in reality the transcendental Brahman cannot be so; and accordingly Maya has to be assumed to be the limiting adjunct of Brahman, causing this appearance of causality ın Brahman. 2 Effects are known to be inferior to the causes; so the principle of Maya, which is known as the cause, must be superior to its effects.

II8 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.i. 3

born. As to how those vital forces etc. do not exist is being stated:

एतस्माजायते प्राणो मनः सर्वेन्द्रियाणि च। एं वायुज्योतिराप: पृथिवी विश्वस्य धारिणी॥३॥ 3. From Him originates the vital force as well as the mind, all the senses, space, air, fire, water, and earth that supports everything. Etasmöt, from this, this very Purusa that is supposed to be the seed of name and form; jāyate, originates; pranah, the vital force, that is an object and modification of nescience, exists only in name, and is essentially unreal in accordance with another Vedic text, "All modification has speech only as its support; it is unreal" (Ch.VI.i.4). For just as a man, who has no son, does not become possessed of one by seeing hım in dream, similarly the supreme Reality cannot become possessed of the vital force by being endued with a vital force that is included in ignorance and is unreal. In this way, the mind and all the senses, as well as the objects, originate from this One. Therefore it is proved that Purusa is devoid of the vital force etc. in the real sense of the term. And it is to be understood that just as these did not exist in reality before origination, so also they become non-existent after dissolution. And' as is the case with the organs, senses, and mind so also is the case with the elements that are the causes of the bodies and the objects-the elements that are kham, space; väyuh, the air inside and outside, differ- entiated as ävaha (moving towards), pravaha moving away from), etc ; jyotih, fire; apah, water; prthivi,

II.i. 4] MUŅDAKA UPANIȘAD II9

earth; that is visvasya dhārini, the support of all. All these elements that possess seriatım the qualities of sound, touch, colour, taste, and smell, together with all the qualities that belong to the predecessors of each, (all these) originate from this very Purusa.

After the brief presentation in the verse "Purusa is transcendental, since He is formless" etc., of the Immutable, the unqualified Purusa, that is true and forms the subject matter of the higher knowledge, He has again to be presented in detail in His conditioned state; and hence the following text. For when a subject matter is stated in brief and in extenso like an aphorism and its commentary, it becomes easy ot com- prehension. As for that Virät within the cosmic egg who takes His birth from the first-born Präna, who is Hiranyagarbha, He (Virät), too, though apparently separated from Purusa by another intervening principle (viz Hiranyagarbha), is born of this Purusa and is a modification of Him. This fact is being stated, and He (Virät) is heing described:

अझनिर्मूर्धा चक्षुषी चन्द्रसूर्यो दिश: श्रोत्रे वाग्विवृताञ्च वेदाः। वायुः प्राणो हृदयं विश्वमस्य पदम्यां पृथिवी ह्येष सर्वभूतान्तरात्मा ।।४।। 4. The indwelling Self of all is surely He of whom heaven is the head, the moon and sun are the two eyes, the directions are the two ears, the revealed Vedas are the speech, air is the

I20 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.i. 4

heart, and (It is He) from whose two feet emerged the earth. Of whom mūrdha, head, the best limb; is agnih, (lit. fire, means here) heaven, in accordance with the Vedic text, "O Gautama, that world is surely fire" (Ch.V.iv.I). (Of whom caksusi, the two eyes; are candrasuryau, the moon and the sun. The words "of whom" are to be supplied everywhere, by transform- ing the word "asya, of Him", that follows (in the third line), to "yasya, of whom". Of whom disah śrotre, the directions are the two ears; of whom vivrtāh edāh, the revealed, well-known, Vedas; are the vāk, speech; of whom vayuh pranah, air is the vital force, asya, i.e. yasya, of whom; viśvam, the whole universe; is hrdayam, the heart, for the entre world is a mod- fication of the mind, inasmuch as it is seen to merge in the mind during deep sleep, and as even during the waking state it emerges out of it to exist divergently, like sparks out of fire. And of whom padbhyām, from the two feet; prthivi, the earth, is born. Esah, this one-the deity who is Visnu (the all-pervading), or Ananta (the infinite), the first embodied Being who has the three worlds as His physical limiting adjunct -is sarvabhūtāntarātmā, the indwelling Self of all. He is in fact the seer, hearer, thinker, knower, and the reality of all the senses in all beings. And the creatures, too, that transmigrate through the five fires,1 are born from that very Purusa. This is being said 1 Heaven, cloud, earth, father, and iv-vii) mother (Ch. V.

II.1. 5] MUŅDAKA UPANISAD I2I

तस्मादग्नि: समिधो यस्य सूर्यः सोमात्पर्जन्य ओषधयः पृथिव्याम्। पुमान् रेतः सिश्चति योषितायां बह्नी: प्रजा: पुरुषात्संप्रसूताः ।।५।। From Him emerges the fire (i.e. heaven) of which the fuel is the sun. From the moon 5.

emerges cloud, and (from cloud) the herbs and corns on the earth. A man sheds the semen into a woman. From Purusa have originated many creatures.

Tasmāt, from that supreme Purusa; (originates) agnh, fire, that is a particular abode (or state) of creatures. That (fire) is being specified, yasya, of which; suryah, the sun; is samidhah, the fuel, as it were; for by the sun is heaven lighted up. Somāt, from the moon, that evolves out of heaven; originates parjanyah, cloud, which is the second fire. From that cloud originate osadhayah, the herbs and corns; prthivyam, on the earth (the third fire). Puman, man, that is (also) a (fourth) fire, siñcati, sheds; the retas, semen, that originates from the herbs and corns when poured as an oblation into the fire that is man; yosi- tāyām (should rather be yositi), into the woman that is (the fifth) fire. In this order bahvih (rather bahvyaḥ), many; prajāh, creatures; samprasutāh, have originated; purușāt, from the supreme Purușa.

Moreover, it is being said that the auxiliaries of karmas, as well as their fruits, emerge verily from Hım. How?

I22 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.i. 6

तस्माधव: साम यजृंषि दीक्षा यज्ञाश्च सवे क्रतवो दक्षिणाश्च। संवत्सरश् यजमानश्च लोका: सोमो यत्र पवते यत्र सूर्य: ॥६॥ 6. From Him (emerge) the Rg, Sama, and Yajur mantras, initiation, all the sacrifices, whether with or without the sacrificial stake, offerings to Brahmanas, the year, the sacrificer, and the worlds where the moon sancti- fies (all) and where the sun (shines).

Tasmāt, from Hım, from Purusa; (emerged) rcaḥ, the (metrical) mantras that have their letters, feet, and lines well regulated and have such metres as the Gayatri and so on. Sama is that which is divided into five parts or seven parts and is embellished with stobha etc. and tune 1 Yajumsı are the mantras whose letters, feet, and lines are not fixed, and which merely take the form of sentences. These are the three kinds of mantras. Diksah, initiation, consisting in wearing a girdle etc., made of Muñja grass-that is to say, the different observances to be followed by the sacrificer (prepara- tory to the actual rite). Ca sarve yajñah, and all the sacrifices-Agnihotra etc .- (in which animals are not sacrificed). Kratavah, the sacrifices involving the use of a sacrificial stake. Ca daksināh, and the offerings to priests and Brähmanas, ranging from the giving of

1 Consisting of five parts-hımkāra, prastāva, udgītna, pratihara, and nidhana, of seven parts-the foregoing five and upadrava and adi. Stobhas are chanted interjections in a Säma song, such as hum, ho (Vide Ch. I. xi-II xxi).

II.i. 7] MUŅDAKA UPANIȘAD I23

a cow to all one possesses. Ca samvatsarah, and year, which, as time, forms a factor in a rite. Ca yajamānah, and the sacrificer, the master (of the sacrifice). Lokāh, the worlds, that are the results of that sacrifice. Those results are being specified: Yatra, where, in which worlds; somah pavate, the moon sanctifies, the crea- tures; and yatra, where; suryah tapati, the sun shines. These (worlds) are attainable through the two paths, called the Southern Course and the Northern Course, and are the results of the rites performed by the igno- rant and the knowing people.

तस्मान्च देवा बहुधा संप्रसूता: साध्या मनुष्या: पशवो वयांसि। प्राणापानी ब्रीहियवौ तपश्च श्रद्धा सत्यं ब्रह्मचर्य विधिश्न ॥७॥।

7. And from Him duly emerged the gods in various groups, the Sādhya gods, human beings, beasts, birds, life, rice, and barley, as well as austerity, faith, truth, continence, and dutifulness. Ca, and; tasmāt, from that Purusa; samprasūtāḥ, duly issued out; devāh, the gods, that are ancillary to rites; bahudhā, variously, in different groups of Vasus etc.1; sādhyāḥ, Sādhyas, a particular class of gods; manusyāh, human beings, who are entitled to undertake rites; paśavah, beasts-both domestic and wild; vayāmsı, birds; and prāna-apānau, breathing in and

1 Eight Vasus, twelve Adityas, eleven Rudras, etc.

I24 EIGHT UPANISADS [II 1. 7

out, constituting life, vrihi-yavau, rice and barley -- meant for sacrificial offering; ca tapas, and austerity, either as a part of a rite meant for personal sanctifica- tion, or as an independent act leading to some result, śraddha, faith-mental tranquillity and belief in the truth of things (taught by the scnptures and the teacher)-which is a precondition for all application of auxilaries that are productive of human objectives, so also satyam, truth-avoidance of falsehood as well as speaking of facts as they occur, witheut causing injury, brahmacaryam, avoidance of sexual relation, ca vidhih, and dutifulness

सप्त प्राणा: प्रभवन्ति तस्मात् सप्ताचिष: समिधः सप्त होमाः। सप्त इमे लोका येषु चरन्ति प्राणा गुहाशया निहिता: सप्त सप्त ॥८। 8. From Him emerge the seven sense- organs, the seven flames, the seven kinds of fuel, the seven oblations, and these seven seats where move the sense-organs that sleep in the cavity, having been deposited (by God) in groups of seven. Moreover, tasmat, from that very Purusa; prabha- vanti, originate; sapta pranah, the seven sense-organs, that are in the head;1 and (so do) their sapta arcisah, seven flames-the illumination of their objects; similarly the sapta samidhah, seven kinds of fuel-seven sense- objects, for the sense-organs are kindled by their objects; sapta homah, seven oblations-the perception 1 Two eyes, two ears, two nostrils, and tongue.

II.i. 9] MUNDAKA UPANIȘAD I25

of those sense-objects, for another Vedic text says, "That which is his sense-perception is what he offers as an oblation" (Mn.LXXX I). Besides, ime sapta lokah, these seven seats of the senses; yesu, in which caranti. move about; prānh, the sense-organs. The expression, "where move the sense-organs (prānāh)" is an attribute of the prānas, so as to exclude Prana and Apana (the functions of exhaling and inhaling). (They are) guhāśayāh; derived from the word guhā (cavity) and the root si (to sleep), guhāsayāh means the sleepers in (the cavity of) the body or the heart, during sleep. Nihitah, (having been) deposited-by the Ordainer; sapta sapta, in groups of seven, in each living being. The purport of the topic is that from the supreme, omniscient Purusa Himself emerge all that are the karmas or the fruits of karma of those men of knowl- edge who sacrifice to the Self,1 as well as all that are the karmas and the auxiliaries and results of karma of the ignorant people. अतः समुद्रा गिरयश्च सर्वेऽ- स्मात्स्यन्दन्ते सिन्धवः सर्वरूपाः । अतश्च सर्वा ओषधयो रसश्च येनैष भूतैस्तिष्ठते ह्यन्तरात्मा ॥६।। 9. From Him emerge all the oceans and all the mountains. From Him flow out the rivers of various forms. And from Him issue all the

1 Those who perform sacrifices as a worship of the supreme Lord with this idea. "All this, as well as myself, is but the supreme Self."-A.G

I26 EIGHT UPANISADS [II i. 9

corns, as well as the juice, by virtue of which does the internal self exist in the midst of the elements.

Atah, from this, Purusa, ıssue; sarve, all; samudrāh, the oceans of Salt etc .; ca girayah, and the mountains -Himalayas etc ;- all these emerge from this Purusa Hımself. Asmat, from this Purusa; syandante, flow out; sindhavah, the rıvers-Gangā etc .; sarvarupāh, of various forms. Ca atah, and from Hım; sarvāh osadhayah, all corns-rice, barley, etc .; ca rasah, and the juice-that is of six kinds,1 yena, by virtue of which; hi, verily; tisthate (rather tisthati) exists; bhutaih, surrounded by the elements, that are gross and five in number; eşah antarātmā, this internal self, the subtle body, so called because of its existence in between the (gross) body and the Self

Thus from Purusa emerged all this. Therefore "all that is a modification is supported by speech and exists only in name" (Ch.VI.i.5-6), and it is false; and that which is Purusa is true. Hence:

पुरुष एवेदं विश्वं कर्म तपो ब्रह्म परामृतम्। एतद्यो वेद निहितं गुहायां सोऽविद्याग्रन्थि विकिरतीह सोम्य ।।१०। इति मुण्डकोपनिषदि द्वितीयमुण्डके प्रथम: खण्डः ॥ 10. Purușa alone is all this-(comprising) the karma and knowledge. He who knows this

1 Has six kinds of taste-sweet, sour, bitter, pungent, astringent, saline.

II 1. I0] MUNDAKA UPANIȘAD I27

supremely immortal Brahman, as existing in the heart, destroys here the knot of ignorance, O good-looking one ! Purusah eva, Purușa, alone, ıs; viśvam idam, all this. There is no such thing as the unverse apart from Purusa. Therefore the very thing that was asked in the question, "O adorable sir, (which is that thing) which having been known, all this becomes known?" (Mu. I 1.3), has been stated here. For on knowing this Purusa, the supreme Self, the source of everything, there arises the realisation: "Purusa alone is all this- there is nothing besides." It is being explained as to what this "all" means: Karma, such as Agnihotra; tapas, knowledge and the separate fruit accruing from it, all these constitute this "all". And all that is but the product of Brahman. Therefore, yah, he who, veda, knows, the brahma paramrtam, Brahman the supremely immortal, as "I indeed am all this"; as nihitam guhāyām, existing in the heart, of every being, sah, he; by virtue of such realisation; vikirati, throws away, destroys; avrdyagranthim, the knot of ignorance, the tendencies and impressions created by ignorance that are hard to untie like knots; iha, here, even while living, and not after death; somya, O good- looking one!

SECOND MUŅDAKA

CANTO II

It is being stated how the Immutable can be known, though It is formless:

आवि: संनिहितं गुहाचरं नाम महत्पद्मत्रैतत् समपितम्। एजत्प्राणन्निमिषञ्च यदेत- जानथ सदसद्वरेण्यं परं विज्ञानाद्यद्वरिष्ठं प्रजानाम् ॥१॥ I. (It is) self-effulgent, well seated, and well known as moving in the heart, and (It is) the great goal. On It are fixed all these-that move, breathe, and wink or do not wink. Know this One that comprises the gross and the subtle, to be beyond the ordinary knowledge of creatures, and (It is) the eligible and the highest of all. Avih, self-effulgent, (and) sannihitam, well seated; appearing as though perceiving words etc. through the limiting adjuncts, viz the organs of speech etc., in accordance with another Vedic text, "It shines, It blazes up", It is cognised in the hearts of all beings as. revealing Itself through such functions of the condi- tioning factors as seeing, hearing, thinking, knowing. That Brahman that is avih, effulgent and sannihitam, well seated, in the heart; of guhācaram nāma, well known as moving in the cavity of the heart, through such modes as seeing and hearing. (It is) mahat, great,

II.ii. 2] MUŅŅAKA UPANIȘAD I29

because It is the greatest of all; (It is) padam, the goal, since It is the resort of all beings, the word being derived from the root pad in the sense of that which is reached by all. Now is being shown how It is the great goal. Sınce atra, on this Brahman, samarpitam, is fixed-like the spokes to the nave of a chariot wheel; ejat, the moving, birds etc .; pranat, all that breathes -men and others who inhale and exhale; yat nimisat, all that has such activities as winking, ca, and-which word suggests all that does not wink,-etat, all this, is fixed on this very Brahman. Etat, this One, on which all things rest; jānatha, you know, O disciples! That which comprises the sat and the asat is what has become your Self; for the sat, formed, gross, and the asat, formless, subtle, do not exist apart from It. (Know) that very Entity alone that is surely the varenyam, eligible, covetable to all-because of Its eternalıty; (and that is) param, distınct; vijñānat, from the knowledge; prajanam, of beings-this is how vijñānāt is connected with the remote prajānām; that is to say, It is beyond the range of ordinary knowl- edge. (Know) yat varstham, that which is the highest; for that Brahman alone is the highest of all high things, by virtue of Its freedom from all defects.

यस्मिलोका निहिता लोकिनश्च। तदेतदक्षरं ब्रह्म स प्राणस्तदु वाङ्मन: तदेतत्सत्यं तदमृतं तद्वेद्वव्यं सोम्य विद्धि ॥२। 2. That which is bright and is subtler than the subtle, and that on which are fixed all the 9

I30 EIGHT UPANISADS [II.ii. 2

worlds as well as the dwellers of the worlds, is this immutable Brahman; It is this vital force; It, again, is speech and mind. This Entity, that is such, is true, It is immortal. It is to be penetra- ted. O good-looking one, shoot at it.

Moreover, yal, that which is; arcimat, bright. Brahman is bright, because by Its light the sun etc shine. Furthermore, yat, that which, is anu, subtle; anubhyah, as compared with the subtle things, e g. the grain called śyāmaka. From the use of the word ca (and), it is implied that it is much bigger than the big earth etc. Yasmin, on which, mhitah, are fixed; lokah, worlds-earth etc .; ca lokinah, and the dwellers of the worlds-men and others, for all are known as depen- dent on Consciousness. Tat etat aksaram brahma, It is this immutable Brahman, that is the support of all; that is sah pranah, the familiar vital force; tat u, that, again, is the van-manah, speech and mind-as well as all the senses (of perception) and organs (of action) That Entity, again, is the inner Consciousness, for the assem- blage of life and senses is dependent on Conscious- ness, as is shown in another Vedic text: "The Vital Force of the vital force" (Br.IV.iv.18, Ke.I.2) Tat etat, that Entity, the Immutable, that is thus the inner Consciousness within life etc .; is satyam, true; and therefore tat amrtam, It is immortal, indestructible Tat veddhavyam, that is to be penetrated, to be shot at, by the mind; the idea is that the mind is to be concentrated on It. Since this is so, therefore somya, O

II i1. 3] MUNDAKA UPANISAD I3I

good-looking one, viddhi, shoot-fix your mind on the Immutable. It is being shown how It is to be shot at:

धनुगृंहीत्वौपनिषदं महास्त्रं शरं हयुपासानिशितं संधयीत। आयम्य तन्भ्ावगतेन चेतसा लक्ष्यं तदेवाक्षरं सोम्य विद्धि॥३॥

weapon familiar in the Upanisads, one should 3. Taking hold of the bow, that is the great

fix on it an arrow, sharpened with meditation. Drawing the string with a mind absorbed in Its thought, hit, O good-looking one, that very target that is the Immutable.

Grhītvā, taking up; the dhanuh, bow; consisting in the mahāstram aupanisadam, the great weapon that occurs, i.e. is well known in the Upanisads; on that bow sandhayita, one should fix; a saram, arrow. What kind of arrow? That is being stated: Upāsāmttam, sharpened, that is to say purified by constant medita- tion. And after fixing the arrow, and ayamya, having drawn the string, that is to say, having withdrawn from the objects the inner organ together with the senses, and concentrating them on the target alone; for the literal meaning of drawing the string with the hand ıs not admissible here; cetasā tadbhāvagatena, with the mind absorbed in the bhāva or bhāvana, thought of that Brahman; viddhi, hit; somya, O good-looking one;

I32 EIGHT UPANISADS [II n. 3

tat eva laksyam aksaram, that very target that is the Immutable, described earlier. The bow etc. that have been mentioned are being specified ·

प्रणवो धनुः शरो ह्यात्मा ब्रह्म तल्लक्ष्य बुच्यते। अप्रमत्तेन वेद्वव्यं शरवत्तन्मयो भवेत् ॥४॥ 4. Om is the bow; the soul is the arrow; and Brahman is called its target. It is to be hit by an unerring man. One should become one with It just like an arrow. Pranavah, the syllable Om; is dhanuh, bow Just as the bow is the cause of the arrow's hitting the target, so Om is the bow that brings about the soul's entry into the Immutable: For the soul when purified by the repetition of Om, gets fixed in Brahman with the help of Om without any hindrance, just as an arrow shot from a bow gets transfixed in the target. There- fore Om is a bow, being comparable to a bow. Ātmi hi sarah, the soul is surely the arrow-the soul that is but the supreme Self in Its conditioned state, that has entered here into the body as the witness of the modes of the intellect, like the sun etc. into water. That soul, like an arrow, is shot at the Self Itself that is the Immutable. Therefore brahma tallaksyam ucyate, Brahman is said to be the target of the soul. It is called the target since, just as in the case of a mark, It is aimed at with self-absorption by those who want to concentrate their minds. That being so, the target that is Brahman, veddhavyam, should be shot at; apramattena, by one who is unerring, who is free from

II.ii. 5] MUŅŅAKA UPANISAD I33

the error of desiring to enjoy external objects, who is detached from everything, who has control over his senses and has concentration of mind. After that, after hitting the mark, tanmayah bhavet saravat, one should remain identified with Brahman like an arrow The idea is this: Just as the success of the arrow consists in its becoming one with the target, similarly one should bring about the result, consisting in becom- ing one with the Immutable, by eliminating ideas of self-identification with the body etc

The Immutable being hard to grasp, It is being presented over and over agamn so as to make It easıly comprehensible :

यस्पिन्यौः पृथिवी चान्तरिक्ष- मोतं मनः सह प्राणश्र सर्वेः। तमेवैकं जानथ आत्मानमन्या वाचो विमुश्चथामृतस्यैप सेतुः॥॥ 5. Know that Self alone that is one without a second, on which are strung heaven, the earth, and the inter-space, the mind, and the vital forces together with all the other organs; and give up all other talks. This is the bridge leading to immortality. Yasmin, that, the immutable Purusa, on whom; dyauh, heaven, prthivi, the earth; ca antarksam, and intermediate space, o'am, are strung; ca, as also; manas, the mind; saha sarvaih pranaih, together with all the other organs; tam eva, Him alone-the support of all; the ekam, one without a second; janatha (is the

I34 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.n. 5

same as jānītha), (you) know, O disciples. and having known, atmānam, the Self, the inmost reality of your- selves and all beings; vimuñcatha (is the same as urmuñcata), discard; anyāh vācah, other talks. that constitute the lower knowledge, and give up also all karmas together with their fruits that are presented by the lower knowledge; because esah, this, this knowl- edge of the Self; is the setuh, bridge, the means of achievement; amrtasya, of immortality, of liberation It is comparable to a bridge, since it is a means for getting across the great sea of the world. In support of this here is another Vedic text: "Knowing Him alone, one goes beyond death; there is no other path to proceed by"1 (Śv III.8, VI.I5). अरा इव रथनाभो संहता यत्र नाड्य: स एषोऽन्तश्चरते बहुधा जायमान: । ओमित्येवं ध्यायथ आत्मानं स्वस्ति ः पराय तमसः परस्तात् ॥६॥ 6. Within that (heart) in which are fixed the nerves like the spokes on the hub of a chariot wheel, moves this aforesaid Self by becoming multiformed. Meditate on the Self thus with the help of Om. May you be free from hindrances in going to the other shore beyond darkness. Moreover, yatra, where, in the heart in which; arāh iva, like the spokes; fixed rathanābhau, on the hub of a chariot wheel; samhatah, are pinned, nādyah, the nerves, that spread over the whole body; in that 1 Or-"there is no other path for reaching (the goal)".

II.ii. 6] MUŅŅAKA UPANIȘAD I35

heart, sah esaķ, that aforesaid One, the Self under discussion that is the witness of all the ideas occurring to the intellect; antah carate, moves, exists, within, carate being the same as carati. (It exists) as though seeing, hearing, thinking, and knowing, and as though bahudhā jāyamānah, becoming multiformed, in accord- ance with the mental states of anger, joy, etc., on account of Its conformity with the limiting adjunct, mind. Common people, accordingly say, "He has become joyous", "He has become angry" Evam, thus, resorting to the imagination stated above, you dhyayatha, think; of that atmanam, Self, om it, with the help of Om. This is said, and has to be said, to the disciples by a teacher possessed of this knowledge. And the disciples have stepped on to the path of libera- tion after discarding all karmas, for they hanker after the knowledge of Brahman. The teacher utters his benediction so that they may realise Brahman without any obstacle: Svasti (astu), let there be no hindrance; vah, for you; paraya,1 for (reaching) the other shore; parastat, beyond. Beyond what? Tamasah, of the darkness, of ignorance; that is to say, for the realisa- tion of the true nature of the Self as Brahman that is free from ignorance. It is being shown as to where He exists who forms the subject matter of the superior knowledge, who is beyond darkness, and who has to be reached after crossing the ocean of the world: 1 Another reading is "pārāya, for crossing over (to the shore)".

I36 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II ii. 7

यः सवज्ञः सर्वविद्यस्यैष महिमा भुवि। दिव्ये ब्रह्मपुरे ह्वोष व्योम्न्यात्मा प्रतिष्टितः ॥ मनोमयः प्राणशरीरनेता प्रतिष्वितोऽसे हृदयं सन्निधाय। तद्विज्ञानेन परिपश्यन्ति धीरा आनन्दरूपममृतं यद्विभाति॥9। 7. That Self which is omniscient in general and all-knowing in detail and who has such glory in this world-that Self, which is of this kind-is seated in the space within the luminous city of Brahman. It is conditioned by the mind, It is the carrier of the vital forces and the body, It is seated in food by placing the intellect (in the cavity of the heart). The discriminating people realise, through their knowledge, the Self as existing in Its fullness on all sides-the Self that shines surpassingly as blissfulness and immortality. The portion yah sarvajñah sarvavid was explained earher (I19). He is being dıstınguished agaın: Yasya esah mahima bhuvr, He who has this well-known splendour in the world. What is that splendour? He under whose sway these heaven and earth are held in position; under whose rule the sun and moon rotate interminably like fire-brands; under whose command the rivers and seas do not overflow their boundaries; similarly under whose authority are directed the moving and the unmoving; in the same way, whose

II.11. 7] MUNDAKA UPANIȘAD I37

command the seasons, half years, and years do not transgress, and so also under whose rule the agents, karmas, and fruits do not violate their appointed hours, yasya, He whose, mahima, glory; is esah. such; bhuvi, in the world, esah, that One ;- the sarvajnah, omniscient (in general), the effulgent One of such glory; -is pratisthitah, seated, in the divye, luminous- illuminated by all the states of the intellect, brahma- pure, in the city of Brahman-this being the place where Brahman is ever manifest in Its nature of Consciousness, so "the city of Brahman" means the lotus of the heart Vyomni, in the space, that is within that heart, Brahman is perceived as though seated there in that space within the lotus of the heart; for any gomg, coming, or stayirg, in any other sense, is impossible for One who is all-pervasive like space. Sah, He, the Self, as seated there, is revealed vari- ously through the mental states, and hence He is manomayah, associated with the mind, being condition- ed by it, prana-sarira-neta, the carrier of the vital forces a the Toew, in the matter of transferring them from the gross body to the other (gross or finer1) body, pratisthitah anne, existing in the food, that takes the shape of a body that is a modification of the food eaten and is subject to growth and decay day by day; sannidhaya, by depositıng, the hrdayam, intellect; in the cavity of the lotus (of the heart). The presence of the Self in the heart is what is meant by Its being seated in food (ie. in the body), for the Self is not really seated in food. Vyñānena, through special

1 According to one reading, the finer body is meant

I38 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.i1. 7

knowledge, emerging from the instruction of scriptures and the teacher, and arsing from the control of the inner and outer organs, renunciation of everything, and detachment, dhirah. the discrimmating people; pari- pasyantı, rcalise as existing in Its fullness everywhere; tat, that, that reality of the Self; yat, which; vibhāti, shines surpassingly, for ever in one's own Self. as anandarupam, blissfulness, as amrtam, immortality, freed from all evil, miseries, and troubles.

The result of this knowledge of this supreme Selt is being stated: भिद्यते हृदयग्रन्थिश्छिद्यन्ते सवसंशयाः। क्षीयन्ते चास्य कर्माणि तस्मिन् दृष्टे परावरे ॥८।। 8. When that Self, which is both high and low, is realised, the knot of the heart gets untied, all doubts become solved, and all one's actions become dissipated. (When that which is both high and low is realised), bhidyate, is untied, is destroyed; hrdayagranthih, the knot of the heart-the host of tendencies and impres- sions of ignorance, in the form of desires that hang on to the intellect, as is declared in another Vedic text: "the desires that subsist in one's heart" (Ka.II ii1 14; Br IV.iv 7). They are based on one's heart and not on the Self. Sarvasamsayah, all doubts, with regard to all objects of cognition, that persist in ordinarv men continuously till death, like the current of the Ganga; chidyante, are dispelled. Ca, and; asya, one's, of the man whose doubts have been solved, whose ignorance has been removed; kşīyante, get dissipated; karmāņi,

II ii 9] MUŅDAKA UPANISAD I39

the actions, that preceded the rise of illumination but had not yielded results in earher lives, as also those actions that accompany the rise of illumination, but not so the actions that produced the present life, since they have already begun to bear their fruits. All this happens tasmin drste parāvare, when that One, the omniscient and transcendent-who is both para, high, as the cause, and avara, low, as the effect-is seen directly as "I am this" The idea is that one becomes free on the eradication of the causes of the worldly state. The following three verses sum up briefly all that has been stated earlier:

हिरण्मये परे कोशे विरजं ब्रह्म निष्कलम्। तच्छुभ्रं ज्योतिषां ज्योतिस्तद्यदात्मविदो विदुः।।। 9. In the supreme, bright sheath is Brahman, free from taints and without parts. It is pure, and is the Light of lights. It is that which the knowers of the Self realise.

Pare hiranmaye kośe, in the supreme, bright sheath; it is called a sheath because of its being the place for the realisation of the nature of the Self, just as a scabbard is in the case of a sword; it is para, supreme, being the inmost of all; and hiranmaya, shining, being illumined with the intellectual percep- tions. There exists brahma, Brahman, so called because of being the greatest as well as the Self of all; (Brahman that is) virajam, free from taints, from all taints of rajas, defects, such as ignorance; (that is) niskalam, without any connection with parts, that is to

I40 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.11. 9 '

say, partless. Since It is tamntless and partless, there- fore tat, It; is śubhram, pure, tat, that, is yyotth, the illuminator, jyotisam, of all lights, of even fire etc that are inherently bright. The purport is this. The bright- ness of even fire etc. is caused by the internal light of their Self that is identical with Brahman. That light of the Self is the highest light that is not ignited by anything else. It is tat, that, yat, which, they viduh, know, who are atmavidah, knowers of the Self-the discriminating people who know their own Self as the witness of all intellectual modifications with regard to such objects as sound etc. People, engaged in the pursuit of the experiences of the Self, tat uiduh, know It. Since It is the highest light, therefore they alone know It, and not the others who are steeped in the pursuit of external experiences. It is being shown how It is the Light of lights:

न तत्र सूर्यों भाति न चन्द्रतारकं नेमा विद्युतो भान्ति कुतोऽयमग्नि: । तमेव भान्तमनुभाति सर्वं तस्य भासा सर्वमिदं विभाति ॥१०॥ I0. There the sun does not shine, nor the moon or the stars; nor do these flashes of light- ning shine there. How can this fire do so? Everything shines in accordance as He does so; by His light all this shines diversely. Tatra, there, in Brahman that is the Self of the sun itself; suryah, the sun, that illuminates everything; na bhäti, does not shine The purport is that the sun

II.11. I0] MUŅDAKA UPANIȘAD I4I

does not illuminate that Brahman, for it is by the light of Brahman that the sun irradiates all that is not the Self Not that the sun is intrinsically possessed of the power of illuminating. Similarly na candratārakam, neither the moon nor the stars; na imah vidyutah, nor these lightning flashes; bhanti, shine; kutah ayam agnıh, how can this fire, that is known to us? To cut short, this universe anubhāt tam eva bhāntam, shines in accord- ance as He, the supreme Lord, shines, because of the fact that He is naturally effulgent Just as water, fire- brand, etc, burn in accordance as the fire does so, owing to their contact with fire, but not by themnselves, similarly, only tasya bhāsā, by His light, sarvam idam, all this-the universe constituted by the sun etc., vibhāti, shines diversely. Since, in this way, it is that very Brahman that illuminates and shines through the different manifested lights, therefore it is inferred that Brahman has Its light by Its own right; for anything that is not possessed of natural luminosity cannot enkindle others, for pots etc. are not seen to irradiate others whereas luminous things, like the sun etc., are seen to do so.

It has been established elaborately with the help of reasoning that Brahman, which is the Light of lights, is alone true, and that everything else is Its modification-a modification that exists only in name, having speech alone as its support. That fact is being restated at the end by this mantra which is a sort of concluding reaffirmation of the foregoing:

142 EIGHT UPANISADS [II.11. II

व्र हैवेदममृतं पुरस्ताद्ब्रह्म पश्चादुब्रह्म दक्षिणतश्चोत्तरेण। अघश्चोरध्वं च प्रसृतं ब्रह्मैवेदं विश्वमिदं वरिष्टम्॥११॥ इति मुण्डकोपनिषदि द्वितीयमुण्डके द्वितीय: खण्डः॥ II. All this that is in front is but Brahman, the immortal. Brahman is on the right, as well as on the left; above and below, too, is extended Brahman alone. This world is nothing but Brahman, the highest. Idam brahma eva, this is but Brahman, as defined earlier; that is purastat, in front, that which appears (as an object) in front of people, whose vision is aftected by ignorance, is Brahman alone. Similarly, brahma paścat, Brahman is at the back; so also daksınatah, on the right; ca uttarena, and on the left; similarly adhah, below; ca urdhvam, and above; all that is prasrtam, extended everywhere, in the shape of pro- ducts, appears as different from Brahman, and is possessed of name and form. To be brief, idam, this; viśvam, universe; is varistham, the most high; brahma eva, Brahman alone. All ideas of non-Brahman are but ignorance like the idea of the snake super- imposed on a rope.1 Brahman alone is the supreme truth. This is the declaration of the Vedas.

1 The identity of Brahman and the universe, implied by the sentence, is by way of elimination of the latter. We say, "That (supposed) ghost is but a stump", meaning thereby that the stump alone exists, the idea of ghost being false. So when we say, "The world is but Brahman", we mean that Brahman alone exists, and nothing else.

THIRD MUNDAKA

CANTO I

That higher knowledge has been presented, by which is attamed that immutable Truth, called Purusa, from whose realisation follows the total eradication of such causes of the worldly state as the knots of the heart And Yoga, as the means for this reahsation, has also been stated with the help of such imagery as the taking up of a bow Now have to be presented truth and the rest that are helpful auxiliaries to that Yoga, therefore the subsequent text is begun. And though Reality was determined earlier, It, too, 1s being primarily ascertained in a different way, for It is very inscrutable. While on this subject, a mantra, which takes the place of a brief enunciation, is being introduced as a help to the comprehension of the supreme Reality:

द्वा सुपर्णा सयुजा सखाया समानं वृक्षं परिषस्वजाते। तयोरन्य: पिप्पलं स्वाद्वत्त्य-

नश्नन्नन्यो अभिचाकशीति ॥१॥ I. Two birds that are ever associated and have similar names, cling to the same tree. Of these, the one eats the fruit of divergent tastes, and the other looks on without eating. Dvā (or rather dvau, means) two; suparņā (being the same as suparnau, means) entities who are well

I44 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III.i. I

related,1 or they are so called because of their analogy with birds,2 (which are) sayuja (that is to say, sayujau), ever associated together; sakhāya (or rather sakhāyau), bear the same names, and have the same cause of manifestation. Being of such characteristics, these two parisasvajāte, hug (cling to), like two birds; samānam vrksam, the same single tree, for enjoying the fruits. It is the "same" in the sense of the identity of the place of their perception; and "tree" means the body because of being demolished like the tree This is the banyan tree3 that has its roots upward and branches downward (G XV.I; Ka II.111 I), that sprouts up from its material cause, the Unmarafested (Maya), called the feld (G XIII.I-3), and that provides a support for all the results of karmas of all beings. God and the soul-as conditioned by the subtle body which holds in itself the tendencies and impressions created by ignorance, desire, and action, -cling to it like two birds. Tayoh, of these two; who hug this tree, anyah, the one (the individual soul), the' knower of the field who clings to the tree of the subtle body that is its limiting adjunct; att, eats, enjoys, owing to non-discrimination, pippalam, the fruit, con- sisting of happiness and misery brought about by action; which is svadu, full of tastes, consisting in the experience of multifarious mental reactions. Anaśnan, 1 The individual soul, with its limited knowledge, is under the control of God who is omniscient Through this commendable dependence the former is related with the latter. 2 Since clinging to the tree etc are found in both the cases 3 Aśvattha, means a banyan; but derivatively it means transitory-whose existence tomorrow (śrah) is unpredictable.

III.1. 2] MUŅDAKA UPANIȘAD I45

without tasting; anyah, the other, God, who is by nature eternal, pure, wise, and free, who is omniscient and has the totality of Maya as His limiting adjunct -that God does not taste, for merely by His presence as the eternal witness, He is the director of both the enjoyer and the enjoyed. He is the other one who merely abhicākašīti, looks on, without enjoying, for His directorship consists in mere observation, as in the case of a king.

समाने वृक्षे पुरुषो निमन्नोऽ- नीशया शोचति मुह्यमान: । जुषं यदा पश्यत्यन्यमीश- मस्य महिमानमिति चीतशोक:॥२। 2. On the same tree, the individual soul remains drowned (i.e. stuck), as it were; and so it moans, being worried by its impotence. When it sees thus the other, the adored Lord, and His glory, then it becomes liberated from sorrow. Facts being as they are, samane urkse, in the same tree, in the body mentioned earlier; (there moans) purusah, the enjoying individual soul; being nimagnah, sunken. Drowned in the water of the sea (of the world) like a bottle gourd, under the heavy weight of ignorance, desire, and attachment to the fruits of action, owing to complete identification with the body, this very being has such ideas as, "I am the son of such a one and the grandson of that one; I am lean, I am stout; I have qualities, I am devoid of qualities; I am happy, I am miserable"; and he thinks that apart I0

I46 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III.i. 2

from that personality of his there is no other; and so he takes birth and dies, and gets united with or separated from friends and relatives. And therefore anisaya, through impotence, consisting in such moods of despondency as, "1 am good for nothing", "My son is lost, and my wife is dead, what avails my life?"-with such moods he ocati, grieves, is smitten; muhyamanah, being worried, by various kinds of troubles because of his ignorance. That soul, while constantly undergoing the degradation of being born among ghosts, beasts, men, and others, is, in the course of multifarious births, perchance shown the path of Yoga, as a result of his accumulation of good deeds, by some very compassionate person; and then becoming endowed with non-injury, truth, continence, renunciation of everything, control of internal and external organs, and concentration of mınd, yadā, when, while engaged in meditation, paśyati, (1t) sees, through diverse paths of Yoga and through karmas, (sees) justam, the adored One, anyam, the One who is other-other than that conditioned by the limiting adjunct of the tree of the world; (sees) isam, the Lord -who is supramundane, beyond hunger, thirst, sorrow, delusion, and death, the Lord of the whole universe- (thus): "I am this God who is the Self of all and is the same in every being; and I am not the other illusory Self delimited by conditions conjured up by ignorance"; and when he sees asya mahimānam, His glory, constituted by the universe; iti, in this way: "This is my glory who am the supreme Lord"-when he sees thus, tadā, then; he becomes vitasokah, hiberated from grief, becomes saved from all the sea

III.i. 3] MUŅŅAKA UPANIȘAD I47

of sorrow, that is to say, he reaches the end of all desires

Another verse also presents this very idea elaborately. यदा पश्य: पश्यते रुक्मवर्ण कर्तारमीशं पुरुषं ब्रह्मयोनिम्। तदा विद्वान्पुण्यपापे विधूय निरजन: परमं साक्यमुपैति॥३॥

hued, creator, lord, and the source of the inferior 3. When the seer sees Purusa-the golden

Brahman-then the illumined one completely shakes off both virtue and vice, becomes taint- less, and attains absolute equality. Yada, when, the paśyah, seer-the word, derived in the sense of one who sees, means the illumined aspirant, paśyate (is the same as paśyatı), sees, in the manner described earlier; rukmavarnam, the naturally self-eftulgent One, or the (golden hued) One whose light is indestructible like that of gold; kartāram, the creator, isam, the lord, of the whole universe, purusam, Purușa; brahmayonım, the Brahman that is the source, or (the phrase means) the source of the inferior Brahman,-when he sees thus, tada, then; that vidvan, illumined one, the seer, punyapāpe vidhuya, having completely shaken off, burnt away, together with their roots, both virtue and vice-the two kinds of action that constitute bondage, and having become nirañjanah, free from taint, free from suffer- ing; upaiti, achieves; paramam sāmyam, absolute equality, consisting in non-duality. The equality

I48 EIGHT UPANISADS [III i 3

within the range of duality is indeed inferior to it. As compared with this, he attains the highest equipoise that is the same as non-dualty.

प्राणो ह्वेष यः सर्वभूतैर्विभाति विजानन्विद्वान्भवते नातिवादी। आत्मक्रीड आत्मरति: क्रियावा- नेष ब्रह्मविदां वरिष्ठः ।४॥

4. This one is, verily the Vital Force, which shines divergently through all beings. Knowing this, the illumined man has no occasion to go beyond anything in his talk. He disports in the Self, delights in the Self. and is engrossed in (spiritual) effort. This one is the chief among the knowers of Brahman. Furthermore, hi esah, verily this One, the One under discussion, viz prēnah, the Vital Force of the vital forces, who is the supreme Lord; vibhāti, shines divergently, sarvabhutaih, through all beings, ranging from Brahma to a clump of grass; the third (instru. mental) case is used here to indicate the state of the thing; and so the phrase means, "as existing among all beings as the Self of all." He who becomes vrdvān, an illumined soul; viānan, after having known, this all-pervasive One as his own Self, directly through the experience, "I am this"; (he) na bhavate, does not become (bhavate being the same as bhavati), what one does by virtue of mere scriptural knowledge. What does he not become? Ativādi, a tall talker, is one who is apt to go beyond all things in his talk. But

III.i. 4] MUNDAKA UPANISAD I49

the one who has become enlightened by realising directly the Self that is the Vital Force of the vital forces has no occasion to resort to tall talk. This is the purport. For when the realisation comes that everything is the Self and there is nothing beside, then what will he excel in his speech' But the man for whom there is the vision of something different (from the Self) can talk by going beyond it. This enlightened man, however, does not see anything, does not hear anything, does not cognise anything apart from the Self; therefore he does not go beyond anything in hıs talk Moreover, (he becomes) ātmakrīdah, disporter in the Self alone, and in nothing else, e.g. in sons, wife, and others. Sımilarly (he is) atmaratih, he has his enjoyment, pleasure, in the Self alone. The dis- tinction between the two is that kridā (disport) is dependent on external accessories, whereas ratih (pleasure) is independent of auxiliaries, and consists in a mere pleasurable feeling towards external objects. So also krıyāvān, is one who is possessed of, i.e. given to, (spiritual) practices like knowledge, meditation, detachment, and so on. If there is (1.e. if atmarati and kryāvān appear as) a compound, then the mean- ing will be "whose activity consists in his pleasure in the Self", in which case either the implication of the bahuvrihi compound or the meaning of the suffix matup (1e. vān in kriyāvān), (both indicating possession), becomes redundant.1

1 The bahuvrihr form should be sımply atmaratıkriyah, which conveys the same meaning, so that the suffix vān becomes useless. Or if the suffix is retained, the bahuvrihi loses its import

I50 EIGHT UPANISADS [III 1 4

(From this single compound) some, however, aim at deriving a meaningl conducive to the combination of karma, like Agnıhotra etc, with the knowledge of Brahman. But this runs counter to the statement of the primary idea in "esah brahmavidām varisthah, this one is the highest of those who know Brahman." For none who is steeped in external actions can dis- port in the Self and delight in the Self, inasmach as one can disport in the Self only on ceasing from external activity, external activity and disport in the Self being opposed to each other For light and dark- ness cannot possibly exist simultaneously at the same place. Therefore the assertion that by this (compound) is established the combination of knowledge and karma is a vain rigmarole. And this is borne out by the Vedic texts "Give up all other talks" (Mu.II.11.5), "Through the Yoga of renunciation" (Mu.III 11.6), and so on Therefore he alone is here the "man of action" (kriyāvān) who is engaged in the practice of knowledge, meditation, and so on, and who is a monk who does not transgress the limits of moral propriety. He who conforms to this description, who has nothing to transcend in his talk, who dsports in his Self and delights in his Self, who is given to spiritual practices, and who is fixed in Brahman, is brahmavidam varisthah, the chief among all the knowers of Brahman.

Now are being enjoined for the monk such disciplines as truth and the rest that are pre- dominatingly characterised by detachment and that are helpful to the fullest knowledge.

1 Viz "disporting in the Self and performing karma."

III i. 5] MUNŅAKA UPANIȘAD I5I

सत्येन लभ्यस्तपसा होष आत्मा सम्यग्ज्ानेन ब्रह्मचर्येण नित्यम्। अन्तःशरीरे ज्योतिमयो हि शुभ्रो यं पश्यन्ति यतय: क्षीणदोषाः।५।। 5. The bright and pure Self within the body, that the monks with (habitual effort and) attenuated blemishes see, is attainable through truth, concentration, complete knowledge, and continence, practised constantly. (The Self is) labhyah, attainable; satyena, through truth, through the rejection of untruth; moreover, tapasā hi, verily through the concentration, of the mind and senses, which meaning (of tapas) follows from the Smrti, "The highest tapas (lit austerity) con- sists in the concentration of the mind and senses" (Mbh.Sā.250. 4). That kind of tapas is indeed the greatest favourable discipline because of its natural tendency towards a vision of the Self, but not so the other kind of tapas (austerity) e g cāndrayana and the rest. The expression, "esah ātmā labhyah-this Self is attainable", is understood everywhere. (This Self is attainable) samyag-jñānena, by complete knowledge, by the vision of the Self in Its reality;1 brahmacaryena, 1 By samyak mñāna, here, is to be understood such immature but adequate knowledge of the meaning of the text that matures into the knowledge of the thing itself. The mature knowledge, productive of direct perception, does not depend on other factors for bringing about its result, viz the cessation of ignorance So it is immature knowledge that alone can be combined with such disciplines as truth etc. for the acquisition of mature knowledge.

I52 EIGHT UPANISADS [III 1. 5

(by continence), through avoidance of sexual relation- ship. By following the analogy of the lamp placed in the middle (which lights up everything on all sides), the word, "mtyam-(practised for) ever," should be supplied everywhere thus by truth practised for ever; by concentration (practised for) ever; by complete knowledge (practised for) ever And it will be said later on, "those in whom there is no crookedness, no falsehcod, and no dissimulation" (Pr I =6) Which 1s this Self that is to be attained through these disciplines? The answer is being given. (That Self ıs) antahsarire, inside the body, in the space within the lotus of the heart; (which Self is) jyourmayah, golden hued (III i.3); and Subhrak, holy, vam, which, which Self, yatayah, the monks who habitually strive for It; ksinadosah, whose mental defects-anger etc .- have become attenuated, pokyant, see, realise That Self is attained by the monks through the disciplines of truth etc. constantly practised, but not through inconstant truth etc This is eulogistic for commendmg the disciplines of truth and the rest. सत्यमेव जयति नानृतं सत्येन पन्था विततो देषयानः। येनाSडक्रमन्त्यूषयो ह्याप्तकामा यत्र तत्सत्यस्य परमं निधानम् ॥६।। 6. Truth alone wins, and not untruth. By truth is maintained for ever the path called Devayana, by which the desireless seers ascend to where exists the supreme treasure attainable through truth.

III.i. 7] MUNŅAKA UPANIȘAD I53

Satyam eva, truth indeed, the truthful man, jayatı,1 wins, na anrtam, not untruthfulness, not the untruthful man; for truth or untruth, by itself, without being practised by men, can have nether victory nor defeat. It is a familar fact in the world that an untruthful man is defeated by a truthful one, but not contrariwise Therefore truth is proved to be a power- ful auxiliary Besides, from scripture it is known that truth is a superior discipline. How' Satyena, by truth, through the prescription of speaking of things as they are, the panthah, path; called devayānah, Deva- yana, the Path of gods; is uitatah, spread, maintained for ever; yena, by which (path), akramanti, ascend, the rsayah, seers, who are free from deceit, diplomacy, want of charity, pride, and falsehood; who are āptakamah, free from desires for everything. (They ascend there) yatra, where, exists tat, that, paramam, best; nidhanam, treasure, that is deposited as a human goal; satyasva, as related-by way of being its result- with truth, which is the highest discipline The path, too, by which they ascend there, is laid with truth- this is how this portion is to be construed with the earlier. It is being said what that thing is and what Its attributes are: बृहच्च तदिव्यमचिन्त्यरूपं सूक्ष्माच्च तत्सूक्ष्मतरं विभाति। दूरात्सुदूरे तदिहान्तिके च पश्यत्स्विहैव निहितं गुहायाम्॥७॥ I Another reading ıs jayate.

I54 EIGHT UPANISADS [III 1. 7

7. It is great and self-effulgent; and Its form is unthinkable. It is subtler than the subtle. It shines diversely. It is further away than the far-off, and It is near at hand in this body. Among sentient beings It is (perceived as) seated in this very body, in the cavity of the heart. Tat, that, the Brahman under consideration, which is attainable through the disciplines of truth and the rest; is brhat, great, because of Its all-pervasiveness; divyam, self-effulgent, super-sensuous; and (It is) therefore acintya-rupam, such as Its features cannot be thought of; It is suksmataram, subtler, than the subtle things like space, for Its subtleness is unsurpassing, It being the cause of all; It vibhati, shines variously, as sun, moon, and the rest. Besides, tat, that, that Brahman; exists sudure, still further away, durāt, than the far-off place, for it is extremely unattainable to the ignorant; ca, and; (It is) tha, here, in the body; antıke, near, close at hand, to the enlightened, because It is the Self and It permeates all; for the Veda declares that it is inside even space. As engaged in such activities as seeing etc., It is perceived by the Yogis as nihitam, seated; iha, in this body; paśyatsu, amongst those who have eyes, 1e. among sentient beings. Where is It perceived? Guhayam, in the cavity (of the heart), called the intellect; for by the enlightened It is perceived as hidden there, and yet, though existing there, It is not perceived by the ignorant because of Its being covered by ignorance.

III.i. 8] MUŅDAKA UPANISAD I55

A unique means for Its realisation is being stated again :

न चक्षुषा गुह्यते नापि वाचा नान्यैदेवैस्तपसा कर्मणा वा। ज्ञानप्रसादेन विशुद्धसत्त्व- स्ततस्तु तं पश्यते निष्कलं ध्यायमान:॥८।। 8. It is not comprehended through the eye, nor through speech, nor through the other senses; nor is It attained through austerity or karma. Since one becomes purified in mind through the favourableness of the intellect, therefore can one see that indivisible Self through meditation. As na grhyate cakșusā, (It is) not comprehended by the eye, by anybody, because of Its formlessness; na api, nor even; is It encompassed vācā, by speech, because of Its unutterability. na anyath devaih, nor by the other senses; na tapasa, nor by austerity, is It grasped, though tapas is the means for the achievement of everything; similarly na, nor, is It attained; karmana, by Vedic karma, to wit, Agnihotra etc., which are celebrated for their great efficacy. What then is the means for Its attainment? That is being said: Jñanaprasādena, through the favourableness of knowledge (i.e. the intellect)1. Though the intellect in all beings is intrinsically able to make the Self known, 1 The word mñana, here, is derived in the sense of that by which one knows. It means the intellect, the instrument of knowledge -A G.

I56 EIGHT UPANISADS [III.i. 8

still, being polluted by such blemishes as attachment 1o external objecis etc , it becomes agitated and impure, and does not, like a stained mirror or ruffled water, make the reality of the Self known, though It is ever at hand. The favourableness of the intellect comes about when it continues to be transparent and tranquil on having been made clean like a mirror, water, etc., by the removal of the pollution caused by the dirt of attachment, springing from the contact of the senses and sense-objects. Since visuddhasattvah, one who has become pure in mind, through that favourableness of the intellect, becomes fit for seeing Brahman; tatah tu, therefore; pasyate (is the same as pasyatı), one sees, realises; tam, that Self; (that is) mıskalam, indivisible, devoid of all differentiation of lımbs, dhyāyamānah, while (one is) engaged in meditation, when (It is) thought of by one with a concentrated mind, after having such spiritual disciplines as truth etc. and having the senses withdrawn (from objects).1

एषोऽणुरात्मा चेतसा वेदितव्यो यस्मिन्प्राण: पञ्चधा संविवेश। प्राणेश्चित्तं सर्वमोतं प्रजानां यस्मिन्विशुद्धे विभवत्येष आत्मा॥६।। 9. Within (the heart in) the body, where the vital force has entered in five forms, is this 1 Through meditation is attained the favourableness of the intellect, which leads to the seeing of the Self It is the Upanisadic knowledge, freed from doubt etc., that leads to the realisation of truth, mere meditation has no such ability. -- A G

III.i 9] MUŅDAKA UPANISAD I57

subtle Self to be realised through that intelligence by which is pervaded the entire mind as well as the motor and sensory organs of all creatures. And It is to be known in the mind, which having become purified, this Self reveals Itself dis- tinctly. The Self, which one sees thus; esah anuh. this subtle; ātmā, Selí, veditavyah, is to be known, through the pure cetasa, intelligence only. Where is It to be realised? Yasmin, where, in the body in which; prānah, the vital force, samuivesa, has entered well, pañcadhā, in five different forms, viz Prāna, Apāna, etc, in that very body, i.e. in the heart, It is to be known through intelligence. This is the idea. Through what kind of intelligence is it to be known? That 1s being said. Through that intelligence by which sarvam cittam, the whole mind, internal organ, prajānām, of crcatures; pranaih saha, together with their motor and sensory organs, is otam, pervaded, as milk is with butter or wood with fire; for the entire internal organ of every creature in this world is familiarly known to be possessed of sentience. Moreover, It is to be known in that internal organ, yasmin visuddhe, which having become pure, freed from the dirt of grief etc .; esah atma, the foregoing Self; vibhavati, reveals Itself distinctly, in Its own reality. For one, who attains as his own Self that which is the Self of all and is possessed of the above characteristics, is being stated the result, consisting in the attainment of all, which follows from the very fact of his becoming one with all:

I58 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III.1. I0

यं यं लोकं मनसा संविभाति विशुद्धसत्त्व: कामयते यांश्र कामानू। तं तं लोकं जयते तांश्र कामां- स्तस्मादात्मज्ञं ह्यर्चयेदभूतिकाम: ॥१० ॥। इति मुण्डकोपनिषदि तृतीयमुण्डके प्रथम: खण्ड:॥ I0. The man of pure mind wins that world which he mentally wishes for and those enjoyable things which he covets. Therefore one, desirous of prosperity, should adore the knower of the Self. Yam yam lokam, any world whichsoever, such as the world of the Manes etc., that, visuddhasattvah, the man of pure mind, the man freed from the mental afflictions (klesa),1 the knower of the Self, samvrbhāti, wishes for, manasa, with the mind, while thinking "Let this be mine or for somebody else", ca, and, yān kāmān, those enjoyable things that, kāmayate, (he) covets, jayate, he wins, gets, tam tam lokam, those very worlds; ca tān kāmān, and those enjoyable things that are wished for. Since the wishes of the enlightened man are infallible, tasmat, therefore; bhutikamah, one who hankers after prosperity; arcayet, should worship, through washing of feet, service, salutation, etc , atmajñam, the knower of the Self, purified in mind by virtue of his knowledge of the Self. Therefore such a knower is certainly adorable.

1 Kleśa-ignorance, egotism, desire, aversion, and tenacity for mundane existence (Yoga-sūtra, II 3).

THIRD MUŅDAKA

CANTO II

स वेदेतत्परमं ब्रह्म धाम यत्र विश्वं निहितं भाति शुभ्रम्। उपासते पुरुषं ये ह्यकामा- स्ते शुक्रमेतदतिवर्तन्ति धीराः ॥१॥ I. He knows this supreme abode, this Brahman, in which is placed the universe and which shines holy. Those wise ones indeed, who having become desireless, worship this (enlightened) person, transcend this human seed.

Sınce sah, he, veda, knows, the paramam dhāma, best abode, the resort of all desires; (that is) etat brahma, this Brahman, as defined before, yatra, where, in which Brahman, as the abode, viśvam nihitam, the whole universe is placed; and which bhāt, shines, in Its own lustre, subhram, purely, (holy); (therefore) ye akāmah, those people who having become free from desire, free from the passion for prosperity, upāsate, serve-with aspiration for liberation; even that purusam, person, who is such a knower of the Self- just as they would worship the supreme Reality; te, those; dhirah, wise ones, ativartanti, transcend; etat śukram, this human seed-that is well known as the material source of the body; they never again approach any womb (for rebirth), as declared in the Vedic text:

I60 EIGHT UPANISADS [III.ii. I

"He has no liking for any abode any more " There- fore one should adore him This is the purport. '

It is being shown that the eschewing of desires is the chief discipline for an aspirant of liberation:

कामान्यः कामयते मन्यमान: स कामभिर्जायते तत्र तत्र। पर्याप्तकामस्य कृतात्मनस्तु इहैष सर्वे प्रविलीयन्ति कामाः ॥२॥ 2. He who covets the desirable things, while brooding (on their virtues), is born amidst those very surroundings along with the desires. But for one who has got his wishes fulfilled and whose Self is self-established, all the longings vanish even here. Yaḥ, he who; kāmayate, covets; kāmān, desirable things-seen or unseen; manyamanah, while brooding, on them, on their good qualities, sah, he; javate, is born; kämabhih, along with those desires, the longing for objects that lead to involvement in virtues and vices; tatra tatra, amidst those surroundings, into which the desires tempt the man for the sake of acquiring the objects. He is born amidst those very objects, surrounded by those very desires. Tu. but; for him who has got his wishes fulfilled on the realisa- tion of the supreme Reality-paryāptakāmasya, for the man of fully satisfied desires, for him who has achieved all covetable things from everywhere by virtue of his craving for the Self; krtatmanah, for the self-poised Self, for the man whose Self, having been

III.ii. 3] MUŅņAKA UPANIȘAD I6I

weaned away from Its inferior aspect constituted by ignorance, has become established in Its own superior aspect through knowledge; tu, however; sarve kamah, all longings, that induce virtuous or vicious activity; praviliyanti, vanısh, that is to say, get dissipated; iha eva, even here, even while the body lasts. The purport is that desires do not crop up owing to the destruction of their causes.

Some may be led to think that if the attainment of the Self be the highest of all achievements, then for Its realsation one should practise extensively such pro- cesses as the study of the Vedas This notion being there, the text says: नायमात्मा प्रवचनेन लभ्यो न मेधया न बहुना श्रुतेन। यमेवैष वृणुते तेन लभ्य- स्तस्येष आत्मा विवृणुते तनुं स्वाम्॥३। 3. This Self is not attained through study, nor through the intellect, nor through much hearing. By the very fact that he (i.e. the aspirant) seeks for It, does It become attainable; of him this Self reveals Its own nature. Ayam ātmā, this Self, that has been explained, and whose attainment is the highest human goal; na labhyah, is not attained; pravacanena, through study, of Vedas and scriptures extensively. Similarly, na medhayā, nor through intelligence, the power of retention of the purport of texts; na bahunā śrutena, nor through many things heard, that is to say, through II

I62 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III.ii. 3

much hearing (of scriptures). By what then can It be reached? That is being explained. Yam eva, that very entity, the supreme Self, which; esah, this one, the man of knowledge, vrnute, seeks to reach; tena, by that fact of hankering,1 (esah, this, the supreme Self); labhyah, is attainable; but not through any other spiritual effort, for It is by Its very nature ever attained. Now is being explained how this attainment of the Self by the man of knowledge comes about. Tasya esah atma, of him this Self; vivrnute, reveals; svam tanum, Its own supreme stature, Its reality that was enveloped in ignorance; the idea is that when knowledge dawns, the Self becomes revealed just like pots etc on the coming of light. Hence the purport is that the means for the attainment of the Self consists in praying for this consummation to the exclusion of everything else. These spiritual disciplines, too-viz strength, absence of delusion, and knowledge-as associated with their signs, that is to say, coupled with monasti- cism, are helpful to the prayer for the attainment of the Self. For: नायमात्मा बलहीनेन लभ्यो न च प्रमादात्तपसो चाऽप्यलिङ्गात्। एतैरुपायर्यतते यस्तु विद्वां- स्तस्यष आत्मा विशते ब्रह्मधाम ॥।४।। 4. This Self is not attained by one devoid of strength, nor through delusion, nor through knowledge unassociated with monasticism. But the Self of that knower, who strives through 1 Consisting in pursuing the idea, "I am Brahman."

III.11. 51 MUŅŅAKA UPANIȘAD I63

these means, enters into the abode that is Brahman. Sınce this Self na labhyah, is not attainable; balahīnena, by one devoid of strength, bereft of the vigour generated by constant adherence to the Self; na ca pramadat, nor again through the delusion, caused by attachment to mundane things-son, cattle, etc .; similarly nor even tapasah, from tapas; alıngāt, unassociated with linga (i.e. the sign of a monk).1 Tapas here means knowledge, and linga means monasticism. The purport is that It is not gained through knowledge unassociated with monasticism. Tu, but; yah vidvan, the man of knowledge, the dis- cerning man, the knower of the Self, who, yatate, strives, with diligence; etaih upayath, through such means-strength, absence of delusion, monasticism, and knowledge; tasya, of him, of that enlightened man; eşah atmā, this Self, visate, enters into, the brahma- dhama, abode that is Brahman. How one enters into Brahman is being stated: संप्राप्यनमृषयो ज्ञानतृप्ताः कृतात्मानो वीतरागा: प्रशान्ता:। ' Sankara is very emphatic that external renunciation is necessary (see introductions to this and Aitareya Upanisads). But Ananda Giri seems to differ. Says he, "Why should this be so, since the Vedas mention the attainment of the Self by Indra, Janaka, Gargi, and others? That is a valid objection Sannyäsa consists in renunciation of everything; and since they had no idea of possession, they had internal renunciation as a matter of fact. The external sign is not the idea intended, for in the Smrti we have, 'An outer maik is no source of virtue.'"

I64 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III i1. 5

ते सर्वगं सर्वतः प्राप्य धीरा युक्तात्मान: सवमेवाविशन्ति।।५।। 5. Having attained this, the seers become contented with their knowledge, established in the Self, freed from attachment, and composed. Having realised the all-pervasive One every- where, those discriminating people, ever merged in contemplation, enter into the All. Samprapya, having attained, having fully realised; enam, this, the Self; the rsayah, seers, become nanatrptah, satisfied by that very knowledge, and not by any external object that gratifies and leads to physical nourishment, krtatmanah, established in identity with the supreme Self; vitarāgah, free from such drawbacks as attachment; praśāntāh, composed, with the senses withdrawn Te, those people, who become so; prapya, having realised; sarvagam, the all-pervasive (Brahman), comparable to space; sarva- tah, everywhere-and not partially, as circumscribed by the limiting adjuncts. What follows then? Having realised as their own Self that very Brahman that is without a second; dhirah, the absolutely discriminating people; who are by nature yuktātmānah, ever merged in deep contemplation; āviśanti, enter; sarvam eva, into the All, even at the time of the falling of the body. They give up the limitations of the adjuncts created by ignorance, like space confined within a pot on the breaking of the pot. Thus the knowers of Brahman enter into the abode that is Brahman.

III ii. 6] MUNDAKA UPANIȘAD I65

वेदान्तविज्ञानसुनिश्चितार्थाः संन्यासयोगाद्यतय: शुद्धसत्त्वाः । ते ब्रह्मलोकेषु परान्तकाले परामृता: परिसुच्यन्ति सर्वे॥६॥ 6. Those to whom the entity presented by the Vedäntic knowledge has become fully ascer- tained, and who endeavour assiduously with the help of the Yoga of monasticism, become pure in mind. At the supreme moment of final departure all of them become identified with the supreme Immortality in the worlds that are Brahman, and they become freed on every side. Moreover, vedānto-viñāna-suniscitārthah, those to whom the entity to be known, ie. the supreme Self presented by the Vedāntic knowledge, has become fully ascertained. Those very people are, again, yałayah, assiduous. (They) suddhasativah, have become purified in mınd; sannyāsa-yogat, by dint of the Yoga of monasticism, through the Yoga consisting in the giving up of all activities, which is the same as the Yoga of remaining steadfast in Brahman alone. Te sarve, all those people, parāntakāle, at the time of final death-the times of death of the worldly people being but times of secondary departure; as compared with these the time of the falling of the body of an aspirant for salvation, at the end of his worldly state, is the supreme moment of departure; at that supreme moment of departure, (they become freed) brahma- lokesu, in the worlds that are Brahman, the worlds and Brahman being identical; the plural (in worlds) is used

I66 EIGHT UPANISADS [III.i1. 6

from the standpoint of the aspirants who are many and consequently the same Brahmaloka appears many or is attained divergently. So the word brahmalokesu means in Brahman. Paramrtāh, (they are) those to whom the supreme Immortality, the deathless Brahman, has become their very Self, those who have become Brahman while still living. Having (thus) attained identity with the supreme Immortality, they parimucyanti, discard individuality, like a lamp blown out or like the space in a pot (when broken); they become freed on every side-they need not have to wait for going elsewhere. And this is in accord with such Vedic and Smrti texts as: "Just as the footprints of birds cannot be traced in space and of aquatics in water, similar is the movement of the men of knowl- edge" (Mbh. Śā. 239 24), "Those who want to go beyond the courses of the world, do not tread on any path" (Itihāsa Upanisad, 18). The courses (to be followed after death), that are dependent on spatial limitation, are indeed within phenomenal existence, since they are accomplished by limited means. But Brahman, being the All, is not to be approached through spatial limitations. Should Brahman be circumscribed by space like any concrete object, It will also have a beginning and an end, It will be supported by something else, It will have parts, and It will be impermanent and a product. But Brahman cannot be so; therefore Its attainment, too, cannot be determined in terms of limitation of space. Besides, the knowers of Brahman accept only that liberation which consists in the removal of ignorance etc., and not that which is a product.

III.ii. 7] MUŅŅAKA UPANIȘAD I67

Furthermore, at the time of liberation: गता: कला: पञ्चदश प्रतिष्ठा देवाश्च सर्वे प्रतिदेवतासु। कर्माणि विज्ञानमयश्च आत्मा परेडव्यये सर्व एकीभवन्ति॥७॥ 7. To their sources repair the fifteen con- stituents (of the body), and to their respective gods go all the gods (of the senses). And the karmas, and the soul that simulates the intellect, all become unified with the supreme Undecaying. The kalah, constituents, that there are-the vital force and the others that build up the body; gatah, have repaired. At the time of liberation each con- stituent goes to its own basis, that is to say, it merges in its cause. The word "pratisthah, to the sources" is used in the plural number accusative case. (The constituents that are) pañcadasa, fifteen in number, that are mentioned in the last Question (of the Praśna Upanisad); ca, and, the well-known sarve devāh, all the gods, living in the body and seated in the organs of vision etc; (get merged) pratidevatasu, into the respective gods, viz the Sun and others; "get merged" -this much is understood. And the karmani, the karmas, performed by the seeker after liberation, that have not begun to bear fruit-not the active karmas that have begun to bear fruit, since the latter get exhausted merely by being enjoyed; ca vijñānamayah atma, and the soul simulating the intellect. The soul that has entered into multifarious bodies, like the reflections of the sun etc. in water etc., simulates the

I68 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III 11. 7

intellect as a result cf considering itself identical with the limiting adjuncts, viz the intellect and the rest, that are created by ignorance. As kamnas are meant for producing results for this (apparent) soul, therefore the Rarmas, together with this soul resembling the intellect, (become unified in the supreme Undecaying). Therefore vyñanamaya means resembling the intellect. When the limiting adjunct is removed, these karmas and the soul, resembling the intellect, sarve, all; ebi- bhavant, become indistinguishable, become unified, pare avyaye, in the supreme Undecaying in the inhnite, imperishable Brahman that is comparable to space, and is birthless, ageless, immortal, fearless, without cause and effect, without interior and exterior, auspicious, and calm; just as the reflections of the sun etc. return to the sun on the withdrawal of the vessels of water etc., or the spaces circumscribed by pots etc. to space itself on the displacement of the pots etc. यथा नद्य: स्यन्दमाना: समुद्रेS- स्तं गच्छन्ति नामरूपे विहाय। तथा विद्वान्नामरूपाद्विमुक्त: परात्परं पुरुषम्ुपैति दिव्यम्॥८। 8. As rivers, flowing down, become indis- tinguishable on reaching the sea by giving up their names and forms, so also the illumined soul, having become freed from name and form, reaches the self-effulgent Purusa that is higher than the higher (Māyā). Moreover, yathā, as; nadyaḥ, rivers-Gangā and the rest, syandamānah, flowing down; gacchanti,

III 11. 9] MUŅDAKA UPANIȘAD I69

attain; astam, mvisibility, indistinguishable identity; samudre, in the sea, on reaching the sea; nāma-rupe ihaya, by giving up (their) names and forms; tathā, simılarly; vidvan, the illumined soul, nāma-rūpāt vimuktah, having become freed from name and form- the creations of ignorance; upaitt, arrives at; the divyam purusam, self-effulgent Purusa, as described earlier; who is param, higher, parat, than the higher (Mayā), as already explained (Mu.II i.2). Objection: Is it not well known that many obstacles beset the path to liberation? So even a knower of Brahman, when dead, may be deflected from his course and may not reach Brahman Itself, being hindered by one of the mental diseases or one of the gods or some such being. Answer. Not so, for by knowledge itself are removed all the hindrances The only obstacle to emancipation is ignorance, and there is no other hindrance; for emancipation is eternal and identical with the Self. Therefore: स यो ह वै तत्परमं ब्रह्म वेद ब्रह्मैव भवति नास्याब्रह्मवित्कुले भवति। तरति शोकं तरति पाप्मानं गुहाग्रन्थिभ्यो विमुक्तोऽमृतो भवति॥६॥ 9. Anyone who knows that supreme Brahman becomes Brahman indeed. In his line is not born anyone who does not know Brahman. He overcomes grief, and rises above aberrations; and becoming freed from the knots of the heart, he attains immortality.

I70 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III 11. 9

Sah yah ha vat, anyone who, in this world; tat paramam brahma veda, knows that supreme Brahman, directly as "I am verily Brahman"; does not follow any other course. In the matter of his attaining Brahman, the gods even cannot raise any obstacle; for he becomes their Self. Hence one who knows Brahman, brahma eva bhavati, becomes Brahman indeed. Furthermore, asya kule, in his line, in the line of the knower of Brahman, na bhavati abrahmavit, there is not born anyone who does not know Brahman. Besides, even while he is alive, he tarati śokam, over- comes mental grief, caused by the loss of many desir- able things. He tarati pāpmanam, goes beyond aberrations, known as virtue and vice. Guhāgranthi- bhyah vimuktah, having become freed from the knots of the heart, from the knots created by ignorance in the heart (Mu.II.i.Io); he amrtah bhavati, becomes immortal It has already been said, "the knot of the heart gets untied" etc (Mu.II 11 8). Now the conclusion is being made by presenting the rule of transmission of the knowledge of Brahman:

तदेतहचाऽ्भ्युक्तम- क्रियावन्तः श्रोत्रिया ब्रह्मनिष्ठाः स्वयं जुह्वत एकषि श्रद्धयन्तः । तेषामेवैतां ब्रह्मविद्यां वदेत शिरोव्रतं विधिवद्यस्तु चीर्णम्॥१॥॥ I0. This (rule) has been revealed by the mantra (which runs thus): "To them alone should one expound this knowledge of Brahman

III.ii. II] MUŅDAKA UPANIȘAD

who are engaged in the practice of disciplines, versed in the Vedas, and devoted to Brahman, who personally sacrifice to the fire called Ekarsi with faith, and by whom has been duly accom- plished the vow of holding fire on the head." Tat etat, this rule regarding the transmission of knowledge; abhyuktam, is revealed; ycā, by a mantra: Those who are kriyāvantah, engaged in the practice of disciplines, as mentioned earlier; śrotriyāh, versed in Vedic studies and observances; brahmanisthāh, devoted to the inferior Brahman and seekers of the knowledge of the supreme Brahman; who svayam, by themselves; juhvate (is the same as juhvatı), sacrifice; ekarsım, to the fire named Ekarsi, śraddhayantah, with faith; tesam eva, to them alone, who have become purified and fit recipients; vadeta, one should expound; etām brahmavıdyām, this knowledge of Brahman. And to those alone one should expound yaih tu, by whom moreover; cirnam, has been accomplished; vidhivat, duly, in accordance with rules; the sirovratam, vow of holding fire on the head, a Vedic vow familiar amongst the followers of the Atharva-Veda. तहेतत्सत्यमृषिरङ्गिरा: पुरोवाच नैतदचीर्णवरतोऽधीते। नमः परमतनृषिभ्यो नमः परमऋषिभ्यः॥११।। इति मुण्डकोपनिषदि तृतीयमुण्डके द्वितीय: खण्डः ॥ II. The seer Angiras spoke of this truth in days of yore. One that has not fulfilled the vow does not read this. Salutation to the great seers. Salutation to the great seers.

I72 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III.İ1. II

Rșih, the seer, named angirāh, Angiras; purā, in days of yore; uvāca, spoke of; tat ctat, that entity that is this; satyam, Truth, the immutable Purusa; to Saunaka who had approached duly and asked him The idea imphed is that, anyone else, too, should similarly speak to one who sceks for the highest good, or hankers after salvation, and approaches dutifully. Aciravratah, one who has not fulfilled the vow, na adhītc, does not (i.e should not) read, etat, this, this in the form of the text. For knowledge becomes sufficiently clear for bearing fruit to one who has fulfilled the vow The knowledge of Brahman is ended. Namah, salutation, parama-rsibhyah, to those great seers, starting with Brahma, through whom that kncwledge was successively handed down, the great seers being those, beginning with Brahma, who directly saw and realised Brahman. Namah, salutation to those, again. The repetition is used as an indication of great solicitousness, and as a conclusion of the Mundaka Upanısad.

ॐ भद्रं कर्णेभि: शृणुयाम देवा भद्रं पश्येमाक्षभिर्यजत्राः।

व्यशेम देवहितं यदायुः॥ ॐ शान्ति: शान्ति: शान्ति: ।।

MANDUKYA UPANISAD

AND KARIKA

ॐ भदं कर्णेमि: शणुयाम देवा भद्रं पश्येमाक्षभियंजनाः।

व्यशेम देवहित यदायु:॥ स्वस्ति न इन्द्रो वृद्धश्रवा: स्वस्ति नः पूषा विश्ववेदाः । स्वस्ति नस्तार्क्ष्यों अरिष्टनेमि: स्वस्ति नो बृहस्पतिदधातु॥ ॐ शान्ति: शान्ति: शान्ति:।।

(For translation see p. 78)

MĀŅŅŪKYA UPANIȘAD

CHAPTER I

AGAMA-PRAKARANA (ON THE VEDIC TEXT)

Commentator's ivocation: (I) I bow to that Brahman which after having enjoyed1 (during the waking state) the gross objects by pervading all the human objectives through a diffusion of Its rays2 of unchanging Consciousness that embraces all that moves or does not move; which again after having drunk' (during the dream state) all the variety of cbjects, produced by desire (as well as action and ignorance) and lighted up by the intellect,4 sleeps while enjoying bliss and making us enjoy through Maya; and which is counted as the Fourth5 from the point of view of Māya, and is supreme, immortal, and birthless.

(2) May that Fourth One protect us which, after having identified Itself with the universe,6 enjoys (during the waking state) the gross objects created by

1 Enjoyment consisting in witnessing the various mental moods of happiness, sorrow, etc 2 The individual souls that are but reflections of Brahman on the intellect. 3 1.e having merged all in the unrealised Self. 4 Existing only subjectively in the form of mental moods or impressions of past experience. 5 Not possessed of the three states of waking, dream, and sleep The cosmic gross body of Virāt

I56 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [Mā I

virtue (and vice), which again (during the dream state) experiences1 through Its own light the objects of enjoy- ment that are called up by Its own intellect, which, further (in sound slcep), withdraws promptly all these into Itself, and which lastly becomes free from all attributes by discarding every distinction and difference.

Introduction. "The letter Om is all this. Of this a clear exposition (follows)" (Ma I.1.I) These four Chapters (of the Karika) that sum up the quintessence of the Vedantic ideas are commenced with the text, "The letter Om is all this" etc. Accordingly, the con- nection, subject matter, and utility (of this treatise) need not be separately dealt with. The connection, subject matter, and utility that pertain to Vedanta itself should fit in here also 2 Still they ought to be briefly stated by one who wants to explain a treatise. In this connection it is to be noted that by the very fact that a scripture, (whether it be Vedanta or a treatise on it), reveals the spiritual disciplines conducive

1 As identified with the cosmic subtle body of Hıranya- garbha

2 The present book comprising the Upanisadic text and the Kanka of Gaudapada forms a sort of a treatise on the Vedanta, and hence the four anubandhas or interconnecting elements-viz adhikān, the peison competent for study, sambandha, connection, e g that between the book and the subject matter, uisaya, subject matter of the book, viz unity of the Self and Brahman, and prayojana, utility, viz libera- tion-are the same in both cases.

Mā. I] MĀŅDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ 177

to the goal, it becomes endowed with a subject matter;1 and from this fact it becomes indirectly possessed of a distinct relationship, a subject matter, and utility. What again is the objective in view? That is being explained: Just as the normal state of a man, afflicted by disease, consists in his getting cured of the disease, sımilarly the normalcy of the Self, stricken with identification with misery, is regained through the cessation of the phenomenal universe of duality The end in view is the realisation of non-duality. Since the phenomenal world of duality is a creation of ignorance, it can be eradicated through knowledge; and hence this book is begun in order to reveal the knowledge of Brahman. This fact is established by such Vedic texts as: "Because when there is duality, as it were, (then one smells something, one sees something," and so on) (Br.II iv.I4), "When there is something else, as it were, then one can see something, one can know some- thing" (Br.IV.ini.31); "But when to the knower of Brahman everything has become the Self, then what should one see and through what, then what should one know and through what?" (Br.II iv.I4). That being so, the first Chapter, devoted to a determination of the meaning of Om, is based on (Vedic) traditional knowledge and is an aid to the 1 We are concerned primarily with knowledge and its result and not with books The result aimed at is liberation, which follows from the realisation of the non-difference of the Self and Brahman, and not from mere scriptures Still the scriptures express that non-difference, and knowledge does not dawn without the help of scriptural deliberation. Thus as indirect means to knowledge, the scriptures become connected with the subject matter

I2

I78 EIGHT UPANISADS [Mā. I

ascertainment of the reality of the Self. The second Chapter is concerned with rationally proving the unreality of that phenomenal world of duality, on the cessation of which is attained non-duality, just as the reality of the rope is attained on the elimination of the illusion of a snake etc. imagined on it. The third Chapter is there to establish rationally the truth of non-duality, lest it too should be negated by a sımilar process of argument. The fourth Chapter seeks to refute through their own arguments all the un-Vedic points of view that are antagonistic to the truth of non-duality established by non-dualism, and that are involved in this unreal duality by the very fact of their mutual antagonism

How again does the ascertainment of the meaning of Om become an aid to the realisation of the reality of the Self? The answer is: From such Vedic texts as, (That goal which all the Vedas with one voice propound, which all the austerities speak of, and wish- ing for which people practise Brahmacarya)-it is this, viz Om" (Ka.I ii.15), "This medium is the best" (Ka I i1.I7), "O Satyakāma, this (Om) is verily Brahman, (superior and inferior)" (Pr.V.2), "Meditate on the Self as Om" (Maitri VI.3), "Om is Brahman" (Tai.I.viii I), "Om indeed is all this" (Ch.II.xxni.3), it follows that just as the non-dual Self, notwithstand- ing the fact that It is the supreme Reality, can still be the substratum of all such illusions as the vital force, like the rope etc becoming the substrata of the snake etc., similarly it is but Om that appears as all the ramifications of speech that have for their contents

Mā. I] MĀNDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ 179

such illusory manifestations of the Self as the vital force etc. And Om is essentially the same as the Self, since it denotes the latter. And all the illusory man- festations of the Self, such as the vital force etc., that are denoted by the modifications of Om, do not exist apart from their names, in accordance with the Vedic texts: "All that is modification exists only in name, having speech as its support" (Ch.VI.i.4), "All this phenomenal world of that Brahman is strung together by the thread of speech and by the strands of names", "All these are but dependent on names1", and so on. Hence the Upanisad says, "Om itr etat aksaram idam sarvam-the letter Om is all this."

ओमित्येतदक्षरमिद५ सर्वं तस्योपव्याख्यानं भूतं भवङ्भविष्यदिति सर्वमोङ्कार एव। यश्चान्यत् त्रिकालातीतं तदप्योङ्कार एव ॥१॥

I. The letter Om is all this. Of this a clear exposition (is started with): All that is past, present, or future is verily Om. And whatever is beyond the three periods of time is also verily Om.

As all these objects that are indicated by names are non-different from the names, and as names are non-different from Om, so Om is verily all this. And as the supreme Brahman is known through the relation- ship subsisting between name and its object, It, too, is but Om. Tasya, of that, of this letter, viz Om, that

' Names make empirical dealings possible for objects.

I80 EIGHT UP.ANISADS [Mā. I

is the same as the supreme as well as the inferior Brahman, upavyākhyānam, a clear exposition, as showing its proximity to Brahman by virtue of its being a means for the attainment of Brahman, the expression, "is to be understood as started with", has to be supplied after "clear exposition" to complete the sentence Bhutam, the past, bhavat, the present; bhavisyat, the future, itr, these, that is to say, what- ever is circumscribed by the three conceptions of time, sarvam onkarah eva, all this is but Om, in accordance with the reasons already advanced. Ca yat trikalatitam, and whatever else there is tha' is beyond the three periods of time, that is inferable from its effects but is not circumscribed by time, e g the Unmanifested and the rest; tat apı onkārah cva, that, too, is verily Om.

Though a word and the thing signified are the same, still the presentation in the text, "The letter Om is all this" etc., was made by giving greater prominence to the word. The very same thing that was presented through an emphasis on the word is being indicated over again with a stress on the thing signified, so that the unity of the name and the nameable may be comprehended. For otherwise, the nameable having been grasped as dependent on the name, the doubt may crop up that the identity of the nameable with the name is to be taken in a secondary sense. And the necessity of understanding their identity arises from the fact that once this identity is established, one can by a single effort eliminate both the name and the nameable to realise Brahman that is different from

Ma 2] MĀNDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ I81

both. And this is what the Upanisad will say in, "The quarters are the letters of Om, and the letters are the quarters" (Ma.8). The Upanısad adverts to the topic in, "All this is surely Brahman" etc.

सर्व५ ह्येतद ब्रह्मायमात्मा ब्रह्म सोऽयमात्मा चतुष्पात् ॥२।।

2. All this is surely Brahman. This Self is Brahman. The Self, such as It is, is possessed of four quarters.

Sarvam etat, all this, all this that was spoken of as but Om; is brahma, Brahman. That Brahman that was indirectly spoken of is being directly and specific- ally pointed out as, "Ayam atma brahma, this Self is Brahman " In the text, "This Self is Brahman", the very Self that will be presented as divided into four parts, is being pointed out as one's innermost Self by the word "ayam, this", (accompanied) with a gesture of hand1. Sah ayam atma, that Self that is such, that is signified by Om and exists as the higher and lower Brahman; is catuspāt, possessed of four quarters, like a (kārsāpana) coin, but not like a cow.2 As the Fourth

1 By placing the hand on the heart. ? The word pada may mean either foot or quarter. The second meaning applies here A kārsāpana is divisible into sixteen smaller units Four of these form a quarter, and eight form a half karsapana. The smaller coins lose their individuality in the bigger ones as it were So Viśva merges in Taijasa, Taijasa in Prājña, and Prājna in Turīya The word "quarter" is not used in any physical sense.

I82 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [Mā. 2

(Turīya) is realised by successively merging the earlier three, starting from Viśva, the word pada (1n the text) is derived in the instrumental sense of that by which something is attained, whereas in the case of the Turiya the word pada is derived in the objective sense of that which is achieved.

The Upanisad shows how the Self can be possessed of four quarters:

जागरितस्थानो बहिष्प्रज्ञः सप्ताङ्क एकोनषिशतिमुखः स्थूलभुग्वैश्वानरः प्रथम: पादः ॥३॥

3. The first quarter is Vaiśvānara whose sphere (of action) is the waking state, whose consciousness relates to things external, who is possessed of seven limbs and nineteen mouths, and who enjoys gross things.

He (Vaiśvānara) who has the jāgarita, waking state, as His sthāna, sphere of activity, is jāgarita- sthanah. He who has His prajna, awareness, bahih, outside, with regard to things other than Himself, is bahisprañah. The idea is that Consciousness appears as though related to outer objects, owing to ignorance. Sımilarly He has seven limbs. For completing the imagery of Agnihotra sacrifice contained in, "Heaven is verily the head of that Vaiśvanara Self, the sun is His eye, air is His vital force, space is the middle part, water is His bladder, and the earth is His two feet" (Ch.V.xviii.2), the Ahavanīya fire has been imagined

Mā. 3] MĀŅDŪKYA UPANIŞAD & KĀRIKĀ I83

as His mouth (Ch. V. xviii.2). He that is possessed of these seven limbs is saptangah Similarly He 1s ekonavimnśatımukhah, possessed of nineteen mouths- the (five) senses of perception and the (five) organs of action make up ten, the vital forces-Prana and the rest-make up five, and (there are) mind (thinking faculty), intellect, egoity, and mind-stuff. These are mouths, since they are comparable to mouths; that is to say, they are the gates of perception. Since through these entrances, Vaiśvanara, thus constituted, enjoys gross objects,-viz sound and the rest, therefore He is sthulabhuk, an enjoyer of the gross. He is called vaiśvānarah, because He leads in diverse ways all (viśva) beings (nara) (to their enjoyment) Or Vaiśvā nara is the same as Viśvānara, He is called Vaiśvānara (all beings) since He encompasses all beings by virtue of His being non-different (in reality) from the Self (1.e Virat) comprising all the gross bodies. He is the prathamah padah, the first quarter. He gets this precedence, because the knowledge of the succeeding quarters is contingent on His knowledge. Objection: The topic under discussion being the possession of four quarters by the Self as referred to in the text, "This Self is Brahman" etc., how is it that heaven and the rest are presented as the head etc .?

Answer: That is nothing incongruous, inasmuch as the intention is to show that the entire phenomenal universe and the world of gods, together with this (gross cosmic) Self contribute to the constitution of the

I84 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [Mã 3

four parts.1 If the presentation is made in this way, non-duality stands established on the removal of the entire phenomenal world, and the Self existing in all beings is realised as one, and all beings are seen as existing in the Self.2 And thus alone will stand affirmed the meaning of the Vedic text. "He who sees all beings in the very Self and the Self in all beings etc" (Iś.6). Otherwise the indwelling Self, as circum- scribed by one's own body, will alone be perceived, as It is by the Samkhyas and others, and in that case the specific statement that It is non-dual (Ma.I 7, Ch.VI 11.I), made by the Upanisads, will have no distinctiveness, for there will be no difference from the philosophy of the Samkhyas and others. But as a matter of fact, it is desirable to find all the Upanisads in accord in propounding the unity of all the selves. Therefore it is but reasonable that, having in view the identity of the Self (as Viśva) in the individual physical context with the Self as Virāt (1.e. Vaiśvānara) in the divine context, the former should be mentioned as possessed of seven limbs comprising such physical con- stituents as heaven etc. And this is confirmed by the 1 The gross cosmic world, as constituting Virät, is the first quarter The subtle cosmic world, as constituting Hiranyagarbha, is the second quarter The cosmic world in its causal state (of ignorance) as constituting the Unmani- fested, is the third quarter The phenomenal world, again, as freed from all states of cause and effect and existing merely as its substratum that is Existence-Knowledge-Bliss, is the fourth quarter

2 Cf सर्वभूतस्थमात्मानं सर्वभूतानि चात्मनि। संपश्यन्नात्मयाजी वे स्वाराज्यमधिगच्छति॥-Manu

Mā. 41 MAŅDŪKYA UPANIŞAD & KĀRIKĀ 185

logical grounds (for inferring unity) that is implied in "your head would have dropped off (if you had not come to me"1 (Ch.V.xii.2). This identity (of Viśva) with Virat is suggestive of the unity (of Taijasa and Prajna) with Hiranyagarbha and the Unmanifested (respectively) as well. And this has been stated in the Madhu-brāhmana (of the Brhadaranyaka Upanisad): "(The same with) the shining immortal being who is in this earth, and the (shining immortal) corporeal being (in the body). (These four are but this Self)" etc. (II.v.I). As for the unity of the Self in sleep (Prajña) and the Unmani- fested, it is a patent fact because of the absence of distinctions 2 Such being the case, it will become proved that non-duality follows on the dissipation of all dualıty. स्वप्नस्थानोऽन्त:प्रज्ञः सप्ताड पकोनविशतिमुरुः प्रि- विक्तभुकैजसो द्वितीय: पाढः ॥४॥ 1 Six Brahmanas, who approached Aśvapati, used to worship part cular limhs of Vaisvanara as Vaisvanara Himself Asvapatı pointed out their mistakes and said that unless they had come to him for rectification, their head, eye, life, etc would have been destroyed But if the individual and Virāt are not the same, it is unreasonable to say, for instance, that from the mistaken worship of heaven (that is only the head of Virat) as Virat Himself, one's own head should drop off The statement becomes reasonable only if the mndividual and Virät are the same, so that the head of the one can be the head of the other. 2 The individual sleeps by withdrawing all distinctions into himself, and in dissolution the Unmanifested, too, with- draws everything into itself The "Unmanifested" means here the "ınner Director" (Ma. 6), ruling from mnside all.

186 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [Mā. 4

4. Taijasa is the second quarter, whose sphere (of activity) is the dream state, whose consciousness is internal, who is possessed of seven limbs and nineteen mouths, and who enjoys subtle objects. Taijasa that has the dream state as his sphere of activity is svapnasthanah. The consciousness cf the waking state, though it is a state of mental vibration, is associated with many means, and it appears to be engrossed in external objects, and thus it leaves in the mind the corresponding impressions. Under the impul- sion of ignorance, desire, and (past) action, the mind, thus possessed of the impressions like a piece of painted canvas, makes its appearance (in the dream state) just as in the waking state, but without any external means. In line with this is the statement, "(When he dreams), he takes away a little of (the imnressions of) this all- embracing world (the waking state)" (Br.IV.iii.9). Similarly in the Upanısad of the Atharva-Veda, after introducing (the subject) with "All senses become one in the highest deity, the mind", it is said, "here in this dream state, the deity (the mind) experiences greatness" (Pr. IV.5). The mind is antah, internal, in relation to the senses. He whose prajña, awareness, in dream, takes the forms of the impressions in that (antah, internal) mind, is antah-prajñah, aware of internal objects. He is called Taijasa (luminous), since he becomes the witness of the (modes of) cognition that is bereft of objects and appears only as a luminous thing. As Viśva is dependent on objects, he experiences the (modes of) gross cognition, whereas the awareness

Mā. 5] MAŅDŪKYA UPANIȘAD & KĀRIKĀ I87

that is experienced here consists of mere impressions; and hence the enjoyment is subtle. The rest is common (with the earlier paragraph). Taijasa is the second quarter.

यत्र सुप्तो न कश्चन कामं कामयते न कश्चन स्वप् पश्यति तत् सुषुप्तम्। सुषुप्रस्थान पकीभूतः प्रज्ञानधन एवानन्दमयो ह्यानन्दभुक् चेतोमुखः प्राज्ञस्तृतीय: पादः॥५॥ 5. That state is deep sleep where the sleeper does not desire any enjoyable thing and does not see any dream. The third quarter is Prājña who has deep sleep as his sphere, in whom everything becomes undifferentiated, who is a mass of mere consciousness, who abounds in bliss, who is surely an enjoyer of bliss, and who is the doorway to the experience (of the dream and waking states). Since sleep, consisting in the unawareness of Realty, is a common feature of the two states (of waking and dream) where there are the presence and absence (respectively) of perceptible gross objects, therefore the adverbial clause, "Where the sleeper" etc.1 is used in order to keep in view the state of deep sleep. Or since sleep, consisting in the unawareness of Reality, is equally present in all the three states. deep sleep is being distinguished (by that clause) from the

1 That is to say, the portion "does not desire any enjoy- able thing" etc occurring in the clause "Where the sleeper" etc , for the portion "does not" etc distinguishes deep sleep from the other two states which have the common feature of unawareness

I88 EIGHT UPANISADS [Mā. 5

earlier two states.1 Yatra, in which place or at which time, suptah, the sleeping man, na pasyati, does not see; kam cana svapnam, any dream; na kāmayate, does not desire, kam cana kamam, any enjoyable thing -for in deep sleep there does not exist, as in the two earlier states, either dream, consisting in the perception of things otherwise than what they are, or any desire2 -this is tat susuptam, that state of deep sleep. He who has got this state of deep sleep as his sphere is sușuptasthānaḥ. He is said to be ekībhūtah, un- differentiated, since the whole host of duality, that are diversified as the two states (of waking and dream) and are but modifications of the mind, become non- discernible (in that state) without losing their aforesaid characteristics, just as the day together with the phenomenal world becomes non-discernible under the cover of nocturnal darkness As such, conscious experiences, that are but vibrations of the mind in the waking and dream states, become solidified as it were. This state is called prajñānaghanah, a mass of con- sciousness, since it is characterised by the absence of

1 Since by the use of the portion "does not see any dream" that is to say "does not have any false perception of Reality" the other two states of dream and waking can be eliminated, the addition of the portion "does not desire any enjoyable thing" may seem to be redundant if we follow the first interpretation To obviate this difficulty the second explanation is introduced Non-perception being a common factor of the three states, sleep can be distinguished by the absence of desire. 2 Thus either of the adverbial portions-viz absence of false perception and freedom from desire-can be used for eliminating the earlier two states.

Mā. 5] MAŅDŪKYA UPANIŞAD & KĀRIKĀ I89

discrimination. It is a mass of consciousness like every- thing appearing as a mass by becoming indistinguish- able under nocturnal darkness From the use of the word eva, surely, it follows that there is nothing of a separate class other than consciousness. And he is anandamayah, full of joy, his abundance of joy being caused by the absence of the misery involved in the effort of the mind vibrating as the objects and their experiencer, but he is not Bliss itself, since the joy is not absolute. Just as in common parlance, one remain- ing free from effort is said to be happy or anandabhuk, an enjoyer of joy, so this one, too, is called ānanda- bhuk, for by him is enjoyed this state that consists in extreme freedom from effort, in accordance with the Vedic text, "this is its supreme bliss" (Br.IV.in 32). He is cetomukhah, since he is the doorway to the consciousness of the experiences in the dream and waking states. Or he :s called cetomukhah because consciousness, appearing as empirical expenence, is his doorway or entrance leading to the states of dream and waking. He is called prajñah, Prājña, conscious par cxcellence, since in him alone is there the knowledge of the past and the future and of all things Even though lying in deep slcep he is called Prājña (conscious) because of his having been so earler (in the two former states of dream and waking); or he is called conscious, since he alone is possessed of the peculiar characteristics of mere (undiversified) con- scicusness, whereas the other two have diversified knowledge as well. Prājña, as described, is the third quarter.

I90 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [Mā. 6

एष सर्वेश्वर एष सर्वज्ञ एषोऽन्तर्याम्येष योनि: सर्वस्य प्रभवाप्ययौ हि भूतानाम्॥६॥

6. This one is the Lord of all; this one is Omniscient; this one is the inner Director of all; this one is the Source of all; this one is verily the place of origin and dissolution of all beings.

Eşah, this one (this Prajña), when in his natural state, is surely sarvesvarah, the Lord of all, of all diversity inclusive of the heavenly world; and contrary to what others believe in, He (the Lord of all) is not something intrinsically different from this one (that is Prājña), as is borne out by the Vedic text, "O good- looking one, (the individual soul conditioned by) the mind is tethered to (that is to say, has for its goal) the Vital Force (which is Brahman)" (Ch VI.viii.2). This one, again, in his (state of) immanence in all diversity, is the knower of all; hence esah sarvajñah, this one is Omniscient. Eşah, this one, is; antaryāmī, the inner Controller, this one becomes the Director of all beings by entering inside (antar). For the same reason1 he gives birth to the universe together with its diversities, as described before; and hence esah yonih, this one is the Source; sarvasya, of all. And since this is so, therefore this very one, is hi, certainly; prabhava- apyayau, the place of origin and dissolution; bhūtānam, of all beings.

1 Since he is Lord, Omniscient, and inner Director (in his identity with Brahman).

I 2] MĀŅDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ I9I

GAUDAPĀDA'S KĀRIKĀ

अत्रते श्रोका भवन्ति- Pertaining to this, here are these verses: Atra, with regard to the subject matter dealt with; ete ślokāh bhavantı, here occur these verses:

बहिप्प्रज्ञो विभुविश्वो ह्यन्तःप्रज्ञस्तु तैजसः। घनप्रज्ञस्तथा प्राज्ञ एक एव त्रिधा स्मृतः ॥१॥ I. Viśva experiences the external things and is all-pervading; but Taijasa experences the internal things; similarly Prājña is a mass of con- sciousness. It is but the same entity that is thought of in three ways. The purport of the verse is this. The transcendence of the three states by the Self, Its unity, purity, and unrelatedness (to anything) are proved by the fact of Its existence in the three states in succession and of Its being interlinked by memory as "I". This is borne out by the illustration of the great fish and others in the Vedic texts 1

दक्षिणाक्षिमुखे षिश्वो मनस्यन्तस्तु तैजसः। आकाशे व हृदि प्राज्ञस्त्रिधा देहे व्यवस्थितः॥२।। 1 "As a great fish swims alternately to both the banks (of a river), eastern and western, so does this infinite being move to both these states-the dream and waking states" (Br IV in. 18) "As a hawk or a falcen flying in the sky becomes tired, and stretching its wings, is bound for its nest, so does this infinite being run for this state, where falling asleep he craves no desires and sees no dreams" (Br VI n1i 19).

I92 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. 2

'2. Viśva s met with in the right eye which is his place of experience. But Taijasa is inside the mind. Prajña is in the space within the heart. In three ways he exists in the body. This verse aims at discovering how all the three, startıng with Viśva, are experienced in the waking state itself. Viśva, the witness of gross objects, 1s primarily experienced1 in the daksına aksi, rıght eye, that is his mukha, mouth (or place of experience), and this is in accordance with the Vedic text, "This being who is in the right eye is named Indha" (Br.IV i1.2). He who is Indha or Vaiśvanara, possessed of effulgence -the Virat Self (identifying Itself with the cosmic gross body) that is within the sun-and he who is the (ındividual) Self (i.e. Viśva) in the (right) eye are identical Objection: Hiranyagarbha is different, and different also (is the soul that) is the knower of the body and senses, that exists in the right cye as the controller of the eyes, that is the cogniser, and that is the master of the body. Answer: Not so, for in reality no difference is admitted, in accordance with the Vedic text, "One effulgent being hidden in all creatures" (Sv VI.II), and the Smrti texts, "O scion of the Bharata dynasty, know me, again, as the knower of the bodies and senses in all the bodies" (G.XIII.2), "Indivisible, and yet exist- ing in all beings, as though divided" (G.XIII.16).2

1 By the adepts in meditation. 2 Virat is essentially identical with Hiranyagarbha, and so is the "knower" with them both.

I. 2] MĀNDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ I93

Though Viśva exists equally in all the organs, he Is specially referred to as existing in the right eye, for in the right eye is noticed the faculty of perception at its best. The soul, with its abode in the right eye, perceives some form, and then closing the eyes and recollecting that very form sees it manifested, manası antah, inside the mind, in the form of impressions as in a dream.1 As it is the case here, so is it in dream Therefore though Taijasa is within the mind, he is really the same as Viśva. On the cessation of the activity called memory, Prājña, sıttıng ākāse ca hrdi, in the space within the heart, becomes free from the diversity (of objects and their perceiving subject) and continucs to be a mere mass of consciousness, for then there is no functioning of the mind 2 Perception and recollection are merely vibrations of the mind, in the absence of these, there is mere existence n an unmani- fested state, in the heart, in identification with the vital force, as is said in the Vedic text, "It is the vital force indeed that engulfs all these" (Ch TV 111 3). Taijasa is the same as Hiranyagarbha because ›f exist- ing in the mind,3 as is declared by the Vedic texts: "(Being attached, he, together with the work, attains

1 This is how Taijasa is met with in the waking state And Viśva and Taijasa are the same; for the same cntity +hat sees as Viśva, recollects as Taijasa. 2 This is how Prajña is met with in the waking state When the mind ceases to act, the same entity assumes the characteristics of Prājña 3 Taijasa is conditioned by the individual mind and Hiranvagarbha by the cosmic mind But the individual and cosmic minds are the same; and so Taijasa and Hıranya- garbha, conditioned by them, must be the same I3

I94 EIGHT UPANIŞADS [I. 2

that result to which his) subtle body or mind (is attached)"1 (Br.IV.iv.6), "This Purusa, identified with the mind,2 (and resplendent, is realised within the hearc)" (Br.V.vi I), and so on.

Objechon. The vital force is a manifested (i.e. perceptible) reality in a sleeping man; and the organs merge into 1l.3 How can the vital force be unmanifested ?

Answer. That is no defect; for an undifferentiated thing is characterised by absence of any distinction of time and space Although the vital force appears to bc differentiated so long as (individual) identification with Prana persists (among those who think themselves to be intimately connected with the different portions of the vital force4), still, since the self-identification with any special feature, as conditioned by the body, is absent in the vital force during deep sleep, the vital

1 Hiranyagarbha, as possessed of the power to act, 1s the soul within the subtle body (linga), and linga is equated with mind in the Vedic text Therefore Taijasa and Hiranya- garbha are the same 2 Hiranyagarbha is but a special manifestation of Purusa idontified with the mind And Taijasa's chief adjunct 's mind Therefore they are the same 3 People sitting by a sleeping man clearlv perceive the activities of the vital force (Prāna). And an additional argument proving that Prana is a manifested entity is pro- vided by the fact that the organs become identified with it n sleep "Unmanifested" means "devoid of the limitations of time, space, and things" Prana is not so in deep sleep 4 They may think, "This is my Prana", "That is his", and so on.

I. 2] MĀNDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ I95

force is then surely undifferentiated.1 Just as in the case of people identifying themselves with individualised vital force, the vital force becomes unmanifested after death, sımilar, too, is the unmanifestedness in the state of absence of distinctions (in deep sleep) in the case of those who identify themselves with the vital force, and similar also is its potentiality to produce effects. And the witness in the state of unmanifestedness and deep sleep is the same (Consciousness) 2 Moreover, since the individuals who identify themselves with limitations, or witness those states, appear as identical with the Unmanifested, the foregoing attributes, "in whom everything becomes undifferentiated", "who is a mass of consciousness", etc., become appropriate with regard to him3 (1 e Prajña in deep sleep, identity- ing himself with Prana). And there is also the reason adduced earlier 4

Obiection Why should the Unmanifested be called Prana (Vital Force)? Answer Because of the Vedic text, "O good- looking one, (the individual soul, conditioned by) the mind is surely tethered to (that is to say, has for its goal) Prāna" (Ch.VI viii.2). 1 Theugh to others it may appear to be manifested, to the sleeping man it is unmanifested, because for him Prana is then unassociated with any particular time or space. 2 Consciousness underhies the two entities conditioned by the unmanifested states on the divine and human planes. 3 Not only are the sleeper and the Unmanifested one from the standpoint of absence of distinction, but they are also one even when conditioned by limiting adjuncis. 1 The unity of the entity manifested on the divine and human planes

I96 EIGHT UPANISADS [I. 2

Objection: In that text the word Prana means Brahman that was introduced as Existence in the sentence, "O good-looking one, all this was but Exist- ence (Brahman) in the beginning" (Ch.VI 11.I). Answer: That is no valid objection, for Existence was assumed there in a state of latency Though in that sentence the Existence-Brahman is called Prāna, still that Existence (-Brahman) is called Prana as well as Existence without ruling out the state of Its being the source of the emergence of individual beings. Had the seedless (non-causal) state of Brahman been meant, the text would have declared, "Not this, not this" (Br.IV.ıv.22, IV v.I5), "From which speech turns back" (Tai.II.9), "That (Brahman) is surely different from the known, and, again, It is above the unknown" (Ke I 4), and so on, as it is also stated by the Smrti, "It is called neither existence nor non-existence" (G XIII.12). If Brahman in Its seedless (non-causal) state be meant there, then the individuals that merge in It in deep sleep and dissolution cannot reasonably re-emerge, and1 there will be the possibility of the freed souls returning to take birth again, for in either case, the absence of cause is a common factor. Besides, in the absence of any seed (of worldly state) to be burnt by the knowledge (of Brahman), knowledge itself becomes useless. Hence Existence is referred to as Prāna (in the Chandogya Upanisad) and It is spoken of as the cause in all the Upanisads by assuming It (for the time being) to be the seed of others. And it

1 If anybody can re-emerge from sleep or dissolution, conceived of as nothing but identity with the pure Brahman, then.

I. 57 MĀNDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ I97

is because of this that It is referred to by eliminating Its causal state in such Vedic texts as: "Superor to the superior Unmanifested" (Mu.II i.2), "From which speech turns back" (Tai.II ix), "Not this, not this" (Br.IV.1v.22), etc. The supremely real state, free from causality, relation with body etc., and modes of waking etc, of that very entity that is called Prajña, will be spoken separately in its aspect as the Turiya (Fourth) The causal state, too, is verily experienced in the body, inasmuch as an awakened man is seen to have such a recollection as, "I did not know anything (in my deep sleep) " Hence it is said, "Tridhā dche vyavasthitah-existing in three ways in the bodv"

विश्वो हि स्थूलभुङनित्यं तेजसः प्रविविक्तभुक्। आनन्दभुक्तथा प्राज्ञस्त्रिधा भोगं निबोधत ॥।३।।

3. Viśva ever enjoys the gross: Taijasa enjoys the subtle; and similarly Prajña enjoys bliss. Know enjoyment to be threefold. स्थूलं तपयते विश्वं प्रविविक्तं तु तैजसम्। आनन्दश्च तथा प्राजञं त्रिधा तृप्तिं निबोधत॥।४।।

4. The gross satisfy Viśva, and the subtle satisfy Taijasa. And so also joy satisfies Prājña. Know enjoyment to be threefold.

The two verses need no explanation.

त्रिषु धामसु यद्भ्ोज्यं भोक्ता यश्च प्रकीर्तितः । वेदैतदुभयं यस्तु स भुञ्जानो न लिप्यते॥५।।

I98 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. 6

5. He who knows both these-viz the enjoy- ment that there is in the three states, and that which is declared to be the enjoyer there-does not become affected even while enjoying. Trisu dhamasu, in the three states, of waking and the rest; there is but one bhojyam, object of enjoy- ment, that appears in triple form, known as gross, subtle, and bliss. And the entity, known by the names of Viśva, Taijasa, and Prājña, is prakīrtitah, declared to be the one bhoktā, enjoyer, because of his recogni- tion (i.e. persistence of memory in all states) through the single concept of "I am that", and because of his common feature of being the perceiver. He who veda, knows; etat ubhayam, both these, as diversified multi- fariously into enjoyers and the things of enjoyment; sah, he, na lipyate, does not become affected; bhuñ- jānah, even while enjoying, because all that is enjoy- able belongs to a single enjoyer. For nothing is added to or deducted from one's nature by one's own objects (of enjoyment or awareness) as in the case of fire, for fire does not lose or gain (in its essential nature) by consuming its own fuel.

प्रभव: सर्वभावानां सतामिति विनिश्चयः। सर्वं जनयति प्राणश्चेतोंशून् पुरुषः पृथक्॥६। 6. It is a well-established fact that origina- tion belongs to all entities that have existence. Prãņa creates all (objects); Purușa creates separately the rays of Consciousness (that are the living creatures).

I. 6] MAŅDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ I99

Prabhavah, origination, in their respective apparent appearances consisting of names and forms created by ignorance; sarvabhūtānām, belongs to all entities, to the different modes of Viśva, Taijasa, and Prājña ;- satām, to all those that exist.1 It will be said later on, "A barren woman's son does not take birth either in reality or through Māyā" (Kārikā, III.28) For if birth really belongs to nonentities them- selves, then Brahman, which is beyond all empirical relations, will be left without any ground of cognition,2 and may be equated with nonentity. But as a matter of fact, it is seen that the snake and such other things, created by ignorance, and sprouting from the seed of Māya, and appearing as a rope etc, have their exist- ence as the rope etc (which are their substrata). For nobody perceives anywhere a rope-snake or a mirage if there is no substratum. Just as the snake surely had its existence as the rope before its illusory appear- ance as the snake, so also all positive entities, before their manifestation, had certainly existence in the form 1 In their own substritum on which they are super- imposed In the sixth paragraph of the Upanisad, in "this one is verily the place of origin", it was said that Prajña is the source of the phenomenal world The question now is. "Is he a producer of entitis or nonentities?" The answer is that he produces entitics which are a sort of reflection of Reality and are true so long as their substratum is kept in view 2 Logical ground of inference If the effect is true, the cause can be inferred to be so; but if the effect is non- existing, the cause will be equally so The inference with regard to Brahman will be like this. "The world is produced from Existence, for it is a superimposed thing like the snake on a rope"

200 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. 7

of their cause, Prana 1 And it is therefore that the Upansad, too, says, "All this (that is in front) is but Brahman" (Mu.II.ii.II), "In the beginning this universe was but the Self" (Br I iv.I). Prānah sarvam janayaiı, Prāna creates all. Purusah janayatı, Purusa creates, prthak, separately, cetomsun, the rays of Consciousness, that issue out (from Purusa) lıke rays from the sun, that are the modes of the intelligence of Purușa who is by nature Consciousness, that are com- parable to the reflections of the sun on water, and that appear divergently as Viśva, Taijasa, and Prājña in the different bodies of gods, animals, and others ;- (Purusa creates) all these rays of Consciousness that possess the characteristics of living creatures, that differ from what has assumed the appearance of objects, and that are similar (to Purusa) just as the sparks of fire (are to fire), or the reflections of the sun on water (are to the sun). But Präna, or the Self in the causal state, creates all other entities2 as shown in the Vedic texts: "as a spider (spreads and withdraws its thread)" (Mu.I.i.7), and "as from fire tiny sparks fly in all directions" (Br.II.i.20).

विभूति प्रसवं त्वन्ये मन्यन्ते सृष्टिचिन्तकाः । स्वप्नमायासरूपेति सृष्टिरन्येर्विकल्पिता।७। 7. Others steeped in cogitation about crea- tion, consider origination as an exuberance (of

1 Prana is Brahman considered as an unknown entity but identified with Existence and serving as the source of all.

2 Existing in the form of objects

I. 71 MĀNDŪKYA UPANIŞAD & KĀRIKĀ 20I

God), while by others it is imagined that creation is comparable to dream or magic.

Srsticintakah. people steeped in the thought (or theories) of creation; manyante, consider; that creation is a uibhut, exuberance, (a demonstration of the superhuman power), of God The idea implied is that for people who think of the supreme Reality there is no interest in questions regarding creation, (which 1s illusory) as is declared m the Vedic text, "Indra (the Lord), on account of Māya, is perceived as manifold" (Br II v 19). For those who observe a magician throw up a rope mnto the sky, ascend it with arms and vansh out of sight, and engage in a fight in which he is cut to pieces and falls to rise up again, do not evince any interest in deliberating on the realty of the magic and its effect conjured up by him Sımilarly, analogous to the spreading out of the rope by the magician, is this manifestation of deep seep, dream, and so on; comparable to the magician, up the rope, are the Prajña, Taijasa, and the rest in those states; and different from the rope and the man who has climbed up it is the real magician. Just as that very magician stands on the ground, invisible because of his magical cover, sımilar is the supreme Reality called Turīya. Therefore the noble people, aspiring to liberation, evince interest in the contemplation of that Turīya alone, but not so in that of creation that serves no purpose. Hence these theories are advanced only by those who cogitate about creation. This fact is stated

202 EIGHT UPANISADS [I. 9

ın svapnamāyāsarupā, of the same nature as dream and magic.1

इच्छामात्रं प्रभो: सृषिरिति सृष्टौ विनिश्चिताः। कालात्प्रसूति भूतानां मन्यन्ते कालचिन्तका: ॥८। 8. With regard to creation some have the firm conviction that creation is a mere will of the Lord. People engrossed in the thought of time (to wit, astrologers) consider that birth of beings is from time.

Srstiḥ, creation, is icchamatram, a mere will; prabhoh, of the Lord, because His will is unfailing. A pot, for instance, is a mere thought, and it is nothing beyond thought. Some think that creation is from time alone. भोगार्थं सृष्टिरित्यन्ये क्रीडार्थमिति चापरे। देवस्येष स्वभावोऽयमाप्तकामस्य का स्पृहा॥६॥ 9. Some others say that creation is for the enjoyment (of God), while still others say that it is for (His) disport. But it is the very nature of the Effulgent Being, (for) what desire can One have whose desire is ever fulfilled ? Others think that srstih, creation, is bhogārtham, for the sake of enjoyment; (and) kridārtham, for the sake of disport. These two views are refuted by 1 This differs from the Vedantic position in believing that dream is true so far as it reflects the realities of the waking state, and that the incantations etc, conjuring up magical illusions, are themselves true, though the magic is false.

Mā 7] MĀNŅŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ 203

"devasya eşah svabhavah ayam, of the Effulgent Being this is the nature"1 etc., where reliance is placed on the argument from the nature (of God). Or all the points of view2 are refuted by asserting, "Āptakāmasya kā sprhā, what desire can One have whose desire is ever fulfilled?" For apart from the fact that the rope etc. are constituted by natural ignorance,3 no cause can be ascertained for their appearing as snake etc.

UPANISAD

The fourth quarter which follows in order has to be stated; hence this is presented (by the Upanisad) in "nantah-prajnam, not conscious of internal object" etc. Since It (i.e. Turiya) is devoid of every characteristic that can make the use of words possible, It is not describable through words, and hence the (Upanisad) seeks to indicate Turiya merely through the negation of attributes.

Objection. In that case It is a mere void.

Answer: No, for an unreal illusion cannot exist without a substratum; for the illusion of silver, snake, human being, mirage, etc., cannot be imagined to exist

' Otherwise known as Maya which is without any beginning and is directly perceived This being so, no motive should be searched for 2 Presented in the verses 7 and 8. and the first line of veise 9 $ Ignorance about the rope etc that are the substrata of the illusory things like snake etc.

204 EIGHT UPANISADS [Mā. 7

apart from the (corresponding) substrata of the mother of pearl, rope, stump of a tree, desert, etc.1

Objection: In that case, just as a pot etc. that hold water etc. are denoted by words, so also Turīya should be specified by (positive) words, and not by negations, since It is the substratum of all such illusion as Prāna etc. Answer: Not so, because the illusion of Prana and the rest is unreal just as silver and the rest are on the mother of pearl etc For a relation between the real and the unreal does not lend itself to verbal representa- tion, since the relation itself is unsubstantial Unlike a cow, for instance, the Self, in Its own reality, is not an object of any other means of knowledge; for the Self is free from all adventitious attributes. Nor like a cow etc. does It belong to any class, because, by virtue of Its being one without a second, It is free from generic and specific attributes Nor is It possessed of activity like a cook for instance, since It is devoid of all action Nor is It possessed of qualities like blueness etc., It being free from qualities. Therefore It baffles all verbal description. Objection: It will, in that case, serve no useful purpose like the horn of a hare and such other things. Answer: Not so; for when Turīya is realised as the Self, it leads to the cessation of craving for the non-Self, just as the hankering for silver ceases on recognising the nacre For there can be no possibility

1 Since an illusion is perceived as soaked in idea of existence, it cannot have non-existence as its basis.

Mā 7] MĀNŅŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ 205

of such defects as ignorance, desire, and the like, after the realisation of Turiya as one's Self. Nor is there any reason why Turiya should not be realised as identical with one's Self, inasmuch as all the Upanisads aim at this conclusion, as is evidenced by the texts, "Thou art That" (Ch.VI viii-xvi), "This Self is Brahman" (Br II V.19), "That which is the Self is Truth" (Ch VI.viii.16); "That which is directly and immediately Brahman" (Br III.iv.I), "That which is inside and outside and is without birth" (Mu.II i 2), "All this is but the Self" (Ch VII xxv 2), and so on This very Self, that is the supreme Reality but has false appearances, has been spoken of as possessed of four quarters Its unreal form has been dealt with, it is a creation of ignorance, is analogous to a snake superimposed on a rope, and consists of the three quarters, that are related (mutually) like the seed and its sprout 1 Now, in the text beginning with, "nāntah- pranam, not conscious of the internal world", the Upanisad speaks of the non-causal, supremelv real state, comparable to a rope, etc, by way of elimmnating the three states, comparable to the snake etc (super- imposed on the rope etc.). नान्त:प्रज्ञं न वहिष्प्रज्ञं नोभयतःप्रज्ञं न प्रज्ञानघनं न प्रज्ञं नाप्रज्ञम्। अदष्मव्यवहार्यमग्राह्यमलक्षणमचिन्त्य- मव्यपदेश्यमेकात्मप्रत्ययसारं प्रपश्चोपशमं शान्तं शिवमद्वैतं चतुर्थ मन्यन्ते स आत्मा स विज्ञेय:॥७॥ 7. They consider the Fourth to be that which is not conscious of the internal world, nor 1 By way of cause and effect

206 EIGHT UPANISADS [Mā. 7

conscious of the external world, nor conscious of both the worlds, nor a mass of consciousness, nor simple consciousness, nor unconsciousness; which is unseen, beyond empirical dealings, beyond the grasp (of the organs of action), unin- ferable, unthinkable, indescribable; whose valid proof consists in the single belief in the Self; in which all phenomena cease; and which is unchanging, auspicious, and non-dual. That is the Self, and that is to be known.

Objects. The start was made with the premiss that the Self is possessed of four quarters. Then, after the presentation of the three quarters, it has become evident that the fourth is different from those three that are conscious of the internal world, and so on; and hence the negation through "not conscious of the internal world" etc becomes futile.

Answer: Not so; for as the true nature of the rope is realsed through the negation of the illusions of a snake etc, so the very Self, subsisting usually in the three states, is sought to be established as Turīya in the same way as is done in the case of the text "That thou art"1 (Ch VI.viii). For if Turiya, whose char- acteristics are dissimilar to those of the Self in the three states, be really different (from the Self), then owing to the absence of any means for realising Turiya, the scriptural instruction will be useless or Turiya will be

' This positive statement is interpreted not literally. but figuratively to mean that "thou", which is the individual soul, is identical with "that", which is God, when both are bereft of conditioning factors.

Mā. 7] MĀNDŪKYA UPANIȘAD & KĀRIKĀ 207

reduced to a nonentity. On the view, however, that like the rope, imagined varously as a snake etc., the Self, too, though one, is imagined in the three states to be possessed of such attributes as consciousness of the internal world etc, there follows the cessation of the phenomenal world of misery simultaneously with the valid knowledge, arsing from the negation of such attributes as being conscious of the internal world; and therefore there remains no need to search for any other means of knowledge or any other discipline (like constant thinking) for the realisation of Turīya This is similar to what happens in the case of the knowledge of the rope where the elimination of the snake from the rope occurs simultaneously with the discrimination between the rope and the snake.1 On the contrary, by those who hold the view that in the act of knowing a pot for instance, an instrument of knowledge engages in some other activity in addition to the removal of darkness (from the pot etc ), it may as well be held that in the matter of splitting wood, the act of splitting engages in doing something to one of the two parts in addition to removing the adhesion of the two members 2

1 Since along with the discriminating knowledge of the form, "This is a rope and not a snake", the cessat on of the snakre comes simultaneously, one need not search for separate result to issue out of the direct perception of the rope, or for any other means of its knowledge, cr ant other aid to it 2 The objection was. "The result of applying an in- strument of knowledge to any object is the revclation of the object and not the mere removal of any illusion created by darkness or ignorance " The answer is' "An instrument of knowledge fulfils its purpose by removing darkness of

208 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [Mā. 7

On the other hand, if it is true that the instrument of knowledge, engaged in separating a jar from the darkness (covering it), fulfils its goal by merely removing the unwanted darkness, just as the act of cutting, aiming at liquidating the sticking together of the parts of the wood to be split, fully serves its pur- pose by separating the two limbs, then the knowledge of the jar emerges immediately; and it is not achieved by any instrument of knowledge. Just as it is here, so in the case of Turiya, the instrument of knowledge, that is nothing but a valid knowledge arising from negation and intended to separate such ideas as "con- scious of the internal world" that are superimposed on the Self, has no other action on Turīya, apart from eliminating the unwanted attributes like "conscious of the internal world",1 for simultaneously with the cessation of such attributes as "conscious of the internal world", there comes about the eradication of the difference of the knower, (the known, and the knowledge). So also it will be said, "duality does not persist after knowledge" (Kārkā, I 18), for knowledge (as a mental state) does not continue for a second moment following that of the cessation of duality.

ignorance from its object The revelation comes pan passu, as a matter of course. If the instiument of knowledge 1s supposed to serve the additional purpose of adding a fiesh feature, like revelation to its object, then one may as well argue that the cutting of wood aims not only at removing the adhesion of the two parts, but also at adding something to either of the two parts" 1 Turīya is self-effulgent and does not require to be illumined by any instrument of knowledge.

Mã. 7] MĀŅDŪKYA UPANIŞAD & KĀRIKĀ 209

Should it, however, continue, it will lead to infinite regress resulting in non-cessation of duality.1 There- fore the conclusion arrived at is that all evils, such as "consciousness of the internal world", superimposed on the Self, cease simultaneously with the application (that is to say, birth) of the instrument (of illumina- tion) that is nothing but a valid knowledge arising from negation (of duality) By the phrase, "nantah-prañam, not conscious of the internal world", is eliminated Taijasa By "na bahisprajñam, not conscious of the outside world", ıs eliminated Viśva By "na ubhayatah-prajñam, not conscious of either" is ruled out the intermediate state between dream and waking. By "na pramñāna- ghanam, not a mass of consciousness" is denied the state of deep sleep, for this consists in a state of latency where everything becomes indistinguishable. By "na prajnam, not simple consciousness" is denied the awareness of everything simultaneously (by a single act of consciousness) By "na apramñam, not uncon- sciousness"' is negated insentience Objection: Since attributes like "conscious of the internal world" are perceived as inhering in the Self, how can they be understood to become non-existent by a mere negation, like the snake disappearing from the rope? 1 If the knowledge, calculated tc eliminate duality, persists after serving its purpese, some other knowledge will be needed to eliminate it That other krowledge will agamn require a third for a similar purpose, and so on To avoid this contingency, the final knowledge must be assumed to be self-ımmolatıng

I4

2I0 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [Mā. 7

The answer is: Sınce lıke the imaginary diversi- ties-such as a snake, a line of water, etc., super- imposed on the rope-the above states (appearing on the Self) mutually rule out each other, though they are in essence one with the witnessing Consciousness, and since the witnessing Consciousness in Its essence is unchanging in all the states, it follows that the witness is true. Objection: It changes (i.e. disappears) in deep sleep. Answer: Not so, for one in deep sleep is cognised (as soaked in Consciousness);1 and this is borne out by the Vedic text, "for the knower's function of knowing can never be lost" (Br.IV iii 30). And just because It is so, It is adrstam, unseen 2 Since It is unseen (i.e. unperceived), therefore It is avyavahāryam, beyond empirical dealıngs. Agrāhyam, beyond the grasp, of the organs of action. Alaksanam, without any logical ground of inference, that is to say, uninferable. Therefore It is acıntyam, unthinkable Hence It is avyapadeśyam, indescribable, by words. It ıs eka-ātma-pratyaya-sāram, to be spotted by the unchanging belief that It is the same Self that subsists in the states of waking and so on. Or the Turiya that has for Its sāra, valid proof eka atmapratyaya, the single belief in the Self, is the eka-atmapratyaya-sāra

I One rising from deep sleep says, "I slept soundly, and I was not aware of anything." This memory would not be possible unless the state was witnessed with the help of Consciousness so as to produce the necessary impressions. 2 Not the object of any sense of knowledge.

Mā. 7] MĀŅDŪKYA UPANIŞAD & KĀRIKĀ 2II

And this is in accord with the Vedic text. "It is to be meditated upon as the Self" (Br I.iv 7).

The attributes, such as "conscious of the internal world", belonging to the possessors of the states (vlz Viśva, Taijasa, and Prājña), have been negated. In "prapañcopasamam, the one in whom all phenomena have ceased" etc. are being denied the attributes of the states. Hence It is santam, unchanging,1 śivam, auspicious.2 Since It is advaitam, non-dual, free from illusory ideas of difference; therefore manyante, (they) consider, It to be, caturtham, the Fourth, being distinct from the three quarters that are mere appearances "Sah ātmā, that is the Self; sah vyñeyah, that is to be known" this is said to imply that just as the rope is known to be different from the superimposed snake, the gap on the earth, and the stick, sımilarly that Self is to be known (as different from the super- imposed states)-the Self that is presented in the sentence "That thou art" (Ch VI vni-xvi), and that has been spoken of by such texts as "He is never seen, but is the witness" (Br III.vii 23), "for the vision of the witness can never be lost" (Br IV.ni 23), etc This (knowledge of the Self) is spoken of from the stand- point of the previous state of ignorance,3 for on the dawn ot knowledge, no dualitv is left. 1 Free from love, hatred, etc 2 Absolutely pure, supreme Bliss and Consciousness in essence 3 The Self, devoid of all description, cannot be known objectively But since in the state of ignorance, one understands knowledge as having an objective refcrence, the text follows that trend of +hought here as well

212 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I I0

GAUDAPĀDA'S KĀRIKĀ

Here occur these verses (of Gaudapāda):

निवृत्ते: सर्वदुःखानामीशानः प्रभुख्ययः । अद्वैतः सवेभावानां देवस्तुर्यों विभु: स्मृतः ॥१॥॥ I0. The inexhaustible non-dual One is the ordainer-the Lord-in the matter of eradicating all sorrows. This effulgent Turiya is held to be the all-pervasive source of all entities.

Nivrtteh, in the matter of the eradication; sarva- duhkhānām, of all sorrows, represented by Viśva, Taijasa, and Prājña; the Self that is Turīya is īsānah, the ordainer The word prabhuh, Lord, is an expla- nation of isanah The idea is that He is the Lord capable of ordaining the cessation of sorrow, for sorrow ceases as a result of His knowledge (He is) avyayah, inexhaustible, that is to say, does not deviate from His nature Why is this so? Because He is advaitah, non-dual. He who is this devah, effulgent One, who is so called because of His self-effulgence; who is turyah, the Fourth, is smrtah, held to be; uibhuh, all-pervasive (source);1 sarvabhāvānām, of all entities. For determining the true nature of Turiya, the generic and specific characteristics of Viśva and the rest are being ascertained:

कार्यकारणबद्धौ ताविष्येते विश्वतैजसौ। प्राज्ञ: कारणबद्धस्तु द्वौ तौ तुर्ये न सिध्यतः ॥११।। 1 Turiya is vibhu, because the different (vrvidha) states issue (bhavanlt) from Hım-A.G.

I I2] MĀNDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ 2I3

II. Those two, viz Viśva and Taijasa, are held to be conditioned by cause and effect. Prajña is conditioned by cause. But both these do not exist in Turīya. Kārya, derived in the sense of anything produced, means the state of being the effect Karana, derived in the sense of anything that acts, means the causal state Those two, viz viśva-tarjasau, Viśva and Taijasa, as described earlier, ısyete, are held to be; kārya-kārana- baddhau, bound by, comprised within, the seed and fruit states, consisting in the non-apprehension and mis- apprehension of Reality But Prājña is bound by the causal state alone. The non-apprehension of Reality alone is the cause of bringing about the state of Prajña Therefore tau dvau, both these two-the causal and the resultant conditions, the non-apprehension and mis- apprehension of Realty,-na sidhyatah turye, do not exist, that is to say, are not possıble, ın Turīya.

नात्मानं न परांश्चेव न सत्यं नापि चानृतम्। प्राज्ञ: किश्चन संवेत्ति तुर्य तत् सर्वदक् सदा ॥१२। I2. Prajña comprehends neither himself nor others, neither truth nor falsehood. But that Turiya is for ever everything and the witness.

How, again, is Prajña conditioned by the causal state, and how are the bondages of non-apprehension and mis-apprehension impossible in the case of Turiya? Sınce unlike Viśva and Taijasa, Prājña na samvetti, does not apprehend; kim cana, anything, any external duality that is different from the Self and is born of

214 EIGHT UPANISADS [I. I2

the seed of ignorance; therefore he is conditioned by the darkness of non-perception of Reality that is the seed of false perception. Sınce tat, that; Turīya is sadā, for ever; sarva-drk, all (sarva) that there is as well as a witness (drk), there being nothing beside Turīya; there- fore Turiya has not the seed consisting in non-perception of Reality. And just because of this there is absence in Turīya of false perception resulting from non- perception, for in the sun, that is ever resplendent, there cannot be any possibility of the opposite darkness or shining in any way other than that of the sun, in con- formity with the Vedic text. "for the vision of the witness can never be lost" (Br. IV. iii. 23). Or Turīya is said to be the "sarva-drk, seer of everything" for cver, because it is but Turiya who, by existing in all beings during the dream and the waking states, seems to be the seer of everything For the Upanisad says, "There is no other witness but this" (Br III. viii. II). द्वैतस्याग्रहणं तुल्यमुभयो: प्राज्ञतुर्ययोः। बीजनिद्रायुतः प्राज्ञः सा च तुर्ये न विद्यते॥१३॥ 13. Non-perception of duality is common to both Prājña and Turīya. Prājña is endued with sleep that is a causal state. But in Turīya that sleep does not exist. This verse is meant to remove the doubt arising from another source. "The non-perception of duality being similar, why should Prajña alone be conditioned by causality and not Turiya?"-this doubt that may arise is being refuted. The reason is that Prājña is bījanidrāyutah: nidrā, sleep, consists in the non-per- ception of Reality, and that itself is the bija, seed, of

I I3] MAŅDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ 215

the birth of the cognition of varieties; and by this bījanidrā, sleep that is a causal state; yutah, is endued, Prajña. That sleep, consisting in the non-perception of Reality, na vidyate, does not exist; (turye), in Turīya, because of his being by nature a constant witness. Therefore in Him there is no bondage of the causal state This is the purport.

न निद्रां नैव व स्वमं तुर्ये पश्यन्ति निश्चिता:॥१४॥

The earlier two are endowed with dream and sleep, but Prajña is endued with I4.

dreamless sleep. People of firm conviction do not see either sleep cr dream in Turīya.

Svapna, dream, consists in false perception, lıke that of a snake on a rope. Nıdrā, sleep, has been spoken of as darkness, consisting in non-perception of Reality By these two-dream and sleep-are endued Viśva and Taijasa, and this is why they have been referred to as conditioned by the states of cause and effect (Karikā, I. II); whereas Prājña is conditioned by sleep alone, unassociated with dream; and hencc he has been referred to as conditioned by the causal state. Niścitāh, those with firm conviction, the knowers of Brahman; na paśyanti, do not see, both these in Turiya, these being of an opposite nature, like dark- ness with regard to the sun. Therefore it has been said that Turiya is not conditioned by the states of cause and effect.

216 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. I5

It is being shown when one becomes firmly rooted in Turīya:

अन्यथा गृहतः स्वपो निद्रा तत्चमजानतः ।

विपर्यासे तयो: क्षीणे तुरीयं पदमश्नते ॥१५॥ I5. Dream belongs to one who sees falsely, and sleep to one who does not know Reality. When the two errors of these two1 are removed, one attains the state that is Turīya.

Svapnah, dream, comes to one grhnatah, cognising; anyathā, falsely; like the cognition of a snake on a rope, in the states of dream and wakıng. Nıdrā, sleep; -belonging to one ajānatah tattvam, not cognising Reality ;- is equally present in all the three states. Dream and sleep being the common features of both Viśva and Taijasa, are treated as one. Since in these two states sleep is of secondary importance owing to the predominance of false perception, the error (in these states) is equated with dream But in the third state the error takes the form of sleep alone, consisting in non-perception of Reality. Therefore when tayoh, of these two (Viśva-Taijasa and Prājña), existing in the states of effect and cause; viparyāse, the two errors, consisting in false perception and non-perception, and constituting the two bondages in the states of effect and cause; ksine, are eradicated, on the cognition of the supreme Reality; then one aśnute, attains; turīyam padam, the state of Turiya. The idea is that, as he

1 Viśva and Taijasa constitute one factor and Prājña the other This is why "tayoh, of these two" is used in the dual number.

I. 16] MĀŅŅŪKYA UPANIŞAD & KĀRIKĀ 217

does not perceive both kinds of bondage, he becomes firmly rooted ın Turīya

अनादिमायया सुप्तो यदा जीव: प्रबुध्यते। अजमनिद्रमस्वप्नमद्वैतं बुध्यते तदा ॥१६। 16. When the individual, sleeping under the influence of beginningless Māyā, is awakened, then he realises the birthless, sleep- less, dreamless, non-dual (Turīya). This one, the jivah, the transmigrating individual soul, that is suptah, asleep, while seeing in both the (waking and dream) states such dreams as "This is my father", "This my son", "This is my grandson", "This is my field", "These are my anımals", "I am their master", "I am happy, miserable", "I am despoiled by this one, and I have gained through this one", and so on, under the influence of sleep that is but Maya whose activity had no beginning and which has the two facets of non-perception of Reality, the causal state, and false perception of Reality Yadā, when, by a most gracious teacher, who has realised the truth that forms the purport of the Upanisads, he (the indvidual) is awakened through the teaching, "Thou art not a bundle of causes and effects, but 'Thou art That' ", then that individual understands thus How? (Thus): (He knows the) ajam, birthless, which is called so since in It there is no external or internal mutation, starting with birth, that positive objects are heir to; the idea is that It is externally and internally devoid of all mutations that phenomenal objects are subject to. (He knows the) anidram, sleepless (Turīya),

218 EIGHT UPANISADS [1. I7

since in It there is no sleep, the causal state, consist- ing in the darkness of ignorance that is the cause of birth and so on Since that Turiya is sleepless, therefore (he realises) It as asvapnam, dreamless, false perception (svapna) being based on non-perception (nidrā) Since It is sleepless and dreamless, therefore the individual, tada, then; budhyate, realises the birthless, non-dual Turīya as his Self. प्रपञ्चो यदि विद्येत निवर्तेत न संशयः। मायामात्रमिदं द्वैतमद्वैतं परमार्थतः॥१७।। 17. It is beyond question that the pheno- menal world would cease to be if it had any existence. All this duality that is nothing but Maya, is but non-duality in reality. If one is to be awakened by negating the pheno- menal world, how can there be non-duality so long as the phenomenal world persists> The answer is: Such indeed will be the case prapancah yadr vidyeta, if the world had existence. But being superimposed like a snake on a rope, it does not exist. Na samsayah, there is no doubt; that if it had existed, nivarteta, it would cease to be Not that the snake, fancied on the rope through an error of observation, existed there in reality and is then removed by correct observation. Not that the magic conjured up by a magician exists in reality and is then removed on the removal of the optical illusion of its witness. Similarly māyāmātram idam dvaitam, this duality that is nothing but Māya, and is called the phenomenal world; is paramarthatah, mn supreme truth; advaitam, non-dual, just like the rope and the magician. Therefore the purport is that there

Mā 81 MANDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ

is no such thing as the world which appears or dısappears विकल्पो विनिवर्तेत कल्पितो यदि केनचित्। उपदेशादयं वादो ज्ञाते द्वैतं न विद्यते॥१८॥ 18. Diversity would disappear if it had been imagined by anyone. This kind of talk is for the sake of (making) instruction (possible). Duality ceases to exist after realisation. How can such fancies as instruction, instructor, and the instructed disappear? To this the answer is: Vikalpah, diversity, vinivarteta, would discontinue; yadı, if; it had been kalpitah, imagined, kena cit, by anybody Just as this phenomenal world is analogous to magic or a snake superimposed on a rope, so also such fancies as the differences of the instructed and so on are there upadesat, for the sake of instruction, hence ayam vadah this talk-of instructor, instruction, and instructed-is for the sake of instruction. When the effect of instrucuon is accomplshed, jñate, on the realisation. of the supreme Realty; dvartam na vidyate, duality ceases to exist UPANISAD

सोडयमात्माऽध्यक्षरमोड्कारोऽधिमानं पादा मात्रा मात्राश्च पादा अकार उकारो मकार इति ॥८।। 8. That very Self, considered from the standpoint of the syllable (denoting It) is Om. Considered from the standpoint of the letters (constituting Om), the quarters (of the Self) are the letters (of Om), and the letters are the quarters. (The letters are): a, u, and m.

220 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [Mā. 8

Sah ayam ātmā, that very Self, that was equated with Om in "This Self is possessed of four quarters" (Mã 2), by giving predominance to the object denoted (by Om),-that very Self; adhyaksaram, from the standpoint of the syllable, when explained with emphasıs on the syllable (is Om) Which again is that syllable? That is being stated. Onkārah, it is the syllable Om That syllable Om, while being divided into quarters, is adhimatram, exists on letters as its basis How? Those which constitute the quarters of the Self are the letters of Om. Which are they? They are the letters a, u, and m. जागरितस्थानो वैश्वानरोडकार: प्रथमा मात्राऽडपे- रादिमत्त्वाद्वाSSप्रोति ह वै सर्वान् कामानादिश्च भवति य एवं वेद॥।६। 9. Vaiśvānara, who has the waking state as His sphere, is the first letter a, because of (the similarity of) pervasiveness. He who knows thus, does verily attain all desirable things, and he becomes the foremost. With regard to these, specific relations are being established. He who is vaiśvānaraḥ, Vaiśvanara (Virāt); jāgartasthanah, with His sphere (of activity) as the wakıng state,1 is akārah, a,-prathamā mātrā,

1 The Self in the gross individual context (viz Viśva) 1s identical with the Self in the gross cosmic context (viz Vaiś- vānara or Virat) Similarly, it is to be understood that Taijasa is identical with Hiranyagarbha, and Prājña with the Unmanifested, the difference lying only in the sphere of manifestation. This identity is suggested by the indiscri- minate use of these terms in the present and following texts.

Mā. I0] MAŅDŪKYA UPANIȘAD & KĀRIKĀ 22I

the first letter, of Om. Because of what similarty? That is being said Apteh, because of pervasiveness. Apti means pervasiveness. By the sound a is pervaded all speech, according to the Vedic text, "The sound a is indeed all speech" (Ai A. II.111.7.13) Sımilarly, by Vaiśvānara is pervaded the whole universe, according to the Vedic text, "The head mdeed of this Self, that is Vaiśvanara, is heaven" etc. (Ch V xV111.2). And we said that the word and the thing denoted by the word are the same That which has adi, precedence, Is said to be adimat, first As the letter called a Is the first, so also is Vaiśvānara Because ot this sımılarty Vaiśvānara is identified with a. The fruit attained by a knower of this identity is stated: Apnoti ha var sarvān kāmān, he surely attams all desirable things, ca bhavati adih, and he becomes the foremost, among the great; yah evam veda, who knows thus, knows the identity as stated स्वप्नस्थानस्तैजस उकारो द्वितीया मात्रोत्कषादुभय- त्वाद्वोत्कर्षति ह वै ज्ञानसन्तति समानश् भवति नास्या- ब्रह्मचित् कुले भवति य एवं वेद॥१०॥ I0. He who is Taijasa with the state of dream as his sphere (of activity) is the second letter u (of Om); because of the similarity of excellence and intermediateness. He who knows thus increases the current of knowledge and becomes equal to all. None is born in his line who is not a knower of Brahman He who is taijasah, Taijasa; svapnasthinah, with his sphere as the state of dream, is the duitīyā mātrā,

222 EIGHT UPANISADS [Mā. I0

second letter, ukārah, u, of Om. Because of what similarity? That is being said: Utkarsat, because of excellence. The letter u is, as it were, better than the letter a; so also is Taijasa better than Viśva. Ubhayatvāt vā, or (this is so) because of intermediale position The letter u occurs between the letters a and m; and so also is Taijasa intermediate between Viśva and Prājña. (Taijasa is u) because of this similarity of being related to both. The result attained by the knower is being stated. Utkarsatı ha vai jñānasania- tim, he heightens, that is to say, increases, the current of his knowledge, ca bhavati samānah, and he becomes equal-he does not become an object of envy to his enemies, as he is not to his friends Asya kule, in hıs line; yah evam veda, who knows thus; na hhavati abrahmavit, none is born who is not a knower of Brahman

सुषुप्तस्थान: प्राज्ञो मकारस्तृतीया मात्रा मितेरपीतेर्घा मिनोति ह वा इद५ सर्वमपीतिश्च भर्वात य एवं वेद ॥११॥ II. Prājña with his sphere of activity in the sleeping state is m, the third letter of Om, because of measuring or because of absorption. Anyone who knows thus measures all this, and he becomes the place of absorption. He that ıs prājnah, Prajña; susuptasthānah, with his sphere the state of sleep; is makarah, the letter m; which is trtiya matra, the third letter; of the syllable Om. By what analogy? That is being said: This is the analogy here-miteh, because of measuring. Miti means to measure. As barley is measured by the vessel

I 19] MĀŅDŪKYA UPANIŞAD & KĀRIKĀ 223

called Prastha, so are Viśva and Taijasa measured, as it were, because of their entry into and coming out of Prajna during dissolution and origination. Sımilarly, too, at the end of the pronunciation of the syllable Om and at the time of its fresh pronunciation, the letters a and u seem to enter into the last letter m to come out again from it Va apiteh, or because of absorption Apiti means getting merged, getting united, in At the time of the pronunciation of Om, a and u seem to get merged into the last letter m. Similarly Viśva and Taijasa merge into Prajña at the time of sleep Because cf this analogy also there is the identity cf Prajña and the letter m The result attained by the man of knowledge is stated: Minoti ha vai idam sarvam, he measures all this, universe, that is to say, he knows its reality, ca bhavati apitih, and he becomes the place of absorption, that is to say the Self in Its causal state, of the universe. The mention of subsi- diary results here is by way of praising the primary means

GAUDAPĀDA'S KĀRIKĀ Here occur these verses (of Gaudapada).

विश्वस्यात्वघिवक्षायामादिसामान्यमुत्कटम्। मात्रासंप्रतिपत्तौ स्यादापिसामान्यमेव च ॥१६।। 19. When the identity cf Viśva with the letter a is intended, (that is to say) when Viśva's identity with a letter is apprehended, the simi- laritv of being the first, as well as the similarity of all-pervasiveness, emerges in view.

224 EIGHT UPANISADS [I. I9.

When the identity viśvasya, of Viśva; with a, with the mere letter a, is intended, then, according to the reasoning adduced; sāmanyam, the similarity; of being the di, first; is seen as utkatam, emerging. This is the idea. The clause "when the identity with a is. intended" ıs explained by mātrāsampratipattau. which means "when Viśva's identity with a alone is appre- hended". After "āptı-sāmānyam eva ca, the simi- larity of all-pervasiveness", the word "utkatam, (is seen as) emerging" is understood because of the use of "ca, and." तैजसस्योत्वविज्ञान उत्कर्षो दृश्यते स्फुटम्। मात्रासंप्रतिपत्तौ स्यादुभयत्वं तथाविधम्॥२०॥ 20. In the matter of comprehending Taijasa as identified with u, that is to say, when Taijasa's identity with a letter is apprehended, the similarity of excellence is clearly seen, and intermediacy also is equally clear. Taiasasya utva-vyñane, in the matter of knowing Taijasa as the letter u, when it is intended io be identified with u; utkarsah, excellence, drśyate, is seen; sphutam, clearly. This is the meaning. Ubhayatvam, intermediacy, is also clear. All this is to be explained as before. मकारभावे प्राज्ञस्य मानसामान्यमुत्कटम्। मात्रासंप्रतिपत्तौ तु लयसामान्यमेव च ॥२१॥ 2I. In the matter of Prajña's identity with the letter m, that is to say, when Prajña's identity with a letter is apprehended, the similarity of

I.23] MĀŅDŪKYA UPANIȘAD & KĀRIKĀ 225

being a measure is seen to emerge plainly, and so also does the similarity of absorption. The idea is that in the matter of Prajña's identity with the letter m, measurement and absorption are excellent points of similarity.

त्रिषु धामसु यस्तुल्यं सामान्यं वेत्ति निश्चितः। स पूज्य: सर्वभूतानां वन्दश्चैव महामुनिः ॥२२॥। 22. He who knows with firm conviction, the common similarities in the three states is a great sage, worthy of adoration and salutation by all beings.

Sah, he; who niścitah, having the firm conviction, "This is certainly so", vetti, knows; in the three states, mentioned above, tulyam samānyam, the common analogies, spoken of; becomes in the world a knower of Brahman and is pujyah, adorable; and vandyah, worthy of salutation

अकारो नयते विश्वमुकारश्चापि तैजसम्। मकारश् पुनः प्राजञं नामान्रे विद्यते गतिः ॥२३।। 23. The letter a leads to Viśva; so also the letter u leads to Taijasa; and the letter m, again, leads to Prajña. With regard to one freed from letters, there remains no attainment.1 1 A represents the gross universe, the waking state, and Viśva; u represents the subtle universe, dream, and Taijasa, and i represents the causal state, sleep, and Prājña. The earher ones merge into the latter ones. In this way every- thing is reduced to Om While engaged in this meditation of Om as all, there flashes in the aspirant's mind the teacher's I5

226 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.23

Akärah, the letter a; nayah carries; him who, after resorting to Om, meditates on it by identifying the quarters of the Self with the letters of Om through the foregoing common features, viśvam, to Viśva; makes him attain Viśva. The idea is that he who meditates on Om with the help of a, becomes identified with Vaiśvānara (Virāt) Similarly ukarah, the letter u; takes him taijasam, to Taijasa. And makārah, the letter m, punah, again; prajnam, to Prajna. The verb "leads" is to be understood from the use of the word "ca, and". But when m, too, disappears, then owing to the destruction of the causal state, amatre, with regard to the one freed from letters (and parts); na vidyate, there does not remain; any gatih, attainment.

UPANIȘAD

अमात्रश्चतुर्थोऽव्यवहार्यः प्रपश्चोपशमः शिवोऽ्द्वेत एवमोङ्कार आत्मैव संचिशत्यात्मनाSडत्मानं य एवं वेद ॥१२॥ इति माण्डूक्योपनिषत् समाप्ता॥ I2. The partless Om is Turīya-beyond all conventional dealings, the limit of the nega- tion of the phenomenal world, the auspicious, and the non-dual. Om is thus the Self to be

instruction that everything is but the absolute Brahman Then all the phenomenal world, merged in Om, disappears in Brahman, and there remains no goal to attain Though the meditation in the three stages relate to the same Om, the results are different in accordance with the emphasis laid on its constituents.

Mā. 12] MĀŅDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ 227

sure. He who knows thus enters the Self through his Self.

Amatrah, that which has no matra, part-the partless Om, becomes but the caturthah, Fourth, Turiya, merely the absolute Self; which is avyava- häryah, beyond empirical relations, because of the disappearance of names and nameables, that are but forms of speech and mind, prapancopasamah, the culmination of phenomenal existence,1 śwah, the auspicious, advaitah, non-dual Evam, thus; Om, as possessed of the three letters, and as applied by a man with the above knowledge, is ātmā eva, verily identi- cal with the Self, possessed of three quarters. Yah evam veda, he who knows thus; samvisati, enters; ālmānam, into (his own supreme) Self, ātmanā, through (his own) Self. The knower of Brahman, who has realised the highest truth, has entered into the Self by burning away the third state ot latency, and hence he is not born again, sınce Turīya has no latency (of creation). For when a snake superimposed on a rope has merged in the rope on the discrimina- tion of the rope and the snake, it does not appear again to those discriminating people, just as before, from the impressions of the past sticking to the in- tellect. To those men of renunciation who are posses- sed of dull or average intellect, who still consider themselves aspirants, who tread the virtuous path, and who know the common features of the letters and the quarters (of Om and the Self) as presented before, (to

1 The ultimate limit of the negition of the world

228 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [Mā. I2,

them) the syllable Om, when meditated on in the proper way, becomes helpful for the realisation of Brahman. In support of this it will be said, "The three ınferior stages of lıfe" etc (Kānkā, III. 16).

GAUDAPĀDA'S KĀRIKĀ Just as before, here occur these verses: ओङ्कारं पादशो विद्यात्पादा मात्रा न संशयः। ओङ्कारं पादशो ज्ञात्वा न किंचिदपि चिन्तयेत् ॥२४।। 24. One should know Om, quarter by quarter; (for) there is no doubt that the quarters (of the Self) are the letters (of Om). Having known Om, quarter by quarter, one should not think of anything whatsoever. Because of the aforesaid similarty, the quarters are the letters, and the letters are the quarters. There- fore andyat, one should know; onkāram, the syllable Om; pādasah, quarter by quarter This is the mean- ing. When the syllable Om is known thus, na cintayet, one should not think of; kim cit apt, anything what- soever, serving any seen or unseen purpose; for he has got all his desires fulfilled. युक्जीत प्रणवे चेतः प्रणवो ब्रह्म निर्भयम्। प्रणवे नित्ययुक्तस्य न भयं विद्यते क्वचित् ॥२५।। 25. One should concentrate one's mind on Om, (for) Om is Brahman bevond fear. For a man, ever fixed in Brahman, there can be no fear anywhere.

I.26] MAŅDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ 229

Yunjita, one should concentrate; cetah, the mind; pranave, on Om, as explained, which is essentially the supreme Reality; for pranavah, Om; is brahma nırbhayam, Brahman beyond fear, because for one who is ever fixed in It, na bhayam vidyate kvacit, there can be no fear anywhere, in accordance with the Vedic text, "The enlightened man is not afraid of anything" (Tai II. ix).

प्रणवो ह्यपरं ब्रहम प्रणवश्च पर: स्मृतः। अपूर्वोऽनन्तरोऽबाह्योऽनपर: प्रणवोऽव्यय:।२६।।

26. Om is surely the inferior Brahman; and Om is considered to be the superior Brahman. Om is without cause, without inside and outside, and without effect; and it is un- decayıng. Prancvah, Om; is both the superior and inferor Brahman When the quarters and letters disappear, from the highest standpoint, Om becomes verily the supreme Self that is Brahman. Therefore it 1s apurvah, without any cause preceding it. There is nothing inside it that is of a d:fferent class, theretore it is anantarah, without inside. Similarly there is nothing existing outside, therefore it is abahyam, without outside There is no abarah, effect of it; therefore it is anaparah, without effect The idea imphed (by the whole) is that it is coextensive with all that is inside or outside, it is birthless, and it is a homogeneous mass of Consciousness like a lump of salt.

230 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I.27

सर्वस्थ प्रणवो ह्यादिर्मध्यमन्तस्तर्थेव च। एवं हि प्रणवं ज्ञात्वा व्यक्षुते तदनन्तरम् ॥२७॥

27. Om is indeed the beginning, middle, and end of everything. Having known Om in this way indeed one attains immediately (iden- tity with it).

Just like the magician and others, (Om is the) beginning (ādi), middle (madhya), and end (anta)- the origination, continuance, and dissolution; sarvasya, of all-of the whole phenomenal universe, consisting of space and the rest which originate like a magic elephant, a snake superimposed on a rope, a mirage, a dream, etc. (from the magician and the rest). Evam hı, in this way ındeed; jñātvā pranavam, having known Om, that is the Self and that is comparable to the magician and the rest, vyaśnute, one attains; identity with the Self, at that very moment. This is the idea.

प्रणवं हीश्वरं विद्यात् सर्वस्य हृदि संस्थितम्। सर्वव्यापिनमोङ्कारं मत्वा धीरो न शोचति॥२८।। 28. One should know Om to be God seated in the hearts of all. Meditating on the all-per- vasive Om, the intelligent man grieves no more. Vidyat, one should know; pranavam, Om; as iśvaram, God; existing hrdi, in the heart-the seat of memory and perception; of all living beings. Matvā, having meditated on (i.e. realised); the sarvavyāpinam, all-pervasive; onkaram, Om, that is the Self beyond

I.29] MAŅDŪKYA UPANISAD & KĀRIKĀ 23I

the worldly state; dhirah, the intelligent man; na śocati, does not grieve, for no cause of grief can be possible (then), in accordance with such Vedic texts as, "The knower of Self transcends sorrow" (Ch VII. i. 3).

अमात्रोऽनन्तमात्रश्च द्वैतस्योपशमः शिवः। ओङ्कारो विदितो येन स मुनिर्नेतरो जनः ॥२६।।

29. The Om, without measures and pos- sessed of infinite dimension, is the auspicious entity where all duality ceases. He by whom Om is known, is the real sage, and not so is any other man. Amatrah, (Om) beyond measures, is Turīya. Matrā, derived in the sense of that by which anything is measured, signifies dimension, that which has in- finite (ananta) dimension is anantamatrah, the idea 1s that its extension cannot be determined. It is sivah, auspicious, bocause of the negation of all duality. Sah yena, he by whom; onkarah, Om, as explained; viditah, is known, is a munih, sage, (lıt. a meditator), because of his medtating on the supreme Reality; but na itarah janah, not the other man, though he may be learned in the scriptures. This is the idea

CHAPTER II

VAITATHYA-PRAKARANA (ON UNREALITY)

In consonance with such Vedic texts as, "One indeed without a second" (Ch.VI.ii.I), it has been said that duality ceases to exist after realisation (Kārikā, I.18). That is, however, only a scriptural assertion. But this falsity can be confirmed even through reasoning. This is why the second Chapter commences : वैतथ्यं सर्वभावानां स्वप्न आहुमनीषिणः । अन्तःस्थानात्तु भावानां संवृतत्वेन हेतुना ।।१। I. The wise declare the falsity of all objects in a dream because of the location of the objects inside (the body) and because of (their) contraction.

The state of the vitatha, unreal, is vartathyam, unreality, or falsity. Of what? Sarvabhāvānam, of all objects, both external and internal; that are per- ceived svapne, in dream (This is what) manīsınah, the wise people, adept in the use of means of knowl- edge; ahuh, say. The ground of falsity is being stated: antahsthānāt, because of existence inside; because of those (bhavah, things) having their sthana, place, antah, inside the body; for (bhāvāh,) objects, such as elephants or mountains, are perceived there and not outside the body. Therefore they ought to be false.

II.21 MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 233

Objection. This ground of inference (viz existence within) is invalidated by the perception of (real) jars etc. within a house etc.1 In answer to this objection it is said: samurtatvena hetuna, by reason of their contraction, that is to say, because they are confined within a small space For mountains and elephants cannot possibly exist within the limited space inside the nerves in the (dreamer's) body A mountain does not surely exist within a body. Objection : It is not tenable that the things seen in a dream have a limited space inside (the body), for one sleeping in the east is seen as though dreaming in the north

Apprehending such an objection the text answers:

अदीर्धत्वाच्च कालस्य गत्वा देशान्न पश्यति। प्रतिबुद्धश् वै सर्वस्तस्मिन्देशे न विद्यते॥२॥ 2. Besides, one docs not see places by going there. for the time is not long enough. Moreover, every dreamer, when awakened, does not continue in that place (of dream). One does not dream by going anywhere outside the body; for as soon as one goes to sleep, one sees as though one is dreaming in a place eight hundred miles away from the body that can be reached in a month only Not that there is suificient time to reach there and come back. Hence adīrghatvāt ca kālasya,

1 So "existence within" 1s no valid ground for inferring that a thing is unreal

234 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.2

inasmuch as the time is not long, the dreamer does not go to a different place. Moreover, pratibuddhah ca vai sarvah, every dreamer, when awakened; na vidyate, does not stay, in the places dreamt of. Should one go to a different region in dream, one should wake up in the region of one's dream. But this is not a fact A man sleeping at night, sees things as though in the day-time. And when the dreamer comes into contact with many, he should be recognised as such by those whom he meets. But he is not apprehended thus; for if they really contacted him, they would say, "We noticed you there today." But this is not so. Therefore he does not go to a different place in dream.

Things seen in a dream are unreal because of this further reason:

अभावश्च रथादीनां श्रयते न्यायपूर्वकम्। वैतथ्यं तेन वै प्राप्तं स्वप्न आहुः प्रकाशितम्॥३॥।

3. Besides, the absence of chariot etc. is heard of in the Upanisad from the standpoint of logic. They say that the falsity arrived at thus (by logic) is reiterated by the Upanisad in the context of dream.

Ca, besides; abhāvah, non-existence; rathādīnām, of chariots etc .; śruyate, is heard of in the Upanisad, in the text, "There are no chariots, nor animals to be yoked to them" (Br. IV. iii. I0); nyāyapūrvakam, from the standpoint of logic. They, the knowers of Brahman, ahuh, say; that the vaitathyam, unrcality;

II 4] MAŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 235

praptam, arrived at, through such reasons as existence inside the body, contraction, etc , is prakāsitam, revealed by the Upanisad, that reiterates that fact while engaged in establishing (the soul's) self-effulgence; svapne, in dream

अन्तःस्थानात्तु भेदानां तस्माजजागरिते स्मृतम्। यथा तत्र तथा रवप्े संवृतत्वेन भिद्यते॥४।। 4. As the dream objects are unreal in a dream, so also, because of that very reason, the objects in the waking state are unreal. But objects (in the dream state) differ because of existence inside (the body) and because of con- traction (in dream). The proposition (major premiss) to be established is the unreality of objects seen in the waking state "Being perceived" is the ground of inference (middle term) And the illustration (in confirmation) is "like an object seen in a dream" And the assertion of the presence of the middle term in the minor term is made thus . Yatha tatra svapne, as (objects "perceived") there in a dream, are false; so also are they false jagante, in the waking state; the fact of "being per- ceived" being equally present And the concluding reiteration is: Tasmāc jāgarite smrtam, therefore falsity is admitted of objects in the waking state as well. The dream object bhidyate, differs, from the object of the waking state; antahsthanāt, because the former is confined within; and samvrtatvena, because of being contracted. And the common features in both

236 EIGHT UPANISADS [II.5

the states are the facts of being perceived and being false

स्वप्नजागरितस्थाने होकमाहुर्मनीषिणः । भेदानां हि समत्वेन प्रसिद्धनैव हेतुना।५। 5. Inasmuch as the diverse things are (found to be) similar on the strength of the familiar grounds of inference, the wise say that the dream and the waking states are one.

Samatvena, inasmuch as there is similarity; bhedānām, of the diverse things; prasiddhena eva hetuna, on the strength of the familiar ground of in- ference, viz that things (in dream and waking states) are equally either the perceiver or the perceived;1 therefore the discriminating people speak of the same- ness of the states of waking and dream. This is only a corollary of what was arrived at on earlier valıd grounds. आदावन्ते च यन्नास्ति वर्तमानेऽपि तत्तथा। वितथैः सदृशा: सन्तोऽवितथा इष लक्षिताः॥६॥ 6. That which does not exist in the begin- ning and the end is equally so in the present (i.e. in the middle). Though they are on the same footing with the unreal, yet they are seen as though real.

The different things noticed in the waking state are unreal, for this additional reason that they do not exist in the beginning and at the end. A thing for

' On the logical ground of "being perceived"

II 7] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 237

instance a mirage, yat, which, na asti, does not exist; adau ante ca, in the beginning and at the end, tat, that, does not exist even in the middle. This is the ascertained truth in the world. So also these different things, seen in the waking state, are indeed unreal, they being vitathaıh sadrsāh, sımılar to, (on the same footing with), unreal things, like the mirage etc., on account of their non-existence in the beginning and at the end And yet avrtathāh wa laksitāh, they are perceived as though real, by the ignorant who do not know the Self.

Objection: The assertion that the things seen in the waking state are unreal hke those seen in the dream is wrong, since objects of the waking state, for instance food, drink, vehicles, etc, are seen to fulfil some purpose by assuaging hunger and thirst and moving to and fro, whereas dream ebjects have no such utilty Therefore it is a mere figment of the bram to say that the objects of the waking state are illusory like those of dream Answer. That is not so Objection Why? Answer. Because

सप्रयोजनता तेषां स्वप्े विप्रतिपद्यते। तस्मादादयन्तवत्चेन मिथ्यैव खलू ते स्मृताः ॥॥ 7. Their utility is contradicted in dream. Therefore from the fact of their having a begin- ning and an end thev are rightly held to be unreal.

238 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.7

Saprayojanatā, the utility, that is noticed, (in the waking state), of tood, drink, etc .; vipratipadyate svapne, is contradicted in dream For a man who has got his hunger appeased and thirst quenched by eating and drinking in the waking state, as soon as he goes to sleep, feels as though he is afflicted by hunger and thirst, and is fasting for a whole day and night. This is similar to his case when, after getting full satisfac- tion in dream from eating and drinking, he wakes up to feel hunger and thirst. Therefore the objecis of the waking state are seen to be contradicted in dream. Accordingly we are of opinion that their unreality like that of dream objects is beyond doubt. Hence from the fact that they possess the common feature of having a beginning and an end, they are rightly held to be unreal.

Objection: From the fact of the similarity of the diverse things in the dream and the waking states, it is wrong to assert that the diversities seen in the waking state are illusory. Counter-objection: Why? Opponent: Because the illustration is inapplicable Counter-objection: How? Opponent: For the very same objects seen in the waking state are not experienced in dream. Counter-objection: What are they then? Opponent: One sees something novel in a dream. One thinks oneself to be possessed of eight arms and sitting astride an elephant with four tusks. Similarly, too, one sees other grotesque things in a dream. That being dissimilar to any other unreal thing must be

JI 7] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 239

true. Therefore the analogy is inapt Hence it is illogical to say that the waking state is as false as a dream. Vedāntist: That is not so The uniqueness that is supposed by you to be seen in a dream is not so by its own right. Opponent: How is it then? अपूर्वं स्थानिधर्मो हि यथा स्वगनिवासिनाम्। तानयं प्रेक्षते गत्वा यर्थवेह सुशिक्षितः ॥।८।। 8. The unique attribute is a mere appear- ance of the experiencer in a particular state, as it is in the case of the dwellers in heaven. This he experiences by going there, just as one, well informed, does in this world. Apurvam, the novel attribute, hi sthamidharmah, is a mere quality (dharma) of (sthuni) the man in a certain state, viz the experiencer in the state of dream. yathā svarganıvāsinām, as it is with the dwellers of heaven, Indra and others. As they have such attr- butes as the possession of a thousand eyes, and so on, sımilarly is this a novel attribute of the dreamer; but it is not there by its own right like the real nature of the seer. Tan, these, the unique things of this kind that are creations of his mind, ayam, this one, the man in that state, the dreamer; preksate, sees, gatva, by going, to the dream state As iha, in this world, susiksitah, a man well informed about the way lead- ing to another region, goes along that way to that other region and sees those objects, so is the case here Hence just as the appearances of things in certain

240 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II.8,

states, such as a snake on a rope or a mirage in a desert, are unreal, similarly the novelties experienced in a dream are merely appearances of the dreamer in that state, and therefore they are unreal. Accord- ingly, the analogy of the dream is not inapplicable.

The assumption that in the illustration of dream we are in the presence of some unique entities has been demolshed. Now the Kānkā again says by way of dilating on the similarity of objects of the waking and dream states:

स्वप्रवृत्तावपि त्वन्तश्चेतसा कल्पितं त्वसत्। बहिश्चेतोगृहीतं सदुद्ृष्टं वैतथ्यमेतयोः ॥६॥ 9. Even in the dream state itself, anything imagined by the inner consciousness is unreal, while anything experienced by the outer con- sciousness is real. (But) both kinds of things are seen to be false.

Svapnavrttau api, even in the dream state; any- thing experienced antaścetesā, by the internal con- sciousness, anything called up by our fancy, is asat, unreal; since it ceases to be perceived the moment after being imagined. In that very dream again, whatever, for instance a pot, is grhītam, perceived; bahiscetasā, by external consciousness, through the eye etc., is sat, real. Thus, though it is definitely known that dream experiences are false, still a division of true and false is seen there. Nevertheless, vaitathyam drstam, un- reality is perceived, for both kinds of things, be they imagined by inner or outer consciousness.

II II] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 24I

जाग्रदुष्टत्तावपि त्वन्तश्चेतसा कल्पित त्वसत्। बहिश्चेतोगृहीतं सदकं वैतथ्यमेतयो: ॥१०॥ I0. Even in the waking state, whatever is imagined by the inner consciousness is false and whatever is perceived by the outer consciousness is true. It is reasonable that both these should be unreal. It :s reasonable to say that both the (so-called) true and false are unreal, for they are equally imagined either by the internal or external consciousness The remaining portion is as already explamned.

The opponent says.

उभयोरपि वैतथ्यं भेदानां स्थानयोर्यदि। क एतान् वुध्यते भेदान् को वै तैषां विकल्पक: ॥११॥

II. If all objects in both the states be unreal, who apprehends these objects and who is indeed their creator?

Yadi, if; there be vaitathyam, unreality; bhedā- nam, for the objects, sthanayoh, in the two-waking and dream-states; then kah, who; is it that budhyate, cognises; etan, these, that are imagined inside and outside the mind: and kah va: tesam vikalpakah, who is indeed their imaginer, creator' The idea implied is this: If you do not want to adopt a theorv of the non-existence of the Self, (and want to posit something behind phenomena), then who is the support of memory and knowledge? I6

242 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II. I2

(The answer is) ·

कल्पयत्यात्मनाSSत्मानमात्मा देव: स्वमायया। स एव बुध्यते भेदानिति वेदान्तनिश्चयः ॥१२।।

I2. The self-effulgent Self imagines Itself through Itself by the power of Its own Maya. The Self Itself cognises the objects. Such is the definite conclusion of Vedānta. Svamāyayā, through Its own Māyā, devaķ ātmā, the self-effulgent Self, Itself, kalpayatı, imagines; Its own atmanam, self; in the Self, as possessed of different forms to be spoken of later, just as snakes etc. are imagined on rope etc. And in the very same way It Itself budhyate, cognises; those bhedān, objects, its, such, is vedantaniścayah, the definite conclusion of Vedänta. There is nothing else as the support of cognition and memory; nor are cognition and memory without support as is held by the Nihilists. This is the idea

While imagining, in what way does the Self do so? This is being answered.

विकरोत्यपरान्भावानन्तश्चित्ते व्यवस्थितान्। नियतांश्च बहिश्चित्त पवं कल्पयते प्रभुः ॥१३। I3. The Lord diversifies the mundane things existing in the mind. Turning the mind out- ward, He creates the well-defined things (as well as the un-defined things). Thus does the Lord imagine.

II I4] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 243

(Prabhuh, the Lord), vikaroti, diversifies; aparān, the non-transcendental, mundanc, bhāvan, objects, such as sound and other unmanifested objects, vyava- sthitan, existing, antaścitte, inside the mind, in the form of mpressions and tendencies. And bahrscittah (san), having the mind turned outward, (the Lord diversifies) myatan, things well-defined, such as the carth etc, as also aniyatan, not well-defined, that exist so long as the imagination lasts; similariy (He diversifies) such things as mental desires by making His mind turned inward. Evam, in this way, prabhuh the Lord, God, that is to say, the Self, imagines

The assertion that everything is a subjective creation like dream is being questioned row. For unlike the subjective creations, to wit, desire etc, that are circumscribed by the mind, the external objects are mutually determined. Thal doubt is unreasonable, for --

चित्तकाला हि येऽन्तस्तु द्यकालाश्ष ये वडिः। कल्पिता एव ते सर्वे विशेषो नान्यहेतुक: ॥१४ 14. Things that exist internally as long as the thought lasts and things that are externally related to two points of time, are all merely imaginations. Their distinction is not caused by anything else. Cittakalah hi ye antah t hines that exis! internally as long as the thought lasts, these that are determined by their thought and those that have no time for determining them apart from the time for

244 EIGHT UPANISADS EII I,

wh:ch their thought lasts are cittakalah, existing as long as the thought lasts The idea is that they arc apprehended only during the time of their magination. Dvayakalah, those that are possessed of two times, i.e, related to different times, that are mutually determined As for instance, "He stays during the milking ', which means that the cow is miiked as long as he stays, and he stays as long as the cow is milked; "This one (present before us) lasts as leng as that one (that is not present) " Thus external factors mutually determine each other They are thus related to 'wo points of tme But whether they be subjertive, lasting for the time of the thought, or obective, related to two points of time, they are all but fancies The fact that external objects have the distinction of being related to two points of time has no other reason but that of being imagined Here, too, the illustraiin of dream fits in

अव्यक्ता एव येऽन्तस्नु स्फुटा एव च ये बहि:। कल्पिता एव ते सर्वे विशेषस्त्विन्द्रियान्तर॥१५।। 15. Those objects that appear as obscure inside the mind, and those that appear as vivid outside, are all merely created by imagination. Their distinction is to be traced to the difference in the organs of perception. The fact that things in the mind, called up by mere mental impressions, have an obscurity, while externally, as objects of the sense of sight etc, they have a vividness. (that) is not due to the existence of the objects themselves, for this distinction is noticed

II T61 MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 245

even in dieam To what is it due then? This is caused by the difference in the organs of perception. Hence it is proved that the things of the waking state are as much a creation of imagination as the dream objects

What is the root of imagining that the personal and external objects are mutually related by way of causation? The answer is.

जीवं कल्पयते पूर्व ततो भावान् पृथग्विधान्। बाह्यानाध्यात्मिकांश्चैष यथाविद्यस्तथास्सृतिः॥१६। I6 First He imagines the individuals, and then He imagines the different objects, external and personal. The individual gets his memory in accordance with the kind of thought impres- sions he has.

Like the fancying of a snake in a rope He pürvam kalpayate, fırst ımagines, on the pure Self that is devoid of such characteristics, jivam, the individual, that is a bundle of causes and effects expressing them- selves through such beliefs as "I act; and mine are the (resulting) sorrows and happiness". After that, for his sake, He (the Lord) imagines different objects, such as the vital force and so on. bahyān adhyātmikān ca, both external and personal. div.ding them into action, instruments, and results What is the reason for that imagination> That s being stated. The individual that is imagined by (the Lord) Himself and is himself capable of imagination, gets a memory, yathavidyah, in accordance with the kind of thought

246 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II 16

impressions that the individual is possessed of, that fact is aliuded to by tathasmrtih, he is possessed of thai kind of memor; Hence from the apprehension of some fancy as the cause, there follows the apprehension of the result,1 from that (awareness of causal relation) follows the memory of the cause and the effect, and from that follows their apprehension, as well as the awareness of the action and accessories that this apprehension of causality leads to and the awareness of the different results following from those actions etc 2 From their awareness arises their memory; and from that memory again arises their awareness. In this way He imagines diversely the things, both personal and external, that are mutually the causes and effects

In the previous verse it has been said that the imagining of individual beings is the root of all other imaginations. Through an illustration is being chown what that imagining of individual creatures is due to:

अनिश्चिता यथा रज्जुरन्धकारे विकल्पिता। सर्पधारादिभिर्भावैस्तद्दात्मा विक्कल्पितः ॥१७॥ 17. As a rope whose nature has not been well ascertained is imagined in the dark to be 1 If there is eating and drinking, there follows satisfac- tion, if eating and drinking are absent satisfaction is wanting; from this the fancy follows that eating cte are the causes of satisfaction 2 From the above awarenes- frllows memory on another occasion; from that arises the awareness of the need of acuon with regard to similar factors that are supposed to lead to satisfaction, from that follows cooking, getting of rice , and producing the result.

II. I8] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 247

various things like a snake, a line of water, etc., so also is the Self imagined variously.

As it happens in common experience that a ragjuh, rope, that is anścita, not well ascertained, in its true reality as "Thıs is so indeed", is vikalpitā, imagined variously, in hazy darkness, as a snake, a line of water, or a stick, just because its real nature has not been determined; for if the rope had been ascertained earlier in its own essence, there would nol have been such imaginations as of a snake etc., as for instance, there is no such imagination with regard to the fingers in one's own hands. This is the illustration Sımilarly the Self is imagined to be an indvidual creature or the vital force ctc, just because It has not been ascertained in Its true nature as pure intelligence, existence, and non-duality, and as different from such evils as cause and effect that are the characteristics of the world This is the conclus on of all the Upanisads

निश्चितायां यथा रज्ज्वां चिकल्पो विनिधर्तते। रज्जुरेवेति चाद्वैतं तद्वदात्मविनिश्चयः॥१८।। I8. As illusion (on the rope) ceases and the rope alone remains when the rope is ascertained to be nothing but the rope, so also is the ascer- tainment about the Self. As on the ascertainment that it is rajuh eva, nothing but a rope, all the imaginations disappear and there remains the rope alone without anything else, so also from the scriptural text, "Not this, not this" (Br.IV 1v 22), establishing the Self as devoid of all

248 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II 18

worldly attributes, there dawns the light of the sun of realisation which leads to this atma-vsniscayah, frm conviction about the Self, viz "All this is but the Self" (Ch VII.xxv.2), (the Self is) "without anterior or posterior, without interior or exterior" (Br II v I9), "He exists internally and externally, and hence He is birthless" (Mu II 12), "Undecaying, immortal, un- dying, fearless" (Br IV iv.25), "One indeed without a second" (Ch VI 11 I)

If it be a well ascertained truth that the Self is but one, why is It imagined as so many infinite things like the Vital Force etc that consttute phenomenal existence ? To this the answer is, "Hear:" प्राणादिभिरनन्तैश्च भावैरैतैविकल्पितः । मायेषा तस्य देवस्य यया संमोहित: स्वयम् ॥१६॥ 19. (This Self) is imagined to be the infinite objects like Prāna (the Vital Force) etc. This is the Maya of that self-effulgent One by which He Himself is deluded. Eşā māyā, this is the Māyā, tasya devasya, of that self-effulgent Self As the magical spell, created by the magician, makes the very clear sky appear as though filled with leafy trees in bloom, similar is this Maya of the self-effuigent One, by which He Himselt seems to have become influenced like a man under delusion. It has been said, "My Māyā is difficult to get over" (G. VII. 14). प्राण इति प्राणविदो भूतानीति च तद्विदः । गुणा इति गुजविदस्तत्वानीति च तद्विदः।।२०।।

II 221 MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 249

20. Those who know Prāna1 Prāna (to be the reality that is the cause of the consider

world) The knowers of the elements consider the elements to be so,2 the knowers of qualities (gunas) cling to the qualities,3 and the knowers of the categories swear by them.4 पादा इति पादविदो विषया इति तद्विदः। लोका इति लोकविदो देवा इति च तद्विद:।२१॥ 21. The knowers of the quarters (viz Viśva, Taijasa, and Prājña) consider the quarters to be the cause The knowers of sense-objects5 consider the sense-objects to be so. According to the knowers of the worlds, the worlds constitute reality.6 And the worshippers of the gods stand by the gods. वेदा इति वेदविदो यज्ञा इति च तद्विद:। भोक्तेति च भोक्तृषिदो भोज्यमिति च तद्विद:॥२२।।

22 The Vedic Scholars ascribe reality to the Vedas, while the sacrificers ascribe this to ' Hirauyagarbha or immanent God This is the view of the worshippers of Hiranyagarbha and of the Vaisesikas. 2 The Lokäyata materialısts swear by the four clements- earth, water, fire, and air 3 The Samkhyas hold to Sattva, Rajas, and Tamas, that are the constituents (gunas, lit qualities) of Pralrti 1 The Saivas hold to the Self, ignorance, and Siva as the sources of the world 5 The followers of Vatsyayana and others 6 The Pauranikas understand the sarth the intermediate world, and heaven to be realities 7 Lıke Baudhāyana

250 EIGHT UPANISADS [II. 22

the sacrifices Those acquainted with the enjoyer, consider it to be the reality,1 whereas those conversant with the enjoyable things2 con- sider them to be so. सूक्ष्म इति सूक्ष्मविद: स्थल इति च तदिकः । मूर्द इति जूर्तचिदोऽमूर्त इति च तद्िदः॥२३।। People conversant with the subtle consider reality also to be so, while others dealing 23.

with the gross consider it to be so. The worshippers of God with forms consider reality as possessed of forms,3 whereas those who swear by formlessness4 call it a void.

काल इति कालविदो दिश इति च तद्विदः। वादा इति वादविदो भुवनानीति तांद्ेढ: ॥।२४।। 24 The calculators of time (the astrologers) call it time. The knowers of the directions ascribe reality to them. The dabblers in theories3 accept them to be so. And the knowers of the universe consider the (fourteen) worlds to be so. मन इति मनोविदो बुद्धिरिति च तद्विदः। चित्तमिति चित्तविदो धर्माधर्मी च तद्विदः॥२५॥।

' The Samkhya view is that the Self is an enjoyer but not an agent of work : The cooks 3 e g Siva or Visnu * The Nihilists " That the metals, mantras, etc hcld in them the secret of immortality

II 27] MANDŪKYA KARIKA 25I

25 The knowers of the mind1 call it the Self, whereas the knowers of intelligence2 take it for the reality. The knowers of ideas3 consider them to be the reality. And the knowers of virtue and vice4 altribute reality to them. पश्चविशक इत्येके पड्धिश इति वापरे! एकत्रिशक इत्याहुरनन्त इति चापरे ॥२६॥। 26 Some say that reality is constituted by twenty-five principles,' while others speak of twenty-six.6 Some say that it consists of thirty- one categories," while according to others they are infinite. लोकाँलोकविद: प्रादुराश्रमा इति तहिदः। स्त्रीपुंनपुंसकं लेड्गा: परापरमधापरे ॥२६॥ 27. Adepts in human dealings say that the people (that is to say people's pleasures) are the real things. People conversant with the stages of life hold those to be the reality. The 1 A class oi materialists 2 A class of Buddhists 3 The Buddhists who swear by subjective ideas withoue corresponding external things 1 The Mīmamsakas. 5 Purusa (the conscious ndiydual souh P adhana or Prakrti (Nature), Mahat (ıntellgence), Ahamkāra (egoism), the five subtle elements, five senses of perception, fve organs of action, five sense-objects, and mind This is the Simkhyn view The above 25 and Grd according to Patañjalı 7 The Paśupatas add vāga (attachm nt), avidyā (1gno- rance), mıyatı (fate), kālakalī dıvisı ns of tıme), and Māya (cosmic illusion) to the above _6

252 EIGHT UPANISADS [II 27

grammarians hold the view that words belonging to the masculine, feminine, and neuter genders are the reality; while others know reality to be constituted by the higher and lower (Brahmans). सृषिरिति सृष्टिविदो लय इति च तदविद: । स्थितिरिति स्थितिविद: सर्वे चेह तु सर्वदा ॥२८॥

28. People conversant with creation call creation to be the reality. The knowers of disso- lution call it dissolution The knowers of subsistence call it subsistence. All these ideas are for ever imagined on the Self. (20-28). Prāna means Prājña, the Self in the state of latency Everything else, ending with subsist- ence, is only His product. And similarly all other popular ideas, conceived by every being, like a snake etc. on a rope, are mere imagmations on the Self that is devoid of all of them, and these are caused by ignorance consisting in the non-determination of the nature of the Self This is the purport (of these verses) as a whole. No attempt is made to explain each of the words in the verses starting with the word Prana, since this is of little practical value and since the meanings of the terms are clear

यं भावं दर्शयेद्यस्य तं भावं स तु पश्यति। तं चावति स भूत्वाऽसौ तदुग्रहः समुपैति तम् ॥२६॥ 29. Anyone to whom a teacher may show a particular object (as the reality) sees that alone And that thing, too, protects him by becoming

I1 30] MANDOKYA KĀRIKĀ 25

identified with him. That absorption leads to his self-identity (with the object of attention). To be brief, yasya, anyone to whom, a teacher or any other trustworthy person, darsayet, may show, any bhavam, positive object, enumerated or not, from among such things as Prana and the rest, by saying "This is verily the reality", sah, he (that instructed man), paśyati, sees, tam bhāvam, that object, by identifying it with himself either as "I am this" or "This is mine." Ca, and; sah, that, that object that was shown, avati, protects, tam, him, that seer; asau bhutva, by becoming one with him, with that aspir- ant, that is to say, that object occupies his attention to the exclusion of all others and keeps him confined within itself. Tadgrahah, state of being taken up with that, absorption in it under the idea, "This is the reality" That absorption, samupaiti tam, approaches him, viz the acceptor (of the thing), that is to say it culminates in identification with hım

पतैरेषोऽपृथग्भावैः पृथगेवेति लक्षितः । एवं यो वेद तत््वेन कल्पयेत् सोऽदिशक्कित: ॥३०॥ 30. Through these things that are (really) non-different (from the Self), this One is presented as though really different. He who knows this truly grasps (the meaning of the Vedas) without any hesitation. Etath, through these, viz Prāna etc., aprthag- bhävath, through these things that are non-different, from the Self; esah, this One, the Self; laksitah, is

254 EIGHT UPANIȘADS

poited out, is believed in by the ignorant; prthak eva it, as though really different, just as a rope is con- sidered to be diverse imaginary things like snake etc This is the meaning The idea is this. Just as to the discriminating people, the snake etc do not exist apart from the rope, so also Prana etc have no existence apart from the Self And this is in accord with the Vedic text, "All these are (but) the Self" (Br. II. iv. 6) Yah Veda, he who knows, evam, thus, tattvena, truly; -knows from Vedic texts and from reasoning, that all things imagined on the Self are unreal apart from the Self, like the snake imagmned in the rope, and knows that the Self is transcendental and untouched by ıllusion; sah, he, kalpayale, (is the same as kalpayatı), grasps, the meanings of the Vedas in their respective contexts; avisamkitah, without any hesitation, he understands that a certan passage means this and a certain other means that For a verse of Manu says, "None but a knower of the Self can understand truly the purport of the Vedas, none but a knower of the Self can derive any benefit from the valid means of knowledge"1 (Manu, VI. 82). It is being stated that the unreality of duality that is established logically s also derived from the valid evidence of Vedānta

' This is Inanca Gin's interpietation of the word kryu- phutu, where priya (action) stands for any valid means of knowledge, and its phala (result) is the knowledge of Reality, for even hny in the sense of Vedic rites etc is meant to serve the purpose of illumination by purifying the aspirant's hcart.

II. 3I] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 255

स्वप्तमाये यथा दष्टे गन्घर्वनगरं यथा। तथा विश्वमिदं दषं वेदान्तेषु विचक्षणैः ॥३१॥

31. Just as dream and magic are seen to be unreal, or as is a city in the sky, so also is this whole universe known to be unreal from the Upanisads by the wise. Svapna-maye, dream and magic, though unreal, being constituted by unreal things, are considered by the non-discriminating people to be constituted by real things. Again, just as gandharvanagaram, an illusory city in the sky-appearing to be full of shops replete with vendable articles, houses, palaces, and villages bustling with men and women-is seen to vanish suddenly before one's very eyes, or just as the svapnu- maye, dream and magic, drste, that are visible to the eye; are unreal; tatha, sımılarly, idam v cam, this whole universe, this entire dualty, drstam, is viewed, as unreal Where? That is being statea Vedentesu, in the Upanisads, as for instance in, "There is no difference whatsoever in It" (Br IV iv. 19, Ka Il i. 2), "The Lord on account of Māya is perce.ved as manifold" (Br II v. 19), "This was but the Self in the beginning-the only entity" (Br II IV 17), "72 the beginning this was indeed Brahman, one only" (Br I. iv TI), "It is from a second entity that rear comes" (Br I. iv 2), "But there is not that second thing" (Br. IV. ill. 23), "But when to the knower of Brahman everything has become the Self" (Br IV v. 15), and so on. (This is known) ucøksantih, by those who are better acquainted with things, by the

256 EIGHT UPANISADS [II 3I

enlightened This view is supported by the following Smrtı text of Vyāsa: "(This universe) is viewed (by the wise) as (unreal) like a chink in the earth that a rope appears to be in darkness or as always (unstable) lke a bubble on rain water, devoid of bliss, and ceas- ing to exist after dissolution.'

न निरोधो न चोत्पत्तिन बद्धो न व साधक: । न मुमुक्षुनं वे मुक्त इत्येषा परमाथेता॥३२॥ 32. There is no dissolution, no origination, none in bondage, none striving or aspiring for salvation, and none liberated. This is the highest truth.

This verse is meant to sum up the purport of this Chapter If from the standpoint of the highest Reality, all duahty is unreal, and the Self alone exists as the only Reality, then it amounts to this that all our dealings, conventional or scriptural, are comprised within the domain of ignorance, and then there is na nirudhah, no dissolution, mrodha being the same as nirodhana, stoppage. Uipattih, orgination. Baddhah, one under bondage, a transmigrating individual soul. Sadhakah, one who strives for liberation. Mumuksuh, one who hankers after liberation Muktah, one who is free from bondage. In the absence of origination and dissolution, bondage etc. do not exist Itr esā paramarthata, this is the highest truth. How can there be absence of ongination and dissolution? The answer is. Because of the absence of duality. The non-existence of duality is establshed by various Vedlic texts such as, "Because when there is duality,

II. 32] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 257

as it were" (Br. II. iv. 14), "(He goes from death to death) who sees difference as it were in It" (Br. IV. Iv. 19, Ka. II. i. Io). "All this is but the Self" (Ch. VII. xxv. 2), "All this is but Brahman" (Nr. U. 7), "One without a second" (Ch. VI. ii. I), "(This Brahman, ... ), and this all are the Self" (Br. II. iv. 6, IV. v. 7). Origination or dissolution can be only of a thing that has existence, and not of one that is non-existent like the horn of a hare. Nor can the non- dual have either birth or death. For it is a contradic- tion in terms to say that a thing is non-dual and yet has birth and death. And as for our empirical expe- rience of Prana etc., it has been already stated that it is all a superimposition on the Self like a snake on a rope. For such a mental illusion1 as the fancying of a rope for a snake does not either originate from or merge in the rope.2 Nor does the rope-snake orig- inate in the mind and merge there,3 nor does it do so from both (the rope and the mind) 4 Similar is the case with duahty which is equally a mental illusion, for duality is not perceived in a state of concentration or deep sleep. Therefore it is established that duality is a mere figment of the brain. And therefore it has been well said that since duality does not exist, the

1 A creation of the ignorance subsisting in the mind 2 For the birth or death of an illusion is equally illu- soiy If these be objectively real, the snake should be per- ceived by all who see the rope 3 For if birth and death are only subjective, the snake should not be perceived outside 4 For it is not experienced as such.

I7

258 EIGHT UPANISADS [II. 32

highest truth consists in the non-existence of dissolu- tion and the rest.

Objection: If such be the case, then the scrip- tures have for their objective only the proving of the non-existence of duality, not the proving of the existence of non-duality, the two objectives being con- tradictory And as a result, one will be landed into Nihilism, inasmuch as non-duality has no evidence in its support and duality is non-existent. Answer: Not so, for why should you revive a point already dismissed with the statement that illusions, like that of a snake on a rope, cannot occur without a substratum? To this the objection is raised thus: The rope that is supposed to be the substratum of the illusion of the snake is itself non-existent, and hence the analogy is irrelevant. Answer: Not so, for even when the illusion dis- appears, the non-illusory substratum can continue to exist by the very fact of its being non-illusory. Objection: The non-dual (substratum), too, 1s unreal like the snake fancied on a rope. Answer: It cannot be so, for just as the rope constituting a factor in the illusion (of snake) exists as an unimagined entity even before the knowledge of the non-existence of the snake, so also the non- dual (Self) exists, since as a last resort It has to be assumed to be non-illusory. Besides, the being who is the ageni of the imagination cannot be non-existent,

II. 32] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 259

since his existence has to be admitted antecedent to the rise of the illusion.1 Objection: But if the scriptures do not deal with the Self as such, how can they lead to a cessation of the awareness of duality? Answer: That is no defect, for duality is super- imposed on the Self through ignorance, just as a snake is on a rope. Objection. How? Answer: All such conceptions, as "I am happy, miserable, ignorant, born, dead, worn out, embodied; I see; I am manifest and unmanifest, agent and enjoyer of fruits, related and unrelated, emaciated and old, and I am this and these are mine,"-are superimposed on the Self The Self permeates all these ideas, for It is invarably present in all of them, just as a rope is present in all its different (illusory) appearances as a snake, a line of water, etc. Such being the case, the knowledge of the nature of the substantive (Self) has not to be generated by scriptures, since It is self-established. The scriptures are meant for proving something that is not already known, for should they restate something that is already known they will lose their validity.2 Since the Self is not

1 The Self has to be assumed as the substratum of the illusory appearance of duality, It survives all illusions as the witness of their disappearance, and as a matter of course It precedes the illusion Therefore there can be no question of Nihilsm even on the suppositicn that the Self is not presented positively by the Upanısads. 2 Consisting in presenting something not known otherwise and not sublated later.

260 EIGHT UPANISADS [II. 32

established in Its own nature owing to the obstacle of such attributes as happiness that are superimposed by ignorance, and since the establishment in Its own realty is the highest goal, therefore the scriptures aim at removing from the Self the ideas of happiness and the rest, by generating with regard to It the ideas of not being happy etc. through such texts as "Not this, not this" (Br. IV. 1v. 22), "Not gross" (Br. III. viii. 8) etc. Unlike the real nature of the Self, the attri- butes of unhappiness etc are not invariably present in consciousness simultaneously with such attributes as happiness etc ,1 for if they were persistently present, no alteration could be created by the superimposition of attributes like happiness etc., just as there can be no coldness in fire possessed of the specific charac- teristic of heat. Therefore, it is in the attributeless Self, that the distinct characteristics of happiness etc. are imagined. And as for the scriptural texts speaking of the absence of happiness etc. in the Self, it is proved that they are merely meant to remove the specific ideas of happiness etc. from It And in support ot this is this aphorism of those who are versed in the meaning of scriptures. "The validity of the

1 If the absence of nappiness etc are natural to the Self, why should they not accompany every perception of the latter? The answer is The Self may reveal Itself, and yec the opposition between Its absence of happiness etc and Its empirical modes of happiness etc may not become patent cwing to the influence of human ignorance

II 33] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 26I

scriptures is derived from their negation of positive qualities from the Self."1 The reason for the preceding verse is being adduced : भावैरसद्विरेवायमदयेन च कल्पितः । भावा अप्यद्वयेनैव तस्माददयता शिवा॥३३॥ 33. This Self is imagined to be the unreal things and also to be non-dual; and these per- ceived things are also imagined on the non-dual Self. Therefore non-duality is auspicious. In (such illusions as) "This is a snake", "This is a stick" etc. the very thing called rope is imagined to be such unreal things as a snake, a stick, a streak of water etc. and also to be the real thing rope that exists as one; similarly the Self is imagined to be such multifarious unreal things as Prana etc. which do not exist. But this is not done from the standpomt of reality, for nothing can be perceived by anybody unless the mind is active, nor can the Self have any movement. And things, perceivable to the unsteady mind alone, cannot be imagined to subsist in reality.2

1 This is a quototion from Dravidācārya The idea is th1s "Though words may not have any positive meaning with regard to Brahman, the validity of the scripture is well established; for the words, that are associated with negation and are well known as denoting the absence of those quali- ties, eliminate all duality from the Self" 2 "Diversity perceived on the motionless Self cannot be fancied to have real existence" is the interpretation accord- ing to Ananda Giri who takes "motionless" as the synonym cf pracalta, that in which motion is absent

262 EIGHT UPANISADS [II. 33

Thereforc though the Self is ever of the same naturc, It alone is imagined to be such unreal things as Prana etc, and again as existing in Its own nature of non- duality and absolute Reality. It is supposed to be the substratum of everything, just as a rope is of the snake etc And those percerved entities too, viz Prana and the rest, are imagined on the Self alone that is non-dual and absolute Reality, for no illusion can be perceived that is baseless. Thus since non-duahty is the substratum of all illusion, and since this non- duality is ever unchanging in its own nature, advayatā, non-duality, is śwva, auspicious, even in the state of illusion. But the illusions alone are evil, for they generate fear like that from the snake seen on a rope for instance. Non-duality is free from fear; hence that alone is auspicious.

नात्मभावेन नानेदं न स्वेनापि कथंचन।

न पृथङ् नापृथक् किंचिदिति तत्त्वविदो विदुः ।।३४। 34. This world, when ascertained from the standpoint of the Self does not continue to be different. Nor does it exist in its own right. Nor do phenomenal things exist as different or non- different (from one another or from the Self). This is what the realisers of truth know. Why, again, is non-duality auspicious? Inauspi- ciousness is to be found where there is diversity or, mn other words, where there is difference of one thing from another. For idam, this, the manifold phenom- enal world, consisting of Präna, etc .; when ascer- tained atmabhävena, from the standpoint of the

II. 35] MĀŅŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 263

supreme Self, the non-dual and absolute Reality, does not continue to be nānā, multiple or different in substance, just as an illusory snake has no separate existence when it is found out with the help of a light to be identical with the rope Besides, this world never exists svena, in its own nature, in the form of Präna etc., because of its having been imagined lıke a snake on a rope. Similarly the objects, called Prāna etc., are not distinct from each other in the sense that a buffalo exists as something different from a horse. Accordingly, just because of the unreality (of duality) there is nothing that can exist as non-separate from one another or from the supreme Self. The Brāhmanas, the knowers of the Self; viduh, realised, the supreme Reality; iti, thus. Hence non-duality is auspicious, since it is free from the causes of evil. This is the purport. The perfect realisation, as described above, is being extolled: वीतरागभयक्रोधैर्मुनिभिर्वेदपारगैः। निर्विकल्पो ह्ययं दृष्टः प्रपश्चोपशमोऽद्यः॥३५॥

35. This Self, that is beyond all imagination, free from the diversity of this phenomenal world, and non-dual, is seen by the contemplative people, versed in the Vedas and unafflicted by desire, fear, and anger. Munibhih, by the constantly contemplative people, by the discriminating ones; from whom have been removed for ever attachment, fear, envy, anger,

264 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II. 35

and all other faults; vedaparagah, by those who have understood the secrets of the Vedas, by the enlightened souls; by those who are ever devoted to the purport of the Vedas, drstah, is realised; ayam, this Self; which is nirvikalpah, devoid of all imaginations; and which is prapañcopaśamah prapañca is the vast expanse of the variegated phenomenal world, and the Self in which there is the upasama, total negation, of this, is the prapañcopasama. And therefore It is advayah, with- out a second. The idea is that the supreme Self is realısable only by the men of renunciation who are free from blemishes, who are learned, and who are devoted to the secrets of the Upanisads, but not so by the logicians and others whose hearts are tainted by attachment etc and whose philosophies are enamoured of their own outlooks. तस्मादेवं विदित्वैनमद्वैते योजयेत् स्मृतिम्। अद्वैतं समनुप्राप्य जडवल्लोकमाचरेत् ॥३६॥ 36. Therefore, after knowing it thus, one should fix one's memory on (i.e. continuously think of) non-duality. Having attained the non- dual, one should behave in the world as though one were dull-witted.

Since non-duality is auspicious and free from fear by virtue of its being by nature devoid of al1 evil, therefore evam viditva enam, having known it thus; yojayet smrtim advaite, one should fix one's memory on non-duahty; one should resort to one's memory for

II. 37] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 265

the realisation of non-duality.1 And having compre- hended that non-duality etc, having realised directly and immediately the Self that is beyond hunger etc., without birth, and above all conventional dealings, by attaining the consciousness, "I am the supreme Brahman," lokam acaret, one should behave in the world, jadavat, like a dull-witted man, that is to say, without advertising one-self as "I am such and such"

It is being stated as to what should be the code of conduct according to which he should behave in the world.

निस्तुतिनिर्नमस्कारो निःस्वधाकार एव च। चलाचलनिकेतश्च यतिर्यादच्छिको भवेत्॥३७॥ 37. The mendicant should have no appre- ciation or greetings (for others), and he should be free from rituals. He should have the body and soul as his support and he should be dependent on circumstances. Giving up all such activities as appreciation or greeting; that is to say, having given up all desire for external objects and having embraced the highest kind of formal renunciation, in accordance with the Vedic text, "Knowing this very Self, the Brāhmanas re- nounce ( ... and lead a mendicant life)" (Br. III. v. I), and the Smrti text, "With their consciousness in that (Brahman) their Self identified with That, ever intent

1 Even after knowing the import of the Upan.sad, there is need of continuously revolving in one's mind these ideas so that they may become firmly rooted

266 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II. 37

on That, with That for their supreme goal" (G. V. 17). Cala, changing, is the body, since it gets trans- formed every moment, and acala, unchanging, is the reality of the Self. Whenever, perchance, impelled by the need of eating etc, one thinks ot oneself as "I" by forgetting the reality of the Self that is one's mReia, support, one's place of abode, and that is by nature unchanging like the sky, then the cala, chang- ing body, becomes his mketa, support. The man of illumination who thus has the changing and the un- changing as his support, but not the man who has external objects as his support, is the calācalamiketa. And he bhavet, should be; yadrcchikah, dependent on circumstances; that is to say, he should depend entirely on strips of cloth, coverings, and food that come to him by chance for the maintenance of the body.

तत्त्वमाध्यात्मिकं दष्टा तत्वं दृष्टा तु बाह्यतः । तत्त्वीभूतस्तदारामस्तत्त्वादप्रच्युतो भवेत्।।३८।। 38. Examining the Reality in the context of the individual and in the external world, one should become identified with Reality, should have his delight in Reality, and should not deviate from Reality. The external entities such as the earth, and the personal entities such as the body, are unreal like the snake imagined on a rope or like dream, magic, etc., in accordance with the Vedic text, "All modification exists only in name, having speech for its support" (Ch. VI. iv. I), and the Self is that which exists within

II. 38] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 267

and without, that is birthless, without cause and effect, without any inside or outside, full, all-pervasıve like space, subtle, motionless, attributeless, partless, and actionless, as is indicated in the Vedic Text, "That is truth, that is the Self, and That thou art" (Ch. VI. viiı-xii)-drstva, having seen, the Reality in this way; tattvibhutah, (one should) become identified with Realıty; tadārāmah, (one should) have one's delight only in the Self, and not in anything external like one lacking in realsation, who accepts the mund as the Self, and thinks the Self to be changing in accord- ance as the mind changes, or at times accepts the body etc to be the Self and thinks, "I am now alienated from Reality that is the Self;" and when at times the mind becomes concentrated, who thinks himself to be united with Reality and in peace under the belief, "I am now identified with Reality." The knower of the Self should not be like that, because the nature of the Self is ever the same, and because it is impossible for anything to change its nature; and one should be for ever apracyutah, unwavering from Reality, under the conviction, "I am Brahman", that is to say, he should ever have the consciousness of Reality that is the Self, in accordance with such Smrti texts as "(The enlightened man) views equally a dog or an outcast" (G. V. I8), "(He sees who sees the supreme Lord) existing equally in all beings" (G. XIII. 27).

CHAPTER III

ADVAITA PRAKARANA (ON NON-DUALITY)

In the course of determining the nature of Om (in Chap. I) it was stated as a mere proposition that the Self is the negation of the phenomenal world, and is auspicious and non-dual. It was further said that "duality ceases to exist after realisation" (Kānkā, I I8) As to that, the non-existence of duality was established by the Chapter On Unreality with the help of such analogies as dream, magic, and a city in space, and through logic on the grounds of "being perceived", "having a beginning and an end", and so on. Should non-duality be admitted only on the authority of scripture (and tradition), or should it be accepted on logical grounds too? In answer to this it is said that it can be known on logical grounds as well. The Chapter On Non-duality starts to show how this can be possible. It was concluded in the preceding Chapter that all diversity, comprising the worshipped, worship, and so on, is unreal and the absolute, non-dual Self, is the highest Realıty; for-

उपासनाश्रितो धर्मो जाते ब्रह्मणि वर्तते। प्रागुत्पत्तेरजं सर्वं तेनासौ कृपण: स्मृतः।।१। I. The aspirant, betaking himself to the devotional exercises, subsists in the conditioned Brahman. All this was but the birthless Brahman before creation. Hence such a man is considered pitiable (or narrow in his outlook).

III. 2] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 269

Upāsanāśrtah is a worshipper who resorts to upāsanā, devotional exercises (like worship and medi- tation), as the means for his liberation, under the belief, "I am a worshipper, and Brahman is to be adored by me. Though I now subsist jāte brahmanı, in the conditioned Brahman, I shall, through my devotion to It, attain ajam brahma, the unconditioned Brahman, after the fall of my body. Prak utpatteh ajam sarvam, before creation all this, including myself, was but the birthless Brahman. Through my devo- tional exercises I shall regain that which I essentially was prak utpaltch, before my birth, though, after being born, I now subsist jate brahmani, in the con- ditioned Brahman." The dharmah, aspirant; upāsanā- śritah, who betakes himself to such devotional exercises; since he is cognisant of such a partial Brahman, tena, for that very reason; asau, that man; smrtah, is considered, krpanaḥ, ptiable, limited (Br III. viii 1o) by those who have seen the eternal and birthless Brahman; this is the idea. And this is in accord with the following text of the Upanisad of the Talavakāra section, "That which is not uttered by speech, that by which speech is revealed, know that alone to be Brahman, and not what people worship as an object" (Ke.I.5).

अतो वक्ष्याम्यकार्पण्यमजाति समतां गतम्। यथा न जायते किचिजायमानं समन्ततः ॥२।।

2. Hence I shall speak of that (Brahman) which is free from limitation, has no birth, and is in a state of equipoise; and listen how nothing

270 EIGHT UPANISADS [TII 2

whatsoever is born in any way, though it seems to be born.

Since on account of one's failure to attain the birthless Self, existing within and without, one becomes limited by thinking oneself through ignorance to be unworthy, and since on that account one comes to believe, "I am born, I subsist in the conditioned Brahman, and having recourse to Its worship I shall attain (the unconditioned) Brahman", atah, there- fore; vaksyāmı, I shall relate; akārpanyam, freedom from misery, limitlessness, the birthless Brahman; for that indeed is a source of limitation, "where one sees another, hears another, knows another. That is limited, mortal, and unreal" (Ch.VII xxiv I), as is asserted in such Vedic texts as "All modification exists in name only, having speech for its support" etc. (Ch. VI Iv.I). Opposed to this is that which has no limitation, which is within and without and is the birthless Brahman, called the Infinite, on realsing which there is cessation of all misery caused by ignorance I shall speak of that freedom from limits. This is the purport. That thing ıs ajāti, birthless; samatām gatam, established in a state of equipoise, poised Why? Since It has no inequalty of parts. Anything that is composite is said to evolve when its parts undergo loss of balance. But since this thing is partless, It is established in equilib- rium, and hence It does not evolve through any change in any part. Therefore, It is birthless and free from misery. Hear yatha, how; samantatah, in all respects; kimct, anything, small though it be; na jayate, is not born, though jayamanam, t may

II. 31 MANDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 27I

(seem to) be born, like a snake from a rope, in conse- quence of perception under ignorance Hear the secret how It is not born-how Brahman remains unborn in every way. This is the idea

The promise was, "I shall speak of Brahman which has no birth and which is free from limitation " Now it is said, "I shall adduce the reason and the analogy for proving this":

आत्मा ह्याकाशवजीवैघटाकाशैरिवोदितः । घटादिवञ्च संधातैर्जातावेतन्निदर्शनम् ॥३॥। 3. Since the Self is referred to as existing in the form of individual souls in the same way as space exists in the form of spaces confined within jars, and since the Self exists in the form of the composite things just as space exists as jars etc., therefore in the matter of birth this is the illustration

Hi, sınce, ātmā, the (supreme) Self, is subtle. partless, and ali-pervasive ākāśacat, lke space,- since that very supreme Self that is comparable to space, uditah, is referred to, puath, as existing in the form of mndividual souls, the individual knowers of the bodies etc . wa, in the same way, okusava ghati- kasah, as space is referred to as existing in the form of spaces circumscribed by jars Or the explanation is: As space has evolved in the form cf spaces within the jars, so also has the supreme Self evolved as the individual souis The idea imphed is chat tne emergence of individual souls from the supreme Seif

272 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II. 3

that is heard of in the Upanisads is comparable to the emergence of the spaces in the jars from the supreme space, but this is not so in any real sense of the term. Just as from that space evolve composite things like jars etc., so also from the supreme Self, that is com- parable to space, emerge the composite things lke the earth etc, as well as the bodies and senses that constitute the individual, all of them taking birth through imagination like a snake on a rope. This fact is stated in ghatādwvat ca, and like a jar etc .; It is evolved, samghataih, in the form of composite things. When with a view to making the fact under- stood by people of poor intellect, the birth of creatures etc. from the Self is referred to by the Vedas, then jatau, with regard to the birth, when that is taken for granted, etat midarsanam, this is the illustration, as it has been cited in the analogy of space etc

घटादिषु प्रलीनेषु घटाकाशादयो यथा। आकाशे संप्रलीयन्ते तद्वजीवा इहात्मनि ॥४॥। 4. Just as the space confined within the jars etc. merge completely on the disintegration of the jars etc., so do the individual souls merge here in this Self.

Just as the spaces within a jar etc. emerge into being with the creation of the jar etc., or just as the spaces within the jar etc. disappear with the disinte- gration of the jar etc., similarly the individual souls «merge into being along with the creation of the aggregates of bodies etc., and they merge here in the

III. 5] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 273

Self on the disintegration of those aggregates. But this is not so from their own standpoint. The next verse is by way of an answer to those dualists who argue, "If there be but one Self in all the bodies, then when one of the souls undergoes birth or death or enjoys happiness etc., all souls should share in these; besides there will be a confusion of the actions and their results." यथैकस्मिन् घटाकाशे रजोधूमादिभिर्युते। न सर्वे संप्रयुज्यन्ते तद्वजीवा: सुखादिभिः॥५॥ 5. Just as all the spaces confined within the various jars are not darkened when one of the spaces thus confined becomes contaminated by dust, smoke, etc., so also is the case with all the individuals in the matter of being affected by happiness etc. Yathā, just as; ekasmin ghatākāśe rajodhūmā- dibhih yute, when one of the spaces confined in a jar is polluted by dust, smoke, etc .; na, not; sarve, zll the spaces, confined within the jars etc., are defiled by that dust or smoke etc ; tadvat, just like that; jivāh, creatures; are not affected by sukhādiblih, by happiness etc. Objection : Is not the Self but one> Answer. Quite so Did you not hear that there is but one Self which like space inhab:ts all the aggregates (of body and senses)? Objection: If the Self be one, It will expenence happiness and sorrow everywhere. Arswer : This objection cannot be raised by the Sāmkhyas For a follower of the Samkhya philos- I8

274 EIGHT UPANISADS [III. 5

ophy cannot surely posit happiness, sorrow, etc. for the soul, inasmuch as he declares that joy, misery, etc inhere in the intellect Moreover, there is no valid ground for imagining that the Self, that is Conscious- ness by nature, has any multiplcity. Obiection In the absence of multiplcity, the (Samknya) theory that Pradhāna (1 e Primordial Nature) acts for others (viz Purusas, the conscious souls) has no leg to stand on Answer No, since whatever is accomplished by Pradhana cannot get inseparably connected with the Self. If it were a fact that any result in the form of either bondage or freedom inhered in the souls separately, then the supposition of a single Self would run counter to the (Samkhya) theory that Pradhāna acts for others, and therefore it would be logical to assume a multiplicity of souls. But as a matter of fact, it is not admitted by the Samkhyas that any result, be it bondage or freedom, that is accomplished by Pradhana, can inhere in the soul; on the contrary they hold that the souls are attributeless and are pure consciousness. Hence the theory, that Pradhana acts for others, derives its validity from the mere presence of the Self, and not from Its multi- plicity. Therefore the fact that Pradhana acts for others, cannot be a logical ground for inferring the existence of many souls And the Simkhyas have no other proof to validate their theory that the souls are different from each other. If it be held that Pradhãna by itself undergoes bondage or liberation by virtue of the mere presence of the supreme One (viz God), and that God becomes an occasion for the

III 5] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 275

activity of Pradhana by the mere fact of His existence which is the same as pure Consciousness, and not on account of any specific quality, then the assumption of a multiplicity of souls and the rejection of the meaning of the Vedas are the results of mere stupidıty.1 As for the view of the Vaisesikas and others who assert that desire and the rest inhere in the soul, that, too, is untenable, for the impressions (of past experience) that generate memory cannot remain inseparably located in the Self that has no location And since (according to them) memory arises from a contact of the soul with the mind, there can be no fixed, tenable rule regarding the rise of memory; or there will be the possibility of the rise of all kinds of memory sımultaneously. Moreover, the souls that are devoid of touch etc. and belong to a different category cannot logically come into contact with the mind etc Furthermore, it is not a fact, though these others believe in it, that qualities like colour or such cate- gories as action, genus, species, or inherence exist independently of the substances. If they were absolutely different from substances, and if desire etc were so from the soul, those qualities etc. would not have any reasonable relation with substances, (nor would desire etc have any relation with the soul) Objection : It involves no contradiction to say that categories that become associated from their very birth can have the relationship of inherence.

1 This refutes the view of those Samkhyas who believe In one God as well as in a multiplicity of sculs.

276 EIGHT UPANISADS [III. 5

Answer Not so, since the eternal Self exists before the ephemeral moods like desire, no theory of congenital inherence can be logically advanced. If on the contrary, desire and the rest are supposed to, have an inseparable relation with the soul from their very birth, then there arises the possibility of their becoming as everlasting as the quality of vastness that the soul possesses (even according to the Vase- șıkas) And that is not a desirable conclusion, for that will lead to the conclusion that the soul has 2o freedom from the bondage (of desire etc). Besides, if the relationship of inherence be different from a sub- stance, then one has to posit another relationship for its being connected with the substance, just as much as such a relationship is assumed in the case of substance and quality (by the Vaisesikas) Objection : Inherence being an eternal, insepar- able connection, there is no need of positing another relationship to connect it (with a substance). Answer: In that case, since entities that are connected through the relation of inherence remain eternally joined, there can be no possibility of their being separate. Alternatively, if the substances and the rest be absolutely disparate, then just as things possessing and not possessing the attribute of touch cannot come in contact, so also those substances etc. cannot become related (with such categories as relation, qualities, etc.) by way of possession that is implied by the sixth case.1 Besides, if the Self is possessed of such 1 We cannot say for inscance, "This thing is related to that colour through inherence", which in ordinary parlance is expiussed by saying, "This thing has that colour"

III. 6] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 277

qualities as desire etc. that are subject to increase and decrease, It will be open to the charge of being imper- manent like the bodies and the fruits of actions. And the other two faults of Its being possessed of parts and being subject to mutation, just like the bodies etc., will be unavoidable. On the other hand, if on the analogy of the sky, appearing to be blackened by dust and smoke attributed to it through ignorance, it is supposed that the Self appears to be possessed of the defects of happiness and sorrow generated by such limiting adjuncts as the intellect that are superimposed «on It through ignorance, there remains no illogcality in Its possessing bondage, freedom etc. in an empirical sense. For all schools of thought, while admitting the (relative reality of) empirical modes of behaviour originating from ignorance, deny their absolute reality. Therefore the imagination of the multiplcity of souls that the logician resorts to is quite uncalled for.

It is being shown how, through ignorance, there can be the possibility, in the same Self, of that same variety of actions that becomes possible on the assump- tion of a multiplicity of souls:

रूपकार्यसमाख्याश्च् भिद्यन्ते तत्र तत्र वै। आकाशस्य न भेदोऽस्ति तद्वज्ीवेषु निर्णयः॥६॥ 6. Though forms, actions, and names differ in respect of the differences (in space created by jars etc.), yet there is no multiplicity in space. So also is the definite conclusion with regard to the individual beings.

278 EIGHT UPANISADS [III 6

As in the same space there is a (supposed) differ- ence of dimensions such as smallness and bigness :n respect of the spaces enclosed by a jar, a water bowl, a house etc, so also there is a difterence of functions such as fetching or holding water, sleeping etc, and of names such as the space in a jar, the space in a water bowl, the space in a house etc, which aie all created by those jar etc , but all these differences are not surely real that are implied in conventional dealings involving dimensions etc created in space, in reality ūkāśasya na bhedah ast, space has no difference, nor can there be any empirical dealing based on the mul- tiplicity of space unless there be the instrumentality of the limiting adjuncts Just as it is the case here, so also jivesu, with regard to the souls, that are created as the individual beings by the conditioning factors of the bodies and are comparable to the spaces enclosed by jars, this nirnayah, definite conclusion, has been ariived at by the wise after examination

नाकाशस्य घटाकाशो विकारावयवी यथा। नैवात्मनः सदा जीवो विकारावयवौ तथा॥॥ 7. As the space within a jar is neither a transformation nor a part of space (as such), so an individual being is never a transformation nor a part of the supreme Self. Ohiection. The experience of difference with regard to those spaces in the jars etc. follows a real pattern. Anster. This does not accord with fact, since ghatikasah, the space within a jar; na vikarah, is not

III. 8] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 2'79

a transformation, of the real space, in the sense that a piece of gold ornament is of gold, or foam, bubbles, and ice are of water, nor is it avayavah, a part, as for instance the branches etc. are of a tree Yatha, as, the space in a jar is not a transformation of space in that sense, tatha, similarly, just as shown in the illustration; jivah, an individual being, that is com- parable to the space withın a jar, is na sadā, never; either a transformation or a part atmanah, of the supreme Self, that is the highest Reality and is com- parable to the infinite space. Therefore the dealings, based on the multiplicity of the Self, must certainly be false Inasmuch as the experience of birth, death, etc. follows as a consequence of the differentiation among individuals created by the limiting adjuncts constituted by the bodies, just as the experience ot the forms, actions etc are the results of the ideas of difference entertained with regard to the spaces within jars etc., therefore the association of the soul with such impuri- ties as suffering, consequences of actions, etc. is caused by that alone, but not in any real sense With a view to establishing this fact with the help of an illustration the text goes on:

यथा भवति वालानां गगनं मलिनं मलैः। तथा भवत्यवुद्धानामात्माऽपि मलिनो मलैः ।८॥ 8. Just as the sky becomes blackened by dust etc. in the eye of the ignorant, so also the Self becomes tarnished by impurities in the eves of the unwise.

280 EIGHT UPANISADS [III. 8

Yathā, as, in common experience, gaganam, the sky, bhavati, becomes, malnam, blackened, by cloud, dust, smoke, and such other impurities; bālānām, to the non-discriminating people, but to the truly dis- criminating people, the sky is not blackened, tatha, so also, abuddhānām, to the unwise, to those only who cannot distinguish the indwelling Self, but not to those who can distinguish the Self, atma, the supreme Self, the knower and the innermost, bhavati, becomes, malinah, tainted; malarh, with impurities-the impuri- ties of mental defects and results of action. For a desert does not become possessed of water, foam, wave, etc. just because a thirsty creature falsely attri- butes these to it. Similarly the Self is not blemished by the impurities of suffering etc attributed to It by the ignorant. This is the idea. The same idea is being elaborated again.

मरणे संभवे चैव गत्यागमनयोरपि। स्थितौ सर्वशरीरपु आकाशेनाविलक्षणः ।।६।।

9. The Self is not dissimilar to space in the matter of Its death and birth, as well as Its going and coming, and existence in all the bodies. The idea imphied is that one should realise that in the matter of birth, death, etc, the Self in all the bodies is quite on a par with space confined in a jar, so far as its origination, destruction, coming, going, and motionlessness are concerned

संघाता: स्वप्नवत्सवें आत्ममायाविसर्जिताः । आधिक्ये सर्वसाम्ये वा नोपपत्तिर्हि विद्यते ॥१०॥

III. II] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 28I

I0. The aggregates (of bodies and senses) are all created like dream by the Maya of the Self. Be it a question of superiority or equality of all, there is no logical ground to prove its existence. Samghātah, the aggregates, of bodies etc., that are analogous to the jars etc ; are like the bodies etc. seen in a dream and like those conjured up by a magician, and are atma-maya-visarntah, produced, conjured up, by the Maya, ignorance, of the Self, the idea is that they do not exist in reality. Though there may be adhikya, superiority, of the aggregates of the bodies and senses of the gods and others in comparison with those of the beasts and others, and there may be samya, equality, of all; still hi, since; there exists na upapattih, no valid ground, no possibility, for them- there is no reason establishing the existence of these things; therefore they are created by ignorance alone- they do not exist in reality. This is the meaning (Upanisadıc) texts that go to establish the fact that the reality of the non-dual Self is proved on the evidence of the Vedas, are now being referred to:

रसादयो हि ये कोशा व्याख्यातास्तैत्तिरीयके। तेषामात्मा परो जीव: खं यथा संप्रकाशित: ।।११।। II. It has been amply elucidated (by us) on the analogy of space, that the individual living being that conforms to the soul of the sheaths. counting from that constituted by the essence of food, which have been fully dealt with in the Taittirīya Upanisad, is none other than the supreme Self.

282' EIGHT UPANISADS [III. II

Rasādayah, the essence of food etc., that is to say, the layers of covering constituted by the essence of food, the vital force, etc. which are comparable to the sheaths of swords, as the preceding ones are more and more external in relation to the earlier ones,- these have been vyakhyutah, fully dealt with, tarttiriyake, in a Part of the Upanisad of the Taittirīya- ka branch (Tai II 1-v1) That which is ātma, the scul, the inmost entity; tesam, of them, of all the shcaths, because of which (soul) the sheaths come to have existence; is called jivah, the living being, since it is the source of animation It is being said as to what it is. It is parah, the supreme Brahman Itself, that was introduced earlier in the text, "Brahman is truth, knowledge, infinity" (Tai. II.i)-the Brahman from which, it was stated that, through the Māyā of the Self, emerged like dream or magic (Karikī, III Io) (first) space etc and then the composite things called the sheaths counting from the one composed of the essence of food (Tai II 1) That very Self samprakasitak, has been held forth, by us as analogous to space in the verses beginning with "Since the Self is reterred to as existing in the form of individual souls in the same way as space" (Kārki, III 3). The idea implied is that the Self is not to be established by the mere human intellect just as much as It cannot be by the imagination of the logicians. द्वयोई्योर्मघुज्ञाने परं ब्रह्म प्रकाशितम्। पृथिव्यामुदरे चैव यथाऽडकाशः प्रकाशितः ॥१२।। 12. As it is demonstrated that in the earth and the stomach there is but the same space,

III. 13] MĀŅDŪKYA KARIKĀ 283

similary in the Madhu-Brähmana the supreme Brahman is revealed as the same with reference to the difterent dual contexts. Morecver, prakāśıtam, it has been revealed; dvayoh dvayoh, with reference to the different dual contexts-the superhuman and the corporeal-that the "shining, immortal being" dwelling inside the earth etc as the knower, is but Brahman, the supreme, Self, that is everything (Br. II. v. I-14). Where (has this been revealed)? That is being stated: The word madhujnana is used in the sense of that from which is known madhu, nectar, the cause of immorta- hty, called the knowledge of Brahman which leads to blissfulness; so it means the (chapter called) Madhu- Brahmana (of the Brhadaranyaka Upanisad). In that Madhu-Brāhmana Like what? Yathi, as, in the world, the same ākāśah, space, is prakāsitah, demonstrated to exist, through inference, prthivyam udare ca eva, in the carth and the stomach, similar is the case here This is the purport

जीवात्मनोरनन्यत्वमभेदेन प्रशस्यते। नानात्वं निन्दते यञ्च तदेवं हि समञ्जसम् ॥१३॥ The fact that the non-difference of the individual and the supreme Self is extolled by a I3.

statement of their identity, and the fact that diversity is condemned, become easy of compre- hension from this point of view alone. The fact that abhedatvam jivätmanah, the non- difference of the individual soul and the supreme Self, ascertained through reasoning and the Vedas; is

284 EIGHT UPANIŞADS [III. 13

praśasyate, praised, by the scriptures and Vyāsa and others; abhedena, by a reference to (the result consist- ing in) the identity of the individual and the supreme Self;1 and the fact that the perception of multiplicity, {hat is common and natural to all beings and is a view formulated by the sophists standing outside the pale of scriptural import, nindyate, is condemned, by the knowers of Brahman as well in such texts as, "But there is not that second" (Br. IV. iii. 23), "It is from a second entity that fear comes" (Br. I. iv. 2), "When he makes a very little difference, then he is subjected to fear" (Tai. II. vii. I), " ... and this all are the Self'' (Br. II. iv. 6, IV. v. 7), "He who perceives here multiplicity, as it were, goes from death to death" (Ka. II. i. 10), tat yat, all that, that has been said (thus); evam hi samañjasam, becomes thus easy of compre- hension; that is to say, becomes logical from this point of view alone; but the perverted views, cooked up by the logicians, are not easy of comprehension; that is to say, they do not tally with facts when probed into.

जोवात्मनो: पृथक्त्वं यत्प्रागुत्पत्ते: प्रकीर्तितम्। भविष्यद्वृत्त्या गौणं तन्मुख्यत्वं हि न युज्यते ॥१४॥ 14. The separateness of the individual and the supreme Self that has been declared (in the Vedic texts) earlier than (the talk of) creation (in the Upanisads), is only in a secondary sense that keeps in view a future result (viz unity); for such separateness is out of place in its primary sense. 1 "He who knows the supreme Brahman becomes Brahman" (Mu. III n1 9)

III. I4] MĀNŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 285

Objection : Since prak utpatteh, earlier even than the Upanisadic texts dealing with creation; prthaktvam jivātmanah, the separateness of the individual and the supreme Self; prakirtitam, has been declared; by the Vedas, in the portion dealing with rites and rituals, in various ways in conformity with the variety of desires (of individuals), in such words as, "desirous of this", "desirous of that", and the supreme Self, too, has been declared in such mantra texts as, "He held the earth as well as this heaven" (R. X. cxxi. I), therefore in case of a contradiction between the sentences of the portions on knowledge (i.e. Upanișads) and rıtes (i.e. Samhitā and Brāhmaņa), why should unity alone, standing out as the purport of the portion on knowledge, be upheld as the reason- able one?

To this the answer is: Tat prathaktvam, that separateness; is not the highest truth; yat, which; is prakirtitam, declared; prak, earlier in the portion on rites, before the Upanisadic texts dealing with creation occur, to wit, "That from which all these beings take birth" (Tai. III. i), "As from a fire fly tiny sparks" (Br. II. i. 20), "From this Self that is such, space was created" (Tai. II. 1. 2), "That (Self) saw (i.e. delibe- rated)" (Ch. VI. ii. 3), "That (Self) created fire" (Ch. VI. ii. 3), etc. What is it then? It is gaunam, second- ary like the separateness of the infinite space and the space within a jar. And this statement is made by keeping in view the future result, as in the sentence,

286 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 14

"He cooks food."1 For the texts, speaking of difference, can never reasonably uphold it in any literal sense, inasmuch as the texts dealing with the multiplicity of the Self only reiterate the diverse ex- periences of beings still under natural ignorance And here in the Upanisads, too, in the texts speaking of creation, dissolution, etc., the one thing sought to be established is the unity of the mndividual and the supreme Self, as is known from such texts as "That thou art" (Ch. VI. viii-xvi), "(Whle he who worships another god thinking), 'He is one, and I am another' does not know" (Br I iv. I0), etc. Therefore the reiteration of the perception of multiplicity is made by the Vedas in this world in a secondary sense only, placing their relance on the future demonstration of unity that is left over as a task to be accomplished in the Upanisads at a later stage. Or the explanation is this: The declaration of unity has been made in "One without a second" (Ch VI. ii. 2) earher than that of creation introduced in such texts as "It (the Self) deliberated", "It created fire" (Ch VI. ii. 2-3) And that, again, will culminate in unity in the text, "That is truth, That is the Self, and That thou art" (Ch. VI. vni-xvi). Therefore the separateness of the individual and the supreme Self that is met with (in the Upanisads) anywhere in any sentence must be taken in a secondary sense, as in the sentence, "He cooks food", for the thing kept in view here is the unity that will be established in future.

1 Where food stands for the ultimate form that the things being cooked will assume.

III 15] MANDŪKYA KARIKĀ 287

Obection: Even though everything be brthless and one without a second before creation, still after creation all these surely have got birth, and indrviduals, too, are different. Answer : This is not so, for the Vedic texts deal- ing with creation have a different object in view. This objection was refuted earlier also by sayıng that, just like dream, the aggregates are created by the Māyā of the Self, and that the birth, difference, etc. of individuals are analogous to the birth, difference etc of the spaces within jars (Kārikās, III. 9-10). (Since falsıty of these have already been dealt with) therefore, taking for granted that very reason, some Vedic texts dealing with creation are being adduced here, from amongst the texts dealing with creation, difference, etc., with a view to showing that they are meant for establishing the oneness of the Self and the ındıvidual beings: मृल्लोहविस्फुलिङ्गादै: सृषटिर्या चोदिताऽन्यथा। उपायः सोऽवताराय नास्ति भेद: कथंचन ॥१५॥ 15. The creation that has been multifari- ously set forth with the help of the examples of earth, gold, sparks, ctc., is merely by way of generating the idea (of oneness); but there is no multiplicity in any way. Srsti, the creation, ya, which; codita, has been expounded, revealed, anyatha, in different ways;1 mrt- loha-visphulinga-adyaih, with the help of such illustra- tions as earth, gold, sparks, etc ;1 sah, that, all that 1 Ch VI. i. 4-6; Mu. II. i. I.

288 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 15

process of creation, is an upāyah, means, avatārāya, for engendering, in us the idea of the oneness of the individual and the supreme Self. It is just like the story of the organs of speech etc. becoming smitten with sin by the devils, that is woven round a conversation with Präna, where the intention is to generate the idea of the pre-eminence of Prāna (Ch.I.ii; Br.I.iii, VI.1;, Pr.2). Obection : That, too, is unacceptable.1 Answer : No, since the conversations of Prana etc. are related divergently in the different branches of the Vedas. If the colloquies were true, we should have met with a uniform pattern in all the branches, and not with heterogeneous contradictory presentations. But as a matter of fact divergence is met with. Therefore the Vedic texts setting forth the interlogues are not to be taken literally. So also are to be understood the sentences dealing with creation. Objection : Since the cycles of creation differ, the Vedic texts dealing with the interlogues, as well as with creation, are divergent with relation to the respective cycles. Answer : Not so, since they serve no useful purpose apart from generating the ideas already mentioned. Not that any other purpose can be imagined for the Vedic texts speaking of colloquies and creation. Objection : They are meant for meditation with a view to attaining self-identification.

1 The anecdotes of Prāna are real.

III. I6] MANDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 289

Answer . Not so, for it cannot be a desirable end to be identified with quarrel, creation, or dissolution. Therefore the texts expressing creation etc. are meant simply for generating the idea of the oneness of the Self, and they cannot be fancied to bear other inter- pretations. Therefore na ash, there is not, any bhedah, multiplicity, caused by creation etc .; katham cana, in any way. Objechon: If in accordance with such Vedic texts as "One only without a second" (Ch VI.i1.2), the supreme Self, that is by nature ever pure, intelligent, and free, be the only reality in the highest sense and all else be unreal, then why are there the instructions on meditation in the Vedic Texts, "The Self, my dear, should be seen"1 (Br.II iv 5), "The Self that is devoid of sin .(is to be sought for)" (Ch.VIII.vii I), "He should resort to self-absorption" (Ch.III xiv I), "The Self alone is to be meditated upon" (Br I iv.7) etc .; and why are the rites like Agnihotra enjoined? Answcr . Hear the reason for this :

आश्रमास्त्रिविधा हीनमध्यमोत्कृष्टदएयः ! उपासनोपदिष्टेयं तदर्थमनुकम्पया ॥१६॥

16. There are three stages of life-inferior, intermediate, and superior. This meditation is enjoined for them out of compassion. The word äśramah, meaning stages of life, indi- cates the people belonging to them-the people

1 The remaining portion is. "heard of, deliberated on, and meditated on."

I9

,290 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. I6

competent for scriptural duties, as well as the people of different castes following the righteous path-for the word is used in a suggestive sense. They are trividhah, of three kinds. How? Hina-madhyama- utkrsta-drstayah, people possessing inferior, medium, and superior power of vision; that is to say, they are endued with dull, medium, and fine mental calibre Iyam upāsanā, this meditation, as well as rites; upadısta, has been instructed; tadartham, for them, for the sake of people of dull and medium intellect who are affiliated to the stages of life etc., and not .for the people of superior intellect having the convic- tion that the Self is but one without a second. (This is done) by the kind Vedas, anukampayā, out of the compassionate consideration, as to how people treading the path of righteousness may attain this superior vision of unity, as set forth in such Vedic texts as "That which is not thought of by the mind, that by which, they say, the mind is thought of, know that to be Brahman, and not this that people worship as an object" (Ke I.6), "That thou art" (Ch.VI vii-xvi), "The Self alone is all this" (Ch. VII.xxv.2), etc. The perfect knowledge consists in the realisation of the non-dual Self, since this is established by scriptures and logic, whereas any other view is false, it being outside the pale of these. A further reason that the theories of the dualists are false is that they are based on such defects as likes and dislikes. How?

स्वसिद्धान्तव्यवस्थासु द्वैतिनो निश्चिता दृढम्। परस्परं विरुध्यन्ते तैरयं न विरुध्यते ॥१७॥

III. I8] MĀŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 29I

17. The dualists, confirmed believers in the methodologies establishing their own conclusions, are at loggerheads with one another. But this (non-dual) view finds no conflict with them. Dvaitinah, the dualists-who follow the views of Kapıla, Kaņāda, Buddha, Arhat,1 and others; niścitāh, are firmly rooted; svasıddhānta-vyavasthāsu, in the methodologies leading to their own conclusions. Think- ing "The supreme Reality is this alone, and not any other", they remain affiliated to those points of view, and finding anyone opposed to them, they become hateful of him. Thus being swayed by lıkes and dislikes, consequent on the adherence to their own conclusions, parasparam virudhyante, they stand arrayed against one another. As one is not at conflict with one's own hands and feet, so also, just because of non-difference from all, ayam, this, this Vedic view of ours consisting in seeing the same Self in every one; na virudhyate, is not opposed; taih, to them, who are mutually at conflict. Thus the idea sought to be conveyed is that the perfect view consists in realising the Self as one, for this is not subject to the drawbacks of love and hatred.

It is being pointed out why this view does not conflict with theirs:

अद्वैतं परमार्थो हि द्वैतं तद्गेद उच्यते। तेषामुभयथा द्वैतं तेनायं न विरुध्यते ॥१८॥

Jainas. 1 Vız the Samkhyas, Nyāya-Vaisesikas, Buddhists, and

292 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. I8.

18. Non-duality is the highest Realitiy, since duality is said to be a product of it. But for them there is duality either way. Therefore this view (of ours) does not clash (with theirs).

Advaitam paramarthah, non-duality is the highest Reality, hi, since, dvaitam, dualty, heterogeneity; is tad-bhedah, a differentiation, that is to say, a product, of that non-duality, in accordance with the Vedic texts, "(In the beginning there was Existence alone)- One without a second .... It created fire" (Ch.VI. ii.2-3), and in accordance with reason also; for duality ceases to exist samadhi (God-absorption), unconsciousness, and deep sleep, when the mind ceases to act. Therefore duality is called a product of non-duality. But tesam, for those dualists, there is nothing but dvaitam, dualıty, ubhayathā, from either point of view, from the standpoints of both Reality and unreality. Though those deluded persons have a dualist outlook and we the undeluded ones have a non-dualist outlook in conformity with the Vedic texts, "The Lord, on account of Māya, is perceived as many" (Br.II.v.I9), "But there is not that second thing (separate from It which It can see)" (Br.IV.iii.23); yet tena, because of this reason (because of the falsity of dualism); ayam, this, our point of view; na virudhyate, does not clash, with theirs. This point can be illustrated thus: A man sitting astride an elephant in rut does not goad his animal against a mad- man standing on the ground and challenging him by saying, "I am also seated on an elephant in opposition; drive your animal against me," just because he has no

III. 191 MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 293

inimical feelings towards the latter. Thus, since in reality, the knower of Brahman is the very Self of the dualists, tena, hence, because of this reason; ayam, this, this outlook of ours, na virudhyate, does not clash; with theirs. If it is asserted that duality is derivd from non- duality, someone may entertain the doubt that on that ground duality, too, is real in the highest sense. Therefore it is said:

मायया भिद्यते हयेतमान्यथाऽजं कथञ्चन। तत्वतो भिद्यमाने हि मर्त्यताममृतं व्रजेत् ॥१६॥ This birthless (Self) becomes differ- entiated through Māya, and It does so in no other I9.

way than this. For should It become multiple in reality, the immortal will undergo mortality. H1, since; that which is the highest Reality: bhıdyate, dıfferentiates, māyayā, through Māyā; like the moon seen as many by a man with diseased eyes or like a rope appearing diversely as a snake, a line of water, etc., but not so in reality, for the Self has no parts. A composite thing can get transformed through a change in its components, as earth gets modified into jars etc. Therefore the idea conveyed is that the part- less, ajam, birthless (Self); differentiates, na katham cana, in no way whatsoever; anyatha, other than this. H1, for; tattvatah bhidyamane, should (It) become multiformed in reality; that which is naturally amrtam, immortal; ajam, birthless; and non-dual; vrajet martyatam, will undergo mortality, like fire becoming cold. And this reversal of one's own nature is

294 EIGHT UPANISADS [III. 19

repugnant, since it is opposed to all valid evidence. The birthless, undecaying Reality that is the Self, becomes multiple through Maya alone and not in reality. Therefore duality is not the highest Truth.

अजातस्यैष भाषस्य जातिमिच्छन्ति षादिनः । अजातो ह्यमृतो भावो मर्त्यतां कथमेष्यति॥२०॥ 20. The talkers vouch indeed for the birth of that very unborn, positive entity. But how can a positive entity that is unborn and immortal undergo mortality ? But as for those vādinah, garrulous people, talking of Brahman; who, while interpreting the Upanisads, icchanti, vouch for, the jatim, birth, in a real sense; ajātasya eva, of the very birthless One, of the immortal Reality that is the Self. If the Self be born as they hold, It esyatı martyatam, will undergo mortality, of a certainty. But that Self being by nature a bhāvah, positive entity; that is ajātah, unborn; amrtah deathless; katham, how; can It undergo mortality? The idea is that It will in no way reverse Its nature to embrace mortality (that individuals are subject to). न भवत्यभृतं मर्त्यं न मर्त्यममृतं तथा। प्रकृतेरन्यथाभावो न कथश्चिन्विष्यति ॥२१॥ 2I. The immortal cannot become mortal. Similarly the mortal cannot become immortal. The mutation of one's nature will take place in no way whatsoever. Because, in this world, the amrtam, immortal; na bhavati, does not become; martyam, mortal; similarly

III. 22] MĀŅŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 295

the mortal does not become immortal. Accordingly, anyathabhavah prakrteh, the mutation of one's nature, to become anything other than what one is; na katham cit bhavisyati, will not take place in any way what- soever, just as fire cannot change its heat.

स्वभावेनामृतो यस्थ भावो गच्छति मर्त्यवाम्। कृतकेनामृतस्तस्य कथं स्थास्यति निश्चलः ॥२२॥ 22. How can the immortal entity continue to be changeless from the standpoint of one according to whom a positive, immortal object can naturally pass into birth, it being a product (according to him) ? As for the disputant, yasya, according to whom; svabhāvena, naturally; amrtah bhāvaḥ, an immortal, posıtive object; gacchati martyatām, attains worldliness, takes birth in reality; tasya, for him; it is a meaning- less proposition to hold that entity to be naturally immortal before creation. Katham, how; can that entity; be amrtah, immortal; tasya, for him; krtakena, inasmuch as it is a product? Being an effect, how will that immortal sthāsyati, continue to be; niścalah, unchanging, immortal by nature? It cannot remain so by any means. At no time can there exist anything called unborn for one who holds the view that the Self has birth; for him all this is mortal. Hence (from this standpoint) we are faced with the negation of freedom. This is the idea. Objection : For one who holds the view that the Self does not undergo birth, the Vedic passages speak- ing of creation can have no validity.

296 EIGHT UPANISADS [III 22

Answer: It is true that there are Vedic texts supporting creation, but such passages have some other point in view, and we said that it "is only by way of generating the idea" of unıty (Kānkā, III 15). Though tne objection was disposed of, the contention and its refutation are adverted to here again merely with a view to allaying the doubts as to whether the passages dealing with creation are favourable or opposed to the subject matter that is going to be dealt with

भूततोऽभूततो वाऽपि सृज्यमाने समा श्रुतिः । निश्चितं युक्तियुक्तं च यशत्गवति नेतरत् ॥२३॥

23. Vedic Texts are equally in evidence with regard to creation in reality and through Māya. That which is ascertained (by the Vedas) and is supported by reasoning can be the mean- ing, and nothing else. Sama srutih, (texts speaking of creation) are equally in evidence; srjyamane, with regard to a thing being created; bhūtatah, in reality; vā, or; abhutatah, through Maya, as is done by a magician. Objection: Of the two possible meanings-primary and secondary-it is reasonable to understand a word in its primary sense. Answer : Not so, for we said earlier that crcation in any other sense is not recognised (in our philosophy), and it serves no purpose. All talks of creation. in the primary or secondary sense, relate only to creation through ignorance, and not to creation in reality, as is denied in the Vedic Text, "It is coextensive with all

III. 24] MANDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 297

that is within and without, and has no birth' (Mu. II.i.2). Therefore that which is niscitam, determined, by the Vedas as one without a second, birthless, and immortal, ca, and, is yukti-yuklam, supported by reasoning; tat, that, alone; bhavati, becomes, the meaning of the Vedic text, and not anything else This is what we said in the earlier verses. It is being shown as to what kind of Vedic cate- gorical statements are met with: नेह नानेति चाल्नायादिन्दो मायाभिरित्यपि। अजञायमानो बहुधा मायया जायते तु सः ॥२४॥ 24. Since it is stated (in the Vedas), "There is no diversity here," and "The Lord, through Māyā, (is perceived as manifold)", "(the Self) without being born (appears to be born mn various ways)", it follows that He is born on account of Maya alone. If creation had taken place in reality, the diverse things should have been real and there should not have been any text showing their unreality. But as a matter of fact there is the text, "There is no diversity here whatsoever" (Ka. II. i. II), which purports to deny the existence of duality. Therefore creation, that has been imagined as a help to the comprehension of non-duality, is as unreal as the interlogue of Prāna (vide Kārikā, III. 15); for this creation is referred to by the word Maya, indicative of unreal things, in the passage, "The Lord, on account of Māya (is perceived as manifold)" (Br. II.v.I9). Objection : The word Maya implies knowledge

298 EIGHT UPANISADS [III. 24

Answer : True. But even so it is nothing damag- ing, since sense-knowledge is accepted as a kind of Māyā, it being a product of ignorance. So māyābhih, means "through different kinds of sense-knowledge," which are but forms of ignorance, as is proved by the Vedic text, "Though unborn, It appears to be born in diverse ways" (Y.XXXI.19). Therefore sah, He. the Self, jāyate māyayā tu, takes birth through Māya alone, the word tu being used to add emphasis, and to imply "through Māya to be sure"; for (other- wise) birthlessness and birth in various ways cannot be reconciled in the same thing like heat and cold in fire. Besides, from the fact that the realisation of unity is a fruitful thing as mentioned in the Vedic text, "What sorrow and what delusion can there be in one who realises unity" etc (Iś. 7), it follows that the unitive outlook is the definite conclusion of the Upanisads, and this view is supported by the fact that in such texts as "He goes from death to death who sees multiplicity, as it were, in It" (Ka. II. i. II), the idea of heterogeneity, implied by creation etc., is condemned.

संभूतेरपवादाच्च संभव: प्रतिषिध्यसे। को न्वेनं जनयेदिति कारणं प्रतिषिध्यते॥२५।। 25. From the refutation of (the worship of) Hiranyagarbha, it follows that creation is negated. By the text, "who should bring him forth?" is ruled out any cause. Samnbhavah pratışidhyate, creation (1.e. the created things), is negated; sambhūteh apavādāt,

III 25] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 299

because of the denial of the worship of the Majestic One1 (Hıranyagarbha), in the text, "They enter into blinding darkness who worship Hıranyagarbha" (Iś. 12). For if Hıranyagarbha were absolutely real, there would not have been any denunciation of Hıs (worshıp). Objection : The denunciation of (the worship of) Hiranyagarbha is meant for bringing about the com- bination of worship with rites (vināśa), as is known from the text, "They enter into blinding darkness who are engaged in (mere) rites" (Iś. 9) Answer: It is true that the condemnation of the meditation on (or worship of) Hiranyagarbha is meant for enjoining a combination of the meditation on the Deity, viz Hiranyagarbha, with rites, referred to by the word vināśa (lıt. the destructible) Still, just as rites, called vināśa, are meant for transcending death consisting in the natural tendencies engendered by ignorance, so also the combination of the meditation on gods with the rites, that is enjoined for the purifica- tion of the human heart, is calculated to lead one across the death consisting in a twofold hankering for ends and means, into which the impulsion, engendered by the craving for the results of works, transforms itself. For thus alone will a man be sanctified from the impurity that is the death characterised by the two- fold hankering. Therefore this avrdyā (lit. ignorance), characterised by a combination of the meditation on gods with rites, aims at leading one beyond death. Thus indeed does the knowledge of the oneness of the

' The Deity that is possessed of full majesty (sam-bhūti).

300 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 25

supreme Self arise inevitably in one who becomes ds- gusted with the world, who is ever engaged in the dıs- cussion of the Upanisadic truths, and who goes beyond death that is but (a form of) avidyā (or ignorance) characterised by the dual desire (for ends and means). Thus, as compared with the pre-existing ignorance, the knowledge of Brahman, leading to immortality, comes as a successor to be related with the same person; and therefore (in this sense) the latter is said to be combined with the former. Accordingly, since the worship of Hiranyagarbha is meant to serve a purpose different from that of the knowledge of Brahman lcading to immortality, the refutation of the worship of Hiranyagarbha is tantamount to its denun- ciation, and this is so because it has no direct bearing on emancipation, though it is a means of purification. Thus from the condemnation of the worship of Hiranyagarbha it follows that He has got only a rela- tive existence, and hence from the standpoint of the absolutely real oneness of the Self, is negated creation (as symbolised by Hranyagarbha and) called immor- tality Thus since it is the individual soul itself, created by ignorance and existing through ignorance alone, that attains its natural stature on the eradication of ignorance, therefore "Kah nu enam janayet, who should again bring him forth ?. " (Br. III. ix. 28.7). For none indeed creates again a snake, superimposed on a rope, once it is removed through discrimination. Sımilarly none will create this individual. The words, "kah nu, who indeed," being used with the force of a covert denial, kāranam pratișidhyate, is ruled out

III. 267 MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 30I

any cause. The idea is that a thing that was created by ignorance and thus disappeared has no source of birth, in accordance with the Vedic text "From nothing did It come out, and nothing came out of It" (Ka. I. i1. 18). स एष नेति नेतीति व्याख्यातं निह्नते यतः । सवमग्राह्यभावेन हेतुनाऽजं प्रकाशते ॥२६॥। 26. Since by taking the help of incompre- hensibility (of Brahman) as a reason, all that was explained earlier (as a means for the knowledge of Brahman) is negated by the text, "This Self is that which has been described as 'Not this, not this'", therefore the birthless Self becomes self- revealed. The Upanisad thinks that the Self, presented through a negation of all attributes in the text, "Now, therefore, the description (of Brahman): 'Not this, not this' " (Br. II. ini. 6) is very difficult to under- stand; and from that point of view whatever was vyākhyātam, explained, as a means adopted again and again for the sake of establishing that very Self- all that it again and again mihnute, negates.1 By

1 Vide Br. II in1. 6, III. 1x 26, IV. i1 4, IV. 1v. 22, and IV v 15 Brhadaranyaka, II 111, starts with, "Brahman has but two forms-gross and subtle" etc. And at the end of the section it is stated, "Now, therefore, the description (of Brahman) 'Not this Not this' " But though explained once, the Self is very difficult to comprehend Hence the Upanisad adopts other helps to present the same entity and then negates them with "not this, not this", so that the absolute Brahman alone may be comprehended as the only Realıty.

302 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 26

showing in the text, "This Self is that which has been described as not this, not this" (Br. III. 1x. 26) that the Self is imperceptible, the Upanisad negates, by implcation, all that is perceptible, has origination, and is comprehended by the intellect.1 Being afraid lest people, not cognisant of the fact that anything present- ed as a means for establishing something else has only that other thing as its goal, may jump to the conclusion that one must cling as firmly to the means as to the end itself, the Upanisad mhnute, refutes (the idea of the reality of the means); agrāhyabhāvena hetuna, by taking the help of the incomprehensibility (of the Self) as a reason. This is the purport As a result of this, the reality of the Self that is co-exten- sive with all that is within and without and is ajam, birthless; prakāśate, gets revealed, by Itself, to one who knows that the means only serves the purpose of the end and that the end has ever the same changeless nature.2

Thus the definite conclusion arrived at by hun- dreds of Vedic texts is that the reality of the Self that is co-extensive with all that exists within and without,

1 The imperceptible Brahman cannot be the supreme Reality, if perceptible things too are equally real. There- fore the truth of Brahman implies the unreality of duality. 2 A superimposed thing has no realty of its own just like a snake imagined on a rope. Similarly all phenomenal things like specific attributes that are denied in Brahman, have no existence by the very fact of being negated. It is a mistake to think that the negated counterpart of this negation must also be true

III. 27] MĀNŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 303

and is birthless, is one without a second, and there is nothing besides. It is now said that this very tact is establıshed by reason as well. सतो हि मापया जन्म युज्यते न तु तत्वतः । तच्वतो जायते मस्य जातं तस्य हि जायते॥२७॥ 27. Birth of a thing that (already) exists can reasonably be possible only through Māyā and not in reality. For one who holds that things take birth in a real sense, there can only be the birth of what is already born. With regard to the Reality that is the Self, the apprehension may arise that, if It be incomprehen- sible for ever, It may as well be non-existent. But that is not correct, for Its effect is perceptible As the effect consisting in janma, bırth (of things), māyaya, through magic, follows from the magician satah, who exists, so the effect in the form of the birth of the world, that is comprehended, leads one to assume a Self existing in the highest sense, that like the magician is the basis for the Māya consisting in the origination of the world; for it is but reasonable to think that like such effects as elephants etc., produced with the help of magic, the creation of the universe proceeds satah, from some cause that has existence, and not from an unreal one. But it is not reasonable to say that from the birthless Self there can be any birth tattvatah, in reality. Or the meaning is this: As the janma, birth; like a snake etc .; satah, of an existing thing, a rope for instance; yujyate, can reasonably be; māyayā, through Māyā, but not tattvatah, in reality;

304 EIGHT UPANISADS [III. 27

similarly, though the Self that exists is incomprehen- sible, It can reasonably have birth in the form of the universe through Maya like the illusion of a snake on a rope; but the birthless Self cannot have any birth in the real sense. Yasya, as for the disputant, who holds that the unborn Self, the supreme Realty; jāyate, undergoes birth, as the universe, he cannot make such an absurd assertion that the birthless passes into birth, since this involves a contradiction. Hence he has to admit perforce that jatam, what is already born; jayate takes bırth, again; and from this predication of birth from what is born will follow an infinite regress. Therefore it is established that the Reality that is the Self, is birthless and one

असतो मायया जन्म तरवतो नैव युज्यते। बन्ध्यापुत्रो न तत्त्वेन मायया वाऽपि जायते ॥।२८।। 28. There can be no birth for a non-existent object either through Maya or in reality, for the son of a barren woman is born neither through Maya nor in reality. For those who think everything to be unreal, janma na yujyate, there can be no possibility of birth in any way; asatah, of a non-existent object; māyayā tattvatah va, either through Maya or in reality, for such is never our experience. For bandhyaputrah, the son of a barren woman; na jayate, never takes birth; either through Maya or in reality. Hence the theory of nihilism is entirely out of place in the present con- text. This is the idea.

III. 30] MAŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 305

How, again, can there be birth for the existent through Maya alone? That is being explained:

यथा खप्े द्याभासं स्पन्दते मायया मनः। तथा जाग्रदुशयाभासं स्पन्दते मायया मनः ॥२६॥ 29. As in dream the mind vibrates, as though having dual aspects, so in the waking state the mind vibrates as though with two facets. As the snake imagined on a rope is true when seen as the rope, so manas, the mind, is true when seen as the Self, the supreme Consciousness. As like a snake appearing on a rope, the mind spandate, vibrates; svapne, in dream; māyayā, through Māyā; dvayābhasam, as if possessed of two facets-the cogniser and the thing cognsed; tatha, jusi like that; jagrat, in the waking state; manas, the mind; span- date, vibrates, as though vibrates, mayaya, through Māyā.

अद्वयं च द्याभासं मनः रवप्े न संशयः। अद्वयं च द्वयाभासं तथा जाग्रन्न संशय: ॥३०॥ 30. There is no doubt that in dream, the mind, though one, appears in dual aspects; so also in the waking state, the mind, though one, appears to have two aspects. Na samsayah, there is no doubt; that just as the snake is true in its aspect of the rope, so the manas, mind; that is but advayam, non-dual, in its aspect of the Self from the highest standpoint; dvayābhāsam, appears to have two aspects; svapne, in dream. For 20

306 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 30

apart from Consciousness, there do not exist two things in dream-elephants and so on that are perceived and eyes and the rest that perceive them. The idea is that the case is similar in the waking state also; for in either state there exists only the supremely real Conscious- ness.1 It has been said that it is the mind alone which, like a snake on a rope, appears as an illusion, in dual roles. What proof is there as to that' The text advances (inferential) proof on the basis of agreement and difference. How?

मनोदृश्यसिदं द्वैतं यत्किचित्सवराचरम्। मनसो ह्यमनीभावे द्वैतं नैवोपलस्यते ॥३१॥ 31. All this that there is-together with all that moves or does not move-is perceived by the mind, (and therefore all this is but the mind); for when the mind ceases to be the mind, duality is no longer perceived. "Idam dvaitam, this duality, as a whole; that is manodrsyam, perceived by the mind; is nothing but the mind, which is itself imagined (on the Self)"- this is the proposition. For duality endures so long as the mind does, and duality disappears with the disappearance of the mind. Hi, for; manasah amanī- bhäve, when the mind ceases to be the mind, when, like the illusory snake disappearing in the rope, the mind's activity stops through the practice of discrimi- 1 The mind, fancied on Consciousness through ignorance, vibrates on the supremely real and constant Consciousness mn either state.

III. 32] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 307

nating insight and renunciation, or when the mind gets absorbed in the state of sleep; dvaitam na upalabhyate, duality is not perceived. From this non-existence is proved the unreality of duality. This is the purport. How does the mind cease to be the mind? This is being answered: आत्मसत्यानुबोधेन न सङ्कल्पयते यदा। अमनस्तां तदा याति ग्राह्याभावे तदग्रहम् ॥३२॥ 32. When, following the instruction of scriptures and the teacher, the mind ceases to think as a consequence of the realisation of the Truth that is the Self, then the mind attains the state of not being the mind; in the absence of things to be perceived, it becomes a non- perceiver. Atmasatya, the Truth that is the Self, that is com. parable to the reality of earth as stated in the Vedic text, "All modification (of earth) exists in name only, having speech for its support. Earth alone is true" (Ch. VI.i.4). Atmasatya-anubodha is the realisation of that Truth of the Self that follows from the instruction of scriptures and the teacher. Yadā, when; as a consequence of that, there remains nothing to be thought of, and the mind na samkalpayate, does not think, as fire does not burn in the absence of combustible things; tada, then, at that time; yātt amanastam, it attains the state of ceasing to be the mind. Grähyābhāve, in the absence of things to be perceived; tat, that mind; agraham, becomes free from all illusion of perceptions. This is the idea.

308 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 33

If this duality is false, how is the truth of one's own Self realised? The answer is:

अकल्पकमजं ज्ञानं जेयाभिन्नं प्रचक्षते। ब्रह्मज्ञेयमजं नित्यमजेनाजं विबुध्यते॥३३॥ 33. They say that the non-conceptual knowledge, that is birthless, is non-different from the knowable (Brahman). The knowledge that has Brahman for its content is birthless and everlasting. The birthless (Self) is known by the birthless (knowledge).

The knowers of Brahman pracaksate, say; that jñānam, absolute knowledge; that is akalpakam, devoid of all imagination (non-conceptual); and is therefore ajam, birthless; is mneyabhinnam, non- different from the knowable, identified with Brahman, the absolute Reality. And this is supported by such Vedic texts as "For the knower's function of knowing can never be lost" (Br. IV.iii.30), like the heat of fire; "Knowledge, Bliss, Brahman" (Br. III.ix.28.7); "Brahman is truth, knowledge, infinite" (Tai. II.i.I). The phrase brahma-jneyam is an attribute of that very knowledge and means, that very knowledge of which Brahman Itself is the content and which is non- different from Brahman, as heat is from fire. By that ajena, unborn, knowledge, which is the very nature of the Self; vibudhyate, is known-It knows by Itself; the ajam, birthless Reality, that is the Self. The idea conveyed is that the Self being ever a homogeneous mass of Consciousness, like the sun that is by nature a

III. 34] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 309

constant light, does not depend on any other knowl- edge (for Its revelation).

It has been said that when the mind is divested of ideation by virtue of the realisation of the Truth that is Brahman, and when there is an absence of external objects (of perception), it becomes tranquil, controlled, and withdrawn like fire that has no fuel. And it has further been said that when the mind thus ceases to be the mind, duality also disappears. निगृहीतस्य मनसो निर्विकल्पस्य धीमतः । प्रचार: स तु विज्ञेय: सुषुप्नेऽन्यो न तत्समः ॥३४॥ 34. The behaviour that the mind has, when it is under control, free from all ideation, and full of discrimination, should be particularly noted. The behaviour of the mind in deep sleep is different and is not similar to that (of the con- trolled mind). Pracärah, the behaviour; that there is; manasah, of that mind, nigrhitasya, that is (thus) under control; nirvikalpasya, that is free from ideation of all kinds; dhimatah, that is full of discrimination-sah, that behaviour; vijñeyah, is to be particularly noted; by the Yogis. Objection : In the absence of all kinds of aware- ness, the mind under control behaves in the same way as the mind in sleep. Hence the absence of aware- ness being the same, what is there to be particularly noted? With regard to this the answer is: The objection is untenable, since the behaviour of the mind susupte,

3I0 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 35

in deep sleep; is anvah, different; the mind being then under the cover of the darkness of delusion arising from ignorance, and if being still possessed of the latent tendencies that are the seeds of many evil actions. And the behaviour of the mind under con- trol is surely different, since ignorance, the seed of evil activities, has been burnt away from that mind by the fire of the realisation of the Truth that is the Self, and since from that mind has been removed the blemish of all afflictions. Hence (the sleeping mind's behaviour) na tatsamah, is not like that behaviour (in the controlled state). Therefore it is fit to be known. This is the meaning.

The reason for the difference of behaviour is being stated:

लीयते हि सुषुप्ते तन्निगृहीतं न लीयते। तदेव निर्भयं ब्रह्म ज्ञानालोकं समन्ततः॥३५।। 35. For that mind loses itself in sleep, but does not lose itself when under control. That very mind becomes the fearless Brahman, possessed of the light of Consciousness all around. Hi, since; suupte,1 in deep sleep; tat, that, the mind, together with all its tendencies and impressions that are the seeds of all such mental modes as igno- rance (egoism, attachment, etc.); līyate, loses itself, attains a seed state of potentiality that is a kind of darkness and non-differentiation; but when that mind is nigrhitam, withdrawn, through knowledge arising 1 A different reading is susuptau.

III 36] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 3II

from discrimination; na liyate, it does not lose itself, it does not attain the seed state of darkness; there- fore it is reasonable that the behaviours of the sleep- ing and controlled minds should be different. Tat eva, that very mind; becomes the supreme non-dual brahma, Brahman Itself; when (in its absorption in Brahman) it is freed from the dual taint of being the subject and the object that are the creations of igno- rance. Since this is the case, therefore that very mind becomes nirbhayam, fearless; for then there is no perception of duality that causes fear (Br I.iv.2). Brahman is that quiescent and fearless entity, by knowing which one has no fear from anywhere (Tai.II 1x). That Brahman is being further distin- guished: Jñana means Knowledge, Consciousness, that is the very nature of the Self, and Brahman that has that Knowledge as Its alokah, light (expression), ıs jñrnalokam, possessed of the light of Knowledge. The meaning is that It is a homogeneous mass of Consciousness; samantatah, all around; the idea implied is that, like space, It is all-pervasive without a break.

अजम निद्रम र्वप्नमनामकमरूपकम्। सकृद्विभातं सर्वेजं नोपचार: कथश्चन ॥३६॥ 36. Brahman is birthless, sleepless, dream- less, nameless, formless, ever effulgent, every- thing, and a knower. (With regard to It) there is not the least possibility of ceremony. Having no cause of birth, Brahman coexists with all that is inside and outside, and It is ajam, unborn;

3I2 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 36

for we said that birth is caused by ignorance as in the case of a snake on a rope; and that ignorance is stopped on the realisation of the truth of the Self according to instruction. As It is birthless, It is amdram, sleepless. Sleep is the beginningless Māya characterised by ignorance. Since he (man) has awakened into his own real, non-dual nature that is the Self, therefore he is asvapnam, dreamless. And since his name and form are a creation of the state of non- waking, and they are destroyed on waking up like the illusion of a snake on a rope, therefore Brahman can- not be named by any word, nor can It be described as having any form in any way, thus It is also anāmakam arupakam, without name and form, as is stated by the Vedic text, "From which speech turns back" (Tai. II. iv, II. ix). Moreover, It is sakrt vibha- fam, ever illumined, constant effulgence by nature, since It is devoid of non-manifestation, consequent on non-perception, and manifestation, contingent on wrong perception (as in the case of an individual1). Realisation and non-realisation (of Brahman) are as day and night (of the sun2), and the darkness of

1 In an individual, Brahman is said to be hidden when It is not perceived as "I". And when a false perception arises in the form "I am an agent" etc, Brahman is said to be manifest. When these two ideas are absent, Brahman remains as the self-effulgent Reality. 2 True it is that non-realisation precedes and realisation succeeds instruction. But they do not belong to Brahman. The sun is supposed to be subject to day and night, because people fancy the sun to rise and set. But in reality the sun has no night or day. Similarly Brahman has no realisation er non-realisation.

III. 37] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 3I3

nescience is ever the cause of non-manifestation. Since this is absent from Brahman, and since Brahman is by nature the light that is eternal Consciousness, it 1s but reasonable that It should be constantly effulgent. Hence, too, It is sarvajñam: sarva, all, as well as, ña, a knower, by nature. With regard to this Brahman of such characterstics there can be na upacārah, no ceremony (practice), as others have, e g. concentration of mind etc that are different from the nature of the Self. The idca is this: As Brahman is by nature eternally pure, intelligent, and free, there can be no possibility of anything to be done katham cana, in any way whatsoever, after the des- truction of ignorance.

The reason is being adduced for establishing namelessness etc. mentioned above:

सर्वाभिलापविगतः सर्वचिन्तासमुत्थितः । सुप्रशान्त: सकृज्ज्योतिः समाधिरचलोऽभय:॥३७।। 37. The Self is free of all sense-organs, and is above all internal organs. It is supremely tranquil, eternal effulgence, divine absorption, immutable, and fearless. The word abhilapah, derived in the sense of that by which utterance is made, means the organ of speech expressing all kinds of words. That which is vigatah, devoid of that, is sarvābhilapavigatah, devoid of the organ of speech. Speech is here used suggestively. So the meaning implied is that It is free of all organs. Similarly sarva-cinta-samutthitah: The word cintā

3I4 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 37

derived in the sense of that by which things are thought of, means the intellect; from that samutthitah, risen above; that is to say, devoid of the internal organ; for the Vedic text declares, "Since It is with- out Prana, without mind, pure, and superior to the high ımmutable" (Mu. II. i. 2). Being devoid of all objects, It is supraśāntah, absolutely tranquil; sakrjjyotih, everlasting light, by virtue of being by nature the Consciousness that is the Self; samadhih, divine absorption, being realisable through the insight arsing out of the deepest Concentration (samādhi). Or It is called samadhi, because It is the object of concentration. Acalah, immutable, and therefore abhayah, fearless, since there is no mutation.

Since Brahman Itself has been described as divine absorption, immutable, and fearless, therefore,

ग्रहो न तत्र नोत्सर्गध्ित्ता यत्र न विद्यते। आत्मसंस्थं तदा ज्ञानमजाति समतां गतम् ।३८।। 38. There can be no acceptance or rejection where all mentation stops. Then knowledge becomes established in the Self, and is unborn and poised in equalty. Tatra, there, in that Brahman; vidyate, there exists; na grahah, no acceptance; na utsargah, no rejection, for where mutability or the possibility of it exists can there be acceptance or rejection. These two are incompatible here with Brahman, for nothing else exists in It to cause a change, and Brahman Itself is without parts. Therefore there is no acceptance or

III 39] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 3I5

rejection. This is the idea. Yatra, where; cinta, thought (mentation); na vidyate, does not exist. How can there be acceptance and rejection where no men- tation is possible in the absence of the mind. This is the idea. As soon as there comes the realisation of the Truth that is the Self, tada, then, in the absence of any object (to be known); jñanam, knowledge; becomes atmasamstham, established in the Self, like the heat of fire in fire. It is then ajati, birthless; gatam samatām, poised in equality. The promise that was made earlier, "Hence I shall speak of Brahman which is free from limitation, is without birth, and is in a state of equipoise" (Kārkā, III. 2), and that has been fulfilled with the help of scripture and reasoning, is concluded here by saying, "unborn and poised in equality" Everything else, apart from this realisation of the Self, is within the sphere of misery, as is declared by the Vedic text, "O Grgī, he, who departs from this world without knowing this Immutable, is miserable" (Br. III. viii. 0). The meaning sought to be conveyed is that by knowing this, one becomes a Brähmana (knower of Brahman) who has got all his duties fulfilled.

Though the supreme Reality is such, yet

अस्पर्शयोगो वै नाम दुर्दर्शः सर्वयोगिभिः। योगिनो बि्यति ह्यस्मादभये भयदर्शिनः ॥३६।। 39. The Yoga that is familiarly referred io as without any touch with anything is difficult to be comprehended by anyone of the Yogis. For

3I6 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 39

the Yogis, who apprehend fear where there is no fear, are afraid of it. Asparsa-yogah nāma, this is familiar as the Yoga without any touch, since it has no relation, indicated by the word touch, with anything; vai, (this is how it is) referred to, well known in all the Upanisads. It is durdarsah, hard to be seen; sarvayogibhth, by all the Yogis, who are devoid of the knowledge imparted in the Upanisads. The idea is that it is attainable only through the effort involved in the realisation of the Self in accordance with instruction. Yoginah, the Yogs; who are bhayadarsinah abhaye, perceivers of fear in this fearless (Brahman), the non-discriminating ones who apprehend the destruction of their person- ality, which fact becomes the cause of their fear; (they) asmat bibhyati, are afraid of it, thinking this Yoga to be the same as the disintegration of their own individuality, though in fact it is beyond all fear. But for those to whom the mind and the sense- organs etc., that are imagined like a snake on a rope, have no existence in reality when considered apart from their essence that is Brahman-for those who have become identified with Brahman-comes fearless- ness; and for them naturally is accomplished the ever- lasting peace called emancipation that is not depen- dent on any other factor, as we declared earlier in "there is not the least possibility of ceremony" (Kārıkā, III. 36). But for the other Yogis who are still treading the path, who are endued with inferior or medium outlook and think of the mind as some- thing different from the Self, though associated with

III. 4I] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 317

It-for those who are not possessed of the realisation of the Self that is the Truth-

मनसो निग्रहायत्तमभयं सवयोगिनाम्। दुःखक्षय: प्रबोधश्चाप्यक्षया शान्तिरेव च॥४०।। 40. For all these Yogis, fearlessness, the removal of misery, knowledge (of the Self), and everlasting peace are dependent on the control of the mind. Sarvayoginām, for all Yogis; abhayam, fearless- ness; is manasah nigrahāyattam, contingent on the control of the mind; and so also is duhkhaksayah, the removal of misery. For there can be no extinc- tion of sorrow for the non-discriminating people so long as the mind, brought into association with the Self, continues to be disturbed. Moreover, (for them) the knowledge of the Self, too, is contingent on the control of the mind. Similarly, akşayā sāntıh, the everlasting peace, called liberation, is also certainly dependent on the control of the mind.

उत्सेक उदघेयद्वत्कुशाग्रेणैकबिन्दुना। मनसो निग्रहस्तद्वद्भवेदपरिखेदतः ॥४१।। 41. Just as an ocean can be emptied with the help of the tip of a blade of Kuśa grass that can hold just a drop, so also can the control of the mind be brought about by absence of depression. Even the control of the mind; comes about aparikhedatah, from the want of depression; for those

3I8 EIGHT UPANISADS [III. 4I

Yogis who unrelentingly and without depression persist with a diligence like that involved in trying to empty an ocean; kuśāgrena ekabindunā, with the help of the tip of a blade of Kuśa grass that can hold only a drop. This is the idea.

Is diligence alone, that knows no depression, the means for controlling the mind? The answer is being given negatıvely' उपायेन निगृह्ीयाद्विक्षिप्तं कामभोगयोः। सुप्रसन्नं लये चैव यथा कामो लयस्तथा॥४२।। 42. With the help of that proper process one should bring under discipline the mind that remains dispersed amidst objects of desire and enjoyment; and one should bring it under control even when it is in full peace in sleep, for sleep is as bad as desire. Being armed with untiring effort, and taking for aid the means to be stated, nigyhniyat, one should bring under discipline, concentrate on the Self Itself; the mind that remains viksiptam, dispersed; amidst objects of desire and their enjoyment. This is the meaning Moreover, laya means that in which any- thing gets merged, i.e. sleep. Though the mind be suprasannam, very peaceful, i.e. free from effort; laye, in that sleep; still "it should be brought under discipline"-this much has to be supplied. Should it be asked, "If it is fully at peace, why should it be disciplined?" the answer is: "Since layah tathā, sleep is as much, a source of evil; yathā kāmah, as

III. 44] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 3I9

desire is." So the idea implied is this: As the mind engaged in objects of desire is to be controlled, so also is the mind in sleep to be disciplined. Which is that process? That is being stated:

दुःखं सर्वमनुस्मृत्य कामभोगान्निवर्तयेत्। अजं सर्वमनुस्मृत्य जातं नैव तु पश्यति॥४३। 43. Constantly remembering that every- thing is full of misery, one should withdraw the mind from the enjoyment arising out of desire. Remembering ever the fact that the birthless Brahman is everything, one does not surely per- ceive the born (viz the host of duality). Anusmrtya, remembering, the fact that; sarvam, everything, all duality that is created by ignorance; is duhkham, full of sorrow; one mivartayet, should withdraw, the mind; kāmabhogāt, from enjoyment prompted by desire, from the objects of desire; one should withdraw with the help of ideas of renuncia- tion-this is the meaning. Anusmrtya, remembering the fact, from the instruction of scriptures and the teacher, that ajam, the birthless, Brahman; is sarvam, everything; na eva tu paśyati, one does not certainly perceive; the host of duality that is opposed to Brahman; for duality ceases then.

लये संबोधमेश्वित्तं विक्षितं शमयेत्पुनः । सकषायं विजानीयात्समप्राप्तं न चालयेत्।।४४।। 44. One should wake up the mind merged in deep sleep; one should bring the dispersed

320 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 44

mind into tranquillity again; one should know when the mind is tinged with desire (and is in a state of latency). One should not disturb the mind established in equipoise. Thus with the help of the dual process of renun- ciation and practice of knowledge, one sambodhayet, should wake up, the mind; merged laye, in deep sleep; one should engage it in the discriminating perception of the transcendence of the Self. The word citta has the same meaning as manas, mind. Samayet punah, one should again make tranquil, the mind; that is viksiptam, dispersed, amidst desire and enjoyment. When the mind of a man, who is practising again and again, is awakened from deep sleep and is withdrawn from objects, but is not established in equipoise and conti- nues in an intermediate state, then vijānīyāt, one should know, that mınd; to be sakasayam, tinged with desire, in a state of latency. From that state too, it should be diligently led to equipoise. But when the mind becomes samapraptam, equipoised, that is to say, when it begins to move toward that goal; na vicalayet, one should not disturb it, from that course; or in other words, one should not turn it back toward objects.

नास्वादयेत्सुखं तत्र निःसङ्ग: प्रज्ञया भवेत्। निश्चलं निश्चरच्चित्तमेकीकुर्यात्प्रयततः ।४५।। 45. One should not enjoy happiness in that state; but one should become unattached through the use of discrimination. When the mind, estab- lished in steadiness, wants to issue out, one should concentrate it with diligence.

III. 46] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 32I

The sukham, happiness; that a Yogi gets while try- ing to concentrate his mind, na asvādayet, he should not enjoy; that is to say, he should not get attached tatra, there, to that state. How should he behave there? He should become nihsangah, unattached; prajnaya, through the discriminating idea. He should think, "Whatever happiness is perceived is a creation of ignorance, and it is false." He should also withdraw his mind from that kind of attraction for joy-this is the purport. When having been withdrawn from the attraction for happiness, and having attained the state of steadiness, the mind becomes niscarat, intent on go- ing out; then withdrawing it from those objects with the help of the above-mentioned process, one ekīkuryāt, should concentrate it-in the Self Itself, prayatnatah, with diligence. The idea is that it should be made to attain its true nature of Consciousness alone.

यदा न लीयते चित्तं न च विक्षिप्यते पुनः। अनिङनमनाभासं निष्पन्नं ब्रह्म तत्तदा ॥४६।। 46. When the mind does not become lost nor is it scattered, when it is motionless and does not appear in the form of objects, then it becomes Brahman. Yada, when; the cittam, mind; brought under con- trol through the aforesaid process; na liyate, does not become lost, in sleep; and also na ca punah vikșipyate, does not, again, become dispersed, amidst objects; and when the mind becomes aninganam, motionless, like a lamp in a windless place; anābhāsam, does not appear in the form of any object, imagined outside; when the 2I

322 EIGHT UPANISADS [III 46

mind assumes such characteristics, then it nıspannam brahma, becomes Brahman; or in other words, the mind then becomes identified with Brahman.

स्वस्थं शान्तं सनिर्वाणमकथ्यं सुखमुत्तमम्। अजमजेन ज्ञेयेन स्वजं परिचक्षते ॥४७॥। 47. That highest Bliss is located in one's own Self. It is quiescent, coexistent with libera- tion, beyond description, and birthless. And since It is identical with the unborn knowable (Brahman), they call It the Omniscient (Brahman). The above-mentioned Bliss, which is the highest Reality, and which consists in the realisation of the Truth that is the Self, is svastham, located in one's own Self; śantam, quiescent, characterised by the absence of all evil; sanirvanam, coexistent with cessa- tion, i.e. liberation; and it is akathyam, indescribable, as it relates to an absolutely unique entity; it is uttamam sukham, the highest happiness, it being unsurpassable and open to the vision of the Yogis alone. It is ajam, unborn, unlike objective happiness. And since this happiness, in its true nature of omniscience, is identical ajena, with the unborn; jñeyena, with the thing to be known; therefore the knowers of Brahman paricaksate, call it; sarvajnam, the omniscient one, Brahman Itself. All such ideas-e.g. the control of the mind and so on, creation resembling the evolution of forms from earth and gold, and meditation-have been spoken of as means leading to the realisation of the supreme Reality as It is in Itself; but these have not been spoken

III. 48] MĀNŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 323

of as supremely true in themselves. The absolutely highest Truth, however, is:

न कश्चिजायते जीव: संभवोऽस्य न विद्यते। एतत्तदुत्तमं सत्यं यत्र किश्चिन्न जायते ॥४८।। 48. No individual being, whichsoever, takes birth. It has no source (of birth). This (Brahman) is that highest Truth where nothing whatsoever takes birth. Na jivah kah cit, no individual being whichsoever, that is a doer or an enjoyer; jāyate, is born; by any means whatsoever. Hence for the Self that is natur- ally unborn and non-dual, na vidyate, there does not exist; any sambhavah, source, cause (for undergoing birth). Since there does not exist for It any cause, therefore no individual being, whichsoever, undergoes birth. This is the meaning. As compared with the truths mentioned earlier as the means, etat, this one; is uttamam satyam, the highest Truth; yatra, where, in which Brahman, that is Truth by nature; na kincit jäyate, nothing whatsoever, not even a jot or tittle, is born.

CHAPTER IV

ALĀTASĀNTIPRAKARANA (ON QUENCHING THE FIRE-BRAND)

Non-duality was advanced as a premiss in 'course of determining the meaning of Om; it was proved to be true from the fact of the unreality of the differences found in things external; it was again directly determined with the help of scriptures and reason in the Chapter On Non-duality; and that non- dualty was summed up in the concluding remark, "This is that highest truth" (Kārikā, III. 48). The realists and the nihilists are opposed to that unitive outlook that is the import of the scriptures. And it has been hinted that their philosophy is false, since their outlook is affected by such vitiating factors as attachment and aversion arising from mutual oppo- sition. And the philosophy of non-duality is extol- led inasmuch as it is not subject to such mental perversion. Now begins the Chapter On Quenching the Fire-Brand, in order to show in detail how those are partial philosophies owing to their mutual recrim- ination, and then after rejecting them to sum up by proving the truth of the philosophy of non-dual- ity with the help of the method of difference (con- sisting in their rejection1). Now while on this

1 Instances of the application of the methods of agree- ment and difference are "Whatever is a product is impermanent", and "Whatever is not impermanent is not a product". When both the methods can be applied to a case, all doubts about the truth of the general proposition is set at rest. In the present case, non-duality, presented by scripture and proved to be a possibility by logic, is confirmed by showing the hollowness of others.

IV. I] MĀŅŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 325

subject, this first verse is meant as a salutation to the promulgator of the school of non-duality by identifying him with non-duality itself. For it is desirable to worship one's teacher at the commence- ment of a scripture so that the result aimed at may be achieved.

ज्ञानेनाकाशकल्पेन धर्मान्यो गगनोपमान्। ज्ञेयाभिश्चेन संबुद्धस्तं धन्दे द्विपदां धरम् ॥१॥ I. I bow down to the One who is the Chief among all persons, who has known fully the souls, resembling sky, through his knowledge that is comparable to space and is non-different from the object of knowledge. Ākāsakalpa is that which is slightly different from space, that is to say, resembling space. So jñānena ākāśakalpena means by a knowledge that is comparable to space. What purpose is served by it? (He knows) dharman, the souls. Souls of what kind? The souls, that are gagana-upamān, comparable to the sky. There is another qualification of that very knowledge. The knowledge that is jneyābhinna, non- different from the objects of knowledge, viz the souls -just as heat is from fire, or light is from the sun. He who sambuddhah, has completely realised; dharmān gaganopamān, the entities that are compa- rable to the sky; jneyābhinnena jnanena, through the knowledge that is non-different from the knowable- that is comparable to space and is non-different from the Self that is to be known. He indeed is the Lord called Narayana. Tam vande, Him I salute; dvipadām

326 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. I

varam, the best among the bipeds, that is to say, the supreme Person among all persons, that are suggested by the word "biped". Under the garb of this salu- tation to the teacher, it is suggested that the purpose of this Chapter is to establish, through a refutation of the opposite views, the philosophy of the supreme Reality that is devoid of the distinctions of knowledge, knowable, and knower.

Now for extolling the Yoga taught in the philos- ophy of non-dualism comes a salutation to it: अस्पर्शयोगो वै नाम सर्वसत्वसुखो हित । अविवादोऽषिरुद्धश्च देशितस्तं नमाम्यहम् ॥२॥

2. I bow down to that Yoga that is well known as free from relationships, joyful to all beings, beneficial, free from dispute, non- contradictory, and set forth in the scriptures. Asparsa-yogah is that Yoga, which has no sparsa, touch, relationship, with anything at any time; it is of the very nature of Brahman. To the knowers of Brahman it is vai nāma, indeed so named; that is to say, it is well known as the Yoga, free from all rela- tionships. And it becomes sarva-sattva-sukhah, a bliss to all beings. Some Yoga, as for instance aus- terity, may itself be sorrowful, though it is distin- guished as a means leading to extreme happiness. But this one is not of that sort. What then? It is joyful to all beings. Similarly, in this world, a partic- ular kind of enjoyment of objects may be joyful but not beneficial. But this one is joyful as well as hitah,

IV. 3] MĀŅŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 327

beneficial, since its nature is ever unchanging. More- over, it is avivādah: that in which there is no dispute by embracing two sides, for and against, is avivādah, free from dispute. Why? Because it is, in aadition, aviruddhah, non-contradictory. The Yoga of this kind that has been desitah, instructed, by the scrip- tures; tam, to that; aham namāmi, I make my saluta- tion, I bow down.

How the dualists contradict each other is being stated:

भूतस्य जातिमिच्छन्ति वादिन: केचिदेव हि। अभूतस्यापरे धोरा विवदन्त: परस्परम् ॥३॥ 3. For some disputants indeed postulate the birth of a (pre-) existing thing. Other wise ones, while disputing among themselves, postulate the . birth of what does not pre-exist.

Kecit eva vādinah, some disputants, viz the Sāmkhyas; icchanti, postulate; jatim, the birth; bhutasya, of an existing thing; but not so do all the dualists, for there are apare, others, viz the Vaiśesikas and the Naiyayikas; who are dhirah, wise, that is to say, proud of their wisdom; and who while vivadantah, talkıng contrariwise; postulate the birth abhūtasya, of a non-existing thing. The idea is that they want to conquer each other through disputation.

Now is being shown what is virtually asserted by them as they refute each other's point of view by talking contrariwise :

328 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 4 भूतं न जायते किंचिदभूतं नैव जायते। विवदन्तोऽछ्या ह्वेवमजाति ख्यापयन्ति ते ॥।४।। 4. A thing that already exists does not pass into birth; and a thing that does not pre-exist cannot pass into birth. These people, while disputing thus, are really non-dualists, and they thus reveal the absence of birth. "Kim cit, anything; that is bhūtam, pre- existing; na jāyate, does not pass into birth, just because it exists, as it is in the case of the Self" _- while speaking thus, the holder of the view that the effect does not exist before its birth,1 refutes the view of the Samkhya who says that the effect, pre-existing in the cause,2 takes birth Simılarly, the Samkhya, too, while speaking thus, "Abhutam, the non-existing; na eva jayate, can never be born, because of the very fact that it does not exist"-refutes the birth of a non-existing thing as held by those who believe in the non-existence of the effect before production. While vivadantah, talking contrariwise; these advayah,3 non-dualists for these really walk into the camp of the non-dualists by refuting each other's view about the birth of the pre-existing or the non- pre-existing; khyāpayanti, reveal, by implication; the ajatim, absence of birth itself. 1 The Naiyayika who would virtually subscribe to the view that something comes out of nothing. 2 The effect remaining involved in the cause. 3 Another reading 1s "dvayāh, dualısts".

IV. 7] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 329

ख्याप्यमानामजञाति तैरनुमोदामहे वयम्। विवदामो न तैः सार्धमषिषादं निबोधत॥५॥ 5. We approve the birthlessness that is revealed by them; we do not quarrel with them. (O disciples), understand this (philosophy) that is free from dispute.

By sayıng "Let this be so", we simply anumodāmahe, approve; the ajātim, birthlessness; taih khyāpyamānām, revealed by them, thus; we na vivadāmah, do not quarrel; taih sardham, with them; by taking any side for or against, as they do in regard to each other. This is the idea. Therefore, O disciples, mbodhata, understand; that philosophy of the highest Reality that is avivadam, beyond dispute, and is approved by us.

अजातस्यव धर्मस्य जाति मिच्छन्ति वादिनः । अजातो ह्वमृतो धर्मो म्त्यतां कथमेष्यति॥६॥ 6. The talkers verily vouch for the birth of an unborn positive entity. But how can a posi- tive entity that is unborn and immortal undergo mortality ? Vādinah, the disputants-all of them, whether holding the view of the prior existence or non-existence of the effect. This verse was commented on earlier (Kārikā, III. 20). न भवत्यमृतं मर्त्यं न मर्त्यममृतं तथा। प्रकृतेरन्यथाभावो न कथंचिद्धविष्यति॥७।

330 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 7

7. The immortal cannot become mortal Similarly, the mortal cannot become immortal. The mutation of one's nature will take place in no way whatsoever. स्वभावेनामृतो यस्य धर्मो गच्छति मर्त्यताम्। कृतकेनामृतस्तस्य कथं स्थास्यति निश्चलः ॥८। 8. How can the immortal entity continue to be changeless from the standpoint of one, according to whom, a positive immortal entity can naturally pass into birth, it being a product (according to him) .. The verses already explained earlier (Kārikā, III. 21-22) are quoted here in order to show the confirma- tion of birthlessness that is revealed through the mutual dispute of other schools of thought. Inasmuch as one's nature, even in the ordinary sense of the term, does not change, (far less can the supreme nature change itself). It is being shown what that nature is:

सांसिद्धिकी स्वाभाविकी सहजा अकृता च या। प्रकृतिः सेति विज्ञेया स्वभावं न जहाति या॥६॥

9. By the word nature is to be understood that which is permanently acquired, or is intrinsic, instinctive, non-produced, or unchanging in its character.

Samsiddhih means complete attainment, and anything resulting from that is samsiddhiki, as is the nature of the successful Yogis who are endowed with

IV. I0] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 33I

such occult powers as becoming at will subtle like atom and so on. In the case of the Yogis, that nature does not change either in the past or the future, it remains as it is. So also svābhāvikī, intrinsic, that which follows from the very nature of things, as for instance, such characteristics as heat or light in the case of fire etc. That nature also does not change according to place or time. Similarly sahaja, instinctive, born with oneself, as for instance, such activities as flying in the sky in the case of birds. Any other behaviour, too, ıs natural, yā akrtā, that is not produced, by anything else, as for instance the tendency of water to flow down. And anything else, yā na jahāti svabhavam, that does not change its character; sā, all that; vyñeyā, is to be known, in this world; as prakrtih, nature. The idea sought to be conveyed is this. when the nature of empirical things, that are falsely imagined, does not change itself, what need can there be to point out that the natural immortality of the ultimate realities that are intrinsically birthless, is not subject to mutation? What constitutes that nature, whose change is assumed by the disputants? And what is the defect in such an assumption? The answer is this:

जरामरणनिर्मुक्ता: सर्वे धर्मा: स्वभावतः। जरामरण मिच्छन्तश्च्यवन्ते तन्मनीषया॥१॥॥ IO. All souls are intrinsically free from old age and death., But by imagining senility and death, and being engrossed in that thought, they deviate from their nature.

332 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. I0

Jarā-marana-nirmuktāh, free from all physical changes, starting with jarā, old age, and (ending with) marana, death. Who are they? Sarve dharmah, all entities, i.e. all the souls. Svabhāvatah, by nature. Although the souls are intrinsically so, yet icchantah, thinking, as though thinking, imagining, jaramaranam, old age and death, for the Self, like the imagining of a snake on a rope; they cyavante, fall, that is to say, deviate, from their own nature; tanmanīsayā, because of that thought, of senility and death, that is to say, because of the defect of being engrossed in that kind of thought. The Vaisesika points out how the Samkhyas, hold- ing the view of the pre-existence of the effect in the cause, talk illogically:

कारणं यस्थ वै कार्य कारणं तस्य जायते। जायमानं कथमजं भिन्नं नित्यं कथं च तत् ।।११।। II. The cause must undergo birth accord- ing to one who holds that the cause itself is the effect. How can a thing be birthless that takes birth, and how can it be eternal when it can be subject to disintegration? The disputant, yasya, according to whom, käranam, the cause itself, (existing) in the form of materials like earth; is the karyam, the effect, that is to say, evolves into the effect; tasya, from his point of view; kāranam, the cause, e.g. Pradhāna or (Primor- dial Nature), though itself unborn; jāyate, undergoes birth, as the effects like Mahat and the rest. This is the idea. If Pradhāna is jāyamānam, born, as Mahat

IV. I2] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 333

and the rest; katham, how, is it said by them; to be ajam, birthless? For it is a contradiction in terms to say that a thing is unborn and yet has birth. More- over, they say that Pradhana is eternal, at the same time that it is bhinnam, split up (transformed), par- tially For a composite thing, a jar for instance, that is subject to partial disintegration, is not seen to be eternal in this world. This is the idea. The meaning sought to be imparted is that it involves a contradic- tion on their part to say that a thing may be broken up partially and yet be birthless and eternal. For elucidating the same idea it is said:

कारणाद्यदयनन्यत्वमत: कार्यमजं यदि। जायमानाद्वि वै कार्यात्कारणं ते कथं ध्रुवम् ॥१२। I2. If (according to you) the effect be non- different from the cause, then on that account the effect, too, is birthless. And if that be so, how can your cause, that is non-different from its effect which is subject to birth, be yet eternal? Yadi, if; it is your intention to hold that there is ananyatvam, non-difference, of the effect; kāranāt, from the cause, that is birthless; then from that it follows that karyam ajam, the effect is birthless. This is a fresh contradiction in your view that a thing is a product and yet birthless. Besides, there is this additional contradiction. If the effect and the cause are non-different, katham, how; can te, your; kāranam, cause; that is non-different kāryāt jāyamānāt, from the effect that is subject to birth; be yet dhruvam, eternal?

334 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. I3

For one half of a hen cannot be cooked, while the other half is reserved for laying eggs.

Moreover, अजाद्वै जायते यस्य दष्टान्तस्तस्य नास्ति वै।

जातान्च जायमानस्य न व्यवस्था प्रसज्यते ॥१३॥ I3. That disputant has certainly no support- ing illustration who holds that the effect is produced out of an unborn cause. If the pro- duced effect is held to be born out of another born thing, that, too, leads to no solution. That disputant, yasya, according to whom; the effect jayate, is produced; ajat, from an unborn thing; tasya, for him; na astı var drstāntah, there is abso- lutely no illustration (in support). The idea is that, in the absence of any supporting illustration, it stands proved by implication that nothing is born of the un- born. On the other hand, if it is held jāyamānasya, with regard to the produced effect; that it comes jātāt, from a born thing; then since the latter must come out of another born thing and the last one, again, from another born thing, na vyavasthā prasajyate, there will be no solution at all; or in other words it will lead to an infinite regress. By the Vedic text, "But when to the knower of Brahman everything has become the Self (then what should one know and through what?") (Br. II. iv. I4), it has been said that from the highest standpoint there is no duality. Taking its stand on this, the (next) verse says:

IV. I5] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 335

हेतोरादि: फलं येषामादिहेतु: फलस्य च। हेतो: फलस्य चानादि: कथं तेरुपवण्यते॥॥१४ I4. How can beginninglessness be declared for cause and effect by those (disputants) accord- ing to whom the effect is the origin of the cause and the cause is the origin of the effect? The disputants, yesam, according to whom; the phalam, effect, the aggregate of body and senses; is the adih, source; hetoh, of the cause, of merit etc .; and similarly the hetuh, cause, merit etc .; is the adih, source; phalasya, of the effect, of the aggregate of body and senses,-thus whle positing a beginning for the cause and the effect by the very assertion that these are mutu- ally the sources and products of each other;1-katham taih upavarnyate, how can it be asserted by these very people; that the cause and effect are beginningless? In other words, this is self-contradictory, for the Self that is eternal and unchanging can neither become the cause nor the effect.

How do they make a contradictory assertion? That is being shown:

हेतोरादि: फलं येषामादिर्हेतुः फलस्य च। तथा जन्म भवेस्ेषां पुत्राज्न्म पितुर्यथा।।१५।। 15. Just as a father may be born of a son, so also may birth be a possibility according to those (disputants) who admit that the effect is the

1 Merit and demerit result from embodiment, and embodi- ment results from merit and demerit.

336 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 15

source of the cause and the cause is the source of the effect. Those who assert that the cause originates from the effect, which is itself produced by the cause, get involved in a contradiction that is on a par with that imphed in pituh janma putrat, the birth of father from a son. If it be contended that the contradiction, pointed out above, cannot be reasonably advanced, we say, संभवे हेतुफलयोरेषितव्यः क्रमस्त्वया। युगपत्संभवे यस्मादसंबन्धो विषाणवत् ॥१६॥। 16. If there be a possibility of cause and effect, you should have to find out a sequence. For should they originate together, there can be no causal relation as between the two horns of a cow. Sambhave, If there be a possibility; hetu-phalayoh, of cause and effect; then tvayā, by you; esitavyah, has to be found out; a kramah, sequence, with regard to origination-viz that the cause precedes and the effect succeeds. This is necessary for this further reason: yasmāt, since; yugapat sambhave, should there be a simultaneous origin, of the cause and effect; there will be asambandhah, want of relationship, through causal- ity, as in the case of the two horns of a cow growing together on the right and the left. How are they unrelated? That is being stated: फलादुत्पद्यमान: सन्न ते हेतुः प्रसिध्यति। अप्रसिद्ध: कथं हेतुः फलमुत्पादयिष्यति॥१७॥

IV. 18] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 337

17. If your cause has to come out of an effect, it can have no right to recognition. How will a cause, that is not established as such, produce a result? Utpādyamānah san, having originated; phalāt, from an effect, that is still to be born, that is itself yet without any existence ;- having been born from an effect that is non-existent like the horn of a hare; hetuh, the cause; na prasidhyati, has no right to recognition; does not have any birth. Katham, how; your hetuh, cause; that is yet to be endued with substance, and apra- siddhah, is not established as such, like the horn of a hare; utpādayisyati phalam, will produce a result? For it is not seen anywhere that two things that depend for existence on each other, and are analogous to the horns of a hare, are connected causally or in any other way. This is the idea. यदि हेतो: फलात्सिद्धि: फलसिद्धिश्च हेतुतः । कतरत् पूर्वनिष्पन्नं यस्य सिद्धिरपेक्षया ।।१८।। 18. If the subsistence of the cause is dependent on the effect, and the subsistence of the effect is dependent on the cause, then which of the two has existence earlier, with relation to which the other may emerge? If, even after the dismissal of any causal relation between the (so-called) cause and the effect by pointing out the defect that they cannot be inter-related, it is contended by you that the cause and the effect subsist by mutual interdependence, then tell me which one among the cause and the effect pre-exists, depending on 22

338 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. I8

which the succeeding one may emerge into being. This is the idea. अशक्तिरपरिज्ानं क्रमकोपोऽथवा पुनः । एवं हि सर्वथा बुद्धैरजाति: परिदीपिता ॥१६। 19. Your inability to answer this will amount to your ignorance, or there will be a falsification of the sequence (asserted by you). Thus indeed is highlighted in every way the absence of birth by the learned ones. If you think that you have no answer, then this asaktih, inability, of yours; will amount to the fallacy of aparyñānam, want of knowledge of reality, i e. igno- rance, atha va, or there will be, kramakopah-kopa, reversal, falsification, of the krama, sequence, spoken of by you, consisting in mutual succession in the sense that the effect derives its subsistence from the cause, and the cause derives its subsistence from the effect This is the meaning. Evam, thus, from the fact that any causal relation between the cause and the effect cannot be substantiated; ajatih, the absence of birth, the non-emergence of everything; paridipita, has been highlighted; buddhaih, by the learned people, the dispu- tants who speak of the defects of each other's point of view.

Objection: We spoke of the causal relation existing between the cause and the effect, whereas you resorted to a mere quibble that it is like the birth of a son from a father, that there is no such connection between the two like the two horns of a cow, and so on. Not that we asserted the production of an effect from a catse that

IV. 20] MĀNŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 339

does not exist or the derivation of a cause from a non- existing effect. What did we say then? It is admitted by us that causality is the kind of relation existing between the seed and the sprout.

With regard to this the answer is: बीजाङ्कुराख्यो दृष्टान्तः सदा साध्यसमो हि सः। न हि साध्यसमो हेतुः सिद्धौ साध्यस्य युज्यते॥२०॥ 20. What is known as the illustration of the seed and the sprout is ever on an equal footing with the (unproved) major term. For an illustration that is as unproved as the major term is not applied for establishing the relation of the major term with the minor term. (This is but begging the qusetion, because the supporting) drstāntah, illustration; that is bījānkurā- khyah, known as that of the seed and the sprout; is sādhyasama, on an equal footing with my major term (that has still to be proved). This is the idea. Objection : Is it not a matter of experience that the causal relation between the seed and the sprout is without a beginning? Answer : Not so, for it is admitted that the earlier ones have their beginning like the succeeding ones. Just as a new sprout born now out of a separate seed has a beginning and another seed born out of a separate sprout has also a beginning by the very fact of succes- sion in birth, similarly the antecedent sprouts as well as the antecedent seeds must have a beginning. And thus since each one of the whole chain of seeds and sprouts has a beginning, it is illogical to assert eter-

340 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 20

nality for any one of them. So also is the case with regard to causes and effects. If now it is argued that the chain of causes and effects is without a beginning, we say, no; for any unity of such a series cannot be upheld. For apart from the causes and effects, even those who talk of the beginninglessness of such a series do not certainly vouch for a unitary entity called either a chain of seeds and sprouts or a procession of causes and effects Therefore it has been well said, "How can beginninglessness be declared by them for cause and effect?" (Kārıkā, IV 14). Thus since your view in- volves an illogicality from a fresh point of view, we are not really avoiding the point at issue. This is the idea Moreover, hetuh, an illustration; that is sādhya- samah, as unproved as the major term; is not applied by those who are adepts in the use of the valid means of proof (i e. inference), sadhyasıddhau, in the matter of establishing a relation between the major term and the minor term (in a syllogism) This is the meaning The "illustration" is to be understood here by the term hetuh (lit. middle term), for an illustration substantiates the ground of inference, and the illustration is under discussion and not the middle term. It is being shown how birthlessness is highlighted by the wise: पूर्वापरापरिज्ञानमजाते: परिदीपकम्। जायमानाद्धि वै धर्मात् कथं पूर्व न गृहते ॥२१। 2I. The ignorance regarding the prece- dence and succession is a pointer to beginning- lessness itself. From the fact that a thing passes into birth, why is not its cause apprehended?

IV. 22] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 34I

And the fact that there is purvāparaparijnanam, ignorance of the precedence and succession, of the cause and the effect; is pandipakam, a pointer, ajāteh, to birthlessness. If an entity passes into birth, katham, why; its purvam, antecedent cause; na grhyate, is not grasped? By one who perceives a thing undergoing birth must also be perceived, as a matter of necessity, the originator of that thing; for the begetter and the begotten are inevitably inter- related. Therefore that is a pointer to birthlessness.

स्वतो वा परतो बाऽपि न किचिद्वस्तु जायते। सदसत् सदसद्वाSपि न किचिद्स्तु जायते ॥२२॥ 22. A thing, whatsoever it may be, is born neither of itself, nor of something else, (nor of both together). Nothing whatsoever is born that (already) exists, does not exist, or both exists and does not exist.

For this further reason nothing whatsoever takes birth, since a thing that (supposedly) undergoes birth, na jāyate, is not born; svatah, of itself; paratah, of another, va, or, of both. Nothing takes birth that is sat, existing; asat, non-existing; or sat-asat, existing and non-existing. There is no possibility of birth for it in any way. To illustrate: As a jar does not come out of that very jar, so nothing, that has not itself come into existence, can be born svatah, out of its own form by itself. Nor does it take birth paratah, from another, as something different from that another, just as a cloth is not born of a pot or a cloth from

342 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 22

another cloth. Similarly a thing is not born both out of itself and another, just as a jar or a cloth is not born out of a jar and a cloth, for this involves a contradiction. Objection : Is not a jar produced from earth and a son born of a father? Answer : True, the ignorant have such notions and use such words as "It exists," "It takes birth." Those very words and notions are examined by the discriminating people as to whether they are true or false, inasmuch as things called a jar, a son, and so on, which are contents of words and notions, when examined, are found to be reduced to mere words, as is declared in the Vedic text, "(All modifications are but names) dependent on speech" (Ch. VI. i. 4)- If a thing already exists, then just because it exists, it does not pass into birth like earth or a father If a thing does not exist, then by the very fact of non- existence it does not undergo birth like the horn of a hare etc. If it is both existent and non-existent, then also it does not take birth, as it is impossible to have a thing that is self-contradictory. Hence it is estab- lished that nothing whatsoever is born. As for those (Buddhists) who assert that a product is nothing more than the mere act of birth, and by whom it is held accordingly that actions, accessories, and results are but the same identical entity and that things are momentary, they are far out of the reaches of reason- ableness, because (according to this theory) a thing cannot be apprehended as "This is so", since it

IV. 23] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 343

ceases to exist for a second moment immediately after being perceived, and because memory of a thing per- ceived earlier becomes impossible.1

Besides, by asserting that the cause and the effect are without beginning, you admit perforce that the cause and effect are without birth. If you ask, "What do you mean?" the answer is:

हेतुन जायतेऽनादे: फलं चापि स्वभावतः। आदिर्न विद्यते यस्य तस्य ह्यादिर्न विद्यते ॥२३॥ 23. A cause is not born of a beginningless effect; nor does an effect naturally come out (of a beginningless cause). (Cause and effect are thus birthless): for a thing that has no cause, has certainly no birth.

Anädeh, from the beginningless, effect; hetuh na jāyate, the cause is not born. For you do not cer- tainly mean that from a beginningless effect, that is not born, the cause derives its birth. Nor do you mean that the phalam, eftect; also gets its birth svabhāvatah, naturally, without any reason; anādeh, from an unborn cause that is beginningless. Accord- ingly, you virtually admit the birthlessness of cause and effect by asserting that they have no beginning. Hi, for, yasya, anything for which; adih, a cause; na uidyate, does not exist, in this world; tasya, for that thing; na vidyate, cannot exist; adih, the birth,

1 There is no possibility for either recognition or memory unless the idea of identity lasts for some moments.

344 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 23

mentioned earlier; for birth is admitted for a thing that has a cause and not for a causeless one.

An objection is being raised again in order to emphasise what has already been said:

प्रज्ञप्ते: सनिमित्तत्वमन्यथा द्यनाशतः। संककेशस्योपलब्धेश्च परतन्त्रास्तिता मता ॥२४॥ 24. (We have to admit) that knowledge has its objects, since a contrary supposition leads to an annihilation of duality. And the existence of objects, as supported by the opposite systems of thought, is also admitted from the fact of the experience of pain. Prajñapti means knowledge, perception of sound etc. That knowledge is possessed of a nimilta, cause, i.e. object. So sanimittatvam means the fact that it has an object-it has objective reference apart from its own subjective existence This is what we admit Percep- tion of sound and the rest cannot be contentless, for it is related to objects. Anyathā, otherwise (in the absence of objects); there would result a void, dvaya- nasalah, as a consequence of the annihilation of dualty, consisting in a variety of experience of sound, touch, blueness, yellowness, redness, etc. This is the meaning. Nor can it be said that duality, consisting in a variety of experiences, does not exist, for this is a matter of direct perception. Accordingly, from the fact that duality is perceived, paratantrastitā, the existence of the scriptures of other schools, that is to say, of the external object, apart from the knowledge,

IV. 251 MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 345

as held by the books of opposite schools; matā, is admitted. For the nature of knowledge being essen- tially that of mere illumination, it cannot have any variety amounting to a mere natural diversification within itself unless there is that variety in its corre- sponding objects, e.g. blueness, yellowness, etc, just as a crystal can have no variety unless it comes into relation with such limiting adjuncts as blueness etc. This is the idea The external objects, as held by the opposite systems, have existence because of the further reason of samkleśa (lit. suffering, which is the same as samkleśana, causing of suffering; so it means) pain. Pain arising from a burn etc. is a matter of experience If, apart from knowledge, there were nothing externally present to cause a burn for instance, pain would not have been experienced But as a matter of fact it is experienced. Therefore, from this fact, it is admitted that there is an external object. For there can be no pain in knowledge as such, since this is not the case elsewhere.1

As to this the reply (of the subjectivist) is.

प्रज्ञप्ते: सनिमित्तत्वमिष्यते युक्तिदर्शनात्। निमित्तस्यानिनिस्तत्वमिष्यते भूतदर्शनात्॥२५।। 25. In accord with the perception of its cause, knowledge is supposed to be based on external objects. But from the standpoint of reality, it is held that the external cause is no cause.

1e g where the body is not in actual contact with fire

346 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 25

It is true that yuktidarsanāt, in compliance with the perception of its cause, as for instance, the experi- ence of duality and pain, isyate, it is posited, by you; that sanimittatvam prajnapteh, there is an external object for knowledge. Now hold fast to your position that external objects are the basis of experience, since it is seen to have a cause Opponent : Tell me what follows from that. The answer is: By us isyate, it is held; that nimittasya animittatvam, the cause-the jar and the rest that are assumed to be the basis of experience- is no cause at all; it is not the basis, the cause, of variety Objection: Why? Answer. Bhutadarśanāt, from the standpoint of reality, that is to say, of the ultimate Reality. For unlike the existence of a buffalo independently of a horse, a jar does not exist apart from clay after being recognised as clay that it really is, nor does a cloth exist apart from the yarns, nor the yarns apart from the fibres. Thus if the reality is pursued successively till words and notions cease, we do not perceive any external occasion for knowledge. This is the meaning. Or the phrase may be abhutadarśanāt (and not bhūtadarsanāt) in which case the meaning is: Abhutadarsanāt, on account of finding the external object to be unreal; anımittatvam isyate, it is not admitted to be the cause (of knowledge), just as a snake seen on a rope is not. Besides, the cause is not a cause, since it is the content of an erroneous percep- tion; and as such, it ceases to be so when the error is

IV. 26] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 347

removed. For to the people in deep sleep, divine absorption (samādht), or liberation, where there is no erroneous perception, there can be no knowledge of any external object, except (the consciousness of) the Self. Nor is a thing perceived by a madman perceived to be such by others who are in their senses. Hereby is demolished the arguments based on perception of duality and experience of pain. चित्त न संस्पृशत्यर्थं नार्थाभासं तथैव व। अभूतो हि यतश्चार्थो नार्थाभासस्ततः पृथक् ॥२६॥ 26. Consciousness has no contact with objects; so also it has certainly no contact with appearances of objects. For according to the reasons adduced, an object has no existence, and an illusory object is not separate from the awareness.1 As there is no external object, therefore the cittam, consciousness; na sprsati, does not come in contact with; artham, object, anything acting externally as a support; nor does it come in contact with arthābhāsam, any appearance of object, for it is as much a form of consciousness as a dream; hi, for; yatah, in accord- ance with the above reasoning, arthah, an object; is abhutah, non-existent, even in the waking state, just as a dream object is. Na, nor is; arthābhāsaḥ, 1 A G explains citta as sphurana, self-emanation, shining The act of knowing implies an object to be known; but consciousness, thought of as shining like the sun, needs no object Bes des, the sun and its shining are the same, though in common parlance a distinction is made between them We are dealing here with the Buddhist view

348 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 26

an illusory object, prthak, different, from the con- sciousness; it is consciousness alone that appears as objects like the jar etc as it does in a dream

Objection : In that case, t the appearance of consciousness in the form of a jar for instance even when there is no jar etc, must be a false perception. And if this be the conclusion, you should point out the (corresponding) right knowledge somewhere (to make this error possible). With regard to this the answer (of the subjectivist) is:

निमित्तं न सदा चित्तं संस्पृशत्यध्वसु त्रिषु। अनिमित्तो विपर्यास: कथं तस्य भविष्यति॥२७॥

27. Consciousness does not ever come in contact with external objects in all the three states. There being no external objects how can there be any baseless false apprehension of it? Cittam, consciousness, na sada samsprśati, does not ever touch; any nimittam, cause, external object, trisu dhamasu, in all the three states (of past, present, and future) Should it come in contact with any object at any time, that will be the non-erroneous absolute reality, and in relation to that true percep- tion, the illusive perception of a jar, where there is no jar, will be a false perception But there is no con- tact of consciousness with any object at any time. Therefore katham, how; bhavrsyati, will there be; tasya, for that consciousness, viparyāsah anımittah,

IV. 287 MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 349*

any false apprehension that has no object to support it? The idea implied is that there is no such thing as false knowledge at all. Rather it is the nature of consciousness that even in the absence of jar etc. it appears like those things.1 The text starting with, "In compliance with the perception of its cause, knowledge" (IV. 25) and ending with the previous verse, which represents the view of the subjective idealists among the Buddhists, is approved by the teacher (Gaudapada) in so far as it refutes the view of those who believe in external objects Now he makes use of that very argument (of the idealists) as a ground of inference for demolishing their own points of view:

तस्मान्न जायते चित्तं चित्तदृश्यं न जायते। तस्य पश्यन्ति ये जाति खे वै पश्यन्ति ते पदम् ॥२८।। 28. Hence consciousness has no birth, and things perceived by it do not pass into birth. Those who perceive the birth of that conscious- ness, may as well see footmarks in space itself. Since from the standpoint of reality, we also approve the view of the subjective idealists that con- sciousness appears as a jar even though there is no such jar etc., therefore it also stands to reason that

1 Those who, in a case of illusion, hold the theory of anyathakhyati, appearance of a real thing in a wrong way, believe that an illusion pre-supposes a true perception some- where. But the subjectivists say that an error does not imply an earlier true knowledge, for an illusion and the objects in an illusion are all appearances of consciousness.

350 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 28

consciousness appears to be born even though there is no such thing as birth. And therefore the cittam, consciousness, na jayate, does not pass into birth; just as much as citta-drsyam na jayate, the things perceived by consciousness have no birth. Therefore ye, those, the idealists, who; paśyantı, perceive; the jahm, birth; tasya, of that consciousness, along with its momentarı- ness, sorrowfulness, voidness, non-selfhood, etc .- thereby presuming to perceive through that very con- sciousness the nature of consciousness that defies all perception-te, they, those idealists; paśyantı, see; padam, the footprint, of birds etc ; khe vai, in space itself That is to say, they are bolder even than the other dualists As for the nihilists, who, while perceiv- ing the non-existence of everything, assert thereby the voidness of their own philosophy, they are even bolder than the idealist,1 inasmuch as they want to have the sky itself in their grasp. Through the above reasons it is established that Brahman is one and has no birth. Now the present verse is meant for summing up as a result (of the dis- cussion), what was presented in the beginning as a pro- position: अजातं जायते यस्मादजाति: प्रकृतिस्ततः । प्रकृतेरन्यथाभावो न कथंचिद्भविष्यति॥२६।। 1 It is through perception that the all-round voidness is proved. But how will perception itself be annulled? Not that perception can annihilate itself, for the simple reason that perception and its negation cannot coexist. Besides, if you talk of absolute nihilism, you affirm the non-existence of your own view as well.

IV. 30] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 35I

29. It is the birthless that (according to the disputants) takes birth. Since birthlessness is its very nature, therefore the transmutation of (this) nature can take place in no way whatsoever.

It is imagined by the disputants that the unborn consciousness, which is nothing but Brahman, takes birth; therefore it is the ajātam, unborn, that jāyate, takes bırth Yasmāt, sınce, ajātih, birthlessness; is its very prakrtih, nature, tatah, therefore; anyathābhāvah, transmutation, birth; prakrteh, of that nature, which is essentially unborn, na katham cit bhavrsyatı, will not take place in any way.

Here is another loophole discovered in the view of those who hold that the wordly state (i e. bondage) and liberation are absolutely real for the soul.

अनादेरन्तवत्वं च संसारस्य न सेत्स्यति। अनन्तता चादिमतो मोक्षस्य न भविष्यति॥३०॥

30. Moreover, if the world be beginning- less, its termination will not be achieved. And there will be no eternality for liberation that has a beginning. Samsārasya anādeh, of the world (i.e. bondage) that has no beginning, no definite non-existence in the past; antavattvam, termination; na setsyat, will not be achieved, with the help of reasoning; for in common experience nothing is seen to have an end that has no beginning.

352 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 30

Objection : It is seen that the continuity of the serial relation between the seed and the sprout breaks (though it has no beginning). Answer: Not so, for this was refuted by pointing out that a series does not constitute a single substance (Kārıkā, IV. 20). Sımılarly na bhavisyati, there will be no; anantatā, everlastingness; even moksasya, of liberation, that has a beginning, that originates at the time of the acquisi- tion of illumination; for such is not the case with jars etc Objection : Sınce like non-existence brought about by the destruction of a jar etc., liberation, too, is not a substance, therefore our point of view is free from defect.1 Answer : On that assumption2 your proposition that liberation has existence from the standpoint of ultimate Reality will fall through. Besides, it will have no beginning just because it will be non-existent like the horn of a hare.

आदावन्ते व यन्नास्ति घर्तमानेSपि तस्तथा। वितथैः सदशाः सन्तोऽषितथा इव लक्षिता: ॥३१॥ 3I. That, which does not exist in the beginning and the end, is equally so in the middle. Though they are similar to the unreal, yet they are seen as though real.

1 Non-existence brought about by destruction has a beginning but no end, and non-existence is not a substance just as much as liberation is not 2 If liberation is non-existent.

IV. 33] MĀNŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 353

सप्रयोजनता तेषां रवन्े वित्रतिपद्यते।

तस्मादाद्यन्तवत््वेन मिथ्येध खलु ते स्मृताः ॥३२॥ 32. Their utility is contradicted in dream. Therefore from the fact of their having a beginning and an end, they are rightly held to be unreal.

These two verses, that were explained in the Chapter On Unreality (Kārkā, II. 6-7), are quoted here in connection with the non-existence of bondage and liberation.

सर्वे धर्मा मृषा रवमे कायस्यान्तर्निदर्शनात्। संवृतेऽस्मिन् प्रदेशे वे भूतानां दर्शनं कुतः॥३३॥ 33. All entities are unreal in dream, since they are seen within the body. How can there be the vision of creatures within this narrow space here ?1

The topic raised in "But from the standpoint of reality it is held that the external cause is no cause" (Kārikā, IV. 25), is being elaborated by these verses.

1 In this way the verse indirectly aims at proving the falsity of all If falsity in dream follows from the fact that things are seen inside the body, then all things even in the waking state must be false, since they are seen within the body of Virat. And if falsity of dream objects follows from the fact of their being seen within a place that is not adequate for them, then things of the waking state must be false since they, though naturally associated with space and time, are still seen in Brahman that has no space and time. -A G. 23

354 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 34

न युक्तं दर्शनं गत्वा कालस्यानियमाद्गतौ। प्रतिबुद्धश्च वै सर्वस्तस्मिन् देशे न विद्यते ॥३४॥ 34. It is not proper to hold that dream objects are experienced by reaching them, since the requisite time involved in the journey is lacking. Moreover, nobody, when awake, con- tinues in the place of dream. The idea implied is that there is no going over to any other place in dream, for the time required for and the distance involved in coming and going, that are valıdly settled in the waking state, aniyamat, have no corresponding fixity, in the dream state. मित्रादयैः सह संमन्ध्य संबुद्धो न प्रपद्यते। गृहीतं चापि यत्किचित्परतिबुद्धो न पश्यति ॥३५॥ 35. Having conferred with friends and others (in dream) one does not get confirmation when awake. And whatever one acquired in dream, one does not see it after waking up. Sammantrya, having deliberated, mitrādyarh saha, with friends and others (in dream); one na prapadyate, does not get confirmation, of that very deliberation when pratibuddhah, up from dream. And yat kım cit, whatever, gold etc .; grhitam, was acquired; he does not get after waking.1 For this reason, too, one does not go to a different place in dream.

' An alternative meaning is To the man of illumina- tion there is no consciousness of anything except Brahman So what may appear to others as his eating, drinking, etc., does not appear to himself to be so, for he thinks, "I do not do anything" (G. V. 8) .- A.G.

IV 37] MĀNDŪKYA KARIKĀ 355

स्वप्े चावस्तुक: कायः पृथगन्यस्य दर्शनात्। यथा कायस्तथा सर्वं चित्तदश्यमधस्तुकम्॥३६॥ 36. Moreover, the body in a dream is unsubstantial, since another body is s seen (to exist). As it is the case with the body, so is everything perceived through consciousness and is (therefore) unsubstantial. And the kāyah, body; that is seen svapne, in dream; to be walking about; is avastukah, unsubstan- tial, anyasya prthak darśanat, since another (sleeping) body, as distinguished from the one in the place of dream, is seen separately. As the body seen in dream is unreal, so all things seen through the mind even mn the waking state are unreal, for they are all equally perceived through consciousness. The significance of the topic under discussion is that the waking state also is unreal, since it is similar to the dream state.

Things are unreal because of this further reason:

ग्रहणाजागरितवत्तद्धेतु: स्वप्न इष्यते। तद्धेतुत्वात्तु तस्यैव सज्जागरितमिष्यते॥३७॥ 37. Since a dream is experienced like the waking state, the former is held to be the result of the latter. In reality, however, the waking state is admitted to be true for that dreamer alone, it being the cause of his dream. Grahanāt, since dream is experienced; jāgaritavat, like the waking state, as characterised by the subject- object relationship; therefore dream isyate, is held;

356 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 37

taddhetuh, as having that waking state as its source; that is to say, dream is a product of the waking state. Taddhetutvāt, since dream has that waking state as its cause; that jagaritam, waking state; is sat, true; tasya eva, for that dreamer alone; but not so for the others, just like the dream itself This is the implica- tion. As a dream is true to a dreamer alone, so far as it appears like objects of common experience having existence, similarly the waking things that appear like existing objects of common experience are true to the dreamer alone as conceived of by him to be the cause of his dream. In reality, however, just like dream objects, the things of the waking state, too, are not objecis of common experience to all, nor have they existence. This is the purport.

Objection : Even though the objects of the waking state be the prototypes of those of the dream state, they are not unsubstantial like dream; for dream is extremely changeful, whereas the waking state 1s seen to be steady. Answer : This is truly so to the non-discriminat- ing people, but to the men of discrimination nothing whatsoever is known to have origination. Therefore- उत्पादस्याप्रसिद्धत्वादजं सर्वमुदाहृतम्। न च भूतादभूतस्य संभवोऽस्ति कथंचन ॥३८। 38. Since origination is not a well-estab- lished fact, it is declared (by the Upanisads) that everything is birthless. Moreover, there is no origination, in any way whatsoever, of any non-existing thing from an existing one.

IV. 39] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 357

Utpādasya aprasiddhatvāt, as origination is not a well-established fact; so in the text, "co-extensive with everything within and without and birthless" (Mu. II. i. 2), it has been udāhrtam, declared, by the Upanisad in effect that; sarvam ajam, everything is birthless; or in other words, the (birthless) Self is everything. And your further conjecture that the unreal dream originates from the real waking state is also untenable. For in this world na asti sambhavah abhūtasya, there is no origination of a nonentity; bhutāt, from a real thing; for a nonentity, like the horn of a hare, is not seen to originate in any way whatsoever. Objection : Has it not been said by yourself that dream is a product of the waking state? So how is it said that origination is not a well-recognised fact? Answer : As to that, listen to what we mean by the causal relation (between them):

असजागरिते दष्टा स्वन्ने पश्यति तन्मयः। असत्खप्रेऽपि दृष्टा च प्रतिबुद्धो न पश्यति ॥३६॥ 39. Having seen some unreal thing in the waking state and being emotionally affected, one sees it in dream also. And having even seen some unreal thing in dream, one does not see it in the waking state. Drstvā, having seen; jāgarite, in the waking state; asat, an unreal, illusory thing, like a snake ımagined on a rope; and becoming tanmayah, emotionally affected by its thoughts; one paśyatı, sees; svapne, in

358 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 39

dream, also; by imagining the duality of subject and object as in the waking state Similarly, unless one resorts to imagination, one, drstvä, after having seen; asat, an unreal thing, svapne api, even in dream: na paśyatı, does not see, it; pratibuddhah, when he is awake. From the use of the word "ca, and," it follows that, in a similar way, one does not some- times see in dream something that one had seen in the waking state. In this sense the waking state is said to be the cause of dream, but thereby it is not implied that the former is real.

In reality, however, it cannot be established that anything has any causal relationship in any way what- soever. How?

सच्च सद्धेतुकं नास्ति सद्वेतुकमसत्कुत: ॥४०।। 40. There is no unreal thing that has an unreality as its cause, similarly there is no unreal thing that has a reality as its cause. Moreover, there is no existing thing that has another existing thing as its cause. How can there be an unreal thing that is produced out of some- thing real? Na asti asat, there is no unreal thing; asaddhe- tukam, that has an unreal thing for its cause-e.g. an unreal thing like a castle in the air that has an unreal thing like a hare's horn as its cause. Similarly, na asti sat, there is no such existing entity; a jar for instance; that is asaddhetukam, the product of an un-

IV. 41] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 359

reality-a hare's horn for instance. Tathā, so also; na asti sat, there is no existing thing, a pot for in- stance, that is a product of another existing thing, a jar for instance. How can there be any possibility of an unreality being produced out of a reality? Besides, there is no other kind of causal relationship possible or imaginable So the idea implied is that, to the discriminating people, causal relationship of anything whatsoever is really an unestablished fact

Again it is said by way of removing any surmise about the causal relationship between the unreal waking and dream states:

विपर्यासोदथा जाग्रदचिन्त्यान् भूतवत् स्पृशेत्। तथा रवप्े विपर्यासाद्धर्मांस्तत्रैव पश्यति ॥४१।। 41. As some one, owing to lack of discrimi- nation, mav, in the waking state, be in contact with unthinkable objects, fancying them to be real, so also in dream, one sees the objects in that dream alone, owing to want of discrimination. Yathā, as; some one; viparyāsāt, owing to want of discrimination; may imagine jāgrat, in the waking state; as though one is in touch with acintyān, unthink- able, objects, like a snake etc. imagined on a rope etc .; bhutavat, as if they were real; tatha, so also; svapne, in dream; viparyāsāt, owing to want of discrimination; he fancies as though visualising dharmān, objects, like elephants etc. that is to say, he sees them there in the dream alone, and not as the products of the waking state.

360 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 42

उपलम्भात्समाचारादस्तिवस्तुत्वचादिनाम्। जातिस्तु देशिता बुद्धैरजातेस्त्रसतां सदा ।४२।। 42. Instruction about creation has been imparted by the wise for the sake of those who, from the facts of experience and adequate behaviour,1 vouch for the existence of substan- tiality, and who are ever afraid of the birthless entity. For those who, upalambhät, because of percep- tion, and samācārāt, adequate behaviour, e.g. proper observance of duties pertaining to castes and stages of life-for those who, because of these two reasons, asti-vastutva-vādinam, resort to the declaration of exist- ence of substantiality-for the sake of those who are earnest in their effort, who are faithful, but who are possessed of an inferior kind of discrimination; that jatih, birth (creation); desitā, has been inculcated; buddhaih, by the wise, by the non-dualists. That creation has been preached as a means to an end (for generating firm discrimination) with the idea: "Let them accept it for the time being. But in the course of practising Vedänta, the discriminating knowledge about the birthless and non-dual Self will arise in them spontaneously." But they have not done so from the standpoint of ultimate truth. And this is so because those non-discriminating people (for whom such instruc- tion is meant) are devoted to Vedic conduct, while, owing to their dull intellect, they are sadā, ever; afraid; ajāteh, of the birthless entity; apprehending that this 1 Proper response to human situations.

IV. 441 MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 36I

will lead to their annihilation. This is the idea. It was said earlier, "that is merely by way of generating the idea (of oneness)" (Kārīkā, III. 15). अज्ञातेस्त्रसतां तेषामुपलम्भाद्वियन्ति ये। जातिदोषा न सेत्स्यन्ति दोषोऽप्यल्पो भविष्यति ॥४३।। 43. For those who, being afraid of the Unborn, deviate from the true path by relying on their experience of duality, the faults arising from acceptance of creation will not bear fruit; and the fault, too, will be insignificant. And ye, those, who thus; upalambhät, relying on perception, as well as adequate behaviour; ajāteh trasatam, being afraid of the unborn entity (i.e. the Self); and declaring that duality exists, uryanti, deviate, from the non-dual Self, that is to say, they accept duality-in the case of those people who are afraid of the Unborn, but are faithful, and tread the righteous path, jatidosāh, the faults arising from the perception of origination; na setsyanti, will not attain fruition, for they are treading on the path of discrimination. Dosah api, should there be any dosah, defect, that is calcu- lated to debar their complete enlightenment; that api, even; alpah bhavisyati, will be insignificant. Objection : As perception and adequate behaviour are valid proofs, things comprised in duality do exist. Answer : Not so, for perceptions and adequate be- haviour are not universally true. How they are not so is being shown: उपलम्भात्समाचारान्मायाहस्ती यथोच्यते। उपलम्भात्समाचारादस्ति वस्तु तथोच्यते ॥।४४।

362 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 44

44. As an elephant conjured up by magic is called an elephant by depending on percep- tion and adequate behaviour, so from the facts of perception and adequate behaviour a thing is said to be existing.

As māyahastī, an illusory elephant conjured up by magic; though non-existent in realty, is yet certainly perceived, just lke a real elephant-people behave towards it in this world just as with a real elephant, and call it an elephant because of such attributes of an elephant as being capable of being bound, ridden upon, etc .- similarly upalambhāt samācārāt, because of per- ception and right conduct (with regard to them); ucyate vastu asti, it is said that duality, consisting of diversity, does exist. Therefore the purport is that the facts of being perceived and dealt with rightly cannot be the tests establishing the existence of a thing.

What again is the absolutely real thing that is the substratum of all unreal ideas of creation and the rest? The answer is: जात्याभासं चलाभासं वस्त्वाभासं तथैव च। अजाचलमवस्तुत्वं विज्ञानं शान्तमद्यम् ।४५।। 45. It is Consciousness-birthless, motion- less and non-material, as well as tranquil and non-dual-that has the semblance of birth, appears to move, and simulates a substance (possessed of qualities). That which being birthless has the semblance of birth is jātyābhāsam, as for instance, in the illustra- tion, "Devadatta has birth". That which appears as

IV. 46] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 363

though moving is calabhasam, as in the case, "That very Devadatta goes". Vastu is a substance that can have attributes; that which simulates that is vastvābhā- sam, as for instance in the illustration, "That very Devadatta is fair or tall". Devadatta appears as though taking birth, as though he moves, and as if he is fair or tall, though in reality he is birthless, changeless, and immaterial. What is it that answers to these charac- teristics? It is viñānam, Consciousness It is śāntam, quiescent; being devoid of birth etc. And therefore It is also advayam, without a second. This is the meaning. एवं न जायते चित्तमेवं धर्मा अजा: स्मृताः । एवमेत विजानन्तो न पतन्ति विपर्यये॥४६॥ 46. Thus Consciousness has no birth, thus are the souls considered to be birthless. Those who know thus indeed, do not fall into calamity. Evam, thus, in accordance with the reasons ad- duced; cittam na jāyate, Consciousness1 does not undergo birth; evam, thus, are dharmāh, the souls; smrtäh, considered; ajāh, birthless; by the knowers of Brahman. The plural in dharmāh (souls) is used meta- phorically, since the non-dual Self Itself appears to be different in accordance with the difference of bodies. Those who, after renouncing all cravings for external things, vijanantah evam eva, know thus indeed; that the Consciousness, free from birth etc., is the non-dual reality that is the Self; na patanti, do not fall, agam; viparyaye, into calamity, into the sea of the darkness 1 "Citta means Consciousness, i e. Brahman."-A G.

364 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 46

of ignorance; as is confirmd by the text of the Vedic verse: "What delusion and what sorrow can there be to the one who realises unity?" (Iś. 7).

In order to dilate upon the above-mentioned reali- sation of the Self, the text goes on:

ऋृजुवक्रादिकाभासमलातस्पन्दित यथा। ग्रहणग्राहकाभासं विज्ञानस्पन्दितं तथा॥४७।। 47. As the movement of a fire-brand appears to be straight or crooked, so it is the vibration of Consciousness that appears to be the knower and the known. Yathā, as; in common experience, it is seen that, alataspanditam, the movement of a fire-brand; rjuvakrādikābhāsam, appears to be straight, curved, and so on; tatha, simılar; is grahanagrāhakābhāsam, the appearance as the perception and the perceiver, that is to say, as the object and the subject. What is it that appears? Vijnanaspanditam, the vibration of Consciousness, as it were, it being set in motion by ignorance, for the unmoving Consciousness can have no vibration, as it was said earlier, "birthless, motion- less" (Kārikā, IV. 45).

अस्पन्द्मानमलातमनाभासमजं यथा। अस्पन्दमानं विज्ञानमनाभासमजं तथा।४८।। 48. As the fire-brand, when not in motion, becomes free from appearances and birth, so Consciousness, when not in vibration, will be free from appearances and birth.

IV. 50] MĀNŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 365

Yathā, as; that very alātam, fire-brand; aspanda- manam, when not in motion, when it does not undergo birth to become straight etc. in shape; it remains anā- bhasam ajam, free from appearances and birth; tatha, so; Consciousness, that vibrates through ignorance, will, on the cessation of ignorance, become aspandamānam, free from vibration, consisting in birth etc .- will remain free from appearances, birth, and vibration. This is the meaning. Moreover,

अलाते स्पन्दमाने वै नाभासा अन्यतोभुवः। न ततोऽन्यत्र निस्पन्दान्नालातं प्रविशन्ति ते॥।४६।। 49. When the fire-brand is in motion, the appearances do not come to it from anywhere else. Neither do they go anywhere else from the fire-brand when it is at rest, nor do they (then) enter into it. Alāte spandamāne, when that very fire-brand is in motion; the appearances of straightness, crookedness, etc. do not come anyatah, from anywhere, outside the fire-brand, to be in it; this is what is meant by na anya- tobhuvah, non-adventitious. Na, nor; do they go out anywhere else; tatah nispandat, from that fire-brand when it is at rest. Na te alātam pravisanti, nor do they enter into the fire-brand, that is motionless. Furthermore,

न निर्गता अलातात्ते द्रव्यत्वाभावयोगतः। विज्ञानेऽपि तथैव स्युराभासस्याविशेषतः॥५०।।

.366 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 50

brand by reason of their unsubstantiality. With 50. They did not issue out of the fire-

regard to Consciousness also, the appearances must be of a similar kind, for as appearance there is no distinction. Te, they, the appearances; na mırgatāḥ alātāt, do not issue out of the fire-brand, like something out of a house; dravyatva-abhāva-yogatah, because of their being devoid of substantiality, that is to say, because of unsubstantiality, the phrase being construed thus: The qality of a dravya, substance, is dravyatva; the absence of that is dravyatvābhāva; and yogatah means by reason of. Entry is possible for things and not for those that are not so. The appearances of birth etc. vijnane api tathaiva syuh, in Consicousness also must be thus alone; ābhāsasya avisesataḥ, for appearance is equally present. It is being shown how they are similar: विज्ञाने स्पन्दमाने वे नाभासा अन्यतोभुषः। न ततोऽन्यत्र निस्पन्दान्न विज्ञानं विशन्ति ते ॥५१॥ न निर्गतास्ते विज्ञानादु द्रव्यत्वाभावयोगतः। कार्यकारणताऽभावाद्यतोऽचिन्त्या: सदैव ते ॥५२।। 51. When Consciousness is in vibration, the appearances do not come to It from any- where else. Neither do they go anywhere else from Consciousness when It is at rest, nor do they (then) enter into It. 52. They did not issue out of Conscious- ness, by reason of their unsubstantiality; for

IV. 53] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 367

they are ever beyond comprehension, being without any relation of cause and effect (with Consciousness). Everything with regard to Consciousness is similar to that of the fire-brand; but Consciousness has this one distinction that It is ever unmoving. It is being pointed out as to what causes the appearances of creation etc. in the motionless Consciousness. Yatah, for; te, these, are sadā eva acıntyāh, ever beyond comprehension, kāryakāranatā-abhāvāt, mn consequence of the absence of any logical connection of cause and effect (between the appearances and Consciousness), they being of the nature of non-existence. Just as the ideas of straightness etc. are perceived in the fire- brand, although the appearances of straightness etc. are unreal, similarly the ideas of creation in the Self, that appear even though there are no creation etc., must be false. This is the purport as a whole (of the two verses).

It has been established that the Reality that is the 'Self, is one and unborn. Now according to those who imagine causality,

द्रव्यं द्रव्यस्य हेतु: स्यादन्यदन्यस्य चैघ हि। द्रव्यत्वमन्यभावो वा धर्माणां नोपपद्यते ।।५३।।

53. A substance can be the cause of a substance, and one thing can be the cause of another, different from itself. But the souls can be considered neither as substances nor as something different from other things.

368 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 53

Dravyam, a substance; syat hetuh, can be the cause; dravyasya, of a substance; anyat anyasya, one thing can be the cause of another, but that very thing cannot be its own cause Nor is a non-substance seen in common experience to be independently a cause of anything.1 Na upapadyate, nor is it logical, in any- way whatsoever; that dharmānām dravyatvam anya- bhavah va, the souls should be considered either as substances or as something different from other things, under which possibility alone could the Self become either a cause or an effect.2 Hence the Self being neither a substance nor different from anything,3 is neither the cause nor the effect of anything. This is the meaning.

एवं न चिसजा धर्माश्चित्तं वाऽपि न धर्मजम्। एवं हेतुफलाजाति प्रविशन्ति मनीषिणः ।।५४।। 54. In this way, the external entities are not the products of Consciousness; Consciousness a product of external entities. nor is

Thus the wise confirm the birthlessness of cause and effect.

Evam, thus, according to the reasons adduced; Consciousness is the very essence of the Self that is identical with Consciousness. Hence dharmāh, exter- nal entities; na cittajah, are not the products of Con-

' Quality, action, genus, etc can be causes through the substances in which they inhere. 2 For casuality presupposes difference. 3 The Self being all-pervasive and homogeneous.

IV. 55] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 369

sciousness;1 na cittam dharmajam, nor is Conscious- ness a product of external entities. For all entities are the mere appearances of that which is essentially Consciousness. Consequently, an effect is not pro- duced from a cause, nor is a cause from an effect. In this way the knowers of Brahman, pravisanti, enter into, confirm, hetuphalājātim, the birthlessness of cause and effect. The idea is that they arrive at the non-existence of cause and effect. It is being pointed out as to what will happen to those who cling to cause and effect:

क्षीणे हेतुफलावेशे नास्ति हेतुफलोद्धवः ।।५५।।

long as there is mental preoccupation with cause 55. Cause and effect spring into being so

and effect. There is no origination of cause and effect when the engrossment with cause and effect becomes attenuated.

Yāvat, so long as; hetuphalāveśah, attention is riveted on cause and effect under the idea, "I am the producer of the causes called virtue and vice; merit and demerit belong to me; and I shall enjoy their fruit by being born sometime and somewhere among the host of creatures"-so long as causality is superim- posed on the Self, so long as the mind is preoccupied with it; tāvat hetuphalodbhavah, so long do cause and effect, merit and demerit and their effect, arise- are active without a break. This is the meaning. 1 A G. equates citta with the supreme Self. 24

370 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 55

When the engrossment with cause and effect, that springs from ignorance, is removed through the reali- sation of non-duality as stated before, like the romoval of the possession by an evil spirit through the power of incantation and medicines, then that engrossment kīne, being attenuated, na asti hetuphalodbhavah, there is no origination of cause and effect.

What is the harm even if there is the origin of cause and effect? The answer is:

यावद्धेतुफलावेशः संसारस्तावदायतः । क्षीणे हेतुफलावेशे संसारं न प्रपद्यते ॥५६॥

56. As long as there is mental preoccupa- tion with causality, so long does the worldly state continue. When the engrossment with causality is exhausted, one does not attain the worldly state. Yavat, as long as; the mental preoccupation with causality is not removed through perfect illumination; tävat, so long; samsarah, the worldly state; persisting unimpaired, remains ayatah, outstretched, that is to say, continues for long. But again, hetuphalāvese ksīne, when the engrossment with causality is attenu- ated, na prapadyate samsāram, one does not attain the worldly state; for then there is no cause for it. Objection : As there is nothing else apart from the unborn Self, how can it be said by you that there are such phenomena as the origin and destruction of cause and effect as well as of the world ?

IV. 58] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 37I

Answer : Listen.

संवृत्या जायते सर्व शाश्वतं नास्ति तेन वै। सद्गावेन ह्यजं सवेमुच्छेदस्तेन नास्ति वै॥५७॥ 57. Everything seems to be born because of the empirical outlook; therefore there is nothing that is eternal. From the standpoint of Reality, everything is the birthless Self; therefore there is no such thing as annihilation. Sarvam jāyate, everything is produced; samvtyā, by samvarana, concealment, consisting in empirical outlook within the domain of ignorance. Tena, therefore; within the range of ignorance, na asti vat šaśvatam, there is surely nothing that is eternal. Hence it has been said that the world, characterised by origin and destruction, remains outstretched; hi, because, sadbhavena, from the standpoint of the highest Real- ity; sarvam ajam, everything is the birthless Self. Since there is no creation, tena, therefore; na asti vai, there is surely no; ucchedah, annihilation, of any cause, effect, etc. This is the meaning. धर्मा य इति जायन्ते जायन्ते ते न तन्वतः। जन्म मायोपमं तेषां सा च माया न विद्यते ॥५८॥ 58. The entities that are born thus, are not born in reality. Their birth is as that of a thing through Maya (magic). And that Māyā, again has no reality. Ye dharmāh, the entities, souls and other things, which; jayante, are born, are imagined to be born ;-

372 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 58

te, they, that are iti, of this kind ;- the word "itr, of this kind" indicates the empirical outlook mentioned earher (IV. 57) ;- so the meaning is, "The entities that are of this kind, are born thus, owing to (concealment through) the empincal outlook," te, they, na jayante, are not born; tattvatah, in reality. And as for the janma, creation, through the covering of the empirical outlook, tesam, of those, those entities, mentioned above; the birth is to be understood māyopamam, like that occurring through Maya (magic). So it is to be understood as similar to magic. Objection : Then there is an entity called Māya. Answer: Not so Sā ca māyā na vidyate, and that Maya does not exist, the idea being that the term relates to something non-existing.

It is being shown how their birth can be com- pared to magical birth:

यथा मायामयादु बीजाजयते तन्मयोडङर:। नासौ नित्यो न चोच्छेदी तद्वद्धर्मेषु योजना ॥५६।। 59. As from a magical seed grows a sprout equally illusory-it being neither eternal nor destructible-just so is the logic applicable in the case of objects. - Yathā, as, māyāmayāt bījāt, from a magical seed, of a mango for instance; jāyate, grows, ankurah tanmayah, a sprout (of equal substance), equally illu- sory, asau, that one, the sprout; being na nıtyah, not eternal; na ca ucchedi, nor destructible-simply because it has no existence, tadvat, just so, is the

IV. 61-62] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 373

yojana, reasoning; about birth and death, dharmesu, in the case of the objects. The idea is that, from the standpoint of logic, there can be no real birth or death for the objects नाजेवु सवधर्मेषु शाश्वताशाश्वताभिधा। यत्र वर्णा न वर्तन्ते विवेकस्तत्र नोच्यते॥६०॥ 60. With regard to all the birthless entities there can be no application of the words eternal and non-eternal. No categorical statement can be made with regard to an entity where words do not apply. But from the standpoint of absolute truth, Sāśvatāśāśvatābhidhā, the terms eternal or non- eternal; na ajeșu dharmeșu, do not apply to the birth- less entities, the souls, whose essence consists in a mere eternal and homogeneous Consciousness. This is the meaning. The term varnah derivatively means those by which things are described and it signifies words. Yatra, where, with regard to which (souls), words do not apply, so far as their description or revelation is concerned; tatra, there; na ucyate, is not uttered; any vivekah, categorical statement, that "This is so indeed", or in other words that, It is either eternal or non-eternal, as is declared in the Vedic text, "From where speech returns" (Tai. II.iv.I). यथा रवप्े द्वयाभासं चित्तं चलति मायया। तथा जाग्रदुद्वयाभासं चित्तं चलति मायया ॥६१॥ अद्वयं च द्वयाभासं चित्तं र्वप्े न संशयः। अद्वयं च द्याभासं तथा जाग्रन्न संशयः ॥६२।

374 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 61-62

61. As in dream, Consciousness vibrates as though having dual functions, so in the waking state Consciousness vibrates as though with two facets. 62. There is no doubt that Consciousness, though one, appears in dream in dual aspects; so also in the waking state, Consciousness, though one, appears to have two aspects. That the absolute Consciousness that is really non-dual, becomes an object of speech, is due only to the activities of the mind, but not so in any real sense. The verses were explained earlier1 (Kārikā, III. 29-30).

For this further reason, duality, describable by words, does not exist:

स्वपद्टक्प्रचरन् सवप्ने दिक्ष वै दशसु स्थितान्। अण्डजान् स्वेदजान् वाऽपि जीवान्पश्यति यान् सदा ॥६३।। स्वपदक्चिस्तदृश्यास्ते न विद्यन्ते ततः पृथक्। तथा तद्दृश्यमेवेदं स्वप्दक्चित्तमिष्यते ॥६४॥ 63-64. The creatures-be they born from eggs or from moisture-that the experiencer of dream sees for ever as existing in all the ten directions, while he is roaming in the dreamland, are but objects of perception to the consciousness of the dreamer, and they do not exist apart from that consciousness. Similarly this conscious- ° In the present verses the word manah is substituted by cittam. In verses 64-67, citta means empirical consciousness.

IV. 66] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 375

ness of the dreamer, is admitted to be only an object of perception to that dreamer. Svapnadrk, one who sees a dream; caran, while moving, svapne, in dream, in the place seen in a dream; yān jīvān sadā pasyatı, all the creatures that he ever notices; dıksu vai dasasu sthitān, as existing in all the ten directions; viz andajān, those born from eggs; svedajan, those born from moisture. Obection : Be that so, what follows therefrom? The answer is: Te, those creatures; are the svapnadrk-cittadrsyāh, objects of perception to the consciousness of the experiencer of dream. Therefore na vidyante, they do not exist; tatah prthak, separa- tely from the consciousness of the dreamer. It is consciousness alone that is imagined as the diverse creatures. Tatha. similarly; even tat, that; svapnadrk- cittam, the consciousness of the experiencer of dream; is idam tad-drśyam eva, merely an object of percep- tion to that dreamer. Therefore there is no separate existence for such a thing as consciousness apart from the dreamer. This is the idea.

चरआ्जागरिते जाग्रद्विक्षु वै दशसु स्थितान्। अण्डजान् स्तेदजान् वाऽपि जीवान्पश्यति यान्सदा॥६५॥ जाग्रच्चित्तेक्षणीयास्ते न विद्यन्ते ततः पृथक्। तथा तदुदृश्यमेवेदं जाग्रतश्चित्तसिष्यते॥६६॥ 65-66. The creatures-be they born from eggs or from moisture-that the experiencer of the waking state sees for ever as existing in all the ten directions, while he is roaming in the

376 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 66

places of the waking state, are but objects of perception to the consciousness of the man in the waking state, and they do not exist separately from that consciousness. Similarly this con- sciousness of the waking man is admitted to be only an object of perception to the waking man. The creatures visible to a waking man are non- different from his consciousness, since they are per- cerved through consciousness, just like the creatures perceived by the consciousness of a dreamer. And that consciousness again, as engaged in the perception of creatures, is non-different from the experiencer, since it is perceived by the experiencer, like the consciousness in the dream state. The remaining portion has already been explained. उभे ह्यन्योन्यदृश्ये ते कि तदस्तीति नोच्यते। लक्षणाशन्यमुभयं तन्मतेनेव गृह्यते ॥६७॥ 67. They are both perceptible to each other. (If the question arises), "Does it exist?" the answer given is "No". Both of them lack vald proof, and each is perceived merely because of a prepossession with the other. Te ubhe, both of them-consciousness and the creatures-knowledge and its modifications-these two; are anyonyadrśye, objects of perception to each other. For the thing that is called knowledge is what it is in relation to its objects such as the creatures; and the objects of perception, such as the creatures, are so in relation to knowledge; consequently, their perception is mutually determined. Hence it is also

IV. 69] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 377

asserted that nothing whatsoever, be it knowledge or the things perceived through knowledge, exists. When ıt is asked, "Kım tat astı iti, does it exits?" ucyate, the answer made, by the discriminating man is, "na, no." For in dream neither an elephant nor a knowl- edge having elephant as its content exists. So also, in this waking state, these do not exist in the eyes of the discriminating people This is the idea implied. How? Since ubhayam, both knowledge and the objects of knowledge; are laksanāśunyam, devoid of laksanā, anything whereby they can be established, that is to say, they are without valid proof. Either is grhyate, perceived, tanmatena eva, merely because of a prepossession with the other There can be no knowl- edge of the pot by setting aside the idea of the pot, nor can there be any comprehension of the idea of the pot by discarding the pot. The meaning implied is that in the case under discussion no distinction, of one being the knowledge and the other its object, can be made between the two. यथा स्वप्नमयो जीवो जायते म्रियतेऽपि च। तथा जीवा अमी सर्वे भवन्ति न भवन्ति च ॥६८॥ 68. As a creature seen in a dream under- goes birth and death, so also do all these creatures appear and disappear. यथा मायामयो जीवो जायते प्रियतेऽपि च। तथा जीवा अमी सर्वे भवन्ति न भवन्ति च ॥६६॥। 69. As a creature conjured up by magic undergoes birth and death, so also do all these creatures appear and disappear.

378 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 70

यथा निर्मितको जीवो जायते ब्रियतेऽपि बा। तथा जीवा अमी सर्वे भवन्ति न भवन्ति व॥९0 ॥ 70. As a creature produced through medi- cines and charms undergoes birth and death, so, also do all these creatures appear and disappear. Māyāmayah means one that is created by a magician; and mrmitakah means created by medicines, charms etc. As egg-born creatures and others created in dreams or by magic and incantation, take birth anď die, so also do such creatures as human beings who are non-existent and are merely imagined on Con- sciousness. This is the idea.

न कश्चिजायते जीवः संभवोऽस्य न विद्यते। एतन्तदुत्तमं सत्यं यत्र किचिन्न जायते॥७१॥ 71. No creature whichsoever has birth; there is no source for it. This is that highest truth where nothing whatsoever is born. It has been said that the birth, death, etc. of creatures within the range of empirical existence are like those of the creatures in dream etc., and that the highest truth is that where no creature undergoes birth. The remaining portion was explained before (Kārikā, III.48). चित्तस्पन्दितमेवेदं ग्राह्यग्राहकवद्द्वयम्। चित्त निर्विषयं नित्यमसङ्गं तेन कीर्तितम् ॥७२। 72. This duality, possessed of subject and object, is a mere vibration of Consciousness.

IV. 73] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 379

And Consciousness is objectless; hence It is declared to be eternally without relations.

All dvayam, duality; grāhya-grāhakavat, possessed of subject and object; is cittaspanditam eva, surely a vibration of Consciousness. But from the ultimate standpoint, cittam, Consciousness, is nothing but the Self, and accordingly it is nirvisayam, without objects. Tena, as a consequence of that, because of Its being without objects; It is kirtitam, declared; to be nityam asangam, ever without relations; as is known from the Vedic text, "For this infinite being is unattached" (Br. IV. iii. 15-16). Anything that has its objects becomes connected with those objects. As Conscious- ness is objectless, It is unrelated. This is the purport.

Objection : If the unrelatedness of Conscious- ness follows from the fact of Its being without objects, then there can be no freedom from relation, since there exist such objects as the teacher, the scripture, and the taught. Answer : That is no defect. Objection : Why? The answer is:

योऽस्ति कल्पितसंवृत्या परमार्थेन नास्त्यसौ। परतन्त्राभिसंवृत्या स्यान्नास्ति परमार्थतः॥७३।।

73. That which exists because of a fancied empirical outlook, does not do so from the standpoint of absolute Reality. Anything that may exist on the strength of the empirical out-

380 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 73

look engendered by other systems of thought, does not really exist. An object, a scripture for instance, yah, which; exists kalpitasamvrtyā, because of a fancied empirical outlook (i e. on the strength of empirical experience), it being called so because it is samvrti, an empirical out- look, that is kalpita, imagined, as a means for the attainment of the highest object. Anything that exists by virtue of this, asau na asti, that has no existence; paramarthena, from the standpoint of the absolute Reality It was said earlier, "Duality ceases to exist after realısatıon" (Kānkā, I. 18). And anything that syāt, may exist, paratantrābhisamvrtyā, on the strength of the empirical outlook engendered by the other systems of thought; that thing paramarthatah, when considered from the standpoint of the highest Reality; na asti, does not exist, to be sure. Therefore it has been well said, "Hence it is declared to be without relations" (Kārikā, IV. 72). Objection: On the assumption that scriptures etc. have only empirical existence, the idea itself that some- thing is birthless will be equally empirical. Answer: Truly so, अजः कल्पितसंवृत्या परमार्थेन नाप्यजः । परतन्त्राभिनिष्पत्या संवृत्या जायते तु सः ॥७४। 74. Since in accordance with the conclu- sion arrived at in the scriptures of the other schools, the soul undergoes birth from the empirical point of view, therefore in pursuance of that fancied empirical view (it is said by the

IV. 75] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 38r

non-dualists that) the soul is birthless; but from the standpoint of absolute Reality, it is not even birthless. Kalpitasamvrtyā, in accordance with the empirical outlook, fostered with the help of scriptures etc .; the Self is said to be ajah, unborn. But paramārthena, from the standpoint of the highest Reality, na api aah, It is not even unborn. For what is birthless paratan- trābhinispattyā, from the standpoint of the conclusions arrived at by other schools of thought; (is said to be so, because) sah, that thing; jayate, undergoes birth; samvṛtyā, as a matter of empirical experience. There- fore the imagination that the Self is birthless, does not pertain to the absolutely real Entity. This is the idea.

अभूताभिनिवेशोऽस्ति द्वयं तत्र न विद्यते। दयाभावं स बुदुष्वैव निर्निमित्तो न जायते॥७५।। 75. There is in evidence a (mere) craving for false objects, (though) no duality is in existence there. Realising the non-existence of duality, one becomes free from craving for false things, and one does not undergò birth. Abhimvesah means persistent fondness. Since no object exists, therefore there is in evidence a mere per- sistent attraction for duality that is non-existing. Dvyam na uidyate tatra, duality does not exist there. Since a fondness for unreality is alone the cause of birth, therefore sah, he; na jāyate, does not undergo birth; who buddhvā, having realised; dvayābhāvam, the non- existence of duality; has become nirnimittah, free from cause, divested of the craving for the unreal duality.

382 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 76

यदा न लभते हेतू नुत्तमाधममध्यमान्। तदा न जायते चित्तं हेत्वभावे फलं कुतः ॥७६॥ 76. When one does not perceive the superior, medium, and inferior causes, then Consciousness ceases to have births. For how can there be any result when there is no cause? The highest causes are those duties which are enjoined in relation to castes and stages of life, which are performed by people free from hankering for results, which lead to the attainment of the states of gods and others, and which are purely virtuous. Those that are mixed with irreligious practices, and which lead to birth among men etc., are the middling ones. And the inferior causes are those particular tendencies that are known as irreligious and that lead to birth among animals etc. Yada, when, after the realisation of the reality of the Self, that is one without a second and free from all imagination; one na labhate, does not perceive, all those causes-superior, intermediate, or inferior- that are fancied through ignorance, just as the dirt seen in the sky by children is not perceived there by a discriminatıng man; tadā, then; cttam, Consciousness; na jayate, is not created, in the shape of gods and others, that constitute the superior, medium, and inferior results. For when there is no cause, no effect can be produced, just as no corn will grow unless there are seeds. It ha It has been said that Consciousness has no birth in the absence of causes. Now is being stated in what this birthlessness of Consciousness consists:

IV. 78] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 383

अनिमित्तस्य चित्तस्य याऽनुत्पत्तिः समाऽदया। अजातस्यैव सर्वस्य चित्तदृश्यं हि तद्यतः ।७9।। 77. The birthlessness that Consciousness attains when freed from causes, is constant and absolute; for all this (viz duality and birth) was perceptible to Consciousness that had been birth- less and non-dual (even before). Anutpattih, the birthlessness, called liberation, that comes; cittasya animittasya, to Consciousness that 1s causeless, that has become free from all the causes of birth called virtue and vice, as a consequence of the realisation of the ultimate Truth ;- the birthlessness that is of this kind, is for ever and under all circum- stances sama, constant, without any distinction; and advayā, absolute. And this state ajātasya, belongs to Consciousness that had been birthless even before; (it belongs) sarvasya, (to Consciousness) that had been all, that is to say to the non-dual Consciousness. Since even before the rise of knowledge, tat, all that-viz duality and birth; was cittadrsyam, an object of per- ception to Consciousness; therefore the causelessness of the unborn non-dual Consciousness is ever the same and absolute, not that sometimes it is subject to birth and sometimes not. It is ever of the same nature. This is the meaning.

बुद्ध्घाऽनिमिसतां सत्यां हेतुं पृथगनाप्ुवन्। वीतशोकं तथाऽकाममभयं पदमश्न ते ।७८।। 78. After realising the causelessness that is the truth, and not accepting any cause separately,

384 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 78

one attains the state of fearlessness that is free from sorrow and devoid of desire. Since duality does not exist in accordance with the reasons adduced, one aśnute, attains; the abhayam padam, state of fearlessness, that is free from desire, sorrow, etc. and is without ignorance etc; that is to say, one is never reborn, buddhvā, after having realısed; animittatam satyam, causelessness as the truth, of the highest order, and anapnuvan, (after) not getting, that is to say, not accepting, prthak, separately; any hetum, cause, that may lead to birth among the gods and others (that is to say), after having renounced the desire for all external things अभूताभिनिवेशाद्दि सदशे तत्प्रवर्तते। वस्त्वभावं स बुदध्वैव निःसङ्गं विनिवर्तते॥७६॥ 79. Since owing to a belief in the existence of unrealities, Consciousness engages Itself in things that are equally so (i.e. unreal), therefore when one has realisation of the absence of objects, Consciousness becomes unattached and turns back. Abhūtābhiniveśah consists in a conviction that duality does exist even though there is no such thing. Since from this infatuation, which is a kind of delusion created by ignorance, tat, that Consciousness, that imitates the unreal; pravartate, engages, sadrse, in a similar thing, therefore when sah, any one; realises the non-existence of that object of duality, his Conscious- ness becomes nihsangam, unattached, to it; and It vinivartate, turns back, from the objects that are the contents of the belief in unrealities.

IV. 8r] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 385

निवृत्तस्याप्रवृत्तस्य निश्चला हि तदा स्थितिः। विषयः स हि बुद्धानां तत्साम्यमजमद्यम्॥८०॥ 80. For then to the Consciousness, that has got detached and does not engage (in duality), there follows the state of inactivity. Since that is the object realised by the wise, therefore that is the real equipoise, and that is birthless and non-dual. Of the Consciousness nivrttasya, that has desisted, from objects of duality; and apravrttasya, does not engage, in any other object because of the realisation of the absence of any such thing; there follows niścala sthitih, a state of motionlessness, that is of the very nature of Brahman. Hi, since; sah visayah that is the object of vision-this state of continuance of knowledge as Brahman that is a non-dual mass of homogeneous Consciousness; buddhānām, to the wise, who realise the supreme Reality; therefore, tat, that state; is sämyam, the highest equipoise, without any differentia- tion; and it is also ajam advayam, birthless and non- dual.

That which is the object of vision to the wise is being shown again:

अजमनिद्रमस्वमनं प्रभातं भवति स्वयम्। सकृद्विभातो ह्येवैष धर्मो धातुस्वभाघतः ॥८१।।

81. This becomes birthless, sleepless, dream- less, and self-luminous. For this Entity is ever effulgent by Its very nature. 25

386 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 8I

That becomes prabhatam svayam, fully illuminat- ed by Itself, and It does not depend on the sun etc, in other words, It is by nature self-effulgent. Esah, this; dharmah, entity, called the Self, that is possessed of such characteristics, is sakrt-vibhatah, shining once for all, that is to say, ever effulgent; dhatusvabhā- vatah, by the very nature of the thing (that is the Self). It is being shown why this supreme Reality, though spoken of thus, is not grasped by ordinary people : सुखमात्रियते नित्यं दुःखं विव्रियते सदा। यस्य कस्य च धर्मस्य ग्रहेण भगधानसौ ॥।८२। 82. Because of His passion for any object, whatever it be, that Lord becomes ever covered up easily, and He is at all times uncovered with difficulty. Since asau bhagavan, that Lord, the non-dual Self, that is to say, the Deity; sukham avriyate, 1s easıly covered; grahena yasya kasya ca dharmasya, by the eagerness to grasp, because of the false belief in the reality of an object, whatever it be, that lies within duality-for the covering follows from the perception of duality, and it does not require any additional effort,-and since It is vivnyate, uncovered, revealed, duhkham, with difficulty, the knowledge of the supreme Reality being a rarity; therefore It is not easy to be understood, though spoken of by the Upanisads and the teachers in various ways, as is pointed out by the Vedic text, "The teacher is wonder- ful, and its receiver is wonderful" (Ka. I. i1 7).

IV. 831 MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 387

When the passionate attachment of the learned to even such subtle ideas as the existence of the Self or Its non-existence, becomes a covering of the Lord -the supreme Self, what wonder is there that the passion in the shape of the intellectual preoccupation of the dull should be much more so? The next verse goes on to show this:

अस्ति नास्त्यस्ति नास्तोति नास्ति नास्तीति वा पुनः। चलस्थिरोभयाभावैरावृणोत्येव बालिशः।।८३।। 83. By asserting that the Self "exists", "does not exist", "exists and does not exist", or again "does not exist, does not exist", the non- discriminating man does certainly cover It up through ideas of changeability, unchangeability, both changeability and unchangeability, and non-existence. Some disputant accepts the idea that the Self asti, exists. Another, viz the believer in momentari- ness of things, avers na asti, It does not exist. Another half believer in momentariness, the naked one (i.e. Jaina), who speaks of both existence and non- existence, asserts, asti na asti, It exists and does not exist. The absolute nihilist says, na asti, na asti, It does not exist, It does not exist. Of these states, that of existence is calah, changeable, it being different from such impermanent things as a jar;1 and

1 An object of perception is inconstant; the perceiving soul is different from it and reacts to it diversely, being, according to Nyaya-Vaisesika, sometimes happy and some- times sorry with regard to the same object.

388 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 83

the state of non-existence is sthirah, changeless, it being ever constant.1 The state of both existence and non-existence, is ubhayam, of either kind, since it relates to both the changeable and the changeless.2 And abhāvah relates to an absolute non-existence.3 Bāliśah means a fool, a non-discriminating man. Each one of the fools, whether cailing the Self existing or not, eva, surely; avrnoti, covers up, the Lord, cala- sthira-ubhaya-abhavaih, by ideas of changeability, unchangeability, both changeability and unchange- ability, and non-existence-which all belong to the four alternatives. The idea implied is that when even a learned man who has not realised the supreme truth is but a fool, nothing need be spoken of one who is naturally stupid.

Of what nature, then, is the supreme Reahty, by knowing which one gets rid of stupidity and becomes enlightened? The answer is: कोट्यश्चतस्र एतास्तु ग्रहैर्यासां सदाऽऽवृतः । भगवानाभिरस्पृष्टो येन दष्ः स सर्वदक्।।८४।। 84. These are the four alternative theories, through a passion for which the Lord remains ever hidden. He who sees the Lord as untouched by these is omniscient.

1 According to those who deny the existence of a per- ceiver apart from the intellect etc., the demial remains constant for non-existence is changeless : The view of the Jainas 3 The view of the nihilistic Buddhists.

IV. 85] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 389

Etah catasrah kotyah, these four alternative theories, viz "It exists", "It does not exist", and so on, that have been already mentioned and that are the conclusions arrived at by the scriptures of the dogmatic disputants; grahaih yasām, through the acceptance, through the conviction arising from the realisation, of which alternatives; bhagavān, the Lord; remains sadā avrtah, ever covered; to those sophists alone. Sah, he, the reflective sage; yena, by whom; drstah, has been realised; that Lord who, though remaining covered to the sophists, is really asprstah abhih, untouched by these-these four alternative theories of existence, non- existense, etc -he who has realised the all-pervasive Being found and presented in the Upanisads alone; sah, that sage; is sarvadrk, omniscient; or to put it otherwise, he is the truly enlightened man. प्राप्य सर्वज्ञतां कृत्सां ब्राह्मण्यं पदमद्दयम्। अनापन्नादिमध्यान्तं किमतः परमीहते॥८५॥ 85. Does one make any effort after having attained omniscience in its fullness and having reached the non-dual state of Brahmanahood, that has no beginning, middle and end? Prāpya, having attained; sarvajnatām kytsnām, omniscience in its fullness; and having reached the advayam brāhmanyam padam, non-dual state of Brahmanahood, as indicated in the Vedic text, "He (who departs from this world after knowing this immutable Brahman) is a Brāhmana (i.e. a knower of Brahman)" (Br. III.viii.Io), "This is the eternal glory of a Brāhmana (i.e. a knower of Brahman): (it

390 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 85

neither increases nor decreases through work)" (Br. IV. iv. 23); which (state) anāpannādimadhyāntam, has no beginning, middle, or end-that is to say, origin, continuance, and dissolution; kim ihate, does one make any effort; atah param, after this, after this attain- ment of the Self? The idea is that any effort becomes useless in accordance with the Smrti text, "He has no end to achieve here either through activity or through inactivity" (G.III.18). विप्राणां विनयो ह्ेष शमः प्राकृत उच्यते। दम: प्रकृतिदान्तत्वादेवं विद्वाञ्शमं व्रजेत् ॥८६॥ 86. This is the modesty of the Brahmanas, this is their tranquillity, and this is their natural self-restraint resulting from spontaneous poise. Having known thus, the illumined man gets established in tranquillity. This continuance in the state of identity wth the Self ıs the natural vinayah, modesty; viprānām, of the Brahmanas. This is their humility, and this is also ucyate, called; their prākrtah samah, natural mental tranquillity. Damah, self-restraint, too, is this only; prakrtidāntatvāt, because of (their) spontaneous poise, Brahman being by nature quiescent. Evam uidvān, having known thus, known Brahman as naturally tranquil; the vidvan, enlightened man; vrajet, should attain, that is to say, remains established in; śamam, tranquillty, that is spontaneous and that is the very nature of Brahman.

Thus since the philosophies of the sophists are at conflict with each other, they lead to the worldly

IV. 87] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 39I

state, and they are the hot-houses for such drawbacks as attraction and repulsion. Accordingly, they are false philosophies. After having proved this fact by their own logic, the conclusion arrived at was that, being free from all the four alternatives, the most perfect philosophy is the naturally tranquil philosophy of non-duality which does not engender such faults as attachment etc. Now the following text starts to show our own process of arriving at truth:

सवस्तु सोपलम्भं च दयं लौकिकमिष्यते। अवस्तु सोपलम्भं च शुद्धं लौकिकमिष्यते॥८७॥ 87. The ordinary (waking) state is admitted to be that duality, co-existing with things of empirical existence and fit to be experienced. The objectless ordinary (dream) state is admitted to be without any object and yet as though full of experience. Savastu, empirical existence, is that which co- exists with a real (empirical) thing; similarly sopalam- bham is that which coexists with experience. This is dvayam duality, that is the source of all behaviour, scriptural and other, and that is characterised by the subject-object relationship. It is laukikam, the ordinary state, or in other words, the state of waking. The waking state is isyate, admitted, to be such in the Upanisads. That which is avastu, unsubstantial, there being an absence of empirical existence as well; which is sopalambham, associated with experience of things, as it were, though in fact there is no object; that is isyate, admitted, in the dream state; to be śuddham,

392 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 87

pure, objectless, subtler than the gross objects of the waking state; and it is laukikam, ordinary, being common to all beings. अवस्त्वनुपलम्भं व लोकोत्तरमिति स्मृतम्। ज्ञानं ज्ञेयं च विज्ञेयं सदा बुद्धः प्रकीतितम्॥८८॥ 88. It is traditionally held that the extraordinary is without content and without experience. Knowledge, the knowable, and the realisable are for ever declared by the wise.

That which is avastu, unsubstantial; ca, and; anupalambham, without experience, or in other words, that which is devoid of the subject and the object; is smrtam, traditionally held, to be, lokottaram, beyond the ordinary, and therefore super-normal, for while the ordinary consists of the subject and the objects, in it there is an absence of these. It is the seed of all activity, that is to say, it is the state of deep sleep. That (mental state) is called jñānam, knowledge, by which is known in succession the supreme Reality together with Its means (of realisation), the ordinary, the objectless ordinary, and the extraordinary. The jneyam, object of knowledge; comprises all these three states, for logically there is no object (of knowl- edge) over and above these, the objects fancied by all the sophists being verily included in them. Vijñeyam, the object of realisation, is the supreme Reality that is called the Fourth, that is to say, the non-dual and birthless Reality that is the Self. All this, ranging from the ordinary to the realisable, prakirtitam, is declared; sarvada, for ever; buddhaih, by the wise,

IV. 89] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 393

by the seers of the summum bonum, by the knowers of Brahman.

ज्ञाने च त्रिविधे जेये क्रमेण विदिते स्वयम्। सर्वज्ञता हि सर्वत्र भवतीह महाधिय: ॥८६।। 89. When, after the acquisition of the knowledge (of the threefold object) and the knowledge of the knowables in succession, the supreme Reality becomes self-revealed, then there emerges here, for the man of supreme intellect, the state of all-pervasiveness and omniscience for ever. Jñāne (vidite), when (after) knowledge-knowl- edge of the ordmnary etc .- is acquired; and mñeye trividhe kramena (vrdite), when (after) the knowables of three kinds are known in succession-viz first the gross ordinary, then when these are not present, the objectless ordinary, and in the absence of that again, the extraordinary; and then when the three states are eliminated and the supreme Reality, the Fourth, non- dual, birthless, fearless vidite, has become known; svayam, of Its own accord; then mahadhiyah, for the man of great intellect; bhavati, there emerges; iha, here, in this world; sarvajnata, the state of being all and the knower; sarvatra, for ever; since his realisa- tion relates to what transcends all the universe; that is to say, if It is known once, It never leaves him. For unlike the knowledge of the sophists, there is no appearance or disappearance for the knowledge of the man who has realised the highest Truth.

394 EIGHT UPANIŞADS [IV. 90

From the fact that the ordinary state etc. have been presented as objects to be known successively, some one may conclude that they have real existence. Hence it is said: हेयज्ञेयाप्यपाक्यानि विज्ञेयान्यग्रयाणतः। तेषामन्यत्र विज्ञेयादुपलम्भस्त्रिषु स्मृतः ॥६०॥ 90. Things to be rejected, realised, accepted, and made ineffective are to be known at the very beginning. From among them, the three, except- ing the realisable, are traditionally held to be only fancies resulting from ignorance. The heya, rejectable, are the three states counting from the ordinary. That is to say, just like the denial of an illusory snake on the rope, waking, dream, and sound sleep are to be denied as having any existence in the Self. The jñeya, thing to be known (realısca), in this context, is the supreme Reality, free from the four alternatives (Kārikā, IV.83). The apya, acceptable, are the disciplines, called scholarship, the strength arising from knowledge, and meditativeness,1 that are to be accepted by the monk after discarding the three kinds of desire (for progeny, property, and worlds). Pākyāni, those that are fit to be rendered ineffective- the blemishes, viz attraction, repulsion, delusion, etc., called passions (kaşāyas). All these, viz those that are to be rejected, known, accepted, and rendered 1 Br. III v I: "Therefore the knower of Brahman, Faving known all about scholarship, should try to live upon the strength which comes of knowledge; having known all about this strength as well as scholarship, he becomes medi- tative."

IV. 91] MĀŅŅŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 395

ineffective, are to be vijneyāni, known well; by the monk; agrayānatah, in the beginning; as (his) means. Tesam, among those, among the things to be rejected etc ; smrtah, it is held traditionally; by the knowers of Brahman; that vijneyat anyatra, apart from Brahman alone that is to be realised, that is the ultimate Reality; there is upalambhah, a mere imagination of perception, owing to ignorance, with regard to all the three, that . are rejectable, acceptable, and fit to be made meffec- tive. They are not, however, admitted to be true from the highest standpoint.

But from the ultimate standpoint:

प्रकृत्याSSकाशवज्ज्ञेयाः सर्वे धर्मा अनादयः । विद्यते न हि नानात्वं तेषां क्वचन किचन ॥६१।। 91. All the souls should be known as naturally analogous to space and as eternal. There is no plurality among them anywhere, even by a jot or tittle.

Sarve dharmah, all the souls; jneyāh, are to be known; by those who hanker after liberation; to be prakrtyā, by nature; ākāsavat, analogous to space, in point of subtleness, freedom from taints, and all- pervasiveness; and (to be) anādayah, eternal. Lest any misconception of diversity be created by the use of the plural number, the text says by way of removing it, nanatvam, plurality; na vidyate, does not exist; teşam, among them; kvacana, anywhere; kim cana, even by a jot or tittle.

396 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 92

And as for the souls being objects of cognition, that, too, is merely in accord with empirical experi- ence but not with Reality. This is being stated:

आदिबुद्धाः प्रकृत्यध सरवें धर्माः सुनिश्चिताः । यस्यैवं भवति क्षान्तिः सोऽमृतत्वाय कल्पते ॥६२।। 92. All the souls are, by their very nature, illumined from the beginning, and their characteristics are well determined. He, to whom ensues in this way the freedom from the need of any further acquisition of knowledge, becomes fit for immortality. Since just like the ever effulgent sun, sarve dharmāh, all the souls; are prakrtya eva, by their very nature; adibuddhah, illumined from the very beginning, that s to say, as the sun is ever shining, so are they ever of the nature of Consciousness, (therefore) there is no need for ascertaining their character; or in other words, their nature is ever well established, and it is not subject to such doubts as to "whether it is so or not so." As the sun is ever independent of any other light, for its own sake or for any other, so yasya, he, for whom, for which seeker after liberation; bhavati, there occurs; in his own soul, kşāntih, a freedom from any need of further acquisi- tion of knowledge-either for himself or for others; evam, thus, in the way described above; sah, that man; kalpate, becomes fit; amrtatvāya, for immorta- lity; that is to say, he becomes able to attain liberation. Similarly, there is no need for bringing about tranquillity in the Self. This is being pointed out:

IV. 94] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 397

आदिशान्ता ह्यनुत्पन्नाः प्रकृत्यैव सुनिर्वृताः। सर्वे धर्मा: समाभिन्नाः अजं साम्यं विशारदम् ॥६३॥ 93. Since the souls are, from the beginning, tranquil, unborn, and by their very nature com- pletely unattached, equal, and non-different, and since Reality is (thus) birthless, uniform, and holy, (therefore there is no need for any acqui- sition etc.).

Since sarve dharmāh, all the souls; are ādiśāntāḥ, tranquil from the beginning, always peaceful; and anutpannāh, birthless; prakrtyā eva sunirvrtāh, com- pletely detached by their very nature; sama-abhinnāh, equal and non-different; and since the reality of the Self is ajam, birthless; sāmyam, equipoised (uniform); visāradam, holy; therefore there is no such thing as peace or liberation that has to be brought about. This is the idea. For anything done can have no meaning for one that is ever of the same nature.

Those who have grasped the ultimate Truth, as described, are the only people in the world who are not pitiable; but the others are to be pitied. This is being stated:

वैशारद्यं तु वै नास्ति भेदे विचरतां सदा। भेदनिम्नाः पृथग्वादास्तस्मात्ते कृपणा: स्सृताः॥६४॥ 94. There can be no perfection for people who have proclivity for multiplicity, and tread for ever the path of duality and talk of plurality. Hence they are traditionally held to be pitiable.

398 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 94

Since they are bhedanimnah, they have a proch- vity for duality, follow duality-that is to say, confine themselves to the world. Who are they? Prthagvādāh, those who talk of a multiplicity of things, or in other words, the dualists. Tasmat, therefore; they are smrtāh, traditionally held to be; krpanāh, pitiable, since na asti, there is no; vaisāradyam, perfection; teşam sada uicaratām bhede, for those who are ever roaming about in duality, that is to say, for those who ever persist in the path of duality conjured up by igno- rance. Consequently it is proper that they should be objects of pity. The next verse says that the nature of the supreme Truth is beyond the ken of those who have not the requisite expansion of heart, who are not learned, who are outside the pale of Vedanta, who are narrow- minded, and who are dull of intellect. अजे साम्ये तु ये केचिद्धविष्यन्ति सुनिश्चिताः । ते हि लोके महाज्ञानास्तच्च लोको न गाहते॥६५॥। 95. They alone will be possessed of unsurpassable knowledge in this world, who will be firm in their conviction with regard to that which is birthless and uniform. But the ordinary man cannot grasp that (Reality). Ye kecit, those who, perchance; even though thev be women; bhavisyanti, will become; suniścitāh, firm in conviction; with regard to the nature of the ultimate Reality, aje samye, that is birthless and uniform; te hi loke makājnānāh, they alone are possessed of great wisdom, or in other words, endowed with unsurpassing

IV. 96] MĀNDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 399

knowledge about Reality, in this world. Ca na lokah, and nobody, no other man of ordinary intellect; gahate, can dip into, that is to say, grasp; tat, that thing, viz their path and their content of knowledge-the nature of the ultimate Reality. For it is stated in the Smrti, "As it is not possible to sketch the flight of birds in the sky, so even the gods get puzzled in trying to trace the course of one who has become identified with the Self of all beings, who is a source of bliss to all, and who has no goal to reach" (Mbh. Sā. 239. 23-24).

The next verse says in what their great knowledge consists:

अजेष्व जमसंक्रान्तं धर्मेषु ज्ञानमिष्यते। यतो न क्रमते ज्ञानमसङ़गं तेन कीर्तितम्॥६६॥

96. It is traditionally held that the knowl- edge inhering in the birthless souls is unborn and non-relational. Since the knowledge has no objective relation, it is said to be unattached.

Since isyate, it is traditionally held; that the jñānam, knowledge; ajesu dharmesu, inhering in the birthless, steady, souls; is ajam, birthless, steady; like light and heat in the sun; therefore that knowledge which is asamkrantam, unassociated with any other object; ajam isyate, is said to be unborn. Yatah, since, jñanam, the knowledge; na kramate, does not relate, to any other object; tena, because of that reason; it is kirtitam asangam, proclaimed to be non- relational, like space.

400 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 97

अणुमात्रेऽपि वैधम्ये जायमानेऽविपश्चितः। असङ्गता सदा नास्ति किमुतावरणच्युति:॥६७। Should there be origination for anything however insignificant, there can never be any non- 97.

attachment for the non-discriminating man;1 what

him ? need one speak of the destruction of covering for

If, in accordance v with the other schools of dis- putants, jāyamāne vaidharmye aņumātre apı, it be admitted that there is origination for any object, inside or outside, however insignificant it be; then na astı, there can be no; asangatā, non-attachment; sadā, for ever; avipaścitah, for that non-discriminating man. Kum uta, should one say that there is no; avarana- cyutih, destruction of covering? Objection : By asserting that there is no removal of covering, you lay yourself open to the charge of accept- ing a covering for the souls as your own conclusion. To this it is answered, "No." अलब्धावरणा: सरवे धर्माः प्रकृतिनिमलाः । आदौ बुद्धास्तथा मुक्ता बुध्यन्त इति नायका: ॥६८॥ 98. No soul ever came under any veil. They are by nature pure as well as illumined and free from the very beginning. Thus being endowed with the power (of knowledge), they are said to know. Sarve dharmāh, all the souls; alabdhāvaranāh, never had any veil, any bondage of ignorance etc., 1 For the slightest idea of origination carres with it the idea of the subject-object relation i e. duality.

IV. 99] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 40z

that is to say they are free from bondage; and they are prakrtınirmalāḥ intrinsically pure; buddhāh tatha muktah, illumined and also free; adau, from the beginning; since they are by nature ever pure, illu- mined and free. If they are so, why is it said that they budhyante, know? The answer is: They are nāyakāh, masters, have the power, of learning; that is to say, they are by nature endowed with the power of knowledge. This is just like saying, "The sun shines", though the very nature of the sun is constant effulgence; or like saying, "The hills stand", though it is the very nature of the hills to be perpetually motionless. क्रमते न हि बुद्धस्य ज्ञानं धर्मेषु तायिनः । सवे धर्मास्तथा ज्ञानं नैतदुबुद्धेन भाषितम् ॥१६॥ 99. The knowledge of the enlightened man, who is all-pervasive, does not extend to objects; and so the souls, too, do not reach out to objects. This view was not expressed by Buddha. Hi, since; jñānam, the knowledge; buddhasya, of the enlightened one, who has realised the ultimate Reality; tayinah, of the all-pervading one, of the one who has no interstices like space, or of the one who is either adorable or intelligent; na kramate, does not extend to other dharmesu, objects; that is to say, his. knowledge is ever centred in (or identified with) the soul like light in the sun. Tathā, similarly, like knowledge itself; sarve dharmah, all the souls; do not extend to other things whatsoever, the souls being analogous to (all-pervasive) space. This is the mean- 26

402 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 99

ıng The knowledge that was introduced in "through his knowledge that is comparable to space" (Kārıkā, IV. I), is this knowledge that is analogous to space, that does not reach out to other things, and that be- longs to the enlightened one who is all-pervasive by virtue of his identity with knowledge itself Like the reality of the Self that is but Brahman, they are un- changing, immutable, partless, eternal, non-dual, unattached, invisible, unthinkable, beyond hunger etc., as is said in the Vedic text, "for the vision of the witness can never be lost" (Br. IV.ni 23). That the nature of the supreme Reality is free from the differ- ences of the knowledge, the known, and the knower and is without a second, etat na bhāsitam buddhena, this thing was not expressed by Buddha; though a near approach to non-dualsm was implied in his negation of outer objects and his imagination of every- thing as mere consciousness. But this non-duality, the essence of the ultimate Reality, is to be known from the Upanisads only. This is the purport. At the end of the treatise a salutation is uttered in praise of the knowledge of the supreme Reality: दुर्दर्शमतिगम्भीरमजं साम्यं विशारदम्। बुद्ध्वा पद्मनानात्वं नमस्कुर्मो यथाबलम्॥१००॥ I00. After realising that State (of Reality) that is inscrutable, profound, birthless, uniform, holy, and non-dual, we make our obeisance to It to the best of our ability. Durdarsam, that which can be seen with difficulty, that is to say, inscrutable, It being devoid of the

IV. I00] MĀŅDŪKYA KĀRIKĀ 403

four alternatives of existence, non-existence, etc. (Kārikā, IV. 83); and hence atıgambhīram, profound, unfathomable like an ocean; to the people lacking in discrimination. Ajam, birthless; samyam, uniform, viśāradam, holy. Buddhvā, having realised, having become identified with; this kind of padam, State; that is anānatvam, non-duality; namaskurmah, we make our obeisance, to that State, yathabalam, to the best of our ability; by bringing It within the range of empirical dealings, though It defies all relative experi- ence This is the idea.

Salutation by the commentator: I. I bow down to that Brahman which, though birthless, appears to be born through Its inscrutable power; which, though ever quiescent, appears to be in motion; which, though one, appears to be multiple to those whose vision has become perverted by the perception of diverse attributes of objects; and which destroys the fear of those who take shelter in It. 2. I salute by prostrating myself at the feet of that teacher of my teacher,1 the most adorable among the adorable, who, on seeing the creatures drowned in the sea (of the world), infested with sea monsters having incessant births and deaths, rescued, out of compassion for all beings, this nectar, difficult to be obtained even by gods and lying in the depths of the ocean, called the Vedas, which 'he stirred up by insert- ing the churning rod of his illumined intellect. 1 Gaudapāda, the teacher of Govindapada who taught Śańkara.

404 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. I00

3. I offer my obeisance with my whole being to those sanctifying feet-the dispellers of the fear of transmigration-of my own teacher, through the light of whose illumined intellect was dispelled the dark- ness of delusion enveloping my own mind, who des- troyed for ever my fear of appearance and disappear- ance in this terrible sea of innumerable births, and having taken shelter at whose feet others also get unfailingly the knowledge of the Upanisads, self- control, and humility.

PRASNA UPANISAD

ॐ भद्रं कर्णेभि: शणुयाम देवा भद्रं पश्येमाक्षभिर्यजत्राः।

व्यशेम देवहितं यदायुः॥ स्वस्ति न इन्द्रो वृद्धश्रवाः स्वस्ति न पूषा विश्ववेदाः। स्वस्ति नस्तार्क्ष्यो अरिष्ठनेमिः स्वस्ति नो बृहस्पतिदधातु॥ ॐ शान्ति: शान्ति: शान्ति: ।

(For translation, see p. 78).

PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD

FIRST QUESTION

This brähmana1 is begun as an elaborate reitera- tion of the subject matter already dealt with in the mantra portion.2 The story in the form of questions and answers by the Rsis is meant for eulogising the knowledge. Knowledge is thus praised by showing that it can be acquired by those who are endowed with self- control and who undergo such disciplines as living in the teacher's house for a year under the vow of brahmacarya3 and that it can be imparted by people who are almost omniscient lıke Pippalāda and others but not by a non-descript person. Moreover, brahma-

1ie. this Upansad, included in the brahmana portion of the Atharva-Veda 21.e the Mundaka Upanisad which presented the knowledge of the Self and talked of two kinds of knowledge -the higher and the lower The latter relates to both rites and meditation. Of these two kinds of lower knowledge, the first is dealt with in the samhita portion of the Veda, the second is elaborated in the Second and Third Questions of this Upanisad The First Question clarifies the result of both rites and meditation so as to generate a dislike for them. The Fourth Question is meant as an elaboration of the two verses in the Mundaka starting with "As from a blazing fire" (Mu II.i r) The Fifth Question expands the medita- tion stated in the verse, "Om is the bow" etc (Mu II ii 4). The Sixth Question is for elucidating the remaining portion beginning with, "From this emerges Prana" (Mu II 1 3)-A G. 3 Celibacy and study of the Vedas with a pious attitude

408 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. I

carya and other disciplines become obligatory from their reference (in the story): ॐ सुकेशा च भारद्वाज: शैव्यश्च सत्यकामः सौर्यायणी व गाग्यः कौसल्यश्चाश्वलायनो भागवो वैदर्भि: कबन्धी कात्यायनस्ते हैते ब्रह्मपरा ब्रह्मनिष्ठाः परं ब्रह्मान्वेषमाणा एष ह वै तत्सवं वक्ष्यतीति ते ह समित्पाणयो भगवन्तं पिप्पलादमुपसन्नाः ॥१॥ I. Sukeśā, son of Bharadvāja; Satyakāma, son of Sibi; the grandson of Surya, born of the family of Garga; Kausalya, son of Aśvala; a scion of the line of Bhrgu, born in Vidarbha; and Kabandhi, descendant of Katya-all these, who were devoted to (the inferior) Brahman, engaged in realising (the inferior) Brahman, and intent on a search of the supreme Brahman, approached with faggots in hand, the venerable Pippalāda with the belief, "This one will certainly tell us all those things." Sukeśā by name, and (known as) bhāradvājaḥ, (because he was) the son of Bharadvaja. Saibyah, the son of Sibi, who was Satyakäma by name. The son of Surya is Saurya, and Saurya's son is Sauryāyani, the lengthening of i in Sauryayani being a Vedic licence; {and he was a) Gärgya, born of the family of Garga. Kausalya by name (and called) Āśvalāyana (because ne was) the son of Aśvala. Bhärgava is one who was a scion of the line of Bhrgu; and he was Vaidarbhi, being born in Vidarbha. Kabandhi by name; and he was Katyayana, a descendant (i.e. great grandson)

I. 21 PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 409

of Katya, and had his great grandfather living, the suffix in the word being used to imply that sense. Te ha ete, these people who were such; were brahma- parāh, ever devoted to the inferior Brahman, mis- taking that for the superior One; and they were brahmanisthah, engaged in practices leading to Its attainment; and they were param brahma anvesa- mänä, intent on the search of supreme Brahman. What is that Brahman? That which is eternal and a thing to be realised. They, who searched for that Brahman with the idea, "For the sake of attaining It, we shall make efforts to our hearts' content", approa- ched a teacher for knowing about It, with the belief: "Eşah ha vai tat sarvam vaksyati, this one will certainly tell us everything regarding It." How did they go? Samit-panayah, with loads of faggot in hand; te ha, those people; upasannah, approached; bhagavantam pippalādam, the venerable Pippalāda, the teacher.

तान् ह स ऋषिरुवाच भूय एव तपसा ब्रह्मचर्येण श्रद्धया संवत्सरं संवत्स्यथ यथाकामं प्रश्नान् पृच्छत यदि विज्ञास्याम: सर्वं ह वो वक्ष्याम इति ॥२॥ 2. To them the seer said, "Live (here) again 'for a year in a fitting manner, with control over the senses and with brahmacarya and faith. Then put questions as you please. If we know, we shall explain all your questions. Tän, to them, who had approached (him) thus; sah, he; the rsih, seer; uvāca ha, said-"Although you have already practised control of the senses, still

4I0 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. 2

bhuyah eva, over again; you samvatsyatha, dwell (here) in a fitting manner, serving your teacher; samvatsaram, for a year; tapasa, with con- trol of the senses; and especially brahmacaryena, with brahmacarya, and śraddhaya, with faith.1 After that prcchata praśnān, put questions, with regard to any- thing that anyone (of you) may desire to know; yathākāmam, as you please, in accordance with the desire that each of you may entertain. Yadi vijňā- syamah, if we happen to know, what you ask; vaksyāmah, we shall explain; sarvam ha, all, that you ask. The word "if" is used to express the absence of conceit, but not to betray ignorance or doubt, which fact is obvious from the solution of the questions (by him).

अथ कबन्धी कात्यायन उपेत्य पप्रच्छ। भगवन् कुतो ह वा इमा: प्रजाः प्रजायन्त इति॥३॥ 3. After that Kabandhi, descendant of Katya, having approached (him), asked, "Vener- able sir, from what indeed are all these beings born ?"

Atha, after that, after the lapse of a year; kabandhi kātyāyanah, Kabandhī, great grandson of Katya, upetya, having approached (him); papraccha, asked; "Bhagavan, venerable sir; kutah ha vai, from what indeed; imāh prajāh, these beings, counting from the Brāhmanas; prajāyante, are born? The result obtained

1 Faith in the truth of the scriptures and the teacher's words

I. 4] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 4II

and the course merited, by following the rites and the lower knowledge in combination, have to be stated; and hence this question.

तस्मै स होवाव प्रजाकामो वै प्रजापतिः स तपोS- तव्यत स तपस्तप्त्वा स मिथुनमुत्पादयते। रयिं च प्राणं चेत्येतौ मे बहुधा प्रजा: करिष्यत इति ॥४॥ 4. To him he said: The Lord of all creatures became desirous of progeny. He deliberated on (past Vedic) knowledge. Having brooded on that knowledge, He created a couple- food and Prana-under the idea, "These two will produce creatures for me in multifarious ways." Tasmai, to him, who had inquired thus; sah ha uvāca, he said; in order to solve that question. Having become prajākāmah var, desirous of creating progeny, for Himself-being filled with the idea, "I shall create by becoming the soul of all"; prajapatih, the Lord of creatures, who having practised (meditation and rites conjointly in his earlier life) as already mentioned, and being full of that thought, evolved, at the com- mencement of a cycle (of creation), as Hiranya- garbha1 by becoming the Lord of all moving and motionless creatures, that were being created. And

1 In His previous life He was a human aspirant meditat- ing on Prajāpati (Hiranyagarbha) with the belief, "I am Prajapati, identified with all " That intense meditation made Hım Prajāpati at the beginning of the present cycle of creation. Even then the belief that He is Prajapati persisted, and He had still in His mind all the Vedic knowl- edge acquired earlier.

412 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. 4

having become Hıranyagarbha, sah tapah atapyata, He practised, deliberated on, the tapas consisting in the knowledge which was acquired in the past life and which related to objects revealed by the Vedas. Then tapas taptvā, after having practised tapas in that way, having revolved in His mind the Vedic knowledge; sah, He; utpadayate, created; mithunam, a couple, that is instrumental to creation, (the couple, viz) rayim ca, the moon, the food; prānam ca, and Prana, fire, the eater (the sun). After creating the cosmic egg, He created the sun and the moon under the idea, "Etau, these two, viz fire and moon, which are the eater and the eaten; prajāh karisyatah, will produce creatures; bahudhā, multifariously; me, for me "1

आदित्यो ह वै प्राणो रयिरैव चन्द्रमा रयिर्वा एतत् सर्वं यन्मूरतं चामूतं च तस्मान्मूर्तिरेव रयिः ।५।।

5. The sun is verily Prana; and food is verily the moon. Whatever is gross or subtle is but food. The gross, as distinguished from that (subtle), is certainly food. Of these adityah ha vat, the sun, verily; is prānah, Prana-the eater, fire; rayih eva, the food is verily, candrama, the moon; rayih is certainly the food and it is the moon. That which is the eater and that ' He projected the couple, the sun and the moon, and became identified with it. Then He created the year that is dependent on that couple, and became identified with the year. Thus successively He produced and became identified with the half year, month, fortnight, day and night; rice, barley, and other focdstuff semen and creatures Prana and rayr convey the ideas of energy and matter

I. 6] PRASNA UPANIȘAD 4I3

which is the food are but one; they are but Prajapati who has become the couple, the distinction being made from the standpoint of superiority and inferiority. How? Etat sarvam, all this; rayih vai, is but food. All of what? Yat murtam, whatever is formed, gross; ca amurtam, and whatever is formless, subtle; all gross and subtle things, which constitute the food and the eater, are but rayıh, food. The murth, gross; which is different tasmät, from that, from the subtle, which is wholly distinct, is indeed rayih, food, since it is eaten up by the formless.1

Similarly, the formless Prāna (Life), the eater, is also everything that is eaten, and hence it is all. How?

अथादित्य उदयन्यत्प्राचीं दिशं प्रविशति तेन प्राच्यान् प्राणान् रश्मिषु संनिधत्ते। यद्दक्षिणां यत् प्रतीचीं यदुदीचीं यदधो यदूर्ध्वं यदन्तरा दिशो यत् सर्वं प्रकाशयति तेन सर्वान् प्राणान् रश्मिषु संनिधत्ते।६।। 6. Now then, the fact that the sun, while rising, enters into the eastern direction, thereby it absorbs into its rays all the creatures in the east. That it enters into the south, that it enters into the west, that it enters into the north, that it reaches the nadir and the zenith, that it enters the intermediate points of the zodiac, that it 1 When no distinction of superior or inferior is made, then everything may be classed as food, for everything is absorbed by something else. But when the distinction is made, the gross gets absorbed in the subtle and is to be considered as food.

4I4 EIGHT UPANISADS [I. 6

illumines all, thereby it absorbs all living things into its rays. Atha, now then; yat, the fact that, adityah udayan, the sun, as it rises up, as it comes within the vision of creatures, prācīm diśam praviśatı, enters, that is to say, pervades, the eastern quarter, through its own light; tena, thereby, by that self-expansion- because these are pervaded by it; it sammdhatte, absorbs; raśmisu, into its rays, that are but its own pervasive lıght; prācyān prānān, all that lives in, all the creatures that happen to be included in, the eastern quarter, they being pervaded by its light; that is to say, it makes them one with itself Similarly yat, the fact; that it enters into the daksinam, southern direc- tion; yat praticim, that it enters into the western direc- tion; yat udicim, that it enters into the northern direc- tion, yat, that it enters into, adhah urdhvam, the nadir, the zenith; yat antaräh disah, that it enters into the inter-spaces, other points of the zodiac; yat ca sarvam prakāsayati, and the fact that it illumines all other things; tena, thereby, by that pervasion through its own light; it samnidhatte, absorbs; raśmisu, into the rays; sarvān prānan, all that lives.

स एष वैश्वानरो विश्वरूपः प्राणोऽग्निरुदयते।

7. That very one rises up who is Prana and fire, who is identified with all creatures, and who is possessed of all forms. This very one, that has been referred to, is spoken of by the mantra:

I 8] PRAŚNA UFANIAD 4I5

Sah eşah, that very one, the eater; (rises up) who ıs prānah varśvānarah, Prāna identified with all creatures; and who is viśvarūpah, possessed of all forms, being embodied in the universe. That eater, again, that is Prana and agnih, fire; udayate, rises, every day, absorbing into himself all the cardinal points. Etat tat, this very entity, that has been referred to above, is also abhyuktam, spoken of, ycā, by the (following) mantra. विश्वरूपं हरिणं जातवेदसं परायणं ज्योतिरेकं तपन्तम्। सहस्ररश्मिः शतधा वर्तमानः प्राणः प्रजानामुदयत्येष सूर्य: ।।८।। 8. (The realisers of Brahman knew the one that is) possessed of all forms, full of rays, endowed with illumination, the resort of all, the single light (of all), and the radiator of heat. It is the sun that rises - the sun that possesses a thousand rays, exists in a hundred forms, and is the life of all creatures. The enlightened realısers of Brahman knew, as their own soul, that sun that is viśvarupam, possessed of all forms; harinam, full of rays; jātavedasam, endowed with enlightenment;1 parayanam, the resort of all lives; ekam jyotih, the only one light, the eye, of all beings; tapantam, the radiator of heat. Who is that whom they knew? Esah, this is; sūryah, the sun; that udayati, rises ;- the sun that is sahasraraśmih, 1 The phrase may mean, "The knower of all that is born".

416 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. 8

possessed of a thousand rays; śatadhā vartamānaḥ, that exists in a hundred (many) ways, in conformity with the difference of the creatures; and that is prānah prajānām, the life of creatures.

It is being explained how this single pair-consti- tuted by that which is the moon, the gross, the food (on the one hand), and that which is the formless Prāna, the eater, the sun (on the other)-could pro- duce the creatures: संवत्सरो वै प्रजापतिस्तस्यायने दक्षिणं चोत्तरं च। तद्ये ह वै तदिष्टापूर्ते कृतमित्युपासते ते चान्द्रमसमेव लोकमभिजयन्ते। त एव पुनरावर्तन्ते तस्मादेत ऋषयः प्रजाकामा दक्षिणं प्रतिपद्यन्ते। एष ह वै रयिर्यः पितृयाण: ॥६।। 9. The year is verily the Lord of creatures. Of Him there are two Courses, the Southern and the Northern. As to that, those who follow, in that way, the sacrifices and public good etc. that are products of action, conquer the very world of the moon. It is they who come back. (Since this is so), hence these seers of heaven, who are desirous of progeny, attain the Southern Course. That which is the Course of the Manes is verily food.

That very couple is the time, called samvatsarah, the year; (and that agamn is) praiabatth, the Lord of creatures; for the year is brought about by that pair, the year being but a collection of the lunar days, and

I 9] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 417

solar days and nights, brought about by the moon and the sun. Being non-different from the food and Prana, the Year is said to be identical with that couple. How is that so? Tasya, of that Lord of the creatures, that the Year is; there are ayane, two Courses; daksinam ca uttaram ca, the Southern and the Northern. These are the two well-known Courses, consisting each of six months, along which the sun moves to the south and the north, ordaning the results for those who perform rites alone as well as those who undertake rites along with meditation. How is that? Tat, as to that; ye ha vat, those who; from among people, counting from the Brähmanas, upāsate, follow; iștāpurte, sacrifices and public good; iti, etc .; tat, in that way; that are krtam, product of action, but who do not follow the uncreated Eternal-the second tat, meaning "in that way", being used adverbially :- (they) abhijayante, conquer, candramasam eva lokam, the very world of the moon, the world constituted by food which is the portion, called rayr (food), of the Lord of the creatures who comprises a pair. This is so because the moon is krta, a result of action When the result of action is exhausted there, te eva punah āvartante, it is they who come back again, for it has been said, "They enter into this or an inferior world" (Mu. I. 1i. 10). Sınce in this way ete, these; ysayah, seers of heaven; prajakamah, who are desirous of progeny, the householders, attain the world of the- moon-the Lord of creatures, identified with food- as the result of their sacrificial and pious acts; tasmāt, therefore; they pratipadyante, attain; daksinam, the Southern Course, that is to say, the moon, suggested 27

418 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. 9

by the Southern Course, the moon being itself a result of action. Esah ha vai rayıh, this indeed is food; yah pitryanah, that which is the Path of the Manes, that is to say, the world of the moon, that is suggested by the term Path of the Manes.

अथोत्तरेण तपसा ब्रह्मचर्येण श्रद्धया विद्ययाSडत्मान- मन्विष्यादित्यमभिजयन्ते। एतद्वै प्राणानामायतनमेतद- मृतमभयमेतत् परायणमेतस्मान्न पुनरावर्तन्त इत्येष निरोधस्तदेष श्रोक: ॥१०॥ I0. Again, by searching for the Self through the control of the senses, brahmacarya, faith, and meditation, they conquer the sun (by proceeding) along the Northern Course. This is the resort of all that lives; this is indestructible; this is fear- less; this is the highest goal, for from this they do not come back. This is unrealisable (to the ignorant). Pertaining to this here is a verse: Atha, again; uttarena, by proceeding along the Northern Course; they abhijayante, conquer; that part rof the Lord of creatures which is Prana, the eater, and the sun. Through what? Anvisya, searching for, i.e. knowing; atmanam, the Self, that is Prana, the sun, the Self of the moving and unmoving; as "I am this Prana that is the sun"; tapasa, through the control of the senses; and especially brahmacaryena, through brahmacarya; śraddhayā, through faith; and vidyayā, through meditation, with the idea of the identity of oneself with the Lord of creatures; they abhijayante, conquer, attain; ādityam, the sun. Etat vai, this

I. II] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 419

indeed, is the common āyatanam, resort; prāņānām, of all that lives.1 Etat, this one; is amrtam indestruc- tible; and because of that fact, this is abhayam, free from fear, not subject to the fear of waxing and waning like the moon. Etat parayanam, this one is the supreme goal, for the meditators as well as for the men who combine meditation with rites; iti, for; etasmāt na punah āvartate, from this (they) do not return, like the others who perform rites alone. Esah, this one; is nirodhah, unrealisable; to the ignorant; for the igno- rant are shut off from the sun. These people do not attain the year, the sun, the Self, which is Prana. For that year, identical with time, proves an obstruction to the ignorant. Tat, pertaining to this idea; esah ślokah, here is a verse: पञ्चपादं पितरं द्वादशाकृति दिव आहु: परे अर्धे पुरीषिणम्। अथेमे अन्य उ परे विचक्षणं सप्तचक्रे षडर आहुरपितमिति॥११॥ II. Some talk of (this sun) as possessed of five feet, as the father, as constituted by twelve limbs, and as full of water in the high place above the sky. But there are these others who call him the omniscient and say that on him, as possessed of seven wheels and six spokes, is fixed (the whole universe). The calculators of time ahuh, call, him; pañca- pādam, possessed of five feet, the five seasons being 1 Or "all the organs-eyes etc.," according to Sankarā- nanda.

420 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. II

the feet, as it were, of the sun as identified with the year; for he revolves with those as his feet. In this imagery, late autumn and winter are taken as but one season. (They call him) pitaram, father. He is the father because he is the generator of all. (They call him) dvādaśākrtim, possessed of twelve forms or limbs, or composed of twelve parts consisting of the twelve months. They call him purisinam, full of water;1 ardhe pare dive, in the place above heaven, that is to say, in the third place above the sky.2 U, but; anye ame pare, these others, other calculators of time; (ahuh, call) that very one, vicaksanam, adept, omniscient. (And they) ähuh, say; that like spokes fixed on the nave of a wheel, the whole universe 1s arpitam, fixed; on him, who, as the embodiment of time, is ever on the move-on him saptacakre, as possessed ot seven wheels, in the form of seven horses; and sadare, as endowed with six spokes, the six seasons. Whether he be possessed of five feet and twelve limbs or seven wheels and six spokes, from either point of view it is the year, the embodiment of time, the Lord of all creatures, constituted by the sun and the moon, which is the cause of the world.

He by whom the whole world is sustained is called the year, the Lord of all creatures; and He is wholly evolved into the twelve months which are His limbs:

1The sun being cause of clouds, from which rain comes. 2 It is third counting from this earth, the second being the sky. Heaven in this context does not mean the dwelling place of the gods -A. G.

I. I31 PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 42I

मासो वै प्रजापतिस्तस्य कृष्णपक्ष एव रयि: शुक्क: प्राणस्तस्मादेत ऋृषयः शुक इष्ट कुर्वन्तीतर इतरस्मिन् ॥१२॥ 12. The month verily is the Lord of all creatures. The dark fortnight is His food, and the bright His Prana. Therefore these seers per- form the sacrifices in the bright fortnight. The others perform it in the other. Masah vai, the month verily; which is also praja- patih. the Lord of all creatures, as described before; is constituted by a pair. Tasya, of Hım, of that Lord of creatures, marked by the month; one part, viz krşnapaksah, the dark fortnight; is rayıh, food, the moon, the other part, viz śuklapaksah, the bright fortnight, is Präna, the sun, the eater, fire. Since they look upon Präna, identified with the bright fort- night, as everything, therefore, ete rsayah, these seers, who realise Prāna; śukle istam kurvantı, perform their sacrifice (really) in the bright fortnight, even though they may be performing it in the dark half, since they do not perceive any dark fortnight existing apart from Prana; whereas the others do not see Prāna, and as a result see only that which is marked by dark- ness and obstructs vision. Therefore itare, the others; kurvanti, perform; (the sacrifice really) itarasmin, in the other half, in the dark fortnight, although they may be doing so in the bright half.

अहोरात्रो वै प्रजापतिस्तस्याहरेघ प्राणो रात्रिरेव रयि: प्राणं वा एते प्रस्कन्दन्ति ये दिवा रत्या संयुज्यन्ते ब्रह्मचर्यमेव तद्यद्रात्रौ रत्या संयुज्यन्ते ॥१३॥

422 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. I3

I3. Day and night are verily the Lord of all creatures. Day is surely His Prana and night is certainly the food. Those who indulge in passion in the day, waste away Prana. That they give play to passion at night is as good as celibacy. That Lord of all creatures, marked by the month, gets again circumscribed by the day and night which are His own limbs. Ahorātrah vai prajāpatih, day and night are verily the Lord of all creatures, just as before. Tasya, of Him; ahar eva prāna, the day is surely Prana, the eater and fire; rātrih eva rayih, night is certainly food, just as before. Ete, these people; praskandanti, eject, exhaust, waste away by separating from themselves; pranam, Prana, identified with day. Who are they? Ye, those who, the fools who; divā, in the day time; samyuyante ratyā, indulge in passion, that is to say unite with women who cause passion .... Since this is so, therefore that should not be done. This is a prohibition enjoined by the way. The fact that they samyujyante ratya, give play to passion; rātrau, in the night, in season; tat, that; is brahmacaryam eva, as good as continence; since this is praiseworthy. This too is an injunction, enunciated in passing, that it is one's duty to live with one's wife in due time. As for the relevant topic, it is this: That Lord of all creatures, who has evolved into day and night, exists as identified with such food as rice and barley.

अन्नं वै प्रजापतिस्ततो ह वै तद्रेतस्तस्मादिमा: प्रजाः प्रजायन्त इति ॥१४॥

I. I5] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 423

I4. Food is nothing but the Lord of all creatures. From that indeed issues that human seed. From that are born all these beings.

Evolving thus, prajäpatih, the Lord of all crea- tures; became that annam vai, food to be sure. How? Tatah ha vai, from that food indeed, issues; tat retas, that human seed, that is the origin of creatures. Tasmät, from that seed, as deposited in a woman; prajayante, are born; imāh prajāh, all these creatures, such as men. The question that was raised, "From what indeed are all these beings born?" has thus beem answered by saying that these creatures are born by passing in succession through the pairs starting with the sun and the moon and ending with day and night, and then by proceeding through food, blood, and semen.

तद्ये ह वै तत् प्रजापतिवतं वरन्ति ते मिथुन- मुत्पाद्यन्ते। तेषामेवैष ब्रह्मलोको येषां तपो ब्रह्मचर्य येषु सत्यं प्रतिष्ठितम् ॥१५।। 15. This being so, those who undertake the well-known vow of the Lord of all creatures, beget both sons and daughters. For them alone is this world of the moon in whom there are the vows and continence, and in whom is found for ever avoidance of falsehood. Tat, this being so; ye, those, the householders who -ha and vai are two indeclinables calling up to mind some well-known fact-caranti, undertake; tat prajā- pativratam, that vow of the Lord of all creatures, con-

424 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [I. I5

sisting in living with one's wife in the proper season; for them this is the visible result. What is that? Te, they; utpādayante, beget; mithunam, a pair, both son and daughter. Tesām eva, for those people alone, for those who undertake sacrifices and public good and offer gifts, is this unseen result consisting in esah brahmalokah, this world of Brahman, the world of the moon, that is indicated by the Path of the Manes ;-- (for those) yesam, in whom; there are tapas, vows, as for instance those vows undertaken by one who has completed his study; brahmacaryam, (continence consisting in) not living with one's wife at times other than the proper season; yesu, in whom, again; satyam, truthfulness, avoidance of falsehood; pratisthitam, exists invariably for ever. तेषामसौ विरजो ब्रह्मलोको न येषु जिह्ममनृतं न माया चेति॥१६॥ इति प्रश्नोपनिषदि प्रथम: प्रश्नः । 16. For them is that taintless world of Brahman, in whom there is no crookedness, no falsehood, and no dissimulation. As for the Northern Course, marked out by the sun, which consists of self-identification with Prana; and is virajah, pure, not tainted like the lunar Brahma-loka and not subject to waxing and waning; asau, that one; is tesam, for them. For whom? That is being said. (For those) na yesu jihmam, in whom there is no fraud, no crookedness, unlike the house- holders in whom it becomes inevitable owing to the exigencies of many contradictory social situations.

I I67 PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 425

Moreover, those in whom anrtam, falsehood, does not become unavoidable as it is in the case of householders in the course of play or merriment. Similarly those in whom, unlike the householders, there does not exist any māyā. Māyā, dissimulation, is a kind of false behaviour consisting in showing oneself publicly in some way and acting quite contrariwise. For those competent persons-the brahmacāris (celebates), forest- dwellers, and mendicants-in whom faults do not exist, because there is no occasion for them, is this untainted world of Brahman, just in consonance with the disciplines they undertake. This is the goal for those who undertake rites in conjunction with medita- tion. As for the earlier Brahma-loka, indicated by the moon, it is for those who perform rites alone.

SECOND QUESTION

It has been said that Prana is the eater and the Lord of all creatures. It has to be determined how He is the Lord of all creatures as well as the eater in this body. Hence is this Question begun.1

अथ हैनं भागवो वैदर्भि: पगच्छ। भगवन् कत्येव देवा: प्रजां विधारयन्ते कतर एतत् प्रकाशयन्ते क: पुनरेषां वरिष्ठ इति ॥१॥ I. Next a scion of the line of Bhrgu, born in Vidarbha, asked him, "Sir, how many in fact are the deities that sustain a creature? Which among them exhibit this glory? Which again is the chief among them?" Atha ha, next in order; bhärgavah vaidarbhih, a scion of the line of Bhrgu, who was born in Vidarbha; papraccha, asked; enam, this one: Bhagavan, O ador- able sir; kati eva devāh, how many deities indeed; vidhārayante, chiefly sustain; prajām, a creature, so far as the body is concerned. Katare, which of them, of those deities divided among the organs of sense and action; prakāsayante, exhibit; etat, this, this manifes- tation of their own glory; kah punah, which again; is varisthah, the chief; esam, among these, that exist as body and organs.

1 In this chapter it will be shown that Prana is the chief, the eater, and the Lord of all creation. The next chapter will enjoin His meditation.

II. 3] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 427

तस्मै स होवाचाकाशो ह वा एष देवो वायुरगिरापः पृथिवी वाङ्मनश्चक्षु: श्रोत्रं च। ते प्रकाश्याभि- वदन्ति वयमेतदुबाणमवष्टस्य विधारयामः॥२॥

2. To him he said: Space in fact is this deity, as also are air, fire, water, earth, the organ of speech, mind, eye, and ear. Exhibiting their glory they say, "Unquestionably it is we who hold together this body by not allowing it to disintegrate." Tasmai, to him, who had asked thus; sah, he; uvāca ha, saıd: Ākāsah ha vai eșah devah, space is in fact that deity, vayuh, air; agnih, fire; apah, water; prthivi, earth-these five elements that are the materials of the body; (and) vāk, speech; manas, mind; caksuh, eye; śrotram, ear-these and others that are the organs of action and knowledge-te, they (that is to say), the gods (presiding over these and) identifying themselves with the body and organs; abhivadanti prakāśya, speak by way of exhibiting their glory, while vying for pre- eminence. How do they speak? "It is vayam, we; who, lıke the pillars of a palace, vidhārayāmah, hold together unquestionably; etat banam, this aggregate of body and senses; avastabhya, by holding it aloft, and not allowing it to be disintegrated." This is the idea. तान् चरिष्ठः प्राण उवाच। मा मोहमापद्यथाहमेवैतत् पश्चधाऽडत्मानं प्रविभज्यैतदुबाणमवधटभ्य विधारयामीति तेऽश्रद्दधाना बभूवुः॥३।

428 EIGHT UPANISADS [II. 3

3. To them the chief Prana said, "Do not be deluded. It is I who do not allow it to dis- integrate by sustaining it by dividing myself five- fold." They remained incredulous. Tän, to them, to those who had such egotism; varisthah prānah, the chief Prāņa; uvāca, said; “Mā apadyatha moham, do not fall into delusion, do not cherish in this way any vanity resulting from non- discrimination; for aham eva, it is I who; vidhārayāmi etat bānam avastabhya, sustain this aggregate of body and senses by not allowing it to disintegrate; I support it, pancadhā ātmānam pravibhajya, by dividing myself fivefold, by dividing my functions into those of the outgoing breath etc" Although Prana said so, still te, they; babhūvuh, 'remained; aśraddadhānāḥ, incredulous, thinking, "How can this be so?"

सर्व एवोत्क्रामन्ते तस्मिश्श्र प्रतिष्ठमाने सर्व एव प्रातिष्ठन्ते। तद्यथा मक्षिका मधुकरराजानमुत्कामन्तं सर्वा एवोत्कामन्ते तस्मिश्श प्रतिष्ठमाने सर्वा एव प्रातिष्ठन्त एवं वाङ्मनश्चक्षुःश्रोत्रं च ते प्रीताः प्राणं स्तुन्वन्ति ॥४।। 4. He appeared to be rising up (from the body) out of indignation. As He ascended, all the others, too, ascended immediately; and when He remained quiet, all others, too, remained in position. Just as in the world, all the bees take to flight in accordance as the king of the bees takes to his wings, and they settle down as he does

II. 5] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 429

so, similarly did speech, mind, eye, ear, etc. behave. Becoming delighted, they (began to) praise Prāņa (thus): Noticing their incredulity, sah, that Prana; on His part, became indifferent and utkramate wa, seemed to rise up (from the body); abhimānāt, out of indigna- tion. What happened on his ascent is being made vivid with the help of an illustration. Tasmin utkrä- mati, when He began to rise up; atha, then, imme- diately after; itare sarve eva, all others, all the organs such as the eye; utkrāmante, ascend(ed); ca tasmin pratisthamāne, and when He, Prāna, stayed on, remain- ed quiet, dd not rise up; sarve eva prātisthante, all of them remain(ed) quietly in position. Tat, with regard to this matter, the illustration is: Yathā, as, loke, in the world; maksıkah, bees; sarvah eva, all of them, utkramante, take to flight; madhukara-rājānam utkramantam, as the king of bees, their own king, takes to the wings; ca sarvh eva prātisthante, and all settle down, tasmin pratisthamāne, as he settles down. As in this illustration, so did vāk, speech; manah, mind; caksuh, eye; śrotram, ear; and others (behave). Te, they, having given up their lack of faith, and having realised the greatness of Prāna, and becoming prītāh, delighted; stunvanti prānam, praise Prāna. How did they praise? एषोडगिस्तपत्येष सूर्य एष पर्जेन्यो मघवानेष वायु:। एष पृथिवी रयिर्देष: सद्सच्चामृतं व यत् ।।५।।

430 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II. 5

5. This one (i.e. Prana) burns as fire, this one is the sun, this one is cloud, this one is Indra and air, this one is the earth and food. This god is the gross and the subtle, as well as that which is nectar. Esah, this one, this Prana, in the form of agnih, fire; tapati, burns. Similarly He shines as suryah, the sun. So also as parjanyah, cloud; He varșatı, rains. Moreover, as maghavan, Indra; He protects the crea- tures and endeavours to kill the demons and ogres. Eșah, this one; is vāyuh, air, diversified as different currents like āvaha, pravaha. Furthermore, eșah deva, this deity; is prthivi, the earth; (and) rayih, food, of the whole world;1 sat, the gross; asat, the subtle; ca, and; yat amrtam, that which is nectar that ensures the sustenance of the gods. The point needs no further elaboration.

अरा इव रथनाभी प्राणे सर्वं प्रतिष्ठितम्। ऋचो यजशूषि सामानि यज्ञ: क्षत्रं ब्रह्म च ॥६॥ 6. Like spokes on the hub of a chariot wheel, are fixed on Prana all things-rks, yajus, sāmas, sacrifice, Kșatriya, and Brāhmaņa. Arah iva rathanabhau, as spokes are fixed on the hub of a chariot wheel; so sarvam, everything, starting from faith and ending with name (Pr. VI. 4); pratisthitam, is fixed; prane, on Prana, indeed; during the time of the existence of the world. Similarly, the three 1 As the earth, He supports all; and as food, He nourishes all.

II. 7] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 43I

kınds of mantras-rcah, rks; yajumsi, yajus; sāmān, samas-(metrical, prose, and musical Vedic texts), and the yajñah, sacrifice, that is performed with those mantras; and the ksatram, Ksatriya caste, that protects all, ca, and; brahma, the Brahmana caste, that is qualified for the performance of duties like sacrifice. This Prana is all this.

प्रजापतिश्चरसि गर्भे त्वमेव प्रतिजायसे। तुभ्यं प्राण प्रजास्त्विमा बलिं हरन्ति यः प्राणैः प्रतितिष्ठसि॥9।

7. It is you who move about in the womb as the Lord of creation, and it is you who take birth after the image of the parents. O Prāna, it is for you, who reside with the organs, that all these creatures carry presents. Moreover, He who is called prajapatih, the Lord of creation, tvam eva, is but you. It is you who carasi, move; garbhe, in the womb-of the father (as seed) and of the mother (as child); and (it is you, again, who) pratijayase, take birth after the image of (the parents). Since you are the Lord of creation, your parenthood is a pre-established fact. The purport is this: You, Prana, are identical with all through your assumption of the form of all bodies and embodied beings. Prāna, O Prāņa; it is tubhyam, to you; yah, who; pratitsthasi, reside; pränaih, with the organs, eyes etc., in all the bodies; that imāh prajāh, all these creatures, that there are, counting from human beings; balim haranti, carry presents, through the

432 EIGHT UPANISADS [II 7

eyes etc. Since you reside in all bodies, it is proper that they should carry presents to you; for you are mn fact the eater, and all else is food for you only.

देवानामसि वहितमः पितृणां प्रथमा स्वधा। ऋृषीणां चरितं सत्यमथर्वाद्गिरसामसि॥८॥

8. You are the best transmitter (of libation) to the celestials. You are the food-offering to the Manes that precedes other offerings. You are the right conduct of the organs that constitute the essence of the body and are known as the atharvas. Moreover, you ası, are, vahnitamah, the best carrier, the best transmitter of libations; devānam, to the celestials, beginning with Indra The svadhā, food-offering, made; pitrinam, to the Manes, in the obsequial rite called Nandī-mukha; that is the prathamā, first, that takes precedence over the other offerings in which the deities dominate1-of that food- offering also, you are the transmitter. This is the idea. Furthermore, it is you who asi, are; the satyam caritam, true, right, conduct, consisting in maintain- ing the body etc .; rsinam, of the organs, such as the eyes etc., angirasam, of those (organs) which represent the essence of the body, and which are called the

1 The readings are deva-pradhāna or deva-pradāna. The first reading is adopted in the translation The second reading would give the meaning, "Over the offering to the gods". The Nandi-mukha has to be performed before making the sacrifices to gods.

II. IO] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 433

atharvas according to the Vedic Text, "Prana is indeed atharvā."1

इन्द्रस्त्वं प्राण तेजसा स्द्रोऽसि परिरक्षिता। त्वमन्तरिक्षे चरसि सूर्यस्त्वं ज्योतिषां पतिः ॥।६।। 9. O Prana, you are Indra. Through your valour you are Rudra; and you are the preserver on all sides. You move in the sky-you are the sun, the lord of all luminaries. Prāna, O Prāņa, tvam ası, you are; indraḥ, Indra, the supreme Lord. Tejasa, by valour; you are rudrah, Rudra, engaged in destroying the world. Again during the time of the existence of the world, you, in your benign aspect, are the pariraksitā, preserver (of the universe) on every side. Tvam, you, carasi, revolve, for ever; antarikse, in the sky, through rising and setting Tvam, you; are the suryah, sun; the patih, lord; yotışām, of the luminaries.

यदा त्वमभिवर्षस्यथेमाः प्राण ते प्रजाः । आनन्दरूपास्तिष्ठन्ति कामायान्नं भविष्यतीति ॥१०॥

I0. O Prāna, when you pour down (as rain), then these creatures of yours continue to be in a happy mood under the belief, "Food will be produced to our hearts' content." Yadā, when; tvam, you; abhivarsasi, pour down, by becoming rain cloud; atha, then; getting food;

1 Though Prana is atharva according to this quotation, yet the sense-organs, which are but manifestations of Prāna, are also atharvā. 28

434 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II. I0

imāh prajāh, all these creatures; prānate, live, that is to say, resort to activities characteristic of vitality. Or (reading prāna te in place of prānaie): prāna, O Prana, imah prajah te, these creatures of yours-which are one with you and which are nourished by your food; at the very sight of the rain you pour down; tisthantı, continue to be; ānandarūpāh, like people possessed of happiness; their idea being this, "Annam bhavisvati, food will be produced; kāmāya, to our hearts' content."

वात्यस्त्वं प्राणैकर्षिरत्ता विश्वस्य सत्पतिः । वयमाद्यस्य दातारः पिता त्वं मातरिश्व नः ॥११॥ II. O Prāņa, you are unpurified, you are the fire Ekarsi, the eater, and you are the lord of all that exists. We are the givers of (your) food. O Mātariśvā, you are our father. Besides, prāna, O Prāņa; tvam, you, are; vrātyah, unpurified-having been born first, you had none to baptise you; the idea is that you are naturally pure. As the fire called ekarşih, Ekarși, that is well known among the followers of the Atharva-Veda; you become the atta, eater, of all oblations. You are the saipatih viśvasya, the lord of all that exists, satpatih being derived in the sense of the lord (pati) of what exists (sat). Or (viśvasya) satpatıh may mean the holy lord (of the universe). Vayam, we, again; are dātārah, givers, to you; ādyasya, of food. Mātariśva, O Mātariśvā (Air); tvam, you; are nah pita, our father, (the word mātariśva being taken as a Vedic use for

II. I3] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 435

matarisvan). Or if the reading be mātarisvanah, the meaning (of the sentence) will be: Tvam, you, are the pita, father, mātarisvanah, of Mātarisvā (Air) 1 Hence also is established your fatherhood of the whole universe

या ते तनूर्वाचि प्रतिष्ठिना या श्रोत्रे या च चक्षुषि। या च मनसि सन्तता शिवां तां कुरु मोत्क्रमीः॥१२।

I2. Make calm that aspect of yours that is lodged in speech, that which is in the ear, that which is in the eye, and that which permeates the mind. Do not rise up. To be brief, yā tanuh te, that aspect of yours, which, is pratisthita, lodged; väci, in speech, which makes the effort of speaking as a speaker, yā śrotre, that which is in the ear, ca ya caksusi, and that which is in the eye; ca yã, and that which, the aspect that; is santatā, pervasive; manasi, in the mind, as acts of thinking etc ; kuru, make, tām, that (aspect); sıvām, calm; mā utkramīh, do not ascend, that is to say, do not disturb it by ascending

प्राणस्येदं वशे सर्वं त्रिदिवे यत् प्रतिष्ठितम्। मातेव पुत्रान् रक्षस्व श्रीश्च प्रज्ञां च विधेहि न इति ॥१३।। इति प्रश्नोपनिषदि द्वितीय: प्रश्नः ॥

1 Since you are identified with ākāśa (space), the source of a.r

436 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [II. 13

I3. All this (in this world), as also all that is in heaven is under the control of Prāna. Protect us just as a mother does her sons, and ordain for us splendour and intelligence. In short, whatever enjoyable thing there is in this world, sarvam idam, all this; is verily prānasya vaśe, under the control of Prāna. And Präna is even the ruler and protector of yat, whatever; is pratisthitam, located, tridive, in the third heaven, in the form of enjoyment for gods and others. Hence raksasva, protect us; mātā iva putrān, as a mother does her sons. Since all the glories, natural to the Brāhmanas and Ksatriyas, are at your disposal, therefore vidhehr nah, ordain for us; śrīh ca (is the same as śriyah ca), all splendour; prajñam ca, and intelligence; that accrue from your continuance. This is the meaning. Thus, inasmuch as the greatness of Prana has been disclosed through His praise as the all-pervasive entity, by the organs such as speech, Prana is ascertained as the Lord of creation and the eater.

THIRD QUESTION

अथ हैनं कौसल्यश्चाश्वलायन: पप्रच्छ। भगवन् कुत पष प्राणो जायते कथमायात्यस्मिञ्शरीर आत्मानं वा प्रचिभज्य कथं प्रातिष्ठते केनोत्क्रमते कथं बाह्यमभिधत्ते कथमध्यात्ममिति॥१॥

I. Then Kausalya, son of Aśvala, asked him, "O venerable sir, from where is this Prana born? How does He come into this body? How again does He dwell by dividing Himself? How does He depart? How does He support the external things and how the physical?" Atha ha, next; kausalyah ca āśvalāyanaḥ, Kausalya, the son of Aśvala; papraccha enam, asked him, "Although the greatness of Prana has thus been perceived by the organs which ascertained His true nature, yet He may still be an effect, mnasmuch as He forms a part of a composite thing. Therefore I ask: Bhagavan, O venerable sir; kutah, from what source; eşah, this one, Prāņa; jāyate, is born? And being born, katham, how, through what special function, does He āyāti, come; asmin śarire, to this body' What is the cause of His being embodied? This is the idea. And having entered into the body, katham, how; does He pratisthate, dwell (in the body); pravibhajya atmanam, by dividing Himself; kena, how, through what special function, does He utkramate, depart; asmat sarirat, from this body? Katham, how; does

438 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. r

He abhidhatte, support; the bāhyam, external things, in the context of the elements and in the divine con- text; and how (does He support) adhyatmam, in the (individual) physical context?" The verb "support" has to be supplied.

तस्मै स होवाचातिप्रश्नान् पृच्छसि ब्रह्मिष्ठोऽसीति तस्मात्तेऽहं व्रवीमि ॥२॥ 2. To him he said: You are putting super- normal questions, since you are pre-eminently a knower of Brahman. Hence I speak to you. Being asked thus, sah, he, the teacher; uvāca ha, said; tasmai, to him: Prana Himself, being inscrutable, is a subject matter of intricate questioning. And you inquire about the birth etc. of that Prana. Hence prcchasi, you ask; atipraśnān, supernormal questions," brahmisthah asi iti, for you are pre-eminently a knower of Brahman.2 Thereby I am pleased. Tasmät, hence; aham bravīmi, I speak; te, to you, what you asked for. Listen:

आत्मन एष प्राणो जायते। यथैषा पुरुषे छायैतस्मि- न्नेतदाततं मनोकृतेनायात्यस्मिञ्शरीरे।।३।। 3. From the Self is born this Prāna. Just as there can be a shadow when a man is there, so this Präna is fixed on the Self. He comes to this body owing to the actions of the mind. 1 Question about transcendental verities. 2 Know the supreme Brahman which transcends the inferior Brahman. This is only by way of encouragement - A. G.

III 4] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 439

Almanah, from the Self-from Purusa, the Immut- able, (or) Truth, jāyate, is born; esch, this Prāna spoken of before (Mu.II.i.2-3). Here is an illustra- tion to show how Yatha, as, in the world; there issues a chaya, shadow, as an effect; puruse, when a man, possessed of hands etc, is there as the cause; sımilarly, ecasmin, on this, on Brahman, on Purusa that is Truth, atatam, is spread, i e. fixed; etat, this one, this principle that is false by nature, is analogous to a shadow, and is called Prāna, just as a shadow is linked to a body. He āyāti, comes, asmin śarīre, to this body; mano-krtena, through the action of the mind, that is to say, as the result of action accomplished through the thought or wish of the mind, for the text will say later, "Virtue results from virtue" (III.7); and there is another Vedic text (on this point): "Being attached, he, together with the work, attains (that result to which the subtle body or mind is attached)" (Br IV iv.6) यथा सम्राडेवाधिकृतान् विनियुङक्त । एतान्

ग्रामानेतान् ग्रामानधितिष्ठस्वेत्येवमेवेष प्राण इतरान्

प्राणान् पृथक् पृथनेव संनिधत्ते॥४॥ 4. As it is the king alone who employs the officers saying, "Rule over these villages, and those ones," just so Präna engages the other organs separately. In the world, yatha, as, in the way in which; samrat eva, it is the king alone who; omyunkte, employs; adhikrtan, the officers; in the villages, etc. How? By ordering, "Adhitisthasva, preside over; etān

440 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 4

grāmān, these villages; etān grāmān, these villages"; evam eva, just so, as is the case in the illustration, so; esah prānah, this (Chief) Prāna; samnidhatte, places, engages; prthak prthak eva, separately, in the respective posts; itarān prānān, the other organs, the eye etc. which are its own manifestations. पायूपस्थेऽपानं चक्षुःश्रोत्रे मुखनासिकाभ्यां प्राणः स्वयं प्रातिष्ठते मध्ये तु समानः। एष ह्येतदतमन्नं समं नयति तस्मादेता: सप्तार्चिषो भवन्ति ॥५।।

5. He places Apäna in the two lower aper- tures. Prana Himself, issuing out of the mouth and nostrils, resides in the eyes and ears. In the middle, however, is Samana, for this one distri- butes equally all this food that is eaten. From that issue out these seven flames. To turn now to the divisions. He places apānam, Apana, that is a division of Himself (i.e. of Prāņa); that exists, payu-upasthe, in the two lower apertures, as engaged in the work of ejecting faeces, urine, etc. So also prānah svayam, Prāna Himself, who occupies the place of the sovereign; prātisthate, resides; caksuh-śrotre, in the eyes and the ears; as issuing out through mukha- nāsikābhyam, mouth and nostrils. Madhye tu, in the middle, however, in between the places of Prāna and Apäna, in the navel; there is samanah, Samãna, which is so called because it assimilates all that is eaten or drunk, hi, for; esah, this one; nayati samam, dıstributes equally (in all parts of the body), leads to digestion; etat hutam annam, all this, that is eaten or drunk, the food

III. 6] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 44I

that is poured (as a libation) on one's bodily fire. Tasmat, from that, from that fire in the stomach- when fed by the food and drink, it reaches the region of the heart,1 bhavanti, there come into existence; etah sapta arcisah, these seven flames, that are lodged in the head The idea is that the revelation of objects like form (or colour) etc that constitutes what is known as seeing, hearing, etc, is caused by Prāņa.

हृदि ह्येष आत्मा। अत्रैतदेकशतं नाडीनां तासां शतं शतमेकैकस्यां द्वासप्ततिर्द्वारुप्ततिः प्रतिशाखानाडीसह- स्त्राणि भवन्त्यासु व्यानश्चरति॥६।। 6. This Self (i.e. the subtle body) is surely in the heart. There are a hundred and one of the (chief) nerves. Each of them has a hundred (division). Each branch is divided into seventy- two thousand sub-branches. Among them moves Vyana. Hi esah atma, this Self-this subtle body associated with the Self-is in fact; hrdi, in the heart, in the space circumscribed by the lump of flesh shaped like a lotus. Atra, in this heart, there are etat ekasatam, this one hundred and one, ın number; nādinām, from among the nerves, among the chief ones. Tasam, of those chief nerves, ekaikasyah, each one has, śatam śatam,

1 The imagery is thus brought out. The digestive power in the stomach is the sacrificial fire; food is the oblation, and sense-knowledge is the flame The seven organs in the head are two eves, two ears, two nostrils, and the mouth These derive their capacrty to act from the energy supplied by food

442 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 6

a hundred divisions. Again, prati śākhānādī- sahasrāni, the thousands of sub-branches into which each of the (one hundred of) branch nerves is sub- divided are, in each case; dvāsaptatih, dvāsaptatıh. seventy-two, seventy-two. Each of the hundred branches of the main nerves becomes (seventy-two) thousand in number.1 Asu, among these nerves; carati, moves; the vital energy called vyānah, Vyāna, the name being derived in the sense of pervasiveness. As rays issue from the sun, so do the nerves issue from the heart and proceed everywhere (in the body); moving through them Vyana resides in the body, pervading it wholly; and by becoming particularly active in the joints, shoulders, and vital parts, and in the interim between the functioning of Prana and Apāna, it becomes the performer of deeds requiring strength.

अथैकयोर्ध्व उदान: पुण्येन पुण्यं लोकं नयति पापेन पापमुभाभ्यामेव मनुष्यलोकम्।७। 7. Now then Udana, when it is in its upward trend, leads to a virtuous world as a result of virtue, to a sinful world as a result of sin, and to the human world as a result of both.

Atha, now then; among those one hundred and one nerves, ekaya, through that one, which proceeds upward and is known as Susumna; the vital force

1 To sum up There are IOI main nerves; each is divided into one hundred branches; and each of these branches is sub-divided into 72,000 sub-branches Thus the sub-branches are 727,200,000 and the total number of all the nerves 1s 727,210,20I

1II 8] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 443

called udanah, Udāna, which moves everywhere from the sole of the feet to the head; urdhvah (san), when it has an upward trend; it nayati, leads; punyamı lokam, to a virtuous world, such as the world of the gods; punyena karmanā, as a result of virtuous deeds; (it leads) papam, to a sinful world, hell, such as birth among beasts; pāpena, as a result of sin, which is opposed to that; (and it leads) manusya- lokam, to the human world; ubhābhyām eva, as a result of both virtue and vice, when they predominate equally. The verb "leads" has to be supplied (everywhere).

आदित्यो ह वे बाह्मः प्राण उद्यत्येष ह्येनं वाक्षुषं प्राणमनुगृह्ञान:। पृथिव्यां या देवता सैषा पुरुषस्यापानमव- प्रभ्यान्तरा यदाकाशः स समानो वायुर्व्यानः ॥८।। 8. The sun is indeed the external Prāna. It rises up favouring this Prana in the eye. That deity, that is in the earth, favours by attracting Apāna in a human being. The space (i.e. air), that is within, is Samāna. The (common) air is Vyāna. Adityah ha var, it is the well-known sun indeed, in the divine context, that is the bahyah prānah, external Prāņa (i.e. Prāņa in external manifestation) Esah, this one, that is such, udayatt, rises up, it 1s this one indeed (that rises) anugyhnanah, favouring, enam prānam, this Prana; cāksusam, that exists in the eye, in the bodily context; that is to say, it favours by vouchsafing light for the eye in the matter of its

444 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. 8

perception of colour. Similarly, yā devatā prthivyām, the deity that is well known as identified with the earth; sā eșā, that very one, exists by vouchsafing favour; avastabhya, by attracting, keeping under control-by the fact of pulling down, apānam purusasya, the vital function called Apãna of a human being; for otherwise the body would fall because of its weight or would fly up into the sky if left free. Yat (rather yah) antara, that which is in the middle, the space that exists in between heaven and earth, the air there being referred to by the word space on the analogy of one sitting on a scaffold;1 sah, it, that air; which is samānah, Samāna-that exists there, helping the vital function called Samāna. This is the idea; for in common with the air (in inter- space), Samäna has the similarity of existing in the space within.2 Vayuh, the air in general, that exists externally as a common factor; is Vyāna, because of the similarity of pervasiveness.3 That is to say, it stays there, helping the (vital function called) Vyāna.

तेजो ह वा उदानस्तस्मादुपशान्ततेजाः। पुनर्भवमि- न्द्रियर्मनसि सम्पद्यमानै: ॥६।। 9. That which is well known as luminosity, is Udāna. Therefore one who gets his light ' In the sentence, "The scaffold is shouting," "scaffold" stands for the men sitting in it Similarly "space" here stands for the "air" in space. 2 Vayu resides in the space between the earth and heaven, and Samäna in the space within the body. The point of resemblance is residence within space. 3 Of the body and the world.

III. IO] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 445

extinguished, attains rebirth together with the organs that enter into (his) mind. That which is tejah ha vai, well known as (common)1 luminosity, ın the outside, is udānah, Udana, in the body, that is to say, it favours the vital function, called Udana, by its light. Since the agency (viz Udāna), that causes one's leaving the body, is of the nature of luminosity, and (while staying in the body) it is favoured by external lıght, tasmat, therefore; when an ordınary man upaśāntatejāh, gets his natural lıght extinguished, then it is to be understood that his life is exhausted and he is about to die. Sah, he, attains; punarbhavam, another body, (rebirth). How? Saha indriyah, together with the organs, counting from speech; sampadyamānaih manasi, entering into the mınd. यञ्चित्तस्तेनेष प्राणमायाति प्राणस्तेजसा युक्त:। सहात्मना यथासङ्कल्पितं लोकं नयति ॥१०॥ I0. Together with whatever thought he had (at the time of death), he enters into Prāna. Prana, in combination with Udāna and in associa- tion with the soul, leads him to the world desired by him. Yaccittah, whatever thought he might have had, at the time of death, tena, together with that idea, and together with the organs, ayāti pranam, he (the creature) enters into Prana, the primary vital function. The purport is that at the time of death, the activities of 1 As distinguished from its special manifestation as the sun

446 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [III. I0

the organs having declined, he continues to live only through the functioning of the chief Prāna (vital energy). Then the relatives say, "He still breathes", "He is still alive." That prānaḥ, Prāņa, again; yuktaḥ tejasā, as combined with the function called Udāna; saha ātmanā, and in association with the soul, the master that enjoys; nayati, leads to, makes him-that enjoyer (of the fruits of work)-reach, under the influence of virtuous and vicious actions; lokam yathāsamkalpitam, a world as was desired by him.1

य एवं विद्वान् प्राणं वेद न हास्य प्रजा हीयतेऽमृतो भवति तदेषः श्रोक: ।११।। II. The line of progeny of any man of knowledge who knows Prana thus, sustains no break. He becomes immortal. Pertaining to this, there occurs this mantra: Yah vidvan, any illumined man who; veda, knows; prānam, Präna; evam, thus, as possessed of the descrip- tions set forth before, viz origin etc .; for that man is being stated this result accruing in this world and the next: Asya, for him, for that man of knowledge; prajāh, line of progeny, consisting of sons, grandsons, etc .; na hiyate, sustains no break. And when his body falls, he bhavati, becomes; amrtah, immortal, through his identity with Präna. Tat, pertaining to this idea; bhavati, there occurs; esah ślokah, this mantra, expres- sive of this idea in the form of a brief statement: 1 As an aspirant, he had desired heaven etc. when engaged in sacrifices and meditation That desire becomes again prominent at the time of death and results in the attainment of that very world

III I2] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 447

उत्पत्तिमायतिं स्थानं विभुत्वं चैव पञ्चधा। अध्यात्मं चैघ प्राणस्य विज्ञायामृतमश्नुते विज्ञायामृतमश्रुत इति ॥१२।। इति प्रश्नोपनिषदि तृतीयः प्रश्ः ॥ 12. Having known the origin, coming, lodgment, and fivefold overlordship and the physical existence of Prana, one achieves im- mortality. Having known, one achieves immor- tality. Vijnaya, having known; (thus), utpattm, the origin (of Präna), from the supreme Self (Pr. III.3); āyatim, (His) coming to this body, through the action of the mind (Pr. III 3), sthānam, (His) lodgment, in such places as the lower apertures (Pr III.5); ca pañcadhā vibhutvam, and (His) fivefold overlordship, (his) order- ing of the different functions of Prana in five ways like a sovereign (Pr III.4); Hs existence externally in the form of the sun etc, and adhyatmam, in the body, as the eye etc .- having known thus, (one) aśnute, achieves; amrtam, immortality. The repettion of "vijñāya amrtam aśnute, having known, he achieves immortality" is by way of concluding the Question.

FOURTH QUESTION

अथ हैनं सौर्यायणी गार्ग्यः पप्रच्छ। भगवन्नेतस्मिन् पुरुषे कानि स्वपन्ति कान्यस्मिआ्जाग्रति कतर एष देवः स्वप्नान् पश्यति कस्यैतत् सुखं भवति कस्मिन्नु सर्वे सम्प्रतिष्ठिता भवन्तीति॥१॥

I. Then the grandson of Sürya, born of the family of Garga, asked him, "O adorable sir, which are the organs that go to sleep in this person? Which keep awake in him? Which is the deity who experiences dream? To whom occurs this happiness? In whom do all get merged ?" Atha, next, sauryāyanī gārgyah, the grandson cf Sūrya, born of the family of Garga; papraccha ha, asked; enam, this one. All about the impermanent, mundane existence that relates to manifested things, is comprised within the domain of the lower knowledge (i.e. of ignorance), and consists of ends and means, having been fully dealt with through the three (previous) Questions, now are begun the succeeding Questions, since it is necessary to speak about that auspicious, calm, unchanging, immutable Truth which is called Purusa, who cannot be thought of in terms of ends and means, is not subject to any means of proof, is beyond the mind and the senses, exists everywhere internally and externally, and is birthless and the subject matter of the superior knowledge. The questions are now being

PRAŚNA UPANISAD 449

raised with a view to telling what the characteristics of that Immutable are, from which, as stated in the second Mundaka, all objects are born lıke sparks from a blazing fire, and into which they merge again (Mu II.i.I); which all those things are that emanate from the Immutable, and how they separate and how they merge there Bhagavan, O adorable sır, kuni (karanāni), which organs, asmin puruse, in this person, possessed of head, hands, etc ; svapanti, go to sleep, desist from their own functions And kan, which; asmin, in this one, jagrat, keep awake, continue in the state of sleeplessness, go on performing their functions? Among those, standing for the effect and cause,1 katarah esah devah, which is this deity, who; pasyati svapnān, experiences dreams Dream means the perception (of objects) within the body, like those in the waking state, by one who has ceased from the perception of the waking state The idea is this Is that activity per- formed by a deity identified with the effect (viz body or Präna), or by someone identified with the senses (and mind)? Kasya, to whom, bhavati, occurs; etat sukham, this happiness, that is calm (1.e taintless), effortless (i.e undisturbed), and unobstructed,2 and that emerges on the cessation of the activities of the dream

1 A dıfferent readıng ıs kārya-karanānı, where kārya, effect, is the body or Prana, and karanani, the senses and organs, with the mind at their head In the readıng kārya- karanan, karanam means the elements from which the body etc are produced ' Tointless, untouched by external objects, efjortless, expressing itself when all disturbances cease, as does a light in a windless place, unobstructed unending, it heing one with the supreme Bliss

29

450 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. I

and waking states? At that time kasmin u sarve sampratisthith bhavanti, in whom do they all remain completely unified, after desisting from the activities of the dream and waking states' The idea is thus, like the honeys (collected from various flowers) merging in (the same) honey (in the bee-hive), or the rivers enter- ing into the sea, they bhavanti, become; sampratisthitāh, blended without the possibility of being distinguished 1 Objection: Since on the analogy of a discarded implement, a scythe for instance, it can be held that the organs and the senses desist from their respective duties and rest separately, each in itself, during sleep, therefore whence can arise in the questioner the surmise that the senses and organs of the sleeping man get merged somewhere? Answer: The surmise (of the questioner in the text) is quite reasonable. Since in relation to the objects of the waking state the senses and organs (are seen to) stand as a composite whole for the benefit of a master and are not independent, therefore in consonance with the fact that composite things are dependent on someone else, it is but reasonable to assume that they become unified in someone even in sleep. Hence this question is quite in keeping with that conjecture. In the present 1 There are five questions The first relates to the perceiver of the waking state That entity whose cessation from activity leads to dream, must be the actor in the waking state. The second question is, "Whose function is it to maintain the body in all the three states?" The third relates to the perceiver of the dream; the fourth to the enjoyer of sleep. The fifth asks about the Turiya, the Fourth, the Self, free from the three states of wakefulness, dream, and sleep.

IV 2] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 45I

context the question, "In whom do they all remai completely unified," is meant to imply, "Who may he be?"-the question being put by one who wants to know something special about the entity in which all the effects and causes get merged during sleep and cosmic dissolution.1 तस्मै स होवाच। यथा गाय मरीचयोऽर्कस्यास्तं मच्छतः सर्वा एतस्मिस्तेजोमण्डल एकीभवन्ति। ताः पुनः पुनरुदयतः प्रचरन्त्येवं ह वै तत् सर्व परे देवे मनस्ये- क्ीभपति। तेन तर्ह्येष पुरुषो न शृणोति न पश्यति न जिघ्रति न रसयते न स्पृशते नाभिवदते नादत्ते नानन्दयते न विसृजते नेयायते स्वपितीत्याचक्षते॥२। 2. To him he said, O Gärgya, just as all the rays of the setting sun become unified in this orb of light, and they disperse from the sun as it rises up again, similarly all that becomes unified in the high deity, the mind. Hence this person does not then hear, does not see, does not smell, does not taste, does not touch, does not speak, does not grasp, does not enjoy, does not eject, does not move. People say, "He is sleeping." Tasmai, to him; sah, he, the teacher; uvāca ha, said. "O Gargya, hear what you asked about. Yatha, as; the maricayah, rays; arkasya, of the sun; astam gacchatah, that is setting down, becoming invisible, sarvāh, all, without exception, eki-bhavantt, become unified, inseparable, indistinguishable, etasmin tejo- 1 It is the absolute Self that the questioner wants to know, and not the conditioned Self that supports all

452 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV 2

"nandale, in this luminous orb, in this sun that is like a mass of light, punah, again; tāh, they, the rays of that very sun; udayatah punah, while it is rising up again; pracaranti, disperse ;- as is this illustration, evam ha vai, in a similar way indeed; sarvam tat, all that- all the senses and their objects; eki-bhavati, become unified, pare deve manası, in the high deity, in the fully luminous, mind-since the deities of the eye etc. are dependent on that of the mind, the latter is their high deity-in that mind they become united, lose their distinction, during dream and sleep, like the rays in the solar orb And when a man is about to wake up, they emanate-they proceed to their respective functions -from the mind itself just like the rays radiating from the sun. Since the ears etc., which are the organs of perception of sound etc., desist from their function as organs, and thus seem to be unified in the mind,1 tena, therefore; tarhi, at that time, during the time of sleep; esah purusah, this person-to wit, a person named Devadatta; na śrnoti, does not hear; na paśyati, does not see, na jighrat, does not smell; na rasayate, does not taste; na sprśate, does not touch; na abhivadate, does not converse; na adatte, does not grasp; na ānanda- yate, does not enjoy; na visrjate, does not eject; na iyayate, does not move; acaksate, they, the common people, say: svapiti iti, he is asleep.

1 The senses cannot actually become identified with the mind, since the mind is not their material cause. simply give up their activities and continue to exist in their They

dependence on the mind.

IV 3] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 453

प्राणाग्रय एवैतस्मिन् पुरे जाग्रति। गार्हपत्यो ह वा एषोडपानो व्यानोऽन्वाहार्यपचनो यदुगार्हपत्यात् प्रणीयते प्रणयनादाहवनीय: प्राण: ॥३।। 3. It is the fires (i.e the functions resembling fire) of Praņa that really keep awake in this city of the body. That which is this Apana really resembles the Garhapatya fire, Vyana resembles the fire Anvaharyapacana. Sınce the Āhavanīya fire is obtained from Gärhapatva, which is the former's source of extraction, therefore Prāna conforms to Ahavaniya (because of its issuing out of Apãna1).

When the organs, such as the ear, sleep etasmin pure, in this city, of the body, which is possessed of nine gates, pranagnayah, the five divisions ot viral function counting from Präna, which are comparable to fires, jagrati, keep awake. The resemblance with fire ıs being stated. Eşah apānah var gārhapatyah, this Apana is really (the sacrificial fire called) Garhapatya How that can be so is being stated: Since the other fire, called Ahavanīya, ıs pranīyate, taken (extracted), gārhapatyāt pranayanāt, from the Garhapatya fire, standing as the source, from which (Ähavaniya fire) is extracted at the time of the Agnihotra sacrifice, there- fore from the derivative sense of "that from which some- thing is taken away," Garhapatya fire is the pranayana, the source of extraction. Similarly for a man in sleep, Präna seems to be moving through the mouth and ' Apana draws in the breath and fills up the lungs, trom that iner air Prana comes out as the outgomg breath

154 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV 3

nostrils, having been extracted from Apana. Therefore Prāņa is comparable to Āhavanīya. As for vyānah, Vyana, since it moves out from the heart through the daksina, right, orifice, and is thus associated with the daksina, southern direction, therefore it is (the fire called) Daksiņāgnı, known otherwise as Anvāhārvapa- cana. समं नयतीति समानः । मनो ह चाव यजमान:। इष्टफलमेवोदान: । स एनं यजमानमहरहर्ब्रह्म गमयति ॥४॥ Samana is the priest called Hota, because it strikes a balance between exhalation and inhala- 4.

tion which are but (comparable to) two oblations. The mind is verily the sacrificer. The desired fruit is Udana, which leads this sacrificer every day to Brahman. The two oblations consisting of ucchvāsa-nihśvāsau, inhaling and exhaling; are the ãhuti, two oblations, of the Agnihotra sacrifice, as it were, just because of the similarity of being two in number. Yat, since; since these are oblations, and since that vital function (called Samāna) samam nayati, strikes a balance, for ever; between etau ähuti, these two oblations, so as to ensure the maintenance of the body; iti, therefore; it is here verily the priest called the Hota, because of the similarity of carrying the oblations (like the priest), and this despite the fact that it is called a fire (in the earlier paragraph). Which is it? Sah samānah, it is Samāna. Because of this further reason, the sleep of an illumined man is verily a performance of the Agnihotra sacrifice.

IV 4] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 455

Therefore the idea imphed is that the illumined man is not to be considered a non-performer of rites. It is thus that in the Vajasaneyaka it is said that all the com- ponent parts of the body and senses of this illumined man perform sacrifices even while he sleeps.1 Such being the case, manah ha vāva yajamānah, it is the mind that is the sacrificer, who keeps awake after having poured (as oblation) the external organs and their objects into the wakeful fires of Prana, and who is intent on going to Brahman, just as one would reach heaven as the result of the Agnihotra sacrifice. The mind is imagined to be the sacrificer, because, like the sacrificer, It acts as the chief among the aggregate of body and senses, and because it sets out for Brahman, just as the sacrificer does for heaven Istaphalam eva, the result itself of the sacrifice; is udanah, the vital function called Udāna, because the achievement of the result of a sacrifice depends on Udana. How? Sah, he, Udāna; ahah ahah, every day; gamayati, leads, yajamānam, the sacrificer, called the mind, to brahma, Brahman, the Immutable, as though to heaven, during the time of sleep, after causing the mind to cease even from the 1 By the text "Vak citah, prānah crtoh, caksuh citah" etc in the Vajasaneyaka, it is enjoined that one should think of the activity of each function of the Prana as a performance of sacrifice And so it is pomted out that the organs of knowledge and action continue their sacrifices even during the sleep of a man who knows thus The text there is meant as a praise of this knowledge Similarly in the present context the purpose is not to enjomn a meditation it being out of place under this topic of transcendental knowledge, but to eulogise illumination

456 EIGHT UPANISADS

dream activities. Hence Udāna takes the place of the result of the sacrifice.

Thus is praised the illumination ot the enlightened man by showing that, starting from the time of the cessation from activity of the ear etc., till the time that he rises up from sleep, he enjoys the fruit of all sacrifices, and his sleep is not a source of evil as it is in the case of an unenlightened man; (and all this is meant as a praise), for (on a contrary view) it cannot be held that in the enlightened man alone the ears etc. sleep, while the fires of the Pranas keep awake, or that his mind enjoys freedom in the dream and wakeful states and then goes to sleep every day, for the fact of passing through the three states of waking, dream, and sleep is similar for all creatures. Hence it is reasonable to say that this is only a eulogy of enlightenment. As for the question, "Which is the deity who experiences dream?"-that is being answered:

अत्रैष देवः रवप्े महिमानमनुभवति। यद्दृष्टं दृष्टमतुपश्यति श्रुतं श्रुतमेवार्थमनुश्णोति देशदिगन्तरैश्च प्रत्यनुभूतं पुनः पुनः प्रत्यनुभवति हष्टं चादष्टं च श्रुतं वाश्रुतं चानुभूतं चाननुभूतं च सच्चासच्च सर्वं पश्यति सर्वः पश्यति ॥५॥ 5. In this dream state this deity (i.e. the mind) experiences greatness. Whatever was seen, it sees again; whatever was heard, it hears again; whatever was perceived in the different places and directions, it experiences again and again; it per-

IV 51 PRASNA UPANISAD 457

ceives all by becoming all that was seen or not seen, heard or not heard, perceived or not per- ceived, and whatever is real or unreal. Atra svapne, in this state of dream, when the senses, such as that of hearing, cease to function, and the vital forces, counting from Präna, keep awake for the maintenance of the body-in this intermediate state (between waking and sleep) before entering into deep sleep, esah devah, this deity (the mind), that has with- drawn into itself all the organs, such as the ear, like the rays of the setting sun; anubhavati, experiences undergoes, mahimanam, greatness, consisting in assum- ing diverse forms of subject and object.

Objection Mind is an instrument of the perceive: in the matter of experiencing greatness Hence how is it said that the mind experiences independently? It 1s the soul, (conscious of the body), that can be free (in dream) Answer. That is no defect, for that freedom of the soul is a result of its being conditioned by the mind. inasmuch as the soul by itself does not in reality either dream or wake. That its wakefulness and dream are caused by the limiting adjunct of the mind has been stated in the (following text of the) Vajasaneyaka Upanisad: "Being associatea with the mind, and being identified with dream," "it (1.e the soul) thinks, as it were, and it shakes as ii were" (Br IV 111 7) There- fore it is quite logical to speak of the independence of the mind in the matter of experiencing dıverse manı- festations Some assert that if the soul is conditioned

458 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV. 5

by the mind in dream, its self-luminosity' will remain unestablished. But that is not so. That is a false notion of theirs, caused by their non-comprehension of the drift of the Upanisads, inasmuch as even all such talk about the Self-starting with (the texts dealing with) self-luminosity and ending with emancipation-is within the range of ignorance. It is caused by such conditioning factors as the mind And this conclusion is arrived at according to such Vedic texts as: "When there is something else, as it were, then one can see something .. " (Br. IV.iii 31), "For him there is no contact with sense-objects", "But when to the knower of Brahman everything has become the Self, then what should one see and through what?" (Br. II.iv.I4). Accordingly, this doubt arises only in those who have imperfect knowledge of Brahman, but not in those who have realised the non-dual Self

Objection: If such be the explanation, the specific statement, "In this state (i.e. dream) he becomes self- effulgent" (Br. IV.ii1.9), becomes meaningless.

The answer to this is being given. This objection of yours falls far short of your mark, since the self-effulgence will be much more meaningless if the Self is (really) delimited within the heart according to

1 As shown in Brhadāranyaka, IV.iti.14: "When he dreams, he takes away a little of the impressions of this all- embracing world (the waking state), he himself puts the body aside and himself creates (a dream body) revealing his own lustre by his own light ... In this state he becomes self- effulgent."

IV 5] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 459

the Vedic Text, "lies in the space1 that is within the heart" (Br. II.i.I7) Objection. Though, as a matter of fact, that defect does arise from that point of view, yet half the weight (of this defect) is removed in dream by the fact that the Self becomes then self-effulgent mn Its isolation (1f dissociation from the mind) 2

Answer: Not so; for even there (in sleep), persists the association with the nerves extending up to the peri- cardium (i.e. the whole body) in accordance with the Vedic text, "(When it becomes fast asleep, ... it comes back along the seventy-two thousand nerves, called Hita, which extend from the heart to the pericardium), and sleeps (i.e. remains) in the body" (Br. II i.19)* and therefore it is a vain effort to remove the (remain- ing) half weight even in sleep through your reliance cn the argument of the self-effulgence of the man Objection: What then, is meant by saying, that "the person becomes self-effulgent in this state" (Br IV.1i1.9)? Tentative reply: That Vedic text has no application here, since it belongs to a different branch (of the Vedas). Objection: Not so, since it is desirable that the Vedic texts should all lead to the identical conclusion, for it is the one Self that is the subject matter of the Upanisads and that is sought to be taught and under-

' The "space" (akasa) here stands really for the supreme Self, buc a literal interpretation leads us astray - The remaining defect will be removed in the state of sleep-this is the implied idea

460 EIGHT UPANISADS [IV 5

stood. Hence it is necessary that the self-effulgence of the Self in dream should be upheld, for the Vedas serve to reveal the real truth. Vedantist's reply. In that case, hear the purport of the Vedic passage by giving up all conceit, for not through conceit can the meaning of the Vedas be mastered even in a hundred years by all the people who pose to be learned. The self-effulgence of the Self, sleeping in the space within the heart and the nerves spreading from the heart to the pericardiac, is not negated because of the Self's dissociation from them, owing to which fact It can be shown to be an entity distinct from them. Similarly, although the mind per- sists (in dream), as possessed of the impressions activated by ignorance, desire, and past actions, yet the most arrogant sophist cannot deny then the self- effulgence of the Self which, while remaining totally dissociated from the entire group of causes and effects, witnesses through ignorance the mental impressions created by past actions like something different from Itself; for the witnessing Self then remains totally dis- tinct from the impressions that form the objects visualised (by It). Hence it has been well said that when the senses merge into the mind which, however, remains unabsorbed, the Self, as identified with the mind, sees dreams. How the mind experiences its diverse manifestations is being said: Being under the influence of the im- pressions of any object-be it a friend or a son etc .- yat, which; drstam purvam, was seen earlier; it paśyati, sees; it thinks through ignorance that it sees the visions resembling the son or the friend, called up by those

IT 63 PRASNA UPANISAD 401

impress:ons of the son, friend, etc So also srutant artham, whatever was heard, anyśrnott, it seems to hear thereafter, under the influence of its impressions. Sımılarly whatever was pratyanubhūtam desadıgan- tarath, perceived as belonging to the different places and quarters; it pratyanubhavati, experiences, appears to expenence, through ignorance, punah punah, time and again So also whatever was drstarn, seen, in this birth; and adrstam, not seen, that is to say, seen in ancther birth, for no imprersion can be left by what is absolutely unseen Similarly with regard to śrulam ca aśrutam ca, whatever was heard and not heard, onubhutam, what was perceived, in this life through the mind alone; ananubhutam ca, and whatever was not perceived, that Is to say, was perceived by the mind itself in another birth, ca sat, and what is true, for insiance the real water etc., co asat, and what is false, for instance, water in a mirage To be brief, it paśyatı, sees, sarvam, all, enumerated or not; sarvah (san), by becoming all, by becoming conditioned by ail the mental impressions. Thus the deity, called mind, sees dreams in its unification with all the senses.

स यदा तेजसाऽभिभूतो भवति। अत्रैष देव: रवप्पान्न पश्यत्यथ तदैतस्मिञ्शरीर एतत्सुखं भवति ॥ ६॥ 6 When that deity, (the mind), becomes overwhelmed by (solar) rays (called bile), then in this state the deity does not see dreams. Then, at that time, there occurs this kind of happiness in this body.

462 EIGHT UPANIŞADS [IV. 6

Yada, when, tejasa, by lght, by the solar light, called bile, that is lodged in the nerves;1 sah, the deity, called mind; bhavati, becomes; completely, abhibhutah, overwhelmed, when the outlets2 for its tendencies are closed down; then the rays of the mind, together with the senses, get collected in the heart. The mind is in sleep when, like fire in wood, it exists in the body, per- vading it as a whole, in the form of general (as opposed to particularised) consciousness Atra, at this time, esah, this, devah (lit. the luminous one), deity, called the mind; na paśyatı svapnān, does not see dreams, the doors of vision having been closed by light. Atha tada, then at that time, etasmin sarire, in this body; bhavati occurs; etat sukham, this happiness, that is of the nature of unobstructed Consciousness; that is to say, the Bliss then pervades the whole body in a general way and it remains undisturbed. At this time, the body and senses that depend on ignorance, desire, and the result of past actions, become inactive. When these become quiet, the nature of the Self, that appears distorted owing to the presence of limiting adjuncts, becomes non-dual, auspicious, and calm. In order to indicate this state through a process of (successively) merging into it the subtle forms of earth etc., that are the creations of ignorance, the text cites an illustration: स यथा सोस्य चयांसि वासोवृक्षं संप्रतिष्ठन्ते। एवं ह वै तत् सर्वं पर आत्मनि संप्रतिष्ठते॥। 9॥ 1 As also by the Consciousness, called Brahman, where the mınd merges. ª The past actions calculated to produce dream.

IV ST PRASNA UPANISAD 463

7. To illustrate the point: As the birds, O good-looking one, proceed towards the tree that provides lodging, just so all these proceed to the supreme Self. Sah, that illustration, is this Yatha, ds somya, O good-looking one, vayanisi, birds, sam pratisthante proceed towards; vāsovrksam, the tree that provides lodging; evam ha vai, just so, just as it is in the illustration; sarvam, all-everything that will be enu- merated, sampratisthate, proceeds; pare atmam, to the supreme Self. to the Immutable.

पृथिवी च पृथिर्वीमात्रा चाऽडपश्राऽडपोमात्रा च तेजश्च तेजोमात्रा च वायुश्च वायुमात्रा चाडडकाश- श्राSडकाशमात्रा च वक्षुश्च द्षव्यं च श्रोत्रं व श्रोतव्यं च ध्राणं च घ्रातव्यं व रसश्च रसयितव्यं च त्वक्च स्पर्शयितव्यं च वाक्च वक्तव्यं च हस्तौ चाऽऽदातव्यं चोपस्थश्चानन्दयितव्यं व पायुश्च विसरजयितव्यं च पादौ च गन्तव्यं च मनश्च मन्तव्यं च बुद्धिश्च बोद्धव्यं चाहंकारश्ताहंकर्तव्यं च चित्तं व चेतयितव्यं च तेजश्र विद्योतयितव्यं च प्राणश्च विधारयितव्यं न् ॥८ ।।

8. Earth and the rudiment of earth, water and the rudiment of water, fire and the rudiment of fire, space and the rudiment of space, the organ and object of vision, the organ and object of hear- ing, the organ and object of smell, the organ and object of taste, the organ and object of touch, the

464 EIGHT UP.1NISADS [IV 8

organ and content of speech, the hands and the object grasped, sex and enjoyment, the organ of excretion and the excreta, the feet and the space trodden, the mind and the content of thought, understanding and the content of understanding, egoism and the content of egoism, awareness and the content of awareness, the shining skin and the object revealed by that, Prana and all that has to be held by Prāņa. What are all those things? Prthivi, the gross earth, possessed of five attributes;1 ca, and, its cause, the prthivi-matra, rudiment of earth, the fine form of smell. Similarly apah ca āpo-mātrā ca, water and the rudiment of water; tejah ca tejo-matra ca, fire and the rudiment of fire; vāyuh ca vāyu-mātrā ca, air and the rudiment of air; ākāsaḥ ca ākāśa-māľrā ca, space and the rudı- ment of space. That is to say, all the gross and subtle elements. So also caksuh, eye, the organ, ca rupam, and the object of sight; śrotram ca śrotavyam ca, ear and the object of hearing; ghrānam ca ghrātavyam ca, nose and the object of smell; rasah ca rasayitavyam ca, the organ of taste and the object of taste; tvak ca sparsayıtavyam ca, the organ and the object of touch; vāk ca vaktavyam ca, speech and the content of speech, hastau ca adātavyam ca, two hands and the objects to be grasped; upasthah ca ānandayitavyam ca, sex and 1 Sound, touch, colour, taste, and smell, the last one being the essential attribute of earth The four others are the essential qualities of space, air, fire, and water respectively. These rudimentary elements combine to form the gross composite elements, the name being given according to the predominance of one or the other.

IV. 9] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 465

what is enjoyed; payuh ca visarjayıtavyam ca, the organ of excretion and what is excreted; pādau ca gantavyam ca, two feet and the place walked over. Thus (it is to be understood) that the organs of knowl- edge and the organs of action have been enumerated. Manah ca, the mind, that has been already mentioned; mantavyam ca, and the object of the mind, (what is thought of), buddhih, understanding, the faculty of ascertaining, boddhavyam, the object to be ascertained. Ahamkarah is the internal organ charactersed by egoism, ca, and, ahamkartavyam, the object of egoism. Cittam, the internal organ possessed of consciousness; ca cetayitavyam, the object to be conscious of. Tejah, the skin, as distinct from the organ of touch and as possessed of lustre; the object revealed by it1 is vidyotayıtavyam Pranah is what is called Sūtra (Hiranyagarbha, who strings together everything); vıdhārayıtavyam, all that is held, strung together by Him, for the entire range of body and senses, combining for the sake of some one else and consisting of name and form, extends thus far only.

Next in order is that reality of the Self that has entered here (in the body) as the enjoyer and the agent of action, like a reflection of the sun in water:

एष हि द्रष्टा स्प्रष्टा श्रोता घ्राता रसयिता मन्ता बोद्धा कर्ता विज्ञानात्मा पुरुषः। स परेऽक्षर आत्मनि संप्रतिष्ठते ॥।६।।

11e the skin itself that is the seat of the organ of touch. 30

466 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. 9

9. And this one is the seer, feeler, hearer, smeller, taster, thinker, ascertainer, doer-the Purușa (pervading the body and senses), that is a knower by nature. It becomes wholly estab- lished in the supreme, immutable Self. Hi, and,1 esah, this one (this Self); is the drastā, seer; sprastā, toucher (feeler); śrotā, hearer; ghrātā, smeller; rasayıtā, taster; mantā, thinker; boddhā, ascertainer; karta, doer. The word vijnana, when derived in the (instrumental) sense of "that by which anything is known", means such instruments as the intellect; but the word here is derived in the nominative sense of "that which knows". So vijñānātma means the reality that has that nature or that is a knower by nature. He is purusah because he fills up, in its entirety, the aggregate of the body and senses that has been spoken of as a limiting adjunct. And as the reflection of the sun in water enters into the sun (when the water is removed), so this Self gets wholly estab- lished pare aksare atmani, in the supreme, immutable Self, that persists as the last resort of the universe. The result achieved by one who realises his identity with that supreme Self is being stated:

परमेवाक्षरं प्रतिपद्यते स यो ह वै तदच्छायमशरीरम- लोहितं शुभ्रमक्षरं देदयते यस्तु सोम्य। स सर्वज्ञः सर्वो भवति। तदेष श्रोक: ॥।१० ।। I0. He who realises that shadowless, bodi- less, colourless, pure, Immutable attains the

" Ananda Giri.

IV IIT PRAŚNA UPANISAD 467

supreme Immutable Itself. O good-looking one, he, again, who realises, becomes omniscient and all Illustrative of this there occurs this verse:

It is being stated that he pratipadyate, attains; param eva aksaram, the supreme Immutable Itself, that is going to be described. Sah, he; (attains the Im- mutable), yah ha vai, who perchance, having become free from all desires; vedayate, realises; tat, that which is; acchayam, free from shadow, from ignorance; aśarīram, bodiless, alohitam, devoid of redness, free from all qualities starting from redness. Since this is so, theretore (It is) subhram, pure, being free from all attrbutes, It is aksaram, the Immutable, the True, called Purusa (all-pervading, indwelling entity), which is without Prana, is not conceivable by the mind, and is auspicious, calm, coexisting with all that is within and without, and is birthless. Tu, again; somya, O good- looking one; yah, he, the renouncer of everything, who knows,1 becomes sarvajnah, omniscient, nothing can possibly remain unknown to him. Formerly he was not omniscient owing to ignorance; again, when ignorance is removed by knowledge, sah bhavatı sarvah, he becomes all. Tat, with regard to that point; bhavatı esah ślokah, there occurs this verse, which sums up the above idea. विज्ञानात्मा सह देवैश्च सर्वेः प्राणा भूतानि संप्रतिष्ठन्ति यत्र।

' Ananda Gin repeats the verb "knows" and splits up the first part of the text into two sentences

468 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [IV. II

तदक्षरं वेदयते यस्तु सोम्य स सर्वज्ः सर्वमेवाविवेशेति ॥।११।। इति प्रश्नोपनिषदि चतुर्थः प्रश्न:॥ II. O good-looking one, he becomes all- knowing and enters into all who knows that Immutable wherein merges the cognising Self- (the Purusa who is naturally a knower)-as also do the organs and the elements together with all the deities. Somya, O good-looking one; yah tu vedayate, he who knows; tat aksaram, that Immutable; yatra, into which; sampratisthanti, merge; vijñānātmā, the entity that is by nature a knower (IV. 9), and pranah, the organs, such as the eye; bhutāni, and the elements such as earth; saha devaih, together with the deities, such as Fire etc .; sah sarvajnah, that omniscient one; āviveśa (is the same as āvisati), enters; into sarvam, everything.

FIFTH QUESTION

अथ हैनं शैव्य: सत्यकाम: पत्रच्छ। स योहवै तद्गगवन्मनुष्येषु प्रायणान्तमोंकारमभिध्यायीत। कतमं वाव स तेन लोकं जयतीति। तस्मै स होषाच॥१॥ I. Next, Satyakāma, son of Śibi, asked him, "O venerable sir, which world does he really win thereby, who, among men, intently meditates on Om in that wonderful way till death?" To him he said:

Atha ha, next, satyakāmah śaıbyah, Satyakāma, son of Sibi, papraccha enam, asked him. Now then, this Question is begun in order to enjoin the medita- tion on Om as a means to the realisation of the inferior and superior Brahman Bhagavan, O venerable sır, sah yah ha vai, anyone, any rare person, manusyesu, among men, who, after withdrawing the internal organ from external objects and concentrating his mind on Om, on which he supermposes the idea of Brahman through devotion, abhidhyayīta, should intently meditate; onkaram, on Om; tat, in that wonderful way, prayanantam, till death, that is to say, for the whole life, (which world does he conquer)? The mean- ing of the term "abhidhyāna, intense meditation" is to have such an unbroken current of the idea of self- identification (with the object of meditation) as is not vitiated by other states of consciousness of a different order, and which is comparable to the (unflickering) flame of a lamp in a windless place. There being many worlds that can be achieved through meditation and

470 EIGHT UPANIŞADS [V. I

rites, katamam vāva lokam, which of the worlds; jayatı sah tena, does he conquer thereby, by that meditation on Om, who undertakes such a lifelong vow, aided by such multifarious forms of yama and niyama (i.e. control of body and senses and observance of moral injunctions) as truthfulness, abstinence from sexual pleasure, non-injury, non-acceptance of pre- sents, dispassion, monasticism, cleanliness, content- ment, absence of dissimulation, etc .? To him who had asked thus, sah, he, Pıppalāda; uvāca ha, said: पतद्वै सत्यकाम परं चापरं व ब्रह्म यदोंकारः।

2. O Satyakäma, this very Brahman, that is (known as) the inferior and superior, is but this Om. Therefore the illumined soul attains either of the two through this one alone. O Satyakāma, etat brahma vai, this very Brah- man; yat, that is; param ca aparam ca, both superior and inferior-the superior being that which is Truth and Immutable and is called Purusa; and the inferior being the First Born, called Prāna; onkārah eva, is but Om, being identical with Om, since Om is Its symbol.1 As the supreme Brahman cannot be (directly) indicated by words etc. and is devoid of all distinctions created by attributes-and as It is (on that account) beyond the senses-therefore the mind cannot explore It. But to those who meditate on Om, which is comparable to the images of Visnu and others 1 Etat and yat, being neuter, are construed with Brahman, rather than with onkarah which is masculine .- A.G

V 3] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 47I

and on which is fixed the idea of Brahman with devotion, that Brahman becomes favourable (and reveals Itself). This is understood on the authority of scriptures. Similar is the case with the inferior Brahman Hence it is said in a secondary sense that, that Brahman which is both inferior and superior is but Om. Tasmat, therefore; vidvan, one who knows, thus; anreti, attains; ekataram, either of the two- superior or the inferior Brahman; etena eva, through this alone, only through this, that is a means for the attainment of the Self, consisting in meditation on Om; for Om is the nearest symbol of Brahman.

स यद्येकमात्रमभिध्यायीत स तेनैध संवेदितस्तूर्ण- मेव जगत्यामभिसंपद्यते। तमृचो मनुष्यलोकमुपनयन्ते स तत्र तपसा ब्रह्मचर्येण श्रद्धया संपन्नो महिमानमनु- भवति॥३॥ 3. Should he meditate on Om as consisting of one letter, he becomes enlightened even by that and attains a human birth on the earth. The Rk mantras lead him to the human birth. Being endued there with self-control, continence, and faith, he experiences greatness. Yadı, even though; sah, he; may not know all the letters by which Om is constituted, still through the influence of the (partial) meditation on Om he attains an excellent goal; one who resorts to Om does not fall into evil by being denied the fruits of both rites and meditation as a consequence of the defect of such partial knowledge What ensues then? Knowing only

472 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [V. 3

one part consisting of one letter, abhidhyāyita, should he meditate, constantly; on Om itself as comprising one letter; sah, he; samveditah, becoming enlightened; tena eva, by that alone-that meditation on Om as possessed of one letter only; tūrnam eva, very quickly; abhi sampadyate, attains, jagatyam, on the earth. What does he attain? Manusyalokam, the human birth (i.e. human body). As many kinds of birth are possible on this earth, so, among these, rcah, the Rk mantras; upanayante, conduct, tam, him, that aspirant; to manusyalokam, human birth, on the earth; for the first single letter (viz a) of Om was meditated on (by him) as the Rk mantras, which stand for the Rg- Veda. Thereby, in that human birth, he becomes a pre-eminent Brahmana, and being sampannah, endued; tapasa, with self-control; brahmacaryena, with con- tinence; śraddhayā, with faith; anubhavati, experi- ences; mahimanam, greatness; he does not become faithless or wilful in his action. He does not come to grief because of any deviation, (consisting in partial knowledge), from Yoga (i.e. application of his mind to Brahman). अथ यदि द्विमात्रेण मनसि संपद्यते सोऽन्तरिक्षं यजुर्भिरुन्नीयते सोमलोकम्। स सोमलोके विभूतिमनुभूय पुनरावतते ॥।४।। 4. Now again, if he meditates on Om with the help of the second letter, he becomes identified with the mind. By the Yajur mantras he is lifted to the intermediate space, the world of the Moon.

V. 4] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 473

Having experienced greatness in the lunar world, he turns round again.

Atha, now again; yadi, if, anyone, conversant with Om as constituted by its second letter (viz w), (abhidhyāyīta, should meditate, on Om) dvimātrena, as possessed of the second letter; then as a result of that concentration, one sampadyate, becomes unified; manası, in the mind of which the Moon is the presid- ing deity, which is conceived of as the state of dream, which is identified with the Yajur mantras, and which is the object of meditation. When sah, that man, who has become thus identified, dies; he is unnīyate, lifted, vaiurbhih, by the Yajur mantras, which are identical with the second letter; antariksam, to the intermediate space (between heaven and earth); that is to say, somalokam, to the world of the Moon, that is supported by intermediate space and is represented by the second letter. Or in other words, the Yajur mantras lead him to a birth in the world of the Moon. Sah, he; anubhūya vibhutim, having experienced great- ness somaloke, in that world of the Moon, avartate punah, turns round again, towards the human world.1

1 According to Sankarananda, the first portion of the text means this If anyone manası sampadyate, resorts to the mind, that is, meditates; durmatrena, for two moments or on the two letters a and u of Om. According to some, this text enjoins a meditation on Hiranyagarbha who embodies Himself in the subtle cosmos, conceived of as a dream, the earlier text similarly enjoins a meditation on Virāt, embody- ing Himself in the gross universe, conceived of as the waking state

474 EIGHT UPANISADS [V. 5

यः पुनरेतं त्रिमात्रेणोमित्येतेनैवाक्षरेण परं पुरुष- मभिध्यायीत स तेजसि सूर्ये संपन्नः । यथा पादोदरस्त्वचा विनिर्मुच्यत एवं ह वै स पाप्मना विनिर्मुक्त स सामभि- रुन्नीयते ब्रह्मलोकं स एतस्माजीवघनात् परात्परं पुरिशयं पुरुषमीक्षते। तद्ेतौ श्रोकौ भवतः ॥५॥ 5. Again, anyone who meditates on the supreme Purusa with the help of this very syllable Om, as possessed of three letters, becomes unified in the Sun, consisting of light. As a snake becomes freed from its slough, exactly in a similar way, he becomes freed from sin, and he is lifted up to the world of Brahmā (Hiranyagarbha). From this total mass of creatures (that Hiranya- garbha is) he sees the supreme Purusa that penetrates every being and is higher than the higher One (viz Hiranyagarbha). Bearing on this, there occur two verses: Punah, again; abhidhyayīta yah, should anyone meditate; etam, on this-on Om; as param purusam, the supreme Purusa, residing within the solar orb; om iti etena eva aksarena, with the help of the very syllable Om; trimatrena, as associated with the knowl- edge of the three letters (a, u, m), and serving as a symbol; (he becomes unified in the Sun, as the result of that meditation). In this context Om is (presented as) a symbol to aid (meditation), which conclusion is drawn from the following Vedic text impying identity: "That which is known as the superior and inferior Brahman (is but Om)" (Pr. V. 2). Moreover, on any

V 5] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 475

other supposition, the irequently used accusative case in onkaram in the text will become unjustifiable. Although from the use of the instrumental case (in trimatrena), an interpretation in the instrumental sense is quite in order, still in conformity with the context, trimatrena etc should be converted to the accusative form1 thus: "trimatram param purusam-(meditate) on Om, associated with the knowledge of the three letters, as the supreme Purusa", so as to accord with the adage, "One should be sacrificed for the family."2 By that meditation, sah, he, becomes sampannah, absorbed-being engaged in meditation, he becomes identified with the third letter (m) and becomes unified, -tejası surye, in the Sun consisting of light. Even after death he does not return from the Sun as one does from the lunar world, but he continues in his identity with the Sun Yatha, just as, a padodarah, snake, vinirmucyate tvaca, is freed from its slough, the dead skin, to become new again, evam ha vai, exactly in the same way, as is the illustration, so; becoming vinirmuktah, freed, pāpmanā, from sin, that is a kind of impurity comparable to the slough, sah, he; unnī- yate, is lifted up, samabhh, by the Sāma mantras, that are identical with the third letter (m of Om); brahmalokam, to the world of Brahma, i e. of Hiranya- garbha, which is called Satya (Truth). That Hiranya- garbha, is identified with all the creatures that are subject to birth and death; for as (the sum total of

1 One might object that the instrumental case indicates that Om is not a symbol (or icon); but Sankara says, it 1s so ' That is to say, for the sake of the majority

476 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [V. 5

all) the subtle bodies, He constitutes the inner soul of all, and in Him, as comprising the (cosmic) subtle body, are strung together all the creatures.1 Hence He is jivaghanah, a mass of creatures. Etasmāt jivaghanāt, from this totality of creatures, that Hiranyagarbha is; sah, he, the enlightened man, who has known Om as possessed of the three letters; iksate, sees, through meditation; puruam, Purusa; purisayam, who has entered into all the bodies and who is called the supreme Self, being param parāt, superior to the higher One, that is to say, to Hiranyagarbha.2 Tat, bearing on this, expressive of the foregoing idea; bhavatah, there occur; etau ślokau, these two verses:

तिस्रो मात्रा मृत्युमत्य: प्रयुक्ता अन्योन्यसक्ता अनविप्रयुक्ता: । क्रियासु बाह्यास्यन्तरमध्यमासु सम्यक प्रयुक्तासु न कम्पते ज्ञः ।।६।।

6. The three letters (by themselves) are within the range of death. But if they are closely joined, one to another, are not divergently applied to different objects, and are applied to the three courses of action-external, internal, and intermediate-that are properly resorted to, then the man of enlightenment does not shake (i.e. remains undisturbed).

1 That identify themselves with their subtle bodies 2 Hiranyagarbha is higher than all other creatures.

V. 6] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 477

Tsrah mātrāh, the three letters, viz a, u, m, of Om; mrtyumatyah, are encompassed by death, not outside the pale of death, that is to say, within the grasp of death.1 But when they are prayuktāh, applied, kryāsu, in actions, in the acts of meditation on the Self; moreover, (when they are) anyonyasaktāh, joined one to another; anaviprayuktah, are not applieđ divergently to different objects; (then the Yogi does not shake). Viprayuktāh are those that are specifi- cally applied to a single object alone; those that are not applied thus are aviprayuktāh (i e. diversely used), those that are not so diversely applied are anaviprayuktah. What follows from that? When (they are applied thus) specially at the time of a single (continuous) meditation during the three kryāsu, courses of action-bāhyābhyantaramadhyamāsu, the external, intérnal, and intermediate in the course of the Yogic actions, consisting in the meditation on Purusas, as associated with the states of waking, dream, and sleep; samyak prayuktāsu, which processes are properly resorted to during the time of meditation; then the ñah, enlightened one, that is to say, the Yogi who knows the divisions of Om, as aforesaid; na kampate, does not shake. For he who knows thus, 1 Viśva, the conscious Self in the waking state, is identi- cal with Vaiśvanara (Virāt) and his residence is in the gross body and the waking state Taijasa, identical with Hiranyagarbha, has his lodging in the subtle body and dream. Prajña, identical with Iśvara has his locus in the Unmanifested and sleep The Yogic processes consist in meditating on them in identification with a, u, m respectively. If these are resorted to separately, and without the idea of Brahman, they cannot lead one beyond death.

478 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [V. 6

cannot possibly be deflected, since the Purusa in the waking, dream, and sleep states, together with the states, has been seen by him as identical with the three letters and as identical with Om. Since a man, who is thus enlightened, has become the Self of all and one with Om, therefore from where can he deviate and to where?

The second verse is meant to sum up all the (foregoing) ideas:

ऋग्भिरेतं यजुर्भिरन्तरिक्षं सामभिर्यत् तत् कवयो वेदयन्ते। तमों कारणैवाSडयतनेनान्वेति विद्वान् यत्तच्छान्तमजरममृतमभयं परं चेति॥७॥ इति प्रश्नोपनिषदि पञ्चमः प्रश्नः । The intelligent know this world that is attainable by the Rk mantras, the intermediate 7.

space achievable by the Yajur mantras, and that which is reached by the Sama mantras. The enlightened man attains that (threefold) world through Om alone; and through Om as an aid, he reaches that also which is the supreme Reality that is quiet and beyond old age, death, and fear. Only kavayah, the intelligent, enlightened ones, and not the ignorant; vedayante, know; etam. this, this world, associated with men; that is attainable rgbhih, through the Rk mantras; antariksam, the intermediate space, presided over by the Moon; that is attainable yajurbhih, by the Yajur mantras; and

V 71 PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 479

tat, that, that world of Brahma; yat, which; is attain- able samabhih, by the Sama mantras. Vidvān, the enlightened one; anveti, reaches; tam, that, that threefold world, indicative of the inferior Brahman; onkarena, through Om, with the aid of Om. And with the help of that very Om, he attains tat, that; yat, which; is param, supreme Brahman, which is immut- able, true, and is called Purusa, the all-pervasive; which is santam, quiet, free, devoid of all such dis- tinctions as waking. dream, and sleep, and is tran- scendental to the whole universe; and is therefore ajaram, free from old age; amrtam, beyond death, since untouched by such changes as old age; and consequently abhayam, fearless; just because It is fearless, therefore param, unsurpassing. The idea is that, he reaches this One also onkarena ayatanena, with the aid of Om, which is a vehicle of advance. The word, "iti, this," is used to imply the end of the sentence.

SIXTH QUESTION

अथ हैनं सुकेशा भारद्वाजः पप्रच्छ। भगघन् हिरण्य- नाभ: कौसल्यो राजपुत्रो मामुपेत्यैतं प्रक्षनपृच्छत। बोडशकलं भारद्वाज पुरुषं वेत्थ। तमहं कुमारमबुव नाहमिमं वेद। यद्यहमिममवेदिषं कथं ते नावक्ष्यमिति। समूलो वा एष परिशुष्यति योऽनृतमभिवदति तस्मान्ना- हाम्यनृतं वक्तुम्। स तूष्णीं रथमारुह्य प्रवव्राज। तं त्वा पृच्छामि क्वासौ पुरुष इति ॥।१।। I. Then Sukeśā, son of Bharadvāja, asked him, "Venerable sir, Hiranyanābha, a prince of Kosala, approached me and put this question, 'Bhāradvāja, do you know the Purusa possessed of sixteen limbs?' To that prince I said, 'I do not know him. Had I known him, why should I not have told you? Anyone who utters a false- hood dries up root and all. Therefore I cannot afford to utter a falsehood.' He went away riding on the chariot silently. Of that Purusa I ask you, 'Where does He exist?'" Atha ha, next; sukeśā bhāradhvājaḥ, Sukeśā, son of Bharadvāja; papraccha, asked; enam, him. It has been said that the entire world, consisting of cause and effect, together with the conscious soul, gets unified in the supreme Immutable during sleep (Pr. IV.II). From the logic of circumstances it follows that even during cosmic dissolution, the world merges

VI. I] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 48I

into that Immutable alone and originates from that alone; for an effect cannot reasonably get absorbed into anything other than its origin. Besides, it has been said, "From the Self is born this Prāna" (Pr. III.3). And it is the well ascertained purport of all the Upanisads that the highest good results from the full realisation of that which is the source of crea- tion; and it has just been declared, "he becomes omniscient and all" (Pr. IV.Io). It remains now to point out, where that Immutable, that Truth, called Purusa (the all-pervasive, indwelling entity) is to be realised. This question is begun for that purpose. And by pointing out the difficulty involved in acquir- ing the knowledge, the narration of the anecdote aims at inducing a special effort in those who hanker after freedom. Bhagavan, O revered sir; a rājaputrah, prince, Kşatriya by caste, named Hiraņyanābha; who was kausalyah, born in Kosala; upetya mām, approaching me; aprcchata, asked; etam praśnam, this question, that is being stated: "Bhāradvāa, O son of Bharadvāja; vettha, do you know; the purusam, Purușa (the Reality pervading the body); which is sodaśakalam, possessed of sixteen digits (limbs)?" That conscious Being, the soul, is sodasakalah, on which, through ignorance, are superimposed sixteen parts that appear like limbs. Aham, I; abruvam, said; tam kumāram, to that prince, who had put the question: "Aham, I; na veda, do not know; imam, this one, that you inquire about." As he thought it impossible that there could be any ignorance in me, despite that statement of mine, I told him as a proof of my ignorance: "Yadi, if perchance; aham, 3I

482 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [VI. I

I; avedisam, happened to know; imam, this one, the Purușa inquired about by you; katham, why; na avaksyam, should I not have told, that is to say should not tell you, inquistive and eminently fitted as a disciple as you are. Noticing his disbelief over again, I said furthermore to carry conviction to him: "Yah, anyone who; abhivadati, utters, anrtam, falsehood; speaks of himself as somewhat other than what he really is; esah, such a man; parıśușyati, dries up; samulah, together with roots; he is deprived from this world and the next, he is destroyed. As I know this fact, tasmāt, therefore; na arhāmi anrtam vaktum, I cannot afford to utter a falsehood; like an ignoramus." Sah, he, the prince, who was thus convinced; prava- vrāja, went away; to where he had come from; āruhya ratham, by riding on the chariot; tūsnim, silently, with abashment. From this the conclusion is drawn that one who knows must impart the knowl- edge to a disciple who is competent and approaches duly, but one should not utter a falsehood under any condition whatsoever. Tam purusam, about that Puruşa; prcchāmi tvā, I ask you ;- which, as an object still unascertained, sticks to my heart like a thorn ;- "Kva asau purusah, where does that Purusa (that is to be known) exist?" तस्मै स होवाच। इहैवान्तःशरीरे सोम्य स पुरुषो यस्मिन्नेताः पोडश कलाः प्रभवन्तीति॥२॥ 2. To him he (Pippalda) said: O good- looking one, here itself inside the body is that Purușa in whom originate these sixteen digits (or limbs).

VI. 2] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 483

Tasmai, to him; sah, he, uvāca ha, said; iha eva, here itself, antahsarire, inside the body, within the space inside the lotus of the heart; somya, O good- looking one; exists sah purusah, that Purusa-and He is not to be sought somewhere else ;- (Purusa) yasmin, ın whom; prabhavantı, originate; etāh sodaśakalāh, these sixteen parts-Prana and the rest that are being enumerated. Purusa that is partless appears through ignorance to be possessed of limbs as a consequence of His association with the sixteen parts that are His limiting adjuncts. But this Purusa has to be shown as an absolute entity by eliminatıng, through knowl- edge, those parts that condition Him. That is why the parts are spoken of as originating from Purusa. Since no empirical pronouncement as to attainability and the means of attainment can be made unless there be the superimposition of Präna and the rest on the attributeless, non-dual, pure principle, therefore the origin, existence, and absorption of the parts, that are within the domain of ignorance, are superimposed (on Purusa); for the parts are always seen to exist in identity with Consciousness at the times of origin, continuation, and dissolution. And this is why some deluded people say, "Just as ghee (clarified butter) melts through contact with fire, so it is consciousness that originates every moment as pot etc. and gets destroyed." Others (e.g. the nihilists) say, "When that consciousness stops, all things appear as void." Still others (e.g. the logicians) say, "The knowledge of pot and the rest arises and gets destroyed as a temporary phenomenon on the Self that is eternal and that imparts the consciousness." The materialists

484 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [VI. 2

say, "Consciousness belongs to matter." But Con- sciousness that knows no decrease or increase, and yet appears diversely through the attributes of the limit- ing adjuncts, is nothing but the Self, which fact is borne out by such Vedic texts as, "Brahman is truth, knowledge, infinite" (Tai.II.i.I), "Brahman is Con- sciousness" (Ai.III.i.3), "Knowledge, Blıss, Brahman" (Br. III.ix 28 7), "Infinite Reality is but pure intelli- gence" (Br. II iv.I2). Consciousness is proved to be invariable from the fact that Consciousness remains unchanged even when objects change in their essence, and because anything, that is known in any way, emerges to consciousness only as such an object of knowledge.1 It does not stand to reason to say that some external thing may exist substantially and still be unknown, for this is like averring that colour is. perceived while the eye is non-existent. A knowable may not exist at the time of its knowledge, but knowl- edge is never non-existent so long as there is a know- able, for knowledge persists in relation to some know- able even though one particular knowable may not

1 That things are apprehended to be what they are is owing to the fact of the apparent diversification of the underlying Consciousness by the limiting adjuncts; and things would cease to be known unless Consciousness lay behind them. This proves that things vary, while Consciousness remains unchanged. A pot may not exist even when there is consciousness of it, or objects may vary essentially, while knowledge persists; but there can be no object of knowledge without Consciousness. Objection : We have no knowledge of a jar at the time that we know a cloth; so knowledge also 1s variable Answer : Knowledge may vary as coloured by its objects, but not essentially, whereas things vary essentially.

VI. 2] PRASNA UPANIȘAD 485

be there; for nobody can have such a thing as a know- able unless he has knowledge. Objection : Since consciousness is not felt in sleep just because t does not exist there then, it follows that it too varies essentially just like the knowable. Answer : No, for in so far as knowledge that reveals its objects is an illuminator of the knowable, just like a lght, the absence of knowledge cannot logically be inferred in sleep, just as the absence of light cannot be inferred from the absence of the thing to be lighted up. For the nihilist cannot imagine the absence of the eye when it fails to perceive colour in darkness. Objection : The nihilist does, as a matter of fact, imagine the absence of knowledge where there is no knowable. Answer: The nihilist should explain how he would argue away the presence of that knowledge by which he imagines the non-existence of that knowledge, for the non-existence of the knowledge being itself a knowable object, it cannot be cognised unless there is knowledge of it. Objection : Since knowledge is non-different from the knowable, non-existence of knowledge follows from the non-existence of the knowable Answer : Not so, because non-existence too is admitted as a knowable. By the (Buddhist) nihilists it is admitted that non-existence is also known and that it is everlasting. Now, if knowledge be non- different from (the knowable) non-existence, it also will become eternal ex hypothesi; and because the non-

486 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [VI 2

existence of knowledge becomes essentially a knowl- edge, non-existence (of knowledge) is reduced to a meanıngless term. In reality knowledge is neither a non-existence nor is it non-eternal. Nor do we lose anything if the mere epithet of non-existence is applied to knowledge that is eternal. If it be now argued that although non-existence is ce is a knowable, it is distinct from knowledge, then in that case, the non-existence of the knowable will not lead to the non-existence of knowledge.1 Objection: The knowable is different from knowl- edge, but knowledge is not different from the knowable. Answer: It is all mere talk that does not lead to any real distinction, for if it be held that the knowable and knowledge are identical, then it is meaningless talk to say that the knowable is distinct from knowledge while knowledge is not distinct from the knowable, and it is comparable to the thesis that vahni (fire) is distinct from agm (fire), while agni is not distinct from vahni. If however knowledge be different from the knowable, the conclusion arrived at is that the absence of the knowable does not logically imply the absence of knowledge.

1 By such a theory you knowledge and the knowable nullify your view that are identical. Hence by depending on the assumptions that knowables are absent in sleep and that knowledge is non-different from the knowables, you cannot argue that knowledge is non-existent in sleep. Moreover, if the non-existing knowable be different from knowledge, why should not an existing knowable be different alšo?

VI. 2] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 487

Objection: Since there can be no awareness (of knowledge) when there is no knowable, it follows that knowledge itself is absent in the absence of the knowable. Answer: Not so, for awareness is admitted in sleep inasmuch as it is held by the (Buddhist) nihilists that consciousness persists even in sleep. Objection: Even there it is held that consciousness is known to itself. Answer: No, since the distinction of the two (viz knowledge and knowable) is already postulated. Inasmuch as the knowledge that pertains to a knowable of the form of non-existence is different from that non- existent knowable, the difference between the knowable and the knowledge stands as an established fact. That fact having been proved, it cannot be revivified like a dead man, nor can it be reversed by even a hundred nihilistic Buddhists. Objection: In so far as knowledge is known by some other knowledge, there crops up an infinite regress from your point of view, since that knowledge must have another knowledge to know it, and that again another. Answcr : Not so, for a logical distinction between all (knowledge and knowable) is possible. On the admission that everything is knowable to some knowl- edge, that knowledge which is different from the know- able remains what it is for ever.1 This is a second 1 We hold that knowables are objects of knowledge, but knowledge itself is not known. The knowable is ever the knowable, and so is knowledge ever knowledge.

488 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [VI. 2

category that is admitted by all who are not nihilists, and no third category to comprehend it is admitted. Thus there is no scope for infinite regress. Objection: If knowledge remains unknown to itself, then omniscience becomes untenable. Answer: That defect, too, should affect him (i.e. the Buddhist) alone. What need have we to remove it?1 Besides, (for him) there is the fault of infinite regress arising from the admission that knowledge is an object of knowledge, for knowledge is certainly a know- able according to the (Buddhist) nihilists. And because (a particular) knowledge cannot be known by itself, an infinite regress is inevitable. Objection: This fault is equally in evidence (in your theory as well). Answer: Not so, for Consciousness can logically be shown to be but one. Since it is but one Conscious- ness, existing in all places, times, persons, etc., that appears diversely because of the differences in the multifarious limiting adjuncts constituted by name,

i The Buddhist believes that knowledge is known So if it can be proved that knowledge is unknowable, omniscience of Buddha, for instance, can no longer be sustained But the Vedäntist is not open to that charge, as according to him knowledge can cognise only those things that are fit to be known, as otherwise non-omniscience would result from the non-comprehension of such an imaginary thing as the horn of a hare. The Vedantist may also reply that since the very conception of omniscience is within the domain of ignorance, he is not under any obligation to prove its reality Or he may argue that omniscience follows from the fact of one's possessing the capacity to know everything that exists.

VI. 2] PRAŚNA UPANISAD 48

form, etc., just like the reflections of the sun etc. on water etc .; therefore that objection has no force; and the statement that is under consideration here agrees with this.1 Objection: From the Upanisadic text, ("here itself inside the body"-Pr. VI. 2), it follows that Purusa is contained here inside the body, like the jujube fruit in a vessel. Answer: No, (this is wrong), because Purusa is the cause of such parts as Prana, and because nobody will understand Purusa as the source of the parts like Prāna, faith, etc., if He be delimited by a mere body. And this follows from the further fact that the body is an effect of those parts; because the body, which is con- stituted by the parts-Präna and the rest-which (in their turn) are the products of Purusa, cannot contain, within itself, like a jujube in a vessel, Purusa who is the origin of its own source. Objection: This is possible on the analogy of the seed and the tree. Just as a tree is the effect of a seed, and the effect of that tree is a fruit, a mango for instance, which holds within itself the (stone that is the) cause of its cause (the tree), similarly the body can contain within itself even Purusa, though He is the cause of its own cause (viz Prāna etc.). Answer: This is untenable, because it implies difference and divisibility. In the analogy, the seeds contained in the fruits of the tree are different from the 1 On the strength of the fact that Consciousness as an eternal entity is the basıs of all appearances, the Upanısad talks of the superimposition of the parts (or limbs) on that Consciousness.

490 EIGHT UPANISADS [VI. 2

seed that produced the tree, whereas in the case to which the analogy applies, the very same Purusa, that is the cause of the causes of the body, is heard of in the Upanisad as confined within the body. Moreover, things like the tree and the seeds can be related by way of the container and the thing contained, because they are composite by nature, whereas Purusa is not divisible, though the parts (viz Prana etc.) and the body are. Hereby it is shown that inasmuch as even space cannot be contained within the body,1 much less can Purusa, who is the cause of space, be confined within it. Therefore the illustration is inapt. Objection: Leave alone the analogy. The point is borne out by the text itself. Answer: That cannot be, for texts cannot create things anew, since a text is not meant to reverse any- thing. What is its function then? It is concerned with expressing things as they are. Therefore the text "inside the body" is to be understood in the same sense as the statement that space exists within the cosmic egg.2 Besides that text conforms only to empirical experience in so far as from such logical grounds as (the experiences of) seeing, hearing, thinking, knowing, etc., Purusa is assumed to be residing as a limited being within the body. And since it is within the body that I Objection : The body produced from indivisible space contains space within itself. Answer : There too space does not enter into the body, but seems to be existing in the shape of a body as pervading the pores and empty regions there. 2 Space is the cause of the universe, but since space pervades everything, it is perceived as confined within the universe.

VI. 3] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 491

He is realised, therefore it is said, "O good-looking one,. that Purusa is inside the body." When not even a fool can wish to conceive mentally that Purusa, who is the cause of space, can be encompassed by the body like a jujube in a vessel, much less can a Vedic text do so, which is a valid means of knowledge. As a description of Purusa it has been said, "that Purusa in whom originate those sixteen parts" (Pr. VI. 2). Though that origination of the parts was stated (there) in the Upanisad in another connection, still the present text (dealing with creation) is meant to recount the order in which the origination occurred as also to show that creation is preceded by intelligence.

स ईक्षांचक्रे। कस्मिन्नहमुत्क्रान्त उत्क्रान्तो भविष्यामि

कस्मिन्वा प्रतिष्ठिते प्रतिष्ठास्यामीति॥३॥ 3. He deliberated: "As a result of whose departure shall I rise up? And as a result of whose continuance shall I remain established?" Sah, He, Purusa, endued with sixteen parts, about whom the son of Bharadvāja inquired; īksām cakre, made this deliberation on, that is to say, penetrated into, the subject of creation, result, order, etc.1 How he did so is being stated: Kasmin utkrante, which particular agent having risen up, from the body; bhavisyāmi aham, shall I become; utkrāntah, separated? Va, or; kasmin pratisthite, which continuing to be

1 "Creation"-of Prana etc .; "result"-such as their departure from the body; "Order"-emergence of faith from Prāna and so on, "etc "-the relation of container and the contained, as subsisting between the world and name, etc.

492 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [VI. 3

established; pratisthāsyāmi aham, shall I remain estab- lıshed, in the body? Objection: Is it not a fact that the Self is not an actor, while Pradhana (Primal Nature) is? Hence it is Pradhäna that evolves as Mahat (i.e. the principle of intelligence) and the rest by setting before itself the needs of Purusa (conscious soul). Therefore in the face of the facts that Pradhäna, existing in a state of balance of its (three) constituents of sattva etc., has to be assumed on valid authority to be the creator; that there exist the minutest atoms that act according to divine will; that the Self has not the wherewithal to create, It being non-dual; and that the Self cannot be the author of evil to Itself, because a conscious being that acts intelligently cannot do any evil to itself; it is unjustifiable to talk of any agentship of Purusa, preceded by independent deliberation. Accordingly, when, to serve the purposes of Purusa, insentient Pradhäna evolves in a regular order, as though out of deliberation, Pradhäna is figuratively spoken of as intelligent in the statement, "He deliberated" etc., just as one might say, "He is the king", with regard to an officer who does everything for the king. Answer: No, since it is as logical to look upon the 'Self as the doer, as to conceive of It as the enjoyer. Just as from the Samkhya standpoint the Self, that is a mere changeless Consciousness, can still be the enjoyer, similarly from the standpoint of the followers of the Vedas, Its creatorship of the world can be justi- fied on the authority of the Vedas. Objection: Any transformation, consisting in a change of (the essence of) the Self into a different

VI. 3] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 493

category, causes Its impermanence, impurity, and multi- plicity; but a mere variation within Its very nature of Consciousness is not such a transformation. Accord- ingly, if enjoyership is inherent in Purusa Himself, any change within that Consciousness (of enjoyment)1 is not open to any charge (of mutation of the Self), whereas from your standpoint, who are followers of the Vedas. and admit that the Self is the creator, there does occur an essential mutation,2 and therefore the Self becomes. subject to all such faults as impermanence etc. Answer : No, for it is held by us that though the Self is but one, still, in a state of ignorance, there occur to It apparent distinctions created by the pre- sence or absence of the limiting adjuncts constituted by the names and forms of objects. The creation of some sort of distinction in the Self by ignorance is admitted as a concession, so that talk about the bondage and freedom of the Self in the scriptures may be possible. In reality, however, one should stand by the unconditioned Entity which is one without a second, which is beyond the reach of all sophists, and which is admitted as fearless and auspicious. There can be no agentship, no enjoyership, nor any action, instrument, or result, where everything is reduced to non-duality. The Samkhyas, however, first imagine that agentship, as well as action, instrument, and result, is superimposed on the Self; but as they are

1 Enjoyment (or suffering) consists in a direct experience of joy (or sorrow). This experience is the very nature of the soul, whereas action belongs to the intellect and the rest. 2 By becoming the intellect etc for the purposes of creation.

494 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [VI. 3

outside the pale of the Vedas, they recoil from such a (monistic) position and hold that enjoyership is a real characteristic of the Self. Again, fancying that Pradhāna is a real substance, essentially different from the Self, they fall into the snares woven by the intellect of other (dualistic) sophists and lose their bearing. Similarly are the other sophists led astray by Samkhyas. Thus by postulating theories opposed to each other, like carnivores (fighting for a piece of flesh), they continually drift away from the supreme Reality owing to their proneness to discover such (distorted) interpretations of the conclusions arrived at by valid means of proof as may demolish each other's point of view. Therefore we disclose a few flaws in the theories of the sophists not in the spirit of the sophists, but in order that people desirous of freedom may become devoted to the true import of the Upanisads, viz the realisation of the non-duality of the Self, by ignoring those other theories. Thus has it been said in this connection: "Leaving the cause of the origination of all disputes1 amongst the dis- putants themselves, and keeping his good sense well protected by their example,2 the knower of the Vedas Teposes happily." Moreover no distinction can be made between the two kinds of modification (in the Self) called enjoyer- ship and agentship. What indeed is that modifica- tion characterised as enjoyership which belongs to a

1 Apprehension of duality as true. 2 Having this firm conviction, "Since the dualistic theories lead only to conflict, non-dualism alone is true."

VI. 3] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 495

class by itself and is different from agentship, depend- ing on which Purusa can be conceived of as merely the enjoyer and not the agent, while Pradhana can be thought of as merely an agent and not an enjoyer? Samkhya : Did we not say that Purusa consists merely of intelligence and He changes internally in the course of experience while still remaining what He is in essence? But He does not change by being trans- formed into some other category, whereas Pradhāna changes by being evolved into some other principle, and hence it is possessed of such attributes as multi- plicity, impurty, insentience, etc. Purusa is opposed to it. Vedantist : That is a distinction that is not real but merely verbal. If to Purusa, who is (conceived of as) mere intelligence before the emergence of enjoyership, there accrues some special attribute called experience at the time of the occurrence of enjoyment, and if after the cessation of the enjoyment, Purusa is freed from that peculiarity and becomes pure intelli- gence again, (then one may argue that during enjoy- ment) Pradhana also evolves as Mahat etc., and then reversing the process (after that experience) it exists in its own nature as Pradhäna. Hence the supposi- tion does not serve to point out any difference. Accordingly, the distinction that is sought to be made between the transformations of Purusa and Pradhāna is merely a verbal one. If now it is held that Purusa continues to be pure intelligence even during enjoyment, then there is no experience by Purusa in the real sense.

496 EIGHT UPANIŞADS [VI. 3

Sāmkhya . During enjoyment there occurs real change in Purusa, and so Purusa can enjoy. Vedantist. That cannot be. Since Pradhāna too undergoes change during enjoyment, it may as well become the enjoyer. Samkhya : Change in pure intelligence alone constitutes experience. Vedantist : In that case there is no valid reason why fire and the rest that are possessed of distinct attributes like heat etc. should not be enjoyers.1 Objection : Enjoyership may belong simultane- ously to both Pradhāna and Purusa. Vedantist : No, since in that case the (Samkhya) theory that Pradhana acts for the benefit of another (viz Purusa) falls through; for among two co-enjoyers there can be no such relationship as overlordship and subordination, just as two lights cannot be so related by way of illuminating each other. Objection : The enjoyment of the unchanging Purusa consists in the production of a reflection of

1 "Change in pure intelligence alone" may mean two things: (I) change in intelligence irrespective of any change in any other substance; (2) some uncommon change in intelligence alone The first position is untenable, since the Purusa cannot enjoy unless there be corresponding changes in the form of happiness etc. in Pradhāna. As for the second alternative, there is no special reason why an uncommon change in an uncommon factor, viz intelligence, should be called enjoyment; for if enjoyment is defined as "an uncommon change within the thing itself," the definition becomes too wide; and thus fire may also become an enjoyer by a mere uncommon change within its uncommon quality of heat.

VI. 31 PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 497

Purusa on the mind-stuff in which the sattva quality predominates and which is by nature an enjoyer. Vedäntist : It cannot be so; for if Purușa is not affected thereby in any way, it is meaningless to posit an enjoyership for Him. If Purusa has no evil in the form of enjoyment, He being ever without attributes, then for removing what (evil) is the (Sāmkhya) scripture written as a means for emancipation? Objection : The scripture is written for the sake of removing the evil superimposed through ignorance. Answer : In that case the hypotheses that Purusa is only an enjoyer and not an agent, that Pradhāna is only a doer and not an enjoyer, and that the supreme Reality is different from Purusa-which (suppositions) are outside the Vedic pale-are useless and un- warranted, and hence nced not be taken into con- sideration by people craving for freedom. Objection : Even from the standpoint of non- duality, such activity as the compilation of scriptures is futile. Answer : No, for no such thing is possible in the state of non-duality. The conflicting thought as to whether the compilation of scriptures is useful or useless can arise only when there are the compilers of the scriptures and others who want to derive some result from them; but if the Self is the only reality, then apart from the Self there can be no compiler of the scriptures, nor any one else of that kind. And in their absence, this kind of hypothesis is altogether unjustifiable. From the very fact of your firm affirmation of the unity of the Self it is admitted by 32

498 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [VI. 3

you pari passu (from your personal experience) that scriptures serve the valid purpose of revealing the non-duality of the Self. And the following scriptural text declares with regard to that unity of the Self, to which you subscribe, that when the conviction arises, there is no scope for doubt: "When to the knower of Brahman everything has become the Self, then what should one see and through what?" (Br. II.iv.14). Similarly in the Vājasaneyaka Upanisad it is shown elaborately how it is possible to do such things as the compilation of scriptures in the domain of ignorance, which comprises things other than the supreme Reality: "Because when there is duality, as it were, (then one sees something)" etc. (ibid). Here again, at the very commencement (of the Upanisad of the Atharva-Veda, viz Mundaka, I.i.4), knowledge and ignorance have been separated by calling them higher and lower. Accordingly, the army at the command of sophistic theories cannot enter here into this domain of the non-duality of the Self that is pro- tected by the hands1 of the king who is none other than the valid proof adduced by Vedanta. It is to be understood that hereby is refuted the fault imputed by others that Brahman lacks the necessary equip- ment etc. for becoming an agent in the matter of crea- tion etc .; for Brahman can (be imagined to) be asso- ciated with differences created by diverse powers and accessories that emerge from such limiting adjuncts as name and form which are called up by ignorance. And so also is set aside the other objection raised by 1 The reasoning found in Vedānta,

VI. 4] PRASNA UPANIȘAD 499)

others that the Self (under the non-dualistic theory) becomes the originator of Its own misery.1 As for the illustration of an officer who does every- thing for the king and is called by courtesy a king or a master, that has no application here because it runs counter to the (obvious) primary meaning of the Vedic text, "He deliberated", which is meant to impart valid knowledge; for a secondary meaning of a word is called for only where the primary meaning is inadmissible. But here it does not stand to reason that an insentient entity (e.g. Pradhana) should engage in well-regulated activity in relation to Purusa, keeping in view the difference between bound and freed souls2 and taking note of such distinctions as of subject, object, space, time, and causation, whereas this becomes justifiable from the standpoint already stated that omniscient God is the creator. By Purusa alone, as by a king,3 is created Prāna, the director of all. How?

स प्राणमसृजत प्राणाच्क्रद्वां खं वायुज्योतिराप: पृथिवीन्द्रियं मनः। अन्नमन्नाद्वीर्य तपो मन्त्रा: कर्म लोका लोकेषु च नाम च।।४।।

1 God is fancied to be the creator of a world ignorantly superimposed on Him, and He is fancied to ordain good and evil for the souls which have no real separate existence. 2 The free souls are to be left apart, and actions are to relate to the bound ones alone. 3 This is according to the reading, "Isvarena iva". An alternative reading is, "Isvarena eva, by God Himself (who ıs Purușa)." 32(i)

500 EIGHT UPANIŞADS [VI. 4

4. He created Prāņa; from Prāņa (He created) faith, space, air, fire, water, earth, organs, mind, food; from food (He created) vigour, self-control, mantras, rites, worlds, and name in the worlds. Having deliberated in the way stated before, sah, He, Purușa; asrjata, created; prānam, Prāņa,1 the sum total of all Prānas, called Hiranyagarbha,2 that is the repository of the organs of all beings, and is the inner soul of all.3 From this Prana, He created śraddham, faith, that is the source of stimulus for all beings for good action. From that He created the great elements that support by becoming the material constituents of the (physical body that is the) vehicle of enjoyment of the fruits of actions. (He created) kham, space, possessed of the quality of sound; vāyuh, air, possessed of two attributes, its own attri- bute of touch and the attribute (sound) of its source (space); similarly jyoth, fire, possessed of three quali- ties-its own quality of colour and the qualities of sound and touch belonging to the earlier two; similarly apah, water, possessed of four attri- butes-its own individual quality of taste and the infu- sion of the three earlier qualities (sound, touch, colour);

1 Energy that is non-different from intelligence. That is to say, the limiting adjunct through which the 'Self appears to be individualised and comes to be known as HHiranyagarbha-A. G. ' As the sum total of all the subtle bodies, this limiting adjunct, called Hiranyagarbha, resides inside the gross bodies and is thought of as one's self. Hence it is antar, inside and ātman, self.

VI. 4] PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 50I

similarly prthivi, earth, endowed with five qualities by virtue of its possession of smell, and the permeation of the four earlier qualities (sound, touch, colour, taste). So also (He created) indriyam, the organs, constituted by those elements themselves, which are of two kinds and are ten in number for the pur- poses of perception and action; and (He created) manah, mind, the lord of those organs, which resides inside and is characterised by doubt and thought. Having thus created the causes (i.e. senses) and effects (i.e. objects) for the creatures, He created for their sustenance annam, food, constituted by paddy, barley, etc. Annat, from that food, when eaten; (He created) viryam, ability, vigour that is at the root of engaging in all works. After that (He created) tapah, self-control, for the sake of the puri- fication of those strong creatures who get involved in sin. Then (He created) mantrah, mantras, com- prising the Rk, Yajur, Sama, and Atharva texts, which are the means for (religious) activities for those who have purified their internal and external organs with the help of self-control; then karma, rites, such as Agnihotra; then lokah, the worlds, the results of rites. And in these worlds He created nāma, name, for instance Devadatta or Yajñadatta, of the created beings. Thus these parts were created in conformity with1 the seeds constituted by such defects of the creatures as ignorance-like two moons, mosquitoes, bees, etc. created by the blurred vision of a man suffering from the disease called Timira, or like all

1 Taking them as His aid.

502 EIGHT UPANISADS [VI. 5

sorts of things created by a dreamer; and these again merge into that very Purusa by giving up such dıs- tinctions as name, form, etc.

How?

स यथेमा नद्यः स्यन्दमाना: समुद्रायणा: समुद्रं प्राप्यास्तं गच्छन्ति भिदयेते तारसा नामरूपे समुद्र इत्येवं प्रोच्यते। एवमेवास्य परिद्ष्टरिमा: षोडश कलाः पुरुषायणा: पुरुषं प्राप्यास्तं गच्छन्ति भिद्येते चासा नामरूपे पुरुष इत्येवं प्रोच्यते स एषोऽकलोऽमृतो भवति तदेष श्रोक:।।५।। 5. The illustration is this: Just as these flowing rivers that have the sea as their goal, get absorbed after reaching the sea, and their names and forms are destroyed, and they are called merely the sea, so also these sixteen parts (i.e. limbs) of the all-seeing Purusa, that have Purusa as their goal, get absorbed on reaching Purusa, when their names and forms are destroyed and they are simply called Purusa. Such a man of realisation becomes free from the parts and is im- mortal. On this point there occurs this verse: Sah, the illustration is this: Yatha, as; imah, these; syandamānāh nadyah, flowing rivers; samudrāyaņāh, that have the sea as their goal, the place where they get absorbed; gacchanti astam, court disappearance, lose their name and form ;- tasām nāma-rūpe, their name and form, for instance, Ganga, Yamuna, etc .;

VI. 51 PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 503

bhidyete, get eliminated; owing to their absorption; and when the identification is established, their sub- stance that is water, samudrah its evam procyate, is called merely by the word sea; evam, similarly, as is this illustration, so; asya, of that Purusa, who is possessed of the attributes mentioned before, and who is being considered here; paridrastuh, of Him who is the seer on all sides, who is the agent of a vision that is identical with His real nature, just as the sun is the revealer everywhere of the light that is identical with itself; ımāh sodasa kalah, those sixteen parts-the parts, counting from Präna, that have been men- tioned; purusāyanah, which have Purusa as their goal, the place where they get identified, as the sea is with relation to the rivers; prāpya purusam, reach- ing Purusa, getting identified with Purusa; astam gacchanti, disappear; ca, and; asam, of them, of the parts; the respective nāma-rupe, name such as Prāņa, as well as form; bhidyete, get destroyed. When name and form are eliminated, the entity that remains undestroyed, procyate, is called, by the knowers of Brahman; purusah itr evam, as Purușa. Sah, he, who has become thus enlightened after being shown by his teacher the process of the absorption of the parts; bhavati, becomes; akalah, free from parts, when the parts, viz Präna and the rest that are the creation of ignorance, desire, and action, are absorbed through knowledge; and he becomes amrtah, immortal. Death is a creation of the parts originating from nescience. When those parts are gone, one becomes immortal just because of one's partlessness. Tat,

504 EIGHT UPANIŞADS [VI. 6

with regard to this matter; bhavati, there occurs; eşah ślokah, this verse:

अरा इव रथनाभौ कला यस्मिन्प्रतिष्ठिताः । तं वेद्यं पुरुषं वेद यथा मा चो मृत्यु: परिव्यथा इति॥६॥ 6. You should know that Purusa who is worthy to be known and in whom are transfixed the parts like spokes in the nave of a chariot wheel, so that death may not afflict you anywhere. Iva, as; arāh, spokes, which are, as it were, the dependants of a chariot wheel; pratisthitāh, are trans- fixed; rathanabhau, in the nave of a chariot wheel; that is to say as they are dependent on the hub, so; veda, one should know; tam vedyam purusam, that knowable Purusa, who is the self of the parts (limbs) and who is called Purusa because of all-pervasiveness or existence in the city (i.e. pur of the body); yasmin, in whom, in which Purusa; pratisthitāh, are transfixed; the kaläh, parts (limbs), during the states of origin, continuance, and dissolution. (You know Him) yatha, so that; O disciples; mrtyuh, death; ma vah parivyathah, may not afflict you on any side. If Purușa remains unknown, you will continue to be miserable under the pain inflicted by death. Hence may not that fall to your lot. This is the idea.

तान् होवाचैतावदेवाहमेतत् परं ब्रह्म वेद। नातः परमस्तीति॥।।II 7. To them he said, "I know this supreme

VI. 87 PRAŚNA UPANIȘAD 505

Brahman thus far only. Beyond this there is nothing." Having thus instructed them (i.e. the disciples), Pippalāda uvāca ha, said; tān, to them, to those dis- ciples, "Veda, I know; etāvat eva, thus far only; etat, this; param brahma, supreme Brahman, that is worthy to be known. Atah param, beyond this; na asti, there is not-anything higher to be known." Thus did he say this in order to remove from the disciples any doubt that there might still remain some- thing unknown, and also in order to generate in them the conviction that they had attained final achieve- ment. It is being stated what those disciples did when they found no recompense for their knowledge after being taught by the teacher and getting their purposes fulfilled : ते तमर्चयन्तस्त्वं हि नः पिता योऽस्माकमविद्यायाः परं पारं तारयसीति। नमः परमऋषिभ्यो नमः परमऋषिभ्यः ।।८।। इति प्रश्नोपनिषदि षष्टः प्रश्नः ॥ 8. While worshipping him they said, "You indeed are our father who have ferried us across nescience to the other shore. Salutation to the great seers. Salutation to the great seers." It is being stated what they said while te, they; arcayantah, were worshipping his feet, by offering handfuls of flowers and saluting him with their heads: "Tvam hi, you indeed are; nah, our; pitā, father;

506 EIGHT UPANIȘADS [VI. 8

since you have generated through knowledge (a fresh) birth in Brahman that is eternal, ageless, deathless, and fearless. Since it is you who, with the help of the raft of knowledge, have ferried us avidyāyāh param pāram, across ignorance or false knowledge, to the other shore of the boundless ocean of nescience, called emancipation, consisting in absolute cessation of rebirth -- (ferried us) as though across an ocean itself, that is infested with birth, old age, death, disease, sorrow, etc., which are like sea animals ;- therefore your fatherhood towards us is more justifiable than that of the others (i.e. our real fathers). The other father, who begets the body alone, is yet the most worshipful in the world: what to speak of one who guarantees absolute fearlessness? This is the purport. Namah, salutation; parama-rsibhyah, to the great seers, the originators of the line of traditional transmission of the knowledge of Brahman. The repetition of namah parama-rsibhyah, is for the sake of showing eager- ness. ॐ भद्रं कर्णेभि: शणुयाम देवा भद्रं पश्येमाक्षभिर्यजन्राः। स्थिरैरङ्गस्तुष्टुवाश्सस्तनूभि- व्यंशेम देवहितं यदायुः॥ ॐ शान्तिः शान्तिः शान्तिः।

INDEX TO TEXTS I (Upanișads) अगिर्मू र्धां चक्षुषी Mu. II.i.4 अहोरात्रो वै Pr. I.I3

अभिर्वाग्भूत्वा Ai. I.ii.4 आकाशो ह वा Pr. II.2

अतः समुद्रा Mu. II.i.9 आत्मन एष प्राणो Pr. III.3

अतिप्रश्नान् पृच्छसि Pr. III.2 आत्मा वा इदमेक Ai. I.i.I

अन्रेष देव:स्वप्ने Pr. IV.5 आदित्यो ह वै Pr. I 5, III 8

अथ कबन्धी Pr. I.3 आवि: सन्निहितं Mu. II.ii.I अथ यदि द्विमात्रेण Pr. V. 4 इन्द्रस्त्वं प्राण Pr. II.9 अथर्वण यां Mu. I.i.2 इष्टापूरत Mu. I.ii.IO अथ हैनं कौसल्य Pr. III.I इहैवान्तःशरीरे Pr. VI.2 अथ हैनं भागवो Pr. II.I Pr. III.I2 अथ हैनं शैब्यः उत्प्त्तमायति Pr. V.I अथ हैनं सुकेशा Pr. VI.I ऋम्भिरेतं यजुभि: Pr. V.7

अथ हैनं सौयायणी Pr. IV.I एतद्व सत्यकाम Pr. V.2

अथादित्य उदयन् Pr. I.6 एतस्माजायते Mu. II.1.3

अथैकयोर्ध्व Pr. III.7 एतेषु यश्चरते Mu. I.ii.5

अथोत्तरेण तपसा Pr. I.I0 एष ब्रह्मेष इन्द्र Ai. III.i.3

अन्नं वे प्रजापतिः Pr. I.I4 एष सवश्वर एष सर्वज्ञ Mā. 6

अमात्रश्चतुर्थो Mā. I2 एष हि द्रष्टा स्प्रष्टा Pr. IV.9

अरा इव रथनाभी Pr. II.6, VI.6 एषोऽगनिस्तपत्येष Pr. II.5

Mu. II.ii.6 एषोडणरात्मा Mu. III.i.9

अविद्यायामन्तरे Mu. I.ii.8 एह्येहीति तम् Mu. I.ii.6

अविद्यायां बहुधा Mu. I.ii.9 ओमित्येतदक्षरम् Ma. I

508 EIGHT UPANIȘADS

कामान्यः कामयते Mu. III.ii.2 तन्मनसाSजिघृक्षत् Ai. I.iii.8

काली कराली च Mu. I.ii.4 तपः श्रद्धे ये Mu. Iii II

कोऽयमात्मेति वयम् Ai. III.i.I तपसा चीयते ब्रह्म Mu Ii 8

क्रियावन्तः श्रोत्रिया Mu. III.ii.Io तमभ्यतपत्तस्या- Ai. I.i.4 गता: कलाः पञ्चदश Mu. III.ii.7 तमशनायापिपासे Ai. I.ii.5 गर्भे नु सन्नन्वेषाम् Ai. II.i.5 तं स्त्री गर्भ बिभर्ति Ai. II i 3 जागरितस्थानो बहि- Mã. 3 तस्माच्च देवा बहुधा Mu II.i.7 वैश्वानर " Mā. 9 तस्मादनि: समिधो Mu. II.i.5 तच्चक्षुषाजिधृक्षत Ai. I.iii.5 तस्मादिदन्द्रो नाम Ai. I.iii 14 तच्छिश्रेनाजिघृक्षत् Ai. I.iii.9 तस्माध्च: साम Mu. II.i.6 तच्छ्रोत्रेणाजिधृक्षत् Ai. I.iii.6 तस्मैं स विद्वान् Mu. I i1.I3 तत्त्वचाजिघृक्षत् Ai. I.iii.7 तस्मै स होवाच Pr. I.4, II.2, तत्प्राणेनाजिघृक्षत् Ai. I.iii 4 III.2, IV.2, VI.2; Mu. I 1.4 तत् स्त्रिया आत्म- Ai. II.i.2 ता एता देवता: Ai. I ii.r तत्रापरा ऋग्वेदो Mu. I.i.5 तान् वरिष्ठः प्राण Pr. II.3 तदपानेनाजिघृक्षत् Ai. I.iii.IO तान् होवाच Pr. VI.7

तटुक्तमृषिणा Ai. II.i.5 तान् ह स ऋषिरुवाच Pr. I. 2

तदेतत्प्राणनाजिघृक्षत् Ai. I iii.4 ताभ्यो पुरुषमानयत् Ai. I.ii.3 तदेतत् सत्यमृषि- Mu. III.ii.II ताभ्यो गामानयत् Ai. I.ii.2

तदेतत् सत्यं मन्त्रेषु Mu. I.ii.I तिस्त्रो मात्रा मृत्युमत्यः Pr. V.6

Pr. I.I6 " यथा Mu. II.i.I तेषामसौ विरजो तदेनत्सष्टं Ai. I.iii.I3 तेजो ह वा उदान Pr. III.9 तदेहचाऽभ्युक्तं Mu. III.ii.IO ते तमर्चयन्तस्त्वं Pr. VI.8 तद् ह वे ततू Pr. I.5 दिव्यो ह्यमूर्त: पुरुषः Mu. II.i.2

INDEX TO TEXTS 509

देवानामसि वहितमः Pr. II.8 पवा ह्येते अदढा Mu. I.ii.7

द्वा सुपर्णा सयुजा Mu. III.i.I बृहच्च तददिव्यम् Mu. III.i.7

द्व विद्ये वेदितव्ये Mu. I.i.4 ब्रह्मा देवानां प्रथम: Mu. I.i.I

धनुर्ग हीत्वौपनिषदं Mu. II.ii.3 ब्रह्मवेदममृतं पुरस्तात् Mu. II.ii.II न चक्षुषा गरृह्यते Mu. III.i.8 भिद्यते हृदयग्रन्थिः Mu. II.ii. 8 न तत्र सूर्यो भाति Mu. II.ii.I0 मासो वें प्रजापतिः Pr. I.I2

नान्त:प्रज्ञं न बहिःप्रज्ञं Mā. 7 य एवं विद्वान्प्राणं Pr. III.II

नायमात्मा प्रवचनेन Mu. III.ii.3 यञ्चित्तस्तेनेष प्राणम् Pr. III.I0

नायमात्मा बलहीनेन Mu. III.ii.4 यत्तदद्रेश्यमग्राह्यम् Mu. I.i.6

पञ्चपादं पितरं Pr. I.II यत्र सुप्तो न कञ्चन कामं Mā. 5

परमेवाक्षरं प्रतिपद्यते Pr. IV.I0 यथा नद्यः स्यन्दमाना: Mu. III.ii.8

परीक्ष्य लोकान् Mu. I.li.I2 यथा सम्राडेवाधिकृतान् Pr. III.4

पायूपस्थेऽपानं Pr. III.5 यथा सुदीप्तात् Mu. II į,I

पुरुष एवेदं विश्वं Mu. II.i.IO यथोर्णनाभि: सजते Mu. I.i.7

पुरुषेह वा अयम् Ai. II.i.I यदर्चिमद्यद्णुभ्योणु Mu. II.ii.2

पृथिवी च पृथिवीमात्रा Pr. IV.8 यदा त्वमभिवर्षस्यथे- Pr. II.I0

प्रजाकामो वे प्रजापतिः Pr. I.4 यदा पश्य: पश्यते Mu. III.i.3

प्रजापतिश्चरसि गर्भे Pr. II.7 यदा लेलायते ह्य्र्चिः Mu. I.ii.2

प्रज्ञानं ब्रह्म Ai. III.i.3 यदुच्छासनिःश्वासा- Pr. IV.4

प्रणवो धनुः शरो Mu. II.ii.4 यदेतद्धृदयं मन- Ai. III.i.2

प्राणस्येदं वशे Pr. II.I3 यं यं लोकं मनसा Mu. III.i.I0

प्राणाग्नय एवैतस्मिन् Pr. IV.3 यः पुनरेतं त्रिमात्रेण Pr. V. 5

प्राणो ह्वेष यः सर्व- Mu III.i.4 यस्मिन् दौः पृथिवी Mu. II.ii.5.

510 EIGHT UPANIȘADS

यस्यामिहोत्रमदशम् Mu. I.ii.3 समाने वृक्षे Mu. III.i.2 यः सर्वज्ञः सर्वविदूMu. I.i.9, II.ii.7 सम्प्राप्यनमृषयो Mu. III.ii.5 या ते तनूर्वाचि Pr. II.I2 संवत्सरो वै प्रजापतिः Pr. I.9 विज्ञानात्मा सह देवैश्च Pr. IV.II यथा सौम्य वयांसि Pr. IV.7 विश्वरूपं हरिणं Pr. I.8 स यथमा नद्यः Pr. VI.5 वेदान्तविज्ञान- Mu. III.ii.6 स यदा तेजसा- Pr. IV.6 व्रात्यस्त्वं प्राणैक- Pr. II.II स यद्येकमात्रम् Pr. V.3 शौनको ह वै महा- Mu. I.i.3 स यो ह वै तत्परमं Mu. III.ii.9 स इमाँलोकान् Ai. I.i.2 स वेदेतत्परमं Mu. III.ii.I स ईक्षत कथं न्विदं Ai. I.iii.II सव तत्प्रज्ञानेत्रं Ai. III.i.3 स ईक्षत लीकान्नु Ai. I.i.I सवं ह्येतदूब्रह्मायमात्मा Mã. 2 स ईक्षते मे नु लोका Ai. I.i.3 सा भावयत्री Ai. II.i.3 स ईक्षतेमे नु लोकाश्च Ai. I.iii.I स ईक्षांचके सुकेशा च भारद्वाज: Pr. I.I Pr. VI.3 स एतमेव सीमानं Ai. I.iii.I2 सुषुप्तस्थान: प्राज्ञो Mā. II

स एतेन प्राज्ञेनात्मना Ai. III.i.4 सोऽपोऽभ्यतपत् Ai. I.iii.2

स एवं विद्वानस्मात् Ai. II.i.6 सोऽभिमानादूर्ध्वम् Pr. II.4 स एष वैश्वानरो Pr. I.7 सोऽयमात्माध्यक्षरम् Mā. 8 स जातो भूतान्यभि- Ai. I.iii.13 सोऽस्यायमात्मा Ai. II.i.4 सत्यमेव नयते Mu. III.i.6 स्वप्रस्थानस्तजस Mã. I0 सत्येन लभ्यस्तपसा Mu. III.i.5 Mã. 4 स प्राणमसजत Pr. VI.4 हिरण्मये परे कोशे Mu. II.ii.9 सप्तप्राणाः प्रभवन्ति Mu. II.i.8 हृदि ह्येष आत्मा Pr. III.6

INDEX TO TEXTS II (Gaudapāda's Kārikā)

अकल्पकमजं ज्ञानं III. 33 अनिमित्तस्य चित्तस्य IV. 77 अकारो नयते विश्वम् I. 23 अनिश्चिता यथा रज्जः II. I7 अज: कल्पितसंवृत्या IV. 74 अन्तःस्थानात्त भेदानां II. 4 अजमनिद्रमस्वप्रम् III. 36 अन्यथा गृहतः स्वप्न: I. I5 IV. 8I अपरव स्थानिधर्मों हि II. 8 अजातेस्त्रसतां तेषाम् IV. 43 अभावश्च रथादीनां II. 3 अजातस्यैव धर्मस्य IV. 6 अभूताभिनिवेशाद्धि IV. 79 अजातस्यैव भावस्य III. 20 अभूताभिनिवेशोऽस्ति IV. 75

अजातं जायते यस्मात् IV. 29 अमात्रोऽनन्तमात्रश्च I. 29

अजाद्वै जायते यस्य IV. I3 अलब्धावरणा: सरवे IV. 98

अजेष्वजमसंक्रान्तं IV. 96 अलाते स्पन्दमाने वे IV. 49

अजे साम्ये तु ये IV. 95 अवस्त्वनुपलम्भं च IV. 88

अणुमात्रेपि वैधम्यें IV. 97 अव्यक्ता एव येऽन्तस्तु II. I5

अतो वक्ष्याम्यकार्पण्यम् III. 2 अशक्तिरपरिज्ञानं IV. 19

अद्दयं च द्वयाभासं III. 30 असज्जागरिते हष्टा IV. 39

IV. 62 असतो मायया जन्म III. 28

अदोर्घत्वाच्च कालस्य II. 2 अस्ति नास्त्यस्ति IV. 83

अद्वैतं परमार्थों हि III. I8 अस्पन्दमानमलातं IV. 48

अनादिमायया सुप्तः I. I6 अस्पर्शयोगो वै नाम III. 39

अनादेरन्तवत्वं च IV. 30 IV. 2 "

5I2 EIGHT UPANIȘADS

आत्मसत्यानुबोधेन III. 32 कारणाद्यदयनन्यत्वं IV. I2 आत्मा ह्याकाशवज III. 3 कारणं यस्य व कायें IV. II आदावन्ते च यन्नास्ति II. 6 काल इति कालविदः II. 24 IV. 31 कोट्यश्चतस्त्र एतास्तु IV. 84 आदिबुद्धाः प्रकृत्येव IV. 92 क्रमते न हि बुद्धस्य IV. 99 आदिशान्ता ह्यनुत्पन्नाः IV. 93 ख्याप्यमानामजाति IV. 5 आश्रमास्त्रिविधा III. I6 ग्रहणाज्जागरितवत् İV. 37 इच्छामात्रं प्रभो: सृष्टिः I. 8 ग्रहो न तत्र नोत्सर्गः III. 38 उत्पादस्या प्रसिद्धत्वात् IV. 38 घटादिषु प्रलीनेषु III. उत्सेक उदधेर्यद्वत् III. 4I चरञ्जागरिते जाग्रद् IV. 65 उपलम्भात् समाचारात् IV. 42 चित्तकाला हि ये II. 14 IV. 44 चित्तं न संस्पुशत्यथे IV. 26 उपायेन निगृह्हीयात् III. 42 चित्तस्पन्दितमेवेदं IV. 72 उपासनाश्रितो घर्मों III. I जरामरणनिर्मु क्ता: IV. I0 उभयोरपि वैतथ्यं II. II जाग्रित्तेक्षणीयास्ते IV. 66 उभे ह्यन्योन्यदृश्ये ते IV. 67 जाग्रद्वृत्तावपि त्वन्तः II. I0 ऋजुवक्रादिकाभासम् IV. 47 जात्याभासं चलाभासं IV. 45 एतैरेषोपृथग्भावैंः II. 30 जीवात्मनो: पृथक्त्वं यत् III. I4 एवं न चित्तजा धर्मा IV. 54 जीवात्मनोरनन्यत्वम् III. I3 एवं न जायते चित्तम् IV. 46 जीवं कल्पयते पूर्व II. I6 ओंकारं पादशो विद्यात् I. 24 ज्ञाने च त्रिविधे ज्ञेये IV. 89 कल्पयत्यात्मनात्मानम् II. I2 ज्ञानेनाकाशकल्पेन· IV. I कार्यकारणबद्धौ ताविष्येते ( I. II तत्वमाध्यात्मिकं दृष्टा II. 38

INDEX TO TEXTS 5I3

तस्मादेवं विदित्वनं II. 36 नात्मानं न परां I. I2

तस्मान्न जायते चित्तं IV. 28 नास्त्यसद्धतुकमसत् IV. 40

तजसस्योत्वविज्ञान I. 20 नास्वादयेत्सुखं तत्र III. 45

त्रिषु धामस यत्तुल्यं I. 22 निगृहीतस्य मनसः III. 34

त्रिषु धामसु यदोज्यं I. 5 निमित्तंन सदा चित्तं IV. 27

दक्षिणाक्षिमुखे विश्वः I. 2 निवृत्तस्याप्रवृत्तस्य IV. 80

दुःखं सर्वमनुस्मृत्य III. 43 निवृत्ते: सवदुःखानां I. I0

दुर्दशमतिगम्भीरं IV. I00 निश्चितायां यथा रज्ज्वां II. I8

द्रव्यं द्रव्यस्य हेतु: IV. 53 निस्तुतिर्निनमस्कार: II. 37

III. I2 नेह नानेति चाम्रायातू III. 24

द्वैतस्याग्रहणं तुल्यं I. I3 पञ्चविंशक इत्येके II. 26

धर्मा य इति जायन्ते IV. 58 पादा इति पादविद: II. 2I

न कश्षिजायते जोव: III. 48 पूर्वापरापरिज्ञानं IV. 2I

IV. 7I प्रकृत्याकाशवज्झया: IV. 9I

न निरोधो न चोत्पत्ति: II. 32 प्रज्ञप्तेः सनिमित्तत्वं IV. 24

न निर्गता अलातात्ते IV. 50 25

न निर्गतास्ते विज्ञानात् IV. 52 प्रणवं हीश्वरं विद्यात् 1. 28

न भवत्यमृतं मत्यं III. 2I प्रणवो ह्यपरं ब्रह्म I. 26

IV. 7 प्रपञ्चो यदि विद्येत I. I7

न युक्तं दर्शनं गत्वा IV. 34 प्रभव: सर्वभावानां I. 6

नाकाशस्य घटाकाशो III. 7 प्राण इति प्राणविद: II. 20

नाजेषु सर्वधर्मेषु IV. 60 प्राणादिभिरनन्तैश्र II. 19

नात्मभावेन नानेदं II. 34 प्राप्य सर्वज्ञतां कृत्स्नां IV. 85

5I4 EIGHT UPANIȘADS

फलादुत्पाद्यमान: सन् IV. 17 यथा स्वप्ने द्वयाभासं IV. 6r

बहिष्प्रज्ञो विभुविश्वः I. I यथकस्मिन् घटाकाशे III. 5 बीजाङ्कुराख्यो दृष्टान्त: IV. 20 यदा न लभते हेतून् I₹. 76 बुद्श्वानिमित्ततां सत्यां IV. 78 यदा न लीयते चित्तं III. 46 II. 33 यदि हेतो: फलात् सिद्धि: IV. 18 भूततोऽभूततो वाऽपि III. 23 यावद्धंतुफलावेशः IV. 55 भूतस्य जातिमिच्छन्ति IV. 3 " IV. 56 भूतं न जायते किंचित् IV. 4 युञ्जीत प्रणवे चेतः I. 25 भोगार्थ सृष्टिरित्यन्ये I. 9 योऽस्ति कल्पितसंवृत्या IV. 73 मकारभावे प्राज्ञस्य I. 2I यं भावं दर्शयेद्यस्य II. 29 मन इति मनोविद: II. 25 रसादयो हि ये कोशा III. II मनसो निग्रहायात्तं III. 40 रूपकायसमाख्याश्र III. 6 मनोदृश्यमिदं द्वैतं III. 31 लये संबोधयेचिचित्तं III. 44 मरणे संभवे चैव III. 9 लीयते हि सुषुप्ते तत् III. 35 मायया भिद्यते ह्येतत् III. I9 लोकाँल्लोकविद: प्राहुः II. 27 मित्रादयै: सह संमन्नय IV. 35 विकरोत्यपरान् भावान् II. 13 III. I5 विकल्पो विनिवर्तत I. I8 यथा निर्मितको जीवः IV. 70 विज्ञाने स्पन्दमाने वै IV. 5I यथा भवति बालानां III. 8 विपर्यासादथा जाग्रत् IV. 41 यथा मायामयाद्दीजात् IV. 5 विप्राणां विनयो ह्येष IV. 86 यथा मायामयो जीव: IV. 69 विभूति प्रसवं त्वन्ये I. 7 यथा स्वप्नमयो जीव: IV. 68 विश्वस्यात्वविवक्षायां I. I9 यथा स्वप्े द्वयाभासं III. 29 विश्वो हि स्थलभुद्दनित्यं I. 3

INDEX TO TEXTS 515

वीतरागभयक्रोधैः II. 35 सूक्ष्म इति सूक्ष्मविद: II. 23 वेदा इति वेदविदः II. 22 सृष्टिरिति सृष्टिविदः II. 28 वैतथ्यं सर्वभावानां II. I स्थलं तर्पयते विश्व I. 4 वैशास्यं तुवै नास्ति IV 94 स्वतो वा परतो वापि IV. 22 स एष नेति नेतीति III. 26 स्वप्नजागरितस्थाने II. 5 सतो हि मायया जन्म III. 27 IV. 64 सप्रयोजनता तेषां II. 7 स्वप्रदक प्रचरन् स्वप्ने IV. 63 IV. 32 स्वप्ननिद्रायुतावाद्यौ I. I4 संघाताः स्वप्नवत्सवे III. I0 स्वप्रमाये यथा दृष्टे II. 31 संभवे हेतुफलयोः IV. I6 स्वप्रवृत्तावपि त्वन्त II. 9 संभूतेरपवादाच्च III. 25 स्वप्न चावस्तुक: कायः IV. 36 संवृत्या जायते सर्व IV. 57 स्वभावेनामृतो यस्य III. 22 सर्वस्य प्रणवो ह्यादि I. 27 IV. 8

सर्वाभिलापविगतः III. 37 स्वसिद्धान्तव्यवस्थासु III. I7

सर्वे धर्मा मुषा स्वप्रे IV. 33 स्वस्थं शान्तं सनिर्वाणं III. 47

सवस्तु सोपलम्भं च IV. 87 हेतुर्न जायतेऽनादे: IV. 23

सांसिद्धिकी स्वाभाविकी IV. 9 हेतोरादि: फलं येषां IV. 14 IV. I5 सुखमात्रियते नित्यं IV. 82 हेयज्ञेयाप्यपाक्यानि IV. 90

ERRATA

Page line for read

2 2 मे मा- मे मा

34 पराङत्यजिघांसत् 9316 -9 पराङत्यजिघांसत् 78 3 तनुभि: तनूभि:

I36 I सवज्ञः सर्वज्ञ:

187 6 प्रज्ञानधन प्रज्ञानघन

25I I3 प्रादुराश्रमा प्राहुराश्रमा

27I I0 संधातै- संघाते-

319 -3 सकषा' सकषायं

387 8 नास्तोति नास्तीति

443 I3 बाह्म बाह्य